18MY Shogun Sport Owners Manual PDF

SHOGUN SPORT
OWNER’S MANUAL
SHOGUN SPORT - EN-UK - 17MY OKWE17E1

BK0240501EN.book 1 ページ２０１６年１１月１０日木曜日午前１０時３５分
Foreword Throughout this owner’s manual the words WARNING and

CAUTION appear.
E09200106793
These serve as reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow
Thank you for selecting a MITSUBISHI MOTORS product as your instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your
new vehicle. vehicle.
This owner’s manual will add to your understanding and full enjoy-
ment of the many fine features of this vehicle.
It contains information prepared to acquaint you with the proper way Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if
to operate and maintain your vehicle for the utmost in driving pleasure. instructions are not followed.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORATION reserves the right to make

changes in design and specifications and/or to make additions to or Means hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor per-
improvements in this product without obligation to install them on sonal injury or damage to your vehicle.
products previously manufactured.
You will see another important symbol:
It is an absolute requirement for the driver to strictly observe all laws
NOTE: gives helpful information.
and regulations concerning vehicles.
*: indicates optional equipment.
This owner’s manual has been written in compliance with such laws It may differ according to the sales classification; refer to
and regulations, but some of the contents may become contradictory the sales catalogue.
with later amendment of the laws and regulations. Abbreviations used in this owner’s manual:
If your vehicle is equipped with any locally produced part, the operat-
LHD: Left-Hand Drive
ing procedure, specifications, maintenance intervals and other contents
RHD: Right-Hand Drive
found in this owner’s manual may not sometimes apply to it.
M/T: Manual Transmission
A/T: Automatic Transmission
This manual explains operation of LHD and RHD vehicles. Illustra-

tions represent LHD operation. Depending on the item, however,
RHD illustrations may also appear.
This vehicle is manufactured by Mitsubishi Motors (Thailand) Co, Ltd. in
Thailand under license from Mitsubishi Motors Corporation.
©2016 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

BK0240501EN.book 1 ページ２０１６年１１月１０日木曜日午前１０時３５分
Foreword – Diesel Engines

During very cold weather some diesel-powered engines may experience difficulties with starting and initial running. These problems arise
from the formation of wax crystals, which block fuel filters and/or fuel lines. All diesel fuel contains wax. It is considered an important diesel
component because of its high cetane value (a measure of the fuel’s resistance to premature combustion). Normally the wax remains liquid
but when diesel fuel gets cold enough the wax starts to crystallize and solidify. If the temperature is sufficiently low, enough crystals will
form to block the fuel filter and/or fuel lines, resulting in the engine becoming difficult to start and run until the fuel temperature increases
sufficiently.
UK diesel is manufactured to the European standard BS EN 590 and the specification of the fuel supplied from refineries is changed during
winter months (Circa: 16th November to 15th March) in order to improve the cold weather performance properties of the fuel. The UK is in
a zone that specifies that diesel remains free of wax crystals down to -15 ‫ ﹾ‬Centigrade (known as the cold filter plugging point test CFPP).
With sustained temperatures below this level, particularly in exposed areas or when a vehicle is left idle for several days, blocking of filters
and/or fuel lines may occur resulting in the engine becoming difficult to start and run until the fuel temperature increases sufficiently.
There are a number of practical measures that can be taken to avoid or reduce problems, including the following:
• It may be advisable to sit in the vehicle with engine running for several minutes before moving off in order to aid build up to working
temperature.
• If possible, park your vehicle in a garage overnight or in a more sheltered area near a building.
• Avoid parking the vehicle with the front facing into the wind.
• If it is impossible to move the vehicle due to snow, try to run the engine daily in order to maintain movement in the fuel system and
generate heat.
Under no circumstances should heat that involves a naked flame or other potential sources of ignition, be applied to any of the fuel system
components.
If you are aware that you will be operating your vehicle in conditions of circa: -10 ‫ ﹾ‬Centigrade or below on a regular basis we recommend
the fitment of a fuel line heater. Your local Mitsubishi Motors dealership will be able to assist you with this.
BK0240501EN.book 1 ページ２０１６年１１月１０日　木曜日　午前１０時３５分
Table of contents
Overview/Quick guide 1
General information 2
Locking and unlocking 3
Seat and seat belts 4
Instruments and controls 5
Starting and driving 6
For pleasant driving 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care 9
Maintenance 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
Instruments and Controls (Driver’s area)
1 Instruments and Controls (Driver’s area)

E08500101710
Combination headlamps and dipper switch P.5-57 Multi Around Monitor operation switch* P.6-134
Turn-signal lever P.5-62 Audio remote control switches* P.7-34
Front fog lamp switch* P.5-63 Horn switch P.5-70
Rear fog lamp switch* P.5-64 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag
Headlamp washer switch* P.5-69 (for driver’s seat) P.4-30, 4-35
Engine switch* P.6-18 Instruments P.5-2
Shift paddles* P.6-42

Outside rear-view mirrors switch P.6-15
Wiper and washer switch P.5-64

Sonar switch* P.6-123 Rear wiper and washer switch
P.5-68
Cruise control switch* P.6-85,

Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)
6-94
and Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
Adaptive Cruise Control System
System (UMS) ON/OFF switch* P.6-107
(ACC)* P.6-90
Headlamp levelling switch* P.5-61
Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)*
P.6-90
Lock switch P.3-25
Multi information display switch* P.5-4
Central door lock switch P.3-16
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface* P.7-60
Electric window control switch P.3-24 Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch* P.6-83
Fuel tank filler door release lever
Bonnet release lever P.10-4
P.2-3
1-1 Overview/Quick guide

Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls 1

E08500101723
LHD
Air conditioner* P.7-2 Audio* P.7-22

Front cooler* P.7-6 Smartphone Link Display Audio*, Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Hazard warning flasher switch P. 5-63 nication System*, DISPLAY AUDIO*
Refer to the separate owner’s manual
Ignition switch* P.6-17 Rear window demister switch P.5-69
Centre ventilators P.7-3

Fuses P.10-22
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) -
airbag (for front passenger’s seat)
Steering wheel height and reach P.4-30, 4-35
adjustment lever P.6-13
Side ventilators P.7-3
Key slot (8A/T)* P.6-27
Front passenger’s airbag indicator*
Key slot (M/T, 5A/T)* P.6-27 P.4-31, 4-33
Glove box P.7-91
Gearshift lever* P.6-30 Cigarette lighter* P.7-87
Selector lever* P.6-32 Accessory socket* P.7-87
USB input terminal (M/T)* P.7-80
HDMI terminal (M/T)* P.7-84
Rear fan switch (8A/T)* P.7-21
Blind Spot Warning switch* P.6-114
Rear fan switch (M/T, 5A/T)* P.7-21
Floor console box P.7-92
Accessory socket* P.7-87 Rear differential lock switch* P.6-61
USB input terminal (A/T)* P.7-80
HDMI terminal (A/T)* P. 7-84
Overview/Quick guide 1-2

1 RHD
Audio* P.7-22
DISPLAY AUDIO*, Mitsubishi Multi Rear window demister switch P.5-69
Entertainment System*
Front passenger’s airbag indicator* P.4-31, 4-33
Cigarette lighter* P.7-87
Air conditioner* P.7-2 Accessory socket* P.7-87
Front cooler* P.7-6 Steering wheel height and reach adjustment lever
Hazard warning flasher switch P. 5-63 P.6-13
Centre ventilators P.7-3
Ignition switch* P.6-17
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag
(for front passenger’s seat) P.4-30, 4-35
Key slot (8A/T)* P.6-27
Side ventilators P.7-3
USB input terminal (M/T)* P.7-80
HDMI terminal (M/T)* P. 7-84
Fuses P.10-22
Rear fan switch (8A/T)* P.7-21
Gearshift lever* P.6-30
Selector lever* P.6-32
Glove box P.7-91
Floor console box P.7-92
Rear differential lock switch* P.6-61 Accessory socket* P.7-87
HDMI terminal (A/T)* P.7-84
Key slot (M/T, 5A/T)* P.6-27 USB input terminal (A/T)* P.7-80
Blind Spot Warning switch* P.6-114

Rear fan switch (M/T, 5A/T)* P.7-21

1
8A/T 2WD 8A/T 4WD
Off Road mode
Electric parking brake switch P.6-8 switch* P.6-60
Hill Descent Control
switch* P.6-78
Cup holder P.7-94
Electric parking
Ashtray* P.7-86 brake switch
Ashtray* P.7-86 P.6-8
Cup holder P.7-94
Super select 4WD II P.6-50
5M/T 6M/T, 5A/T

Super select 4WD*
P.6-46
Super select 4WD II* P.6-50
Ashtray* P.7-86
Ashtray* P.7-86
Lever type
Lever type
parking brake
parking brake
Cup holder P.7-94 lever P.6-6
lever P.6-6
Cup holder P.7-94

Interior
1 Interior
E08500201476
7 persons Seat belts P.4-14 Front room & map lamps P.7-88, 7-90, 10-29
Adjustable seat belt anchor P.4-16 Sunglasses holder* P.7-91, 7-93
Rear entertainment system* Sunroof* P.3-26
Inside rear-view mirror P.6-13
Door courtesy lamps P.7-88, 7-91
Sun visors P.7-85
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)- Card holder P.7-85
curtain airbag* P.4-30, 4-38 Vanity mirror P.7-86
Rear personal lamps P.7-88, 7-90, 10-29
Rear cooler P.7-20 Supplemental restraint system
Tether anchorage locations* P.4-26 (SRS) -driver’s knee airbag*
P.4-30, 4-35
Luggage compartment lamp
P.7-88, 7-90, 10-29 Head restraints P.4-7
Accessory socket P.7-87

Front seats P.4-4
Cup holder P.7-95

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
-side airbag (for front seat)* P.4-30,
4-38
Tether anchorage locations* P.4-26 Convenient hook P.7-97
Armrest P.4-5 Second seats P.4-5

Cup holder P.7-94 Child restraint system with ISOFIX mountings* P.4-26
Lower anchorage location* P.4-26
Third seats P.4-6
Tether anchorage locations* P.4-26

Interior
5 persons 1
Seat belts P.4-14 Front room & map lamps P.7-88, 7-90, 10-29
Adjustable seat belt anchor P.4-16 Sunglasses holder* P.7-91, 7-93
Sunroof* P.3-26
Rear personal lamps
Rear entertainment system* P.7-88, 7-90, 10-29 Inside rear-view mirror P.6-13
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)- Sun visors P.7-85
curtain airbag* P.4-30, 4-38 Card holder P.7-85
Vanity mirror P.7-86
Door courtesy lamps P.7-88, 7-91
Tether anchorage locations* P.4-26 Supplemental restraint system

(SRS) -driver’s knee airbag *
Luggage compartment lamp P.4-30, 4-35
P.7-88, 7-90, 10-29
Accessory socket P.7-87 Head restraints P.4-7
Front seats P.4-4

Cup holder P.7-95
Convenient hook P.7-97
Cargo area cover* P.7-95 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) -side

airbag (for front seat)* P.4-30, 4-38
Second seats P.4-5
Tether anchorage locations* P.4-26 Child restraint system with ISOFIX mountings* P.4-26
Lower anchorage location* P.4-26
Armrest P.4-5 Tether anchorage locations* P.4-26
Luggage net* P.7-98
Cup holder P.7-94

Luggage area
1 Luggage area
E08500301217
Tools P.8-7 Jack P.8-7
Luggage hooks P.7-97
Fire extinguisher*
Luggage floor boxes* P.7-91, 7-93 Warning triangle*
Warning triangle* First-aid kit*

Exterior - front
Exterior - front 1
E08500401928
Sunroof* P.3-26 Outside rear-view mirrors P.6-14

Roof antenna* P.7-57 Side-view camera* P.6-133
Wiper and washers P.5-64, 10-20 Fuel tank filler door P.2-3
Locking and unlocking P.3-15, 3-16
Bonnet P.10-4 Keyless entry system P.3-4
Engine compartment P.10-2, 11-11 Keyless operation system* P.3-7
Security alarm system* P.3-20
Side turn-signal lamps (on outside rear-

Headlamp washer* P.5-69 view mirror)* P.5-62, 10-28
Forward Collision Mitigation System Side turn-signal lamps (on fender)* P.5-62, 10-28
(FCM) sensor* P.6-102
Blind Spot Warning Sensor* P.6-114
Front-view camera* P.6-133
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System sensor* P.6-112
Sensor system sensor* P.6-125
Except for LED headlamp type LED headlamp type
Headlamps P.5-57, 10-28, 10-29 Headlamps P. 5-57, 10-28
Front turn-signal lamps

Front turn-signal lamps
P.5-62, 10-28, 10-31
P.5-62, 10-28, 10-31
Position lamps Daytime running lamps
P.5-57, P.5-59, 10-28
10-28, 10-30 Position lamps P.5-57, 10-28
Front fog lamps*
P.5-63, 10-28, 10-32 Front fog lamps*
Daytime running lamps* P.5-59, 10-28, 10-32 P.5-63, 10-28, 10-32

Exterior - rear
1 Exterior - rear
E08500401931
Reversing lamps P.10-28, 10-33 Rear turn-signal lamps P.5-62, 10-28, 10-33
Tail and stop lamps P.5-57, 10-28, 10-33
High-mounted stop lamp P.10-28
Blind Spot Warning lamp* P.6-116
Glass antenna* P.7-58
Rear wiper and washer P.5-68
Tailgate P.3-18
Rear-view camera* P.6-129, 6-133

Multi around monitor* P.6-133 Tyre inflation pressures P.10-16
Changing tyres P.8-8
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side)*
Tyre rotation P.10-18
P.5-64, 10-28, 10-33
Snow tyres P.10-19
Tyre chains P.10-19
Licence plate lamp P.5-57, 10-28, 10-34 Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) P.6-117
Spare wheel P.8-9 Blind Spot Warning Sensor* P.6-114
Reversing sensor system sensor* P.6-122

Quick guide
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page
Quick guide 3-4. Driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock 1
switches
E08500500010
For vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
tor switch, the outside rear-view mirrors can
Lock and unlock the doors be folded and extended automatically if you
E08500601438 press the LOCK switch (1) or UNLOCK
switch (2).
Keyless entry system
Refer to “Operation of the outside rear-
view mirrors” on page 3-4.
Press the key switch, and all doors and the
tailgate will be locked or unlocked as desired.
It is also possible to operate the outside rear- Keyless operation system*
Tailgate switches
view mirrors (Vehicles equipped with the
mirror retractor switch). When you are carrying the keyless operation
The key switch will operate within approxi- key and within the operating range, if you
mately 4 m from the vehicle. press the driver’s or front passenger’s door
switch (A), or the tailgate switch (B) (when
Keyless entry key Keyless operation key locking) and the tailgate open switch (C)
(when unlocking), the doors and the tailgate
are locked/unlocked.
The operating range is approximately 70 cm
from the driver’s or front passenger’s door
switch and the tailgate switches. Refer to “keyless operation system” on
page 3-7.
1- LOCK switch
2- UNLOCK switch
3- Indicator lamp

Quick guide
1 Around the driver’s seat 1-Electric remote-controlled out- 2-Engine switch*

E08500801485 side rear-view mirrors
[For vehicles equipped with the keyless oper-
To adjust the mirror position ation system]
If you are carrying the keyless operation key,
you can start the engine. If you press the
Except for vehicles engine switch without depressing the brake
equipped with the mir- pedal (A/T) or the clutch pedal (M/T), you
ror retractor switch can change the operation mode in the order of
OFF, ACC, ON, OFF.
Vehicles equipped with

the mirror retractor
switch
L- Left outside mirror adjustment

R- Right outside mirror adjustment
1- Up
2- Down OFF- The indicator lamp on the engine
3- Right switch turns off.
4- Left ACC- The indicator lamp on the engine
5- Mirror retractor switch switch illuminates orange.
ON- The indicator lamp on the engine
Refer “Outside rear-view mirrors” on page switch illuminates green.
6-14.
Refer “Engine switch” on page 6-18.

Quick guide
3-Combination headlamps Type 2 3-Turn-signal lever 1

Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps. The turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is
operated.
Type 1
OFF All lamps off

With the ignition switch or the
operation mode is in ON, head- 1- Turn-signals
lamps, position, tail, licence plate 2- Lane-change signals
OFF All lamps off and instrument panel lamps turn on
and off automatically in accord-
Position, tail, licence plate, instru- AUTO Refer “Turn-signal lever” on page 5-62.
ance with outside light level. All
ment panel lamps on
lamps turn off automatically when
Headlamps and other lamps go on the ignition switch is turned to the 4-Steering wheel height and reach
“OFF” position or the operation adjustment
mode is put in OFF.
1. Release the lever while holding the steer-
Position, tail, licence plate and ing wheel up.
instrument panel lamps on 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
Headlamps and other lamps go on position.
3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pull-
Refer “Combination headlamps and dip- ing the lever fully upward.
per switch” on page 5-57.

Quick guide
1 5-Wiper and washer switch Type 2
Type 1
A- Locked
B- Release
MIST- Misting function
Refer “Steering wheel height and reach The wipers will operate once.
adjustment” on page 6-13. OFF- Off
AUTO- Auto-wiper control
The wipers will operate once.
Rain sensor
OFF- Off
The wipers will automatically
INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
operate depending on the degree
LO- Slow
of wetness on the windscreen.
HI- Fast
LO- Slow
HI- Fast
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the

windscreen by pulling the lever towards you.
Refer to “Wiper and washer switch” on

page 5-64.

Quick guide
6-Electric window control 7-Fuel tank filler door release LHD 1

lever
Press the switch down for opening the win-
dow, and pull the switch for closing. Open the fuel tank filler door.
The fuel tank filler is located on the rear left
Driver’s switch Driver’s switch side of your vehicle.
LHD RHD
RHD
1- Driver’s door window

2- Front passenger’s door window
3- Rear left door window
4- Rear right door window Refer “Filling the fuel tank” on page 2-3.
5- Lock switch
5-Speed automatic transmission
Lock switch with sports mode* While depressing the brake pedal,
E08501001338 move the selector lever through the
If you press the switch (5), the passenger’s gate.
switches cannot be operated. To cancel, press
Selector lever operation Move the selector lever through the
it once again.
gate.
Refer “Electric window control” on page The transmission selects an optimum gear
3-24. ratio automatically, depending on the speed
of the vehicle and the position of the acceler-
ator pedal.

Quick guide
1 Selector lever positions 8-Speed automatic transmission WARNING

with sports mode*  If the lock button is always pushed to
operate the selector lever, the lever may be
“P” PARK E08501001341
accidentally shifted into the “P” (PARK)
This position locks the transmission to pre- or “R” (REVERSE) position. Be sure not
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can Selector lever operation to push the lock button when performing
be started in this position. the operations indicated by in the illus-
tration.
The transmission selects an optimum gear
“R” REVERSE ratio automatically, depending on the speed
of the vehicle and the position of the acceler-
This position is to back up. ator pedal. Selector lever positions
“N” NEUTRAL “P” PARK
At this position the transmission is disen- This position locks the transmission to pre-
gaged. vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
be started in this position.
“D” DRIVE
“R” REVERSE
This position is for normal driving.
This position is to back up.
Refer to “5-Speed automatic transmission
with sports mode” on page 6-32.
“N” NEUTRAL
The lock button must be pushed while
At this position the transmission is disen-
the brake pedal is depressed to move
gaged.
the selector lever.
The lock button must be pushed to
“D” DRIVE
move the selector lever.
The lock button need not be pushed to This position is for normal driving.
move the selector lever.

Quick guide
Refer to “8-speed automatic transmission
with sports mode” on page 6-39. 1
4-wheel drive operation*

E08502000048
Road conditions
Driving mode Dry paved road Packed snow Deep snow or
Gravel road Sandy road Rocky road
and highway road muddy road
Super select 4WD
( P.6-46)
2H or 4H 4H 4HLc or 4LLc 4HLc or 4LLc 4HLc or 4LLc 4HLc or 4LLc
Super select 4WD II
( P.6-50)
Off Road mode-selector
− − GRAVEL MUD/SNOW SAND ROCK
( P.6-60)
Rear differential lock
− − − Active* Active* Active*
( P.6-61)
*:The OFF Road mode and the rear differential lock cannot be used at the same time. When the rear differential lock is set to ON, the OFF Road
mode turns off. In addition, when the rear differential lock is ON, the OFF Road mode will be deactivated even if the OFF Road mode-selec-
tor is operated.
CAUTION
 When driving on the off-road, confirm the conditions of the road surface and the landscape, and drive after confirming that the components of the suspen-
sion and the bottom of the front and rear bumper do not contact with the road surface. (Refer to “Vehicle dimensions” on page 11-4)

Quick guide
4- Forward Collision Mitigation System
1 Multi information display (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
Type 2
E08501201239
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indica-
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before tor display*  P.6-102, 6-109
operating. 5- Cruise control indicator display*
The following information is included on the  P.6-85
multi information display: odometer, tripme- 6- Adaptive Cruise Control System
ter, average fuel consumption etc. (ACC) display*  P.6-90
7- “ ” or “ ” mark indicator  P.5-6
Type 1
8- Information screen  P.5-4
9- Selector lever position indicator dis-
play (vehicles with 5A/T)  P.6-34
(vehicles with 8A/T)  P.6-41 1- Engine coolant temperature display
10- Engine coolant temperature display  P.5-22
 P.5-7 2- Selector lever position display* 
11- Odometer  P.5-8 P.6-34
12- Fuel remaining display  P.5-7 3- Fuel remaining display  P.5-22
13- Outside temperature display 4- Frozen road warning*  P.5-21
 P.5-8 5- Information display  P.5-19
Refer “Multi information display” on page 6- Service reminder  P.5-23
5-3.
Refer “Multi information display” on page
5-18.
1- Off Road mode indicator display*
 P.6-61
2- Drive mode indicator display*
 P.6-50
3- mark display  P.5-6

General information
2
Fuel selection ...................................................................................2-2

Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................2-3
Installation of accessories ................................................................2-5
Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems ................2-5
Genuine parts ...................................................................................2-6
Used engine oils safety instructions ................................................2-6
Fuel selection
Fuel selection CAUTION CAUTION

 Diesel-powered vehicles with the “DIESEL  Do not use more than 10 % concentration of
2
E00200104839
EN590” or the “DIESEL Euro IV-PH” label ethanol (grain alcohol) by volume.
Petrol-powered vehicles on the fuel tank filler door are designed to Use of more than 10 % concentration may
Unleaded petrol octane number use only diesel fuel that meets the EN590 or lead to damage to your vehicle fuel system,
95 RON or higher Euro IV-PH standard. engine, engine sensors and exhaust system.
Use of any other type of diesel fuel would  Do not operate your vehicle on petrol con-
If the “PREMIUM FUEL adversely affect the engine’s performance taining methanol. Using this type of alcohol
ONLY” label is attached to the and durability. could adversely affect the vehicle’s perfor-
fuel tank filler door, fill it up with  For diesel-powered vehicles, if proper “win- mance and damage critical parts of the vehi-
premium fuel. ter” fuel is not used in winter, the diesel pre- cle’s fuel system.
heat indicator lamp may blink and the engine
Rec- Diesel-powered vehicles
speed may not rise above the idling speed
ommen Cetane number 45 or higher
ded Cetane number (EN590)
because of fuel freezing. In this case, keep NOTE
the engine idling for approximately ten min-  For diesel fuel, due to the separation of par-
fuel 51 or higher*1*2 utes, then turn off the ignition switch or put affin, the fluidity decreases considerably as
the operation mode in OFF and immediately the temperature falls.
*1: If the “DIESEL EN590” label turn it on or put in ON again to confirm that Because of this fact there are two kinds of
is attached to the fuel tank filler the diesel preheat indicator lamp is off. fuel: “summer” and “winter”.
door, fill it up with EN590. (Refer to “Diesel preheat indicator lamp” on This must be considered in winter use. Select
*2: If the “DIESEL Euro IV-PH” page 5-51) either of the two kinds of fuel in accordance
label is attached to the fuel tank with ambient temperature.
Above -5 °C: “summer” diesel
filler door, fill it up with Euro IV- Ethanol/Gasohol (Petrol-pow- Below -5 °C: “winter” diesel
PH.
ered vehicles only) When travelling abroad, find out in advance
about the fuels served in local service sta-
CAUTION A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco- tions.
 For unleaded petrol-powered vehicles, the hol) and 90 % unleaded petrol may be used in
use of leaded fuel can result in serious dam- your vehicle, provided the octane number is
age to the engine and catalytic converter. Do at least as high as that recommended for
not use the leaded fuel. unleaded petrol.
2-2 General information

Filling the fuel tank
NOTE NOTE WARNING

 Petrol-powered vehicles have the knock con-  Poor quality petrol can cause problems such  Fuel is highly flammable and explosive.
trol system so that you can use unleaded pet- as hard starting, stalling, engine noise and You could be burned or seriously injured 2
rol 90 RON or higher as an emergent hesitation. If your experience these prob- when handling it. When refueling your
measure in case unleaded petrol 95 RON or lems, try another brand and/or grade of pet- vehicle, always turn the engine off and
higher is not available on journey, etc. rol. keep away from flames, sparks, and smok-
In such a case, you don’t need to adjust the If the check engine warning lamp flashes, ing materials. Always handle fuel in well-
engine specially. have the system checked as soon as possible ventilated outdoor areas.
In case of using unleaded petrol 90 RON or at an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS  Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to
higher, the engine performance level is dealer. get rid of your body’s static electricity by
reduced.  In diesel-powered vehicles, poor-quality die- touching a metal part of the vehicle or fuel
 In petrol-powered vehicles, repeatedly driv- sel fuel can cause deposits form in the injec- pump. Any static electricity on your body
ing short distance at low speeds can cause tor, resulting in black smoke and rough could create a spark that ignites fuel
deposits to form in the fuel system and idling. vapor.
engine, resulting in poor starting and poor If these problems occur, you are advised to  Perform the whole refueling process
acceleration. If these problems occur, you add a cleaning additive to the diesel fuel (opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
are advised to add a detergent additive to the when you refuel the vehicle. The additive ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do not
petrol when you refuel the vehicle. The addi- will break up and remove the deposits, let any other person come near the fuel
tive will remove the deposits, thereby return- thereby returning the engine to a normal con- tank filler. If you allowed a person to help
ing the engine to a normal condition. Be sure dition. Be sure to use a MITSUBISHI you and that person was carrying static
to use a MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE MOTORS GENUINE DIESEL FUEL SYS- electricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.
FUEL SYSTEM CLEANER. Using an TEM CLEANER. Using an unsuitable addi-  Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
unsuitable additive could make the engine tive could make the engine malfunction. For until refueling is finished. If you moved
malfunction. For details, please contact the detailed, please contact the nearest author- away and did something else (for example,
nearest authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. sitting on a seat) part-way through the
dealer. refueling process, you could pick up a
fresh charge of static electricity.
Filling the fuel tank  Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel
E00200204175
contains toxic substances.
 Keep the doors and windows closed while
WARNING refueling the vehicle. If they were open,
 When handling fuel, comply with the fuel vapor could get into the cabin.
safety regulations displayed by garages  If the fuel cap must be replaced, use only a
and filling stations. MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine part.
General information 2-3

Filling the fuel tank
Fuel tank capacity NOTE

 While filling with fuel, hang the fuel cap on
2 Petrol-powered vehicles:70 litres the hook (A) located on the inside of the fuel
tank filler door.
Diesel-powered vehicles:68 litres
Refueling
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear
left side of your vehicle.
1- Remove
Open the fuel tank filler door with the
2- Close
release lever located below the instrument
panel.
4. Insert the gun in the tank port as far as it
CAUTION goes.
 Since the fuel system may be under pressure,
remove the fuel cap slowly. This relieves any
pressure or vacuum that might have built up
CAUTION
 Do not tilt the gun.
in the fuel tank. If you hear a hissing sound,
wait until it stops before removing the fuel
cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, injuring 5. When the gun stops automatically, do not
you or others. fill with fuel any more.
6. To close, turn the fuel cap slowly clock-
wise until you hear clicking sounds, then
gently push the fuel tank filler door
3. Open the fuel tank filler tube by slowly closed.
turning the fuel cap anticlockwise.

Installation of accessories
 Improper installation of electrical parts Even when such parts are officially author-
Installation of accessories could cause fire, please refer to the Modi- ised, for example by a “general operators per-
fication/alteration to the electrical or fuel mit” (an appraisal for the part) or through the 2
E00200302299
Before fitting any accessories, please consult systems section within this owner’s man- execution of the part in an officially approved
your authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS ual. manner of construction, or when a single
dealer.  Using a cellular phone or radio set inside operation permit following the attachment or
the vehicle without an external antenna installation of such parts, it cannot be
CAUTION may cause electrical system interference, deduced from that alone, that the driving
 Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosis which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera- safety of your vehicles has not been affected.
connector for checking and servicing the tion.
electronic control system.  Tyres and wheels which do not meet spec- Consider also that there basically exists no
Do not connect a device other than a diagno- ifications must not be used. liability on the part of the appraiser or the
sis tool for inspections and service to this Refer to the “Specifications” section for official. Maximum safety can only be ensured
connector. Otherwise, the battery could be information regarding wheel and tyre with parts recommended, sold and fitted or
discharged, the electronic devices of the sizes. installed by an authorised MITSUBISHI
vehicle could malfunction, or other unex-  Do not fail to read the accessories manu- MOTORS dealer (MITSUBISHI MOTORS
pected problems could result. GENUINE replacement parts and
als prior to the installation of accessories,
In addition, malfunctions caused by connect- MITSUBISHI MOTORS accessories). The
parts or other modifications to the vehi-
ing a device other than a diagnosis tool may same also pertains to modifications of
not be covered under warranty. cle!
MITSUBISHI vehicles with respect to the
production specifications. For safety reasons,
 The installation of accessories, optional Important points! do not attempt any modifications other than
parts, etc., should only be carried out those that follow the recommendations of an
within the limits prescribed by law in your Due to a large number of accessories and authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
country, and in accordance with the guide- replacement parts of different manufactures
lines and warnings contained within the available in the market, it is not possible, not
documents accompanying this vehicle. only for MITSUBISHI MOTORS but also an Modification/alterations to
Only MITSUBISHI MOTORS approved authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer, the electrical or fuel systems
accessories should be fitted to your vehi- to check whether the attachment or installa- E00200401495
cle. tion of such parts affects the overall safety of MITSUBISHI MOTORS has always manu-
your MITSUBISHI-vehicle. factured safe, high quality vehicles. In order
to maintain this safety and quality, it is impor-
General information 2-5

Genuine parts
tant that any accessory that is to be fitted, or Failure to use Genuine Parts may invalidate
any modifications carried out which involve any future warranty claim. MITSUBISHI
WARNING
 Keep used engine oils out of reach of chil-
2 the electrical or fuel systems,
ried out in accordance with
should be car-
MITSUBISHI
MOTORS will not be liable for any malfunc-
tion of your vehicle that may have been
dren.
MOTORS guidelines. caused by the use of substitute parts in place

of MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE
CAUTION PARTS.
 Please consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
At the MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer you
MOTORS dealer concerning any such fit- can also get appropriate advice and the
ment or modification. assembling of Genuine Parts will be handled
If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or professionally.
improper installation methods are used (pro- MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE PARTS
tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic are identified by this mark, and are available
devices may be adversely affected, resulting at all authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
in a fire or other accident. dealers.
Genuine parts
E00200501685
Don’t play around with substitutes.

MITSUBISHI MOTORS has gone to great
lengths to bring you a superbly crafted vehi- Used engine oils safety
cle offering the highest quality and dependa-
bility. Don’t reduce that quality and instructions
dependability by using substitute parts. E00200601279
Always use MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENU-

INE PARTS designed and manufactured to WARNING
maintain your MITSUBISHI vehicle at top  Prolonged and repeated contact may
cause serious skin disorders, including
performance. The operation of vehicle com-
dermatitis and cancer.
ponents can be less efficient in case of using
 Avoid contact with the skin as far as possi-
Non-Genuine Parts.
ble and wash thoroughly after any con-
tact.

Locking and unlocking
3
Keys .................................................................................................3-2
Key number tag ................................................................................3-2
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................3-3
Keyless entry system .......................................................................3-4
Keyless operation system* ...............................................................3-7
Doors ..............................................................................................3-15
Central door locks ..........................................................................3-16
“Child-protection” rear doors ........................................................3-17
Tailgate ..........................................................................................3-18
Security alarm system*...................................................................3-20
Electric window control .................................................................3-24
Sunroof* .........................................................................................3-26
Keys
Keys NOTE NOTE

E00300103992  The key is a precision electronic part with a  [For vehicles equipped with the security
built-in signal transmitter. Please observe the alarm system]
Keyless entry key following in order to prevent a malfunction. Pay attention to the following if the security
3 • Do not leave anywhere that is exposed to alarm is set to “Active”. Refer to “Security
direct sunlight, for example on the dash- alarm system” on page 3-20.
board. • If the security alarm is in the system armed
• Do not disassemble or modify. mode, the alarm will sound if the doors are
• Do not excessively bend the key or subject opened after being unlocked with the key,
it to a strong impact. the inside lock knob or the central door lock
Keyless operation key • Do not expose to water. switch.
• Keep away from magnetic key rings. • Even if the security alarm is set to
• Keep away from audio systems, personal “Active”, the system preparation mode is
not entered if the keyless entry system or
computers, TVs, and any other equipment
that generates a magnetic field. the keyless operation function was not used
to lock the vehicle.
• Keep away from devices that emit strong
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular
1- Keyless entry key phones, wireless devices and high fre- Key number tag
2- Keyless operation key quency equipment (including medical
E00312701063
3- Emergency key devices).
• Do not wash with ultrasonic cleaners or The key number is stamped on the tag as indi-
similar equipment. cated in the illustration.
Make a record of the key number and store
WARNING • Do not leave the key where it may be
exposed to high temperature or high humid- the key and key number tag in separate
 When carrying a key on flights, do not
press any switches on the key while on the
ity. places, so that you can order a key from your
plane. If a switch is pressed on the plane,  The engine is designed so that it will not start authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer in
the key emits electromagnetic waves, if the ID code registered in the immobilizer the event the original keys are lost.
which could adversely affect the plane’s computer and the key’s ID code do not
flight operation. match. Refer to the section entitled “Elec-
When carrying a key in a bag, be careful tronic immobilizer” for details and key
that no switches on the key can be easily usage.
pressed by mistake.
3-2 Locking and unlocking

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
NOTE NOTE
• When the key contacts a key ring or other • When the key contacts or is close to other
metallic or magnetic object immobilizing keys (including keys of other
vehicles)
3
• When the key grip contacts metal of

Electronic immobilizer another key
(Anti-theft starting system) In cases like these, remove the object or

E00300203401 additional key from the vehicle key. Then
The electronic immobilizer is designed to try again to start the engine. If the engine
does not start, contact an authorised
reduce significantly the possibility of vehicle
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
 If you lose one of them, contact an author-
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be as possible. To obtain a replacement or extra
achieved, using a key “registered” to the spare key, take your vehicle and all remain-
immobilizer system. ing keys to an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer. All the keys have to be re-
registered in the immobiliser computer unit.
NOTE The immobilizer can register as follows.
 [Vehicles without keyless operation system]
• Keyless entry key: up to 8 different keys
In the following cases, the vehicle may not
• Keyless operation key: up to 4 different
be able to receive the registered ID code
keys
from the registered key and engine may not
start.
Locking and unlocking 3-3

CAUTION To lock NOTE

 Don’t make any alterations or additions to  It is possible to modify functions as follows:
the immobilizer system; alterations or addi- Press the LOCK switch (1). All the doors and For further information, please contact an
tions could cause failure of the immobilizer. authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
3 the tailgate will be locked. The turn-signal
• The time for automatic relocking can be
lamps will blink once. When they are locked
changed.
with the room lamp switch in the “” or the
Keyless entry system “DOOR” position, the room lamp also blink
• Activating the operation confirmation func-
tion (blinking of the turn-signal lamps) only
E00300304076 once. during locking, or only during unlocking.
Press the key switch to lock or unlock the • The confirmation function (this indicates
doors and the tailgate. To unlock locking or unlocking of the doors and the
It is also possible to operate the outside rear- tailgate with the blink of the turn-signal
view mirrors. (Vehicles equipped with the lamps) can be deactivated.
Press the UNLOCK switch (2). All the doors • The number of times the turn-signal lamps
mirror retractor switch)
and the tailgate will be unlocked. If the room are blinked by the confirmation function
lamp switch is in the “” or the “DOOR” can be changed.
Keyless entry key Keyless operation key position at this time, the room lamp will come • On vehicles with keyless operation system,
on for approximately 15 seconds and the the buzzer sound can be activated when a
turn-signal lamps will blink twice. keyless operation is done.
NOTE Operation of the outside rear-

 For vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac- view mirrors (Vehicles
tor switch, the outside rear-view mirrors
automatically retract or extend when all the equipped with the mirror
doors and the tailgate are locked or unlocked retractor switch)
using the key switches of the keyless entry E00310801523
1- LOCK switch system. Refer to “Starting and driving: Out-
2- UNLOCK switch side rear-view mirrors” on page 6-14.
3- Indicator lamp  If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and no
To fold
door or tailgate is opened within approxi-
mately 30 seconds, relocking will automati- Locking the doors using the LOCK switch
cally occur. (1), the outside rear-view mirrors are folded
automatically.

To extend NOTE NOTE

• Deactivate the automatic extension func- • The key switch is operated at the correct
Unlocking the doors using the UNLOCK tion. distance from the vehicle, but the doors and
the tailgate are not locked/unlocked in
switch (2), the outside rear-view mirrors are
extended automatically.
The outside rear-view mirrors can be folded response. 3
or extended by the following operations, • The indicator lamp (3) is dim or does not
even if changing to the any of above. come on.
NOTE After pressing the “LOCK” switch to lock
 Functions can be modified as stated below. the doors and tailgate, if the “LOCK” For further information, please contact an
Please consult an authorised MITSUBISHI switch is pressed again twice in a row authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
MOTORS dealer. within approximately 30 seconds, the out- If you replace the battery yourself, refer to
• Automatically extend when the driver’s side rear-view mirrors will retract. “Procedure for replacing the key battery”
door is closed, and then the following oper- After pressing the “UNLOCK” switch to on page 3-5.
ation is performed. unlock the doors and tailgate, if the  If your key is lost or damaged, please contact
[Except for vehicles equipped with the key- “UNLOCK” switch is pressed again twice an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
less operation system] in a row within approximately 30 seconds, dealer for a replacement key.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” or the outside rear-view mirrors will extend  If you wish to add key, please contact an
“ACC” position. again. authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
[Vehicles equipped with the keyless opera-  The keyless entry system does not operate in The following numbers of the keys are avail-
tion system] the following conditions: able.
Put the operation mode in ON or ACC. • The key is left in the ignition switch. • Keyless entry key: up to 4 keys
• Automatically retract when the ignition (except for vehicles with keyless operation • Keyless operation key: up to 4 keys
switch is turned to the “LOCK” position or system)
the operation mode is put in OFF, and the • The operation mode is not in OFF. (vehicles
driver’s door is then opened. with keyless operation system) Procedure for replacing the key
• Automatically extend when the vehicle • The door or tailgate is open. battery
speed reaches 30 km/h.  The key switch will operate within approxi- E00309501490
mately 4 m from the vehicle. However, the
operating range of the key switch may
Before replacing the battery, remove static
change if the vehicle is located near a power electricity from your body by touching a
station, or radio/TV broadcasting station. metal grounded object.
 If either of the following problems occurs,
the battery may be exhausted.


4. Install a new battery with the + side (B)
CAUTION Keyless entry key
up.
 When the key case is opened, be careful to
keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch Keyless entry key
the internal components. + side
3
NOTE - side
 You may purchase a replacement battery at
an electric appliance store. Coin type
 An authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS battery
dealer can replace the battery for you if you CR1620
prefer.
Keyless operation key
1. Remove the screw (A) from the key. Keyless operation key
(Keyless entry key only) + side
Keyless entry key
- side
Coin type
battery
CR2032
NOTE
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the
5. Close the key case firmly.
MITSUBISHI mark facing you. If the
6. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 1.
MITSUBISHI mark is not facing you when
2. With the MITSUBISHI mark facing you, you open the key case, the switches may (Keyless entry key only)
insert the cloth-covered tip of a straight come out. 7. Check the keyless entry system to see that
blade (or minus) screwdriver into the it works.
notch in the key case and use it to open 3. Remove the old battery.
the case.

Keyless operation system*
Keyless operation system* NOTE

E00305601985  The keyless operation key uses an ultra-weak
electromagnetic wave. In the following
The keyless operation system allows you to cases, the keyless operation system may not
lock and unlock the doors and the tailgate, operate properly or may be unstable. 3
start the engine and change the operation • When there is equipment nearby that emits
mode simply by carrying the keyless opera- strong radio waves, such as: a power sta-
tion key with you. tion, a radio/TV broadcasting station or an
The switches on the keyless operation key airport.
can also be used as the key switch of keyless • The keyless operation system is carried
together with a communications device
entry system.
such as a cellular phone or radio set, or with
Refer to “Starting and stopping the engine” an electronic device such as a personal
on page 6-23. computer.
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 3-4. • The keyless operation key is touching or
covered by a metal object.
The driver should always carry the keyless WARNING • A keyless entry system is being used
operation key. This key is necessary for lock-  When using electro-medical devices other nearby.
ing and unlocking the doors and the tailgate, than implantable cardiac pacemakers or • When the keyless operation key battery is
starting the engine and otherwise operating implantable cardiovascular-defibrilla- worn out.
the vehicle, so before locking and leaving the tors, contact the electro-medical device • When the keyless operation key is set down
vehicle, be sure to check that you have the manufacturer ahead of time to determine in an area with strong radio waves or noise.
keyless operation key. the adverse effects of radio waves on the In such cases, use the emergency key.
devices. Electro-medical device operations Refer to “To lock/unlock without using the
could be affected by radio waves. keyless operation function” on page 3-10.
WARNING
 People with implantable cardiac pacemak-
You can limit the possible operations of the
ers or implantable cardiovascular-defi-
brillators should not go near the exterior keyless operation system. Please consult an
transmitters (A) or the interior transmit- authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
ters (B). The radio waves used by the key-
less operation system could adversely
affect implantable cardiac pacemakers or
implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 Because the keyless operation key receives  If the keyless operation key battery is wear-  Locking and unlocking operate only when
signals in order to communicate with the ing out or there are strong electromagnetic you press a door or tailgate switch that
transmitters in the vehicle, the battery con- waves or noise present, the operating range detects the keyless operation key.
3 tinually wears down regardless of keyless may become smaller and operation may  Operation may not be possible if you are too
operation key use. The battery life is 1 to become unstable. close to the front door, door window or tail-
2 years, depending on usage conditions. gate.
When the battery wears out, replace the bat-  Even if the keyless operation key is within
tery according to the description in this man- Operating range for locking and 70 cm of the driver’s or front passenger’s
ual or have it replaced an authorised door lock/unlock switch or tailgate handle, if
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. unlocking the doors and tailgate the key is near to the ground or high up, the
Refer to “Procedure for replacing the key E00306201685
system may not operate.
battery” on page 3-5. The operating range is approximately 70 cm
 If the keyless operation key is within the
 Because the keyless operation key continu- from the driver’s or front passenger’s door operating range, even someone not carrying
ally receives signals, strong radio wave lock/unlock switch, and tailgate handle. the key can lock and unlock the doors and
reception could affect battery wear. Do not tailgate by pressing the driver’s or front pas-
leave the key near a TV, personal computer, senger’s door lock/unlock switch, the tail-
or other electronic device. gate LOCK switch or the tailgate open
switch.
Operating range of the keyless
operation system Operating range for starting the
E00305701739
engine and changing the opera-
If you are carrying the keyless operation key,
enter the operating range of the keyless oper-
tion mode
E00306301468
ation system, and press the driver’s or front
passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, the tail- The operating range is the interior of the
*: Forward direction vehicle.
gate LOCK switch or the tailgate open
switch, the ID code for your key is verified. : Operating range
You can lock and unlock the doors and the
tailgate, start the engine and change the oper-
ation mode only if the ID codes of your key-
less operation key and the vehicle match.


gate LOCK switch (B) within the operating
To operate using the keyless range, the doors and the tailgate are locked.
operation function The turn-signal lamps will blink once.
E00305802317 Also refer to “Locking and unlocking: Doors,
Driver's or front passenger's door lock/unlock
Central door locks, Tailgate” on pages 3-15, 3
switches
3-16 and 3-18.
NOTE
 As for the vehicles for some countries, the
buzzer may sound.
*: Forward direction
: Operating range
Unlocking the doors and tailgate
NOTE When you are carrying the keyless operation

 Even if it is within the operating range, if the Tailgate switches key, if you press the driver’s or front passen-
keyless operation key is in a small item ger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), or the tail-
holder such as the glove box, on top of the gate open switch (C) within the operating
instrument panel, door pocket or in the lug- range, all the doors and the tailgate are
gage compartment, it may be impossible to unlocked.
start the engine and change the operation If the room lamp switch is in the “” or the
mode. “DOOR” position at this time, the room lamp
 If a keyless operation key is too close to the will turn on for 15 seconds. The turn-signal
door or door window, it may be possible to
lamps will blink twice.
start the engine or change the operation
mode even when the key is outside the vehi-
If the driver’s or front passenger’s door
cle. lock/unlock switch is pressed and any of the
doors or tailgate is not opened within approx-
Locking the doors and tailgate imately 30 seconds, relocking will automati-
cally occur.
When you are carrying the keyless operation Refer to “Locking and unlocking: Doors,
key, if you press the driver’s or front passen- Central door locks, Tailgate” on pages 3-15,
ger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), or the tail- 3-16 and 3-18.


if the room lamp switch is in the “” or the
NOTE “DOOR” position.
To lock/unlock without using
 As for the vehicles for some countries, the the keyless operation function
buzzer may sound. When locking: The turn-signal lamps blink E00306000165
 For vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
3 tor switch, the outside rear-view mirrors
once.
automatically retract/extend when all the
When unlock- The room lamp illuminates Emergency key
doors and the tailgate are locked/unlocked
ing: for approximately 15 sec- E00307201594
using the keyless operation function. Refer onds, the turn-signal lamps The emergency key (A) can only be used to
to “Starting and driving: Outside rear-view blink twice. lock and unlock the door. To use the emer-
mirrors” on page 6-14. gency key, unlock the lock knob (B) and
 The keyless operation function does not remove it from the keyless operation key (C).
operate under the following conditions: NOTE
• The keyless operation key is inside the  As for the vehicles for some countries, the
vehicle. buzzer may sound.
• A door or the tailgate is open or ajar.  Functions can be modified as stated below.
• The operation mode is not in OFF. For further information, please contact an
 The time between unlocking and automatic authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
locking can be adjusted. Please consult an • Activating the operation confirmation func-
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. tion (blinking of the turn-signal lamps) only
 The tailgate open switch (C) can be used to during locking, or only during unlocking.
check that the vehicle is locked properly. • Disabling the operation confirmation func-
Press the tailgate open switch within approx- tion (blinking of the turn-signal lamps).
imately 3 seconds of locking the vehicle. If • Changing the number of blinks for the
you wait longer than 3 seconds and press the operation confirmation function (blinking
tailgate open switch, the doors and tailgate of the turn-signal lamps).
will be unlocked. NOTE
 Only use the emergency key for emergen-
cies. If the keyless operation key battery
Operation confirmation when locking wears out, replace it as quickly as possible so
and unlocking that you can use the keyless operation key.
 The emergency key is built in the keyless
Operation can be confirmed as shown below. operation key.
However, the room lamp will illuminate only  After using the emergency key, always return
it into the original position.

Locking and unlocking the door 2- Unlock
Turning the emergency key in the forward

direction locks the door, and turning it in the
rear direction unlocks the door. Also refer to 3
“Locking and unlocking: Doors” on page
3-15.
1- Lock
Warning activation
E00305902044
In order to prevent vehicle theft or the accidental operation of the keyless operation system, the buzzer and the display on the information screen
in the multi-information display are used to alert the driver.
If a warning is activated, always check the vehicle and the keyless operation key. The warning is also displayed if there is a fault in the keyless
operation system.
TYPE 1:Color liquid crystal display type TYPE 2:Mono-color liquid crystal display type
TYPE 1 TYPE 2
Item Note (Solution)
Display Buzzer Indicator Buzzer
Detection of Inner buzzer No sounds There is a fault in the keyless operation system.
failure sounds once
Illuminates


TYPE 1 TYPE 2
Fall of battery Inner buzzer No sounds The battery starts to run out, the warning is activated. （The
3 voltage sounds once warning is not activated if the battery is completely dead.）
Blinks
Key not Inner buzzer No sounds When the engine switch is turned to the ACC or ON from
detected sounds once OFF or when the engine is started, the warning is activated, if
any of the following conditions is occurred.
Blinks • Carrying another keyless operation key with a different
code, or the keyless operation key could be outside the
operating range.
• The battery of the keyless operation key is dead.
• Communication is blocked by electric wave environment.
Keyless opera- Inner buzzer Inner buzzer If the operation mode is in OFF and the driver’s door is
tion key sounds sounds opened with the keyless operation key in the key slot, a warn-
reminder approxi- approxi- ing is issued and the outer buzzer sounds for approximately
mately 1 min- mately 1 min- 3 seconds and the inner buzzer sounds for approximately
Blinks
ute ute Outer 1 minute to remind you to remove the key. If the key
Outer buzzer buzzer sounds removed from key slot, the buzzer is stopped.
sounds approxi-
approximately 3 sec-
mately 3 seconds
onds
intermittently


TYPE 1 TYPE 2
Keyless opera- Inner buzzer Inner buzzer • When the vehicle is parked with the operation mode in any
tion key take- sounds once sounds once mode other than OFF, if you close the door after opening 3
out monitoring Outer buzzer Outer buzzer any of the doors and taking the keyless operation key out
system sounds inter- sounds inter- of the vehicle, a warning is issued until the key is detected
Blinks
mittently mittently in the vehicle.
• If you take the keyless operation key out of the vehicle
through a window without opening a door, the keyless
operation key take-out monitoring system does not oper-
ate.
• It is possible to change the setting to make the keyless
operation key take-out monitoring system operate if you
take the keyless operation key out from the vehicle through
a window without opening a door. For further information,
please contact an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer.
• Even if you have the keyless operation key within the
engine start operating range, if the keyless operation key
and vehicle ID codes cannot be matched, for example due
to the ambient environment or electromagnetic conditions,
the warning may be activated.


TYPE 1 TYPE 2
Key lock-in Inner buzzer Outer buzzer • When the operation mode is in OFF, if you close all the
3 prevention sounds once sounds doors and the tailgate with the keyless operation key left in
system Outer buzzer approxi- the vehicle and you try to lock the doors and tailgate by
sounds mately 3 sec- pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock
Blinks
approxi- onds switch, or the tailgate LOCK switch, a warning is issued
mately 3 sec- intermittently and you cannot lock the doors and tailgate.
onds • Make sure you have the keyless operation key with you
intermittently before locking the doors. Even if you leave the keyless
operation key inside the vehicle, it is possible that the
doors will lock depending on the surrounding environment
and wireless signal conditions.
Door ajar pre- Inner buzzer Outer buzzer When the operation mode in OFF, if you try to lock the doors
vention sys- sounds once sounds and tailgate by pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s door
tem Outer buzzer approxi- lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate LOCK switch with one of
sounds mately 3 sec- the doors or the tailgate not completely closed, a warning is
Blinks
approxi- onds issued and you cannot lock the doors and tailgate.
mately 3 sec- intermittently
onds
intermittently
Operation Inner buzzer Outer buzzer When the operation mode is in any mode other than OFF, if
mode OFF sounds once sounds you close all the doors and the tailgate then try to lock the
reminder sys- Outer buzzer approxi- doors and tailgate by pressing the driver’s or front passen-
tem sounds mately 3 sec- ger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate LOCK switch, a
Blinks
approxi- onds warning is issued and you cannot lock the doors and tailgate.
mately 3 sec- intermittently
onds
intermittently

Doors
2- Unlock
Doors NOTE
 The driver’s door can be opened without
NOTE
E00300403621
using the lock knob by pulling on the inside
CAUTION  When locking or unlocking with the key, all door handle.
 Make sure the doors are closed: driving with doors and the tailgate will be locked or 3
doors not completely closed is dangerous. unlocked.
Refer to “Central door locks” on page 3-16.
 Never leave children in the vehicle unat-
 If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless
To lock without using the key
tended.
operation system, the driver’s door can be
 Be careful not to lock the doors while the
locked or unlocked with the emergency key.
key is inside the vehicle.
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 3-10.
NOTE
 To prevent the key from being locked inside
To lock or unlock from inside
the vehicle, neither the lock knob on the the vehicle
driver’s door nor the key can be used to lock
the driver’s door when it is open.
To lock or unlock with the key Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked
position, and close the door (2).
NOTE
 The driver’s door cannot be locked using the
inside lock knob while the driver’s door is
opened.
1- Lock
2- Unlock
1- Lock

Central door locks
Central door locks LHD RHD

E00300803263
NOTE
3  Repeated continuous operation between lock
and unlock could activate the central door
locking systems built-in protection circuit
and prevent the system from operating. If
this occurs, wait approximately 1 minute
before operating the central door lock sys-
tem.
1- Lock 1- Lock
 When the driver’s door is open, the central
door lock switch cannot be used to lock it.
2- Unlock 2- Unlock
All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked NOTE Vehicle-speed sensitive auto-
and unlocked as described hereafter.  If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless
operation system, the driver’s door can be
matic door lock (with impact-
locked or unlocked with the emergency key. sensitive unlock mechanism)*
Driver’s door with key Refer to “Emergency key” on page 3-10.
All of the doors and the tailgate lock automat-
Using the key on the driver’s door locks or
ically when the vehicle speed exceeds
unlocks. The central door lock switch approximately 9 mph. In addition, all of the
doors and the tailgate unlock when a strong
Using the central door lock switch on the impact that could be very dangerous to the
driver’s door locks or unlocks all doors and occupants is sustained by the collision of the
the tailgate. vehicle. This is prepared for rescue activities
when an unexpected accident occurs.

“Child-protection” rear doors
WARNING NOTE “Child-protection” rear

 When the vehicle-speed sensitive auto-
matic door lock/Impact-sensitive unlock
 These functions are activated when the vehi-
cle is shipped from the factory. If you wish to
doors
mechanism may not operate in the follow- activate or deactivate these functions, please
E00300902182
ing conditions, have the vehicle inspected contact an authorised MITSUBISHI 3

at an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
MOTORS dealer.
dealer immediately.
• The door does not lock automatically Unlock using the ignition
even when the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 9 mph. switch, the engine switch or the
• The door unlocks automatically while selector lever
driving.
• Even when the ignition switch or the
operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn- It is possible to unlock all of the doors and the
ing lamp does not come on or it remains tailgate whenever as follows.
on. [Vehicles with M/T] 1- Lock
• The SRS warning lamp and/or the warn- The ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” 2- Unlock
ing display comes on while driving. position or the operation mode is put in OFF.
• The central door lock system is broken [Vehicles with A/T]
Child protection helps prevent the rear doors
down. The selector lever placed the “P” (PARK)
from being opened accidentally from the
position while the ignition switch or the oper-
inside.
ation mode is in ON.
If the lever is set to the locked position, the
NOTE Or the ignition switch is turned to the
rear door cannot be opened using the inside
 Even if the vehicle suffers significant defor- “LOCK” position or the operation mode is
handle, but only with the outside handle.
mation from a collision etc., depending on put in OFF.
the location and angle of the collision, as If the lever is set to the “Unlock” position, the
well as on the shape and condition of the These functions are deactivated when the child protection mechanism does not func-
other object in the collision, the doors and vehicle is shipped from the factory. If you tion.
the tailgate may not unlock. The extent of wish to activate or deactivate these functions,
deformation or damage to the vehicle does please contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
not necessarily correlate with unlock of the
MOTORS dealer.
doors and the tailgate.

Tailgate
CAUTION WARNING LHD RHD

 When driving with a child in the rear seat,  When there is a build up of snow or ice, it
please use the child protection to prevent should be removed before opening the tail-
accidental door opening which may cause an gate. If you open the tailgate without
3 accident. removing it, there is a possibility that the
tailgate may close suddenly due to the
weight of that snow or ice.
 When you open the tailgate make sure
Tailgate that the tailgate is opened fully and
E00301402588
remains fully open. If you only open the
tailgate halfway there is a risk that the
WARNING tailgate may drop and slam shut. If you 1- Lock
 Luggage compartment is not designed to open the tailgate while your vehicle is 2- Unlock
ride for people. Do not let people ride or parked on an incline it is more difficult to
children play there. This could result in a do so than on the flat and also it may drop
serious accident. and slam shut. NOTE
 It is dangerous to drive with the tailgate  Repeated continuous operating between lock
open, since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can and unlock could cause the central door
enter the cabin. CAUTION locks’ built-in protection circuit to prevent
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause the system from operating. If this occurs,
 Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
unconsciousness and even death. wait approximately 1 minute before operat-
loading and unloading luggage. Heat from
And also, if opening the tailgate while ing the central door lock switch.
the exhaust could lead to burns.
driving, luggage may fall from the tail-
 To avoid damage to the tailgate, make sure
gate. This could result in a serious acci-
the area above and behind the tailgate is
dent.
 When opening and closing the tailgate,
clear before opening it. To open from outside the vehi-
make sure of the surrounding safety and cle
keep enough space for back and upper of
the vehicle and be careful not to hit your To lock/unlock
head or pinch your hands, neck, etc.
After unlocking the tailgate, press the tailgate
open switch (A) and pull up the tailgate.
The tailgate can be locked or unlocked by
using the central door lock switch (driver
side).

Tailgate
To close
To close the tailgate, pull the tailgate grip (A)

downward and release it before the tailgate is 3
completely closed, then gently push shut the
tailgate from the outside.
2. Move the lever (B) to open the tailgate.

NOTE
 The tailgate cannot be pulled up when you
do not open it as soon as the tailgate open
switch is pressed. In this case, push the tail-
gate open switch once again and pull up the
tailgate.
 The tailgate cannot be opened when the bat-
tery is flat or disconnected.
CAUTION
 When closing the tailgate, do not close it
To open from inside the vehicle directly putting the hands on the tailgate
grip. If the hands or arms got caught, a seri-
The tailgate can also open from inside the 3. Push out on the tailgate to open it. ous injury could result.
vehicle.
It is designed to provide a way to open the WARNING
tailgate in the case of a discharged battery.  Always keep the release lever lid on tail-
gate closed when driving so that your lug-
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw- gage cannot accidentally bump the lever
driver into the notch of the lid (A) inside and open the tailgate.
of the tailgate and pry gently to open the
lid.

Security alarm system*

The system preparation time extends from the
NOTE CAUTION point at which all of the doors and the tailgate
 Gas struts (B) are installed to support the  Do not modify or add parts to the security
are locked by pressing of the LOCK switch
tailgate. alarm system.
on the key or the keyless operation function
Doing so could cause the security alarm to
3 malfunction. to the point at which the system armed mode
goes into effect.
During this time, it is possible to temporarily
NOTE open a door or the tailgate without using the
keyless entry system or the keyless operation
 The alarm system will not be activated if the
doors and the tailgate have been locked using function and without causing the alarm to
a key, the inside lock knob or the central sound (for example, when you forget some-
door lock switch (instead of the keyless entry thing inside the vehicle or realize that a win-
system or the keyless operation function). dow is open).
To prevent damage or faulty operation.
• Do not hold the gas struts when closing the
tailgate. System armed mode
• Also, do not push or pull the gas struts. The security alarm has four
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape, modes: (The buzzer stops and the security indicator
etc., to the gas struts. lamp continues to blink with the indicator’s
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts. reduced lit-up duration time.)
• Do not hang any object on the gas struts. System preparation mode Once the system preparation mode has ended,
(approximately 20 seconds) the system armed mode starts.
If an unlawful opening of any of the doors or
Security alarm system* (The buzzer sounds intermittently and the
tailgate is detected during the system armed
mode, the alarm will be activated to warn
E00301502114
security indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
people around the vehicle of an abnormal
The security alarm system is for alerting the ter blinks.)
condition.
surrounding area of suspicious behaviour to Also, if unlawful moving of the vehicle is
Indicator lamp
prevent unlawful entry into the vehicle by attempted or a vehicle intrusion is detected,
operating an alarm if a door or the tailgate is the alarm will be activated.
opened when the vehicle has not been
unlocked using the keyless entry system or
the keyless operation function.

Alarm activation NOTE

 When lending the vehicle to another person
Inside alarm (approximately 10 seconds): or allowing the vehicle to be driven by some-
one who is unfamiliar with the security alarm
The buzzer sounds, warning those inside system, be sure to give the person a proper 3
the vehicle of an abnormal condition. explanation of the security alarm system.
If a person who is unfamiliar with the secu-
Outside alarm (approximately 30 seconds): rity alarm system accidentally unlocked the
vehicle, causing the alarm to sound, the
The turn-signal lamps blink and the horn alarm would be a nuisance to people nearby.
sounds, warning people around the vehi-
cle of an abnormal condition.
Setting the system Driver’s and front passenger’s door lock/unlock
Refer to “Alarm activation” on page 3-23. E00301702259
switches
Follow the procedure below to set the system

NOTE to the system armed mode.
 The alarm will resume if unlawful actions
are taken again, even if the alarm has 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
stopped. position and then remove the key (vehi-
cles with keyless entry system), or put the
operation mode in OFF (vehicles with
System cancellation keyless operation system).
2. Exit the vehicle and close all of the doors
and tailgate. Tailgate LOCK switch
It is possible to cancel the system activation
3. Press the LOCK switch (A) on the key of
during the system preparation mode or the
the keyless entry system or the keyless
system armed mode.
operation system, the driver’s or front
In addition, it is possible to cancel the alarm
passenger’s door lock/unlock switch (B),
once it has been activated.
or the tailgate LOCK switch (C) in order
Refer to “Cancelling the system” on page
to lock all the doors and the tailgate.
3-22, “Cancelling the alarm” on page 3-23.


By locking the vehicle using the keyless 4. After approximately 20 seconds, the  Opening any one of the doors or the tail-
entry system or the keyless operation buzzer stops, and when the blinking of the gate, or inserting the key into the ignition
function, the system preparation mode is security indicator lamp starts to slow switch (vehicles with keyless entry sys-
activated. down, the system armed mode goes into tem) when the system is in the system
3 The buzzer makes an intermittent beeping effect. preparation mode.
sound and the security indicator lamp in The security indicator lamp continues to  Holding the keyless operation key and
the instrument cluster flashes for confir- blink during the system armed mode. pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s
mation. door lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate
NOTE open switch to unlock the doors and the
Indicator lamp  The security alarm system can be activated tailgate (vehicles with the keyless opera-
when people are riding inside the vehicle or tion system).
when the windows are open. To prevent acci-
dental activation of the alarm, do not set the
system to the system armed mode while peo- NOTE
NOTE ple are riding in the vehicle.  If the battery terminals are disconnected
 Avoid leaving valuable items inside the vehi- while the system is in the system preparation
 The system preparation mode is not activated
cle even when the security alarm system has mode, the memory will be erased.
when the doors and the tailgate have been
been set to the “active” mode.  It is possible to register up to 8 keys for key-
locked using a method other than the keyless
less entry system and 4 keys for keyless
entry system or the keyless operation func-
operation system.
tion (namely a key, the inside lock knob or
As long as they are registered, any of the
the central door lock switch). Cancelling the system keys, other than the one used to activate the
 If the security indicator lamp in the instru- E00301802117
system, can be used to cancel the system.
ment cluster does not blink after the locking
The following methods can be used to cancel If you want to register additional keys,
operation using the keyless entry system or
the system when it is in the system prepara- please contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
the keyless operation function, the security
tion mode or the system armed mode. MOTORS dealer.
alarm system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.  Pressing the UNLOCK switch on the key.
 Turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position. (vehicles with keyless entry sys-
tem)
 Putting the operation mode in ON. (vehi-
cles with keyless operation system)


1. The inside alarm will be activated for (After pressing of the LOCK switch, the
NOTE approximately 10 seconds. vehicle will lock if all the doors and the
 The activation distance for keyless entry sys-
2. The alarm will be activated for approxi- tailgate are closed, after which the system
tem is approximately 4 m.
mately 30 seconds. preparation mode will once again go into
If it is not possible to lock or unlock the
vehicle by pressing the switch at the correct The turn-signal lamps will flash, and the effect.) 3
distance or the security alarm system cannot horn will sound intermittently.  Turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
be set or cancelled using the switch, the bat- position. (vehicles with keyless entry sys-
tery may need to be replaced. tem)
Replace the battery at your authorised  Putting the operation mode in ON. (vehi-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. cles with keyless operation system)
 If the UNLOCK switch on the key, or the  Holding the keyless operation key and
driver’s or front passenger’s door locking or unlocking the doors and the
lock/unlock switch is pressed and no door or tailgate using the keyless operation func-
the tailgate is opened within 30 seconds, the
tion (vehicles equipped with the keyless
doors and the tailgate will automatically
operation system).
relock. In this case as well, the system prepa-
ration mode will go into effect.
 The time between pressing of the UNLOCK NOTE
switch on the key, or the driver’s or front 3. The alarm will resume if unlawful actions  When the ignition switch is turned to the
passenger’s door lock/unlock switch and are taken again, even if the alarm has “ON” position or the operation mode is put
automatic locking can be adjusted. Please stopped. in ON, the buzzer sounds 4 times. This oper-
consult your authorised MITSUBISHI ation indicates that the alarm was activated
MOTORS dealer. while the vehicle was parked.
Cancelling the alarm Please check the inside of the vehicle to con-
E00302001744 firm that nothing was stolen.
Alarm activation  Even if the battery is disconnected, the alarm
It is possible to halt the activation of an alarm
E00301902219 activation memory will not be erased.
using the following methods:
When the system is in the system armed
mode, the alarm will be activated as follows  Pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK switch
if the vehicle is unlocked or if any of the on the key.
doors or tailgate is opened using a method
other than the keyless entry system or the
keyless operation function.

Electric window control

If you want to stop the window movement,
Electric window control WARNING operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
 Before operating the electric window con-
E00302201658
tion.
trol, make sure that nothing is capable of
The electric windows can only be operated
being trapped (head, hand, finger, etc.).
3 with the ignition switch or the operation
 Never leave the vehicle without removing Passenger’s switches
mode in ON. the key.
 Never leave a child (or other person who The passenger’s switches can be used to oper-
Electric window control switch might not be capable of safe operation of ate the corresponding passenger’s door win-
the electric window control) in the vehicle
E00302303174 dows.
alone.
Each door window opens or closes while the Press the switch down for opening the win-
corresponding switch is operated. dow, and pull up the switch for closing.
Driver’s switches
Driver’s switch Driver’s switch
LHD RHD
The driver’s switches can be used to operate
all door windows. A window can be opened
or closed by operating the corresponding
switch.
Press the switch down to open the window,
and pull up the switch to close it.
[Type 1]
If the switch for the driver’s door window is
1- Driver’s door window fully pressed down, the door window auto-
2- Front passenger’s door window matically opens completely. NOTE
3- Rear left door window  Repeated operation with the engine stopped
4- Rear right door window [Type 2] will run down the battery. Operate the win-
5- Lock switch If the switch for the driver’s window is fully dow switches only while the engine is run-
pressed down/pulled up, the door window ning.
automatically opens/closes completely.  The rear door windows only open halfway.

Electric window control
Lock switch Timer function CAUTION

E00303102446 E00302402110  The safety mechanism is cancelled just
When this switch is operated, the passenger’s The door windows can be opened or closed before the window is fully closed. This
allows the window to close completely.
switches cannot be used to open or close the
door windows and the driver’s switch cannot
for 30 seconds after the engine is stopped.
Therefore be especially careful that no fin- 3
However, once the driver’s door or the front
gers are trapped in the window.
open or close any door windows other than passenger’s door is opened, the windows can-
 The safety mechanism is deactivated while
the driver’s door window. not be operated. the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe-
To unlock, press it once again. cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
Safety mechanism (driver’s the door window opening.
window only of the vehicles

with driver’s switch Type 2) NOTE
E00302502137  The safety mechanism can be activated if the
When the door window is automatically driving conditions or other circumstances
closed by pulling up the switch fully, if a cause the driver’s door window to be sub-
hand or head is trapped in the closing win- jected to a physical shock similar to that
caused by a trapped hand or head.
dow, it will lower automatically.
 If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or
Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts
more times in a row, the safety mechanism
their head or hand out of the window when
will be cancelled and the door window will
1- Lock closing the driver’s door window. not close correctly.
2- Unlock The lowered window will become operational In such a case, the following procedure
after a few seconds. should be implemented to rectify this situa-
tion. If the window is open, repeatedly raise
WARNING WARNING the driver’s door window switch until that
 A child may tamper with the switch at the window has been fully closed. Following
 If the battery terminals are disconnected
risk of its hands or head being trapped in this, release the switch, raise the switch once
or the fuse for electric window is replaced,
the window. When driving with a child in again and hold it in this condition for at least
the safety mechanism will be cancelled.
the vehicle, please press the window lock 1 second, then release it. You should now be
If a hand or head got trapped, a serious
switch to disable the passenger’s switches. able to operate in the normal fashion.
injury could result.

Sunroof*
2- Tilt up
NOTE 3- Close, Tilt down
Safety mechanism
 If the battery terminals are disconnected or E00303801420
the fuse for electric window is replaced, the To open, press the switch (1). If a hand or head is trapped in the closing
safety mechanism will be cancelled and the
3 door window will not automatically
To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch
(2) or (3).
sunroof, it will re-open automatically.
Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts
open/close completely.
If the window is open, repeatedly raise the their head or hand out of the sunroof when
driver’s door window switch until the win- NOTE opening or closing.
dow has been fully closed. Following this,  The sunroof automatically stops just before The opened sunroof will become operational
release the switch, raise the switch once reaching the fully open position to reduce after a few seconds.
again and hold it in this condition for at least wind throbs.
1 second, then release it. You should now be Press the switch again to fully open it. If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or
able to operate the driver’s door window in more times consecutively or the switch (2) is
the normal fashion. kept pressed for 10 seconds or longer with the
To close, press the switch (3). sunroof stationary in the fully tilted up posi-
tion, normal closing of the sunroof will be
Sunroof* To tilt up, press the switch (2). The rear edge
aborted. In such an event, you should take the
E00302702399 sunroof rises for ventilation.
following steps:
The sunroof can only be operated with the To tilt down, press the switch (3).
1. Press the switch (2) repeatedly until the
ignition switch or the operation mode in ON.
sunroof has been fully tilt up.
WARNING 2. Once the fully tilt up position has been
 Do not put head, hands or anything else reached, press again and hold the switch
out of the sunroof opening while driving (2) for at least 3 seconds.
the vehicle. 3. After pressing the switch (1) to perform
 Never leave a child (or other person who full opening, press the switch (3) to fully
might not be capable of safe operation of close the sunroof.
the sunroof switch) in the vehicle alone.
 Before operating the sunroof, make sure
that nothing is capable of being trapped
(head, hand, finger, etc.).
1- Open

Sunroof*
NOTE NOTE NOTE

 The safety mechanism can be activated if the  The sunroof stops just before reaching the  After washing the vehicle or after it has
driving conditions or other circumstances fully open position. rained, wipe off any water that is on the sun-
cause the sunroof to be subjected to a physi- If the vehicle is driven with the sunroof in roof before operating it.
cal shock similar to that caused by a trapped this position, wind buffeting is lower than  Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the 3
hand or head. with the sunroof fully open. engine stationary will run down the battery.
 Avoid stopping the sunroof before it reaches  When leaving the vehicle unattended, make Operate the sunroof while the engine is run-
the opening or closing end during operations. sure you close the sunroof and remove the ning.
If this should accidentally be allowed to hap- ignition key.
pen, repeat the process from step 1.  Release the switch as soon as the sunroof
reaches the fully open or fully closed posi-
Sunshade
E00307901243
tion.
CAUTION  Release the switch as soon as the sunroof Slide the sunshade manually to open and
 The safety mechanism is cancelled just reaches the fully tilt up position. close it.
before the sunroof is fully closed. This  If the sunroof does not operate when the sun-
allows the sunroof to close completely. roof switch is operated, release the switch
Therefore be especially careful that no fin- and check whether something is trapped by
gers are trapped in the sunroof. the sunroof. If nothing is trapped, have the
sunroof checked at an authorised
4. Following this action, it should be possi-
 Depending on the models of ski carriers or
ble to operate the sunroof in the normal roof carriers, the sunroof may contact with
manner. the carrier when the sunroof is tilted up. Be
careful when tilting up the sunroof if such a
ski carrier or a roof carrier is installed.
CAUTION
 Be sure to close the sunroof completely
 Please observe the following because the
when washing the vehicle or when leaving
sunroof could be damaged.
the vehicle.
• Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is fro-
 Be careful, not to put any wax on the weath-
CAUTION
zen closed (after snow fall or during  Be careful that hands are not trapped when
erstrip (black rubber) around the sunroof
extreme cold). closing the sunshade.
opening. If stained with wax, the weather-
• Do not sit or place heavy luggage on the strip cannot maintain a weatherproof seal  The sunshade cannot be closed with the sun-
sunroof or roof opening edge. with the sunroof. roof opened. Doing so could damage the
sunshade.

Sunroof*
NOTE
 The sunshade will operate together with the
sunroof when the sunroof is opened.
 Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before clos-
3 ing the sunshade.

Seat and seat belts
Seat arrangement .............................................................................4-2 4

Seat adjustment ................................................................................4-4
Front seats ........................................................................................4-4
Second seats .....................................................................................4-5
Third seats (7 persons) .....................................................................4-6
Head restraints .................................................................................4-7
Making a luggage area .....................................................................4-9
Making a flat seat ...........................................................................4-13
Seat belts ........................................................................................4-14
Pregnant women restraint ..............................................................4-19
Seat belt pre-tensioner system and force limiter system ...............4-19
Child restraint ................................................................................4-20
Seat belt inspection ........................................................................4-30
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-airbag .................................4-30
Seat arrangement
Seat arrangement
E00400202027
By operating the front, second or third seat,

select the desired seat arrangement.
4-2 Seat and seat belts

Seat arrangement
5 persons 7 persons
Normal usage
4
Flat seat  P.4-13
Folding the second

seats
 P.4-9
Making a luggage Folding the third seat-

area backs forward —
 P.4-11
Folding the third seats

—
 P.4-12
Seat and seat belts 4-3

Seat adjustment
Seat adjustment WARNING CAUTION

E00400301962  To minimize the risk of personal injury in  When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,
the event of a collision or sudden braking, pay careful attention to the rear seat passen-
Adjust the driver’s seat so that you are com-
the seatbacks should always be in the gers.
fortable and that you can reach the pedals, almost upright position while the vehicle is
steering wheel, switches etc. while retaining a in motion. The protection provided by the
4 clear field of vision. seat belts may be reduced significantly Front seats
when the seatback is reclined. There is E00400401426
WARNING greater risk that the passenger will slide

under the seat belt, resulting in serious
 Do not attempt to adjust the seat while
injury, when the seatback is reclined.
Manual type*
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
 Do not place objects under the seats. This
trol and result in an accident.
could prevent the seat from locking
 After seat adjustments are made, ensure
securely, and it could lead to an accident.
the adjusting mechanism (levers or han-
It may also cause damage to the seat or
dles etc.) are returned to their original
other parts.
positions, and the seating is locked in posi-
tion by attempting to move the seat for-
ward and rearward without using the
adjusting mechanism. CAUTION
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in the  Make sure the seat is adjusted by an adult or
luggage area of a vehicle. Also, the luggage with adult supervision for correct and safe
area and rear seats should never be used operation.
as a play area by children. In a collision,  Do not place a cushion or the like between
your back and the seatback while driving. 1- To adjust forward or backward
people or children riding unrestrained in
these areas are more likely to be seriously The effectiveness of the head restraints will Lift the handle and adjust the seat to the
injured or killed. be reduced in the event of an accident. desired position, and release the han-
 Do not allow people or children to ride in  The reclining mechanism of the front manual dle.
any area of your vehicle that is not seat’s seatback is spring loaded, causing it to 2- To recline the seatback
equipped with seats and seat belts, and fold the seatback forward when the lock Pull the lever up and then lean back-
make sure that everyone travelling in your lever is operated. When using the lever, sit ward to the desired position, and
vehicle is in a seat and wearing a seat belt, close to the seatback or hold it with your release the lever.
or in the case of a child is strapped in a hand to control its return motion.
child restraint.  When sliding the seats, be careful not to
catch your hand or foot.

Second seats
3- To adjust seat cushion height (driver’s 4- To adjust seat cushion angle
side only)* Operate the switch as indicated by the
CAUTION
 The reclining mechanism of the seatback is
Turn the dial and adjust the seat cush- arrows and adjust the seat cushion
spring loaded, causing it to return to the ver-
ion height to the desired position. angle to the desired position. tical position when the lock lever is operated.
When using the lever, sit close to the seat-
Power type* NOTE back or hold it with your hand to control its
 To prevent the battery from running down, return motion. 4
operate the switch with the engine running.  If the seatback is reclined while the cup
holder is used, drinks could be spilled. If the
spilt drink is very hot, you could be burnt.
Second seats
E00402001501
NOTE
To recline the seatback.  It is possible to adjust the seatback angle
In order to recline the seatback, lean forward independently on each side.
slightly, pull the seatback lock lever up, and  If your vehicle is equipped with the cargo
then lean backward to the desired position area cover, when using the cover in the posi-
and release the lever. The seatback will lock tion of the rear holes, prevent the cover from
1- To adjust forward or backward in that position. touching the seatback lock lever because the
seatback lock lever may not operate prop-
Operate the switch as indicated by the
erly.
arrows and adjust the seat to the desired Refer to “Cargo area cover (5 persons)” on
position. page 7-95.
2- To recline the seatback
Operate the switch as indicated by the
arrows and adjust the seatback angle to
Armrest
the desired position.
E00402401475
3- To adjust seat height
Operate the switch as indicated by the To use the armrest, fold it down.
arrows and adjust the seat height to the To return to the original position, push it
desired position. backward until it is flush with the seat.
If the entire switch is operated, then the
entire seat moves.

Third seats (7 persons)
CAUTION
 For reasons of safety, do not sit in the third
seat when using the tether anchor strap (Type
2 only).
Refer to “Installing a child restraint system
to the lower anchorage (ISOFIX child
4 restraint mountings) and tether anchorage”
on page 4-26.
To recline the seatback.

Pull the seatback lock release band and adjust
the seatback by hand to the desired position,
NOTE
and release the strap.
 Do not climb or sit on the armrest. Doing so Third seats (7 persons)
could damage the armrest. E00402701494
 The top surface of the armrest contains a cup

holder for second seat occupants. WARNING
Refer to “Cup holder” on page 7-94.  For reasons of safety, whenever passen-
gers sit in the third seat, be sure to raise
all the head restraints of the second seats.
To get in and out of the third
seat (7 persons)
E00402501333
Getting in and out of the third seat can be

made easily by folding the second seat.
Refer to “Folding the second seats” on page
4-9.

Head restraints
in the direction of the arrow. After adjust-
Head restraints ment, push the head restraint downward and Second seats
E00403302885
make sure that it is locked.
WARNING
 Driving without the head restraints in
place can cause you and your passengers
serious injury or death in an accident. To
4
reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
always make sure the head restraints are
installed and properly positioned when
the seat is occupied.
 Never place a cushion or similar device on
the seatback. This can adversely affect Third seats (7 persons)
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
Second or third seats (7 persons)
To adjust height To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,

pull up the head restraint to the locked posi-
tion.
Front seats
To raise the head restraint, move it upward.
Adjust the head restraint height so that the To lower the restraint, move it downward
centre of the head restraint is as close as pos- while pushing the height adjusting knob (A)
sible to ear level to reduce the chances of in the direction of the arrow. After adjust-
injury in the event of collision. Any person ment, push the head restraint downward and
too tall for the head restraint to reach their make sure that it is locked.
seated ear level, should adjust the restraint as
high as possible.
To raise the head restraint, move it upward.
To lower the restraint, move it downward
while pressing the height adjusting knob (A)

Head restraints
WARNING To install
 When a person sits in the second or the
third seats (7 persons), pull up the head Confirm that the head restraint is facing the
restraint to a height at which it locks in
correct direction, and then insert it into the
position. Be sure to make this adjustment
seatback while pressing the height adjusting
before starting to drive. Serious injuries
4 could otherwise be suffered in the result of knob (A) in the direction indicated by the
an impact. arrow.
The head restraint stalk with the adjustment
Second seats notches (B) must be installed in the hole with
the adjusting knob (A).
CAUTION
 The shape and size of the head restraint dif-
fers according to the seat. Always use the
correct head restraint provided for the seat
and do not install the head restraint in the
wrong direction.
Third seats
(7 persons)
CAUTION
 Confirm that the height adjusting knob (A) is
correctly adjusted as shown in the illustra-
tion, and also lift the head restraints to
ensure that they do not come out of the seat-
To remove back.
Lift the head restraint with the height adjust-

ing knob (A) pressed in.

Making a luggage area
CAUTION
 When folding or storing the seat, be sure not
to catch your hand or leg.
NOTE 4
 It is possible to folding the seat indepen-
dently on each side.
Folding the second seats

E00403801203
5. Lift the whole seat forward.
E00403401472 To fold
To create luggage space, you can fold the sec-
1. Adjust the angle of the front seatbacks in
ond and/or the third seats.
the upright position and move the front
seat forward. (Refer to “Front seats” on
WARNING page 4-4.)
 When driving the vehicle, do not allow 2. Store the seat belt buckles in the storage
anyone to sit on the third seat if the second pockets of the second seats.
seat is folded. The second seat could tip Refer to “Second and third (7 persons)
rearward in the event of hard braking, a seat belt storage” on page 4-18.
collision or sudden starts resulting in seri- 6. Remove the retaining band (B) in the
3. Lower the head restraints of the second
ous injuries.
seat to the lowest position. original position from the second seat.
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.
4. Pull up the lever (A), then tilt the seatback
CAUTION forward.
 Do not stack luggage above the seatback
height. Secure the luggage firmly.
Serious accidents could result due to unre-
strained objects entering the passenger com-
partment during sudden braking.

CAUTION
 Do not allow any person to sit on the folded
seat, and do not place luggage on it. The
seat’s mounting fittings could bend under the
weight, making it impossible for the seat to
be retained on the vehicle.
4
To return
1. Remove the retaining band while support-
7. Securely retain the second seat by hooking the seat by hand. Store the retaining 2. Push the seat until you hear a “click” and
ing the retaining bands onto the head band in the original position then gently the seat locks securely.
restraint of the front seat and adjusting the lower the seat.
length of the retaining band.
3. Raise the seatback until it locks securely

into place.
CAUTION Push lightly on the seatback to confirm
WARNING  When returning the second seat while there
that it has actually been secured.
 Be sure to securely retain the folded seat are occupants in the third seat, be careful not
using the retaining bands. Unless retained, to trap the feet of the third seat occupants
the seat may tip, causing a serious acci- with the second seat.
dent.


Push lightly on the seatback to confirm
4. Pull the seatback lock release band (B),

then tilt the seatback forward until you
Folding the third seatbacks for- hear a “click”. 2. Gently lower the seat cushion, then push
ward (7 persons) the seat cushion until you hear a “click”
E00403601100
and the seat locks securely.
To fold
1. Lower the head restraints of the third seat
to the lowest position. (Refer to “Head
restraints” on page 4-7.)
2. Store the seat belt buckles in the storage
pockets of the third seats.
Refer to “Second and third (7 persons)
seat belt storage” on page 4-18.
3. Pull the lock release band (A), then lift the
seat cushion forward. To return
then raise the seatback until it locks
securely into place.

Folding the third seats (7 per-

sons)
E00403901116
To fold
4
1. Fold the second seats. (Refer to “Folding
the second seats” on page 4-9.)
2. Lower the head restraints of the third seat
to the lowest position. (Refer to “Head
restraints” on page 4-7.)
3. Store the seat belt buckles in the storage
then tilt the seatback forward until you To return
pockets of the third seats.
hear a “click”.
Refer to “Second and third (7 persons)
1. Fasten the cover to the seatback with the
seat belt storage” on page 4-18.
band (E).
4. Pull the lock release band (A), then lift the
seat cushion forward.
7. Pull up the cover (D) from the rear direc-

tion.
then raise the seatback until it locks
5. Raise the stand (C), and then gently lower
securely into place.
the seat cushion.
Push lightly on the seatback to confirm

Making a flat seat
CAUTION
 To ensure the seats are locked securely,
attempt to move them back and forth.
 Do not jump on, or impact the seatbacks
heavily.
 To raise the seatback, put a hand on the seat-
back and raise slowly. Never have a child do
4
this operation, or an unexpected accident
may result.
1. Remove the head restraints from the front

seats, and raise the armrest.
3. Lift the seat cushion backward. Fold the
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7,
stand (C) and then gently lower the seat
cushion.
Making a flat seat “Armrest” on page 4-5.
E00404302127
By removing the head restraints and fully

reclining the seatbacks of the seats, one large
flat seat is achieved.
WARNING
 Never drive with passengers on the flat
seat. This is highly dangerous.
CAUTION
4. Push the seat cushion until you hear a  To make a flat seat, stop the vehicle in a safe NOTE
“click” and the seat locks securely. place.  If your vehicle is equipped with the cargo
 Make sure the seat is adjusted by an adult or area cover, remove it.
with adult supervision for correct and safe Refer to “Cargo area cover (5 persons)” on
operation. page 7-95.
 Do not walk around on top of the seats after
they have been laid flat.

Seat belts
2. Slide the front seats fully forward, then tip The front seat belts have a pre-tensioner sys-
their seatbacks backward.
CAUTION tem. These belts are used the same way as a
 Since the gap is made between the seatbacks
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-4. conventional seat belt.
and the seat cushion, do not recline the front
Refer to “Seat belt pre-tensioner system and
seatbacks backward beyond necessity.
Doing so could wrinkle the front or second force limiter system” on page 4-19.
seats and damage them.
4 WARNING
4. Store the front head restraints between the  Seat belts should always be worn by every
front seats. adult who drives or rides in this vehicle,
The flat seat configuration is now com- and by all children who are large enough
to wear seat belts properly.
plete.
Other children should always use proper
Reverse the above procedures when
child restraint systems.
returning the seat to the normal position.
 Always place the shoulder belt over your
3. Recline the second seatbacks backward. shoulder and across your chest. Never put
it behind you or under your arm.
Refer to “Second seats” on page 4-5.
 One seat belt should be used by only one
person. Doing otherwise can be danger-
ous.
 The seat belt will provide its wearer with
maximum protection if the recliner seat-
back is placed in fully upright position.
When the seatback is reclined, there is
greater risk that the passenger will slide
under the belt, especially in a forward
impact accident, and may be injured by
the belt or by striking the instrument
panel or seatbacks.
Seat belts  Remove any twists when using the belt.
E00404802050
To protect you and your passengers in the

event of an accident, it is the most important
that the seat belts be worn correctly while you
drive.

Seat belts
3. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness as
WARNING To fasten
desired.
 No modifications or additions should be
made by the user which will either prevent 1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding
the seat belt adjusting devices from oper- the latch plate. NOTE
ating to remove slack, or prevent the seat  For some models, the seat belts in the second
belt assembly from being adjusted to NOTE
remove slack.  When the seat belts cannot be pulled out in a
outside seating positions are equipped with
an automatic locking retractor (ALR) mecha-
4
 Never hold a child in your arms or on locked condition, pull the belts once force- nism.
your lap when riding in this vehicle, even fully and then return them. After that, pull If you pull the seat belt fully out of the
if you are wearing your seat belt. To do so the belts out slowly once again. retractor, the retractor will switch to its ALR
risks severe or fatal injury to your child in child restraint installation mode and lock,
a collision or sudden stop. thus preventing further movement.
 Always adjust the seat belt to a snug fit. 2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle until If this happens, you should switch the retrac-
 Always wear the lap portion of the belt a “click” is heard. tor back to its emergency locking retractor
over your hips. (ELR) mode by taking off the seat belt and
fully rewinding it. You should then wear the
seat belt again. (Refer to “Installing a child
3-point type seat belt (with restraint system to a 3-point type seat belt
emergency locking mechanism) (with emergency/automatic locking mecha-
E00404902790
nism)” on page 4-28.)
This type of belt requires no length adjust-

ment. Once worn, the belt adjusts itself to the
movement of wearer, but in the event of a
To unfasten
sudden or strong shock, the belt automatically
locks to hold the wearer’s body. Hold the latch plate and press the button on
the buckle.
WARNING
NOTE  Never wear the lap portion of the belt
 You can check if the belt locks by pulling it across your abdomen. During accidents it
forward quickly. can press sharply against abdomen and
increase the risk of injury.
 The seat belts must not be twisted when
worn.

Seat belts
Seat belt reminder* WARNING

E00409802332  Do not install any accessory or sticker that
makes the lamp difficult to see.
Type 1
4 NOTE
 If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas-
tened, the warning lamp and the tone will
issue further warnings each time the vehicle
starts moving from a stop.
 For the front passenger seat, the warning
Type 2
function works only while a person is sitting
NOTE on the seat.
 As the belt retracts automatically, keep the  When luggage is placed on the front passen-
latch plate held while retracting so that the ger seat, a sensor in the seat cushion may,
belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could depending on the weight and position of the
damage the vehicle. luggage, cause the warning tone to sound
 If the seat belt (A) or ring (B) becomes dirty, and the warning lamp to come on.
the belt may not retract smoothly. If the seat If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
belt and ring are dirty, clean them with a position or the operation mode is put in ON
mild soap or detergent solution. while the driver’s and/or the front passenger’s Adjustable seat belt anchor
(if so equipped) seat belt is not fastened, the
warning lamp comes on and the tone sounds
(front seats)
E00405001704
for approximately 6 seconds to remind the
driver and/or the front passenger (if so The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted.
equipped) to fasten the seat belt. To move the anchor, pull the lock knob (A)
If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still and slide the anchor to the desired position.
unfastened, the warning lamp will blink and Release the lock knob to lock the anchor into
the tone will sound intermittently until the position.
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, “FAS-
TEN SEAT BELT” is displayed on the infor-
mation screen in the multi information
display (Type 1 only).

Seat belts
1- Tighten
WARNING 2- Loosen WARNING
 When adjusting the seat belt anchor, set it  Be sure to securely connect the both latch
at a position that is sufficiently high so While holding the latch plate, insert the latch plate (A and B). Failing to do so could sig-
that the belt will make full contact with plate into the buckle until a “click” is heard. nificantly reduce the amount of protection
your shoulder but will not touch your and cause serious injures in a collision or a
neck. sudden stop.
Second-centre 3-point type seat
belt*
Lap belts* E00412701064 To fasten
E00405101200 The second-centre 3-point type seat belt must 1. Pull out the latch plate (B) and then pull
be worn correctly as illustrated. out the small latch plate (A) by tilting it as
The lap belts should be adjusted by holding
the belt and latch plate at right angles to each shown in the illustration.
other, and then pulling the belt as shown in
the illustration to a snug fit around the occu-
pant.

Seat belts
5. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness as
desired.
To unfasten
1. Hold the latch plate and press the button
4 on the buckle.
NOTE
 As the belt retracts automatically, keep the
latch plate held while retracting so that the
belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could 3. Store the seat belt buckle in the storage
NOTE damage the vehicle and hit passengers. pocket.
 Pulling out the latch plate by force may dam-  To release the buckle (C), press the button (Refer to next column.)
age the headliner. (E) with a narrow-tipped object (latch plate
or mechanical key etc.).
2. Pull out the buckle (C) from the seat cush- Second and third (7 persons)
ion. seat belt storage
3. Pull the seat belt and insert the small latch E00405401085
plate (A) into the buckle (C).

4. Insert the latch plate (B) into the buckle Seat belt plate storage
(D).
Outboard seating position
After passing the belt through the rear notch

(A), insert the plate into the front notch (B).
2. After the seat belt is retracted completely,

insert the small latch plate (A) into holder
(F), and then insert the latch plate (B) into
the holder (F).

Pregnant women restraint
Centre seating position (3-point type seat Pregnant women restraint

belt)* E00405600064
Refer to “Second-centre 3-point type seat WARNING

belt” on page 4-17.  Seat belts work for everyone, including
pregnant women. Pregnant women should 4
Seat belt buckle storage use the available seat belts. This will
reduce the likelihood of injury to both the
woman and the unborn child. The lap belt
Store the seat belt buckles in the storage should be worn across the thighs and as
pockets. snug against the hips as possible, but not
across the waist. Consult your doctor if
Centre seating position (lap belt)* Second seat you have any additional questions or con-
cerns.
Coil the belt around the seat belt plate (A),
and then store the seat belt in the storage
pocket. Seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
tem and force limiter system
Third seat (7 persons) E00405701538
The driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat

each have a seat belt equipped with a pre-ten-
sioner system and force limiter system.
Pre-tensioner system
E00405802288
*- Vehicles with second-centre 3-point
type seat belt When the ignition switch or the operation
mode is under the following conditions, if
there is a frontal impact or a side impact
(vehicles equipped with SRS side airbags and
SRS curtain airbags) severe enough to injure
the driver and/or front passenger, the pre-ten-

Child restraint
sioner system will retract their respective seat always be used according to the size of the
belts instantaneously, thus maximizing the
NOTE child. This is required by law in most coun-
 The pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated
seat belt’s effectiveness. tries.
if the vehicle suffers a severe impact, even if
The regulations concerning driving with chil-
[Except for vehicles equipped with the key- the seat belts are not worn.
dren in the front seat may differ from country
less operation system]  The pre-tensioner seat belts are designed to
to country. You are advised to comply with
4 The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
work only once. After the pre-tensioner seat
belts have been activated, they must be the relevant regulations.
“START” position. replaced by an authorised MITSUBISHI
[Vehicles equipped with the keyless operation
MOTORS dealer. WARNING
system]  When possible, put children in the rear
The operation mode is in ON. seat. Accident statistics indicate that chil-
SRS warning dren of all sizes and ages are safer when
E00405900360 properly restrained in the rear seat rather
WARNING than in the front seat.
The same warning lamp/display is shared by
 To obtain the best results from your pre-  Holding a child in your arms is no substi-
tensioner seat belt, make sure you have the SRS airbags and the pre-tensioner seat
tute for a restraint system. Failure to use a
adjusted your seat correctly and wear belts. proper restraint system can result in
your seat belt properly. Refer to “SRS warning lamp/display” on severe or fatal injury to your child.
page 4-41 .  Each child restraint device or fixing is to
be used only by one child.
CAUTION Force limiter system  When attaching a child restraint system to
 Installation of audio equipment or repairs in the rear seat, prevent the front seatbacks
E00406001248
the vicinity of the pre-tensioner seat belts or from touching the child restraint system.
floor console must be performed by an In the event of a collision, each force limiter Otherwise, the child could be seriously
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. system will effectively absorb the load injured in the event of hard braking or a
It is important to do so because the work applied to the seat belt so as to minimize the collision.
could affect the pre-tensioner systems. impact to the passenger.
 If you need to scrap the vehicle, please con-
sult an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer. It is important to do so because unex- Child restraint
pected activation of the pre-tensioner seat E00406403608
belts could cause injuries. When transporting children in your vehicle,

some type of child restraint system should

Child restraint
Caution for installing the child WARNING Infants and small children
restraint on vehicle with front A REARWARD FACING CHILD E00406602300
RESTRAINT must NOT be used in the When transporting infants and small children
passenger airbag front passenger seat as it places an infant
in your vehicle, follow the instruction given
too close to the passenger airbag. The
below.
The label shown here is attached on vehicles force of an inflating airbag could kill or
with front passenger airbag. cause serious injuries to the child. 4
Front passenger’s
airbag ON
Instruction:
WARNING WARNING
 Extreme Hazard! A FORWARD FACING CHILD  For small infants, an infant carrier should
NEVER use a rearward facing child RESTRAINT should be used in the rear be used. For small children whose height
restraint on a seat protected by an seat whenever possible; if used in the front when seated allows the shoulder belt to lie
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH seat, adjust the seat to the most rearward in contact with the face or the throat, a
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can position and turn off the front passenger’s child seat should be used.
occur. airbag ON-OFF switch (if so equipped).  The child restraint system should be
appropriate for your child’s weight and
NOTE height and properly fit the vehicle. For a
higher degree of safety: THE CHILD
 The labels may be in different positions
depending on the vehicle model.
RESTRAINT SYSTEM SHOULD BE
INSTALLED IN THE REAR SEAT.

Child restraint
 Before purchasing a child restraint sys-
tem, try installing it in the rear seat to
NOTE
 Depending on the seating position in the
make sure there is a good fit. Because of
vehicle and the child restraint system that
the location of the seat belt buckles and
you have, the child restraint can be attached
the shape of the seat cushion, it may be using one of the following two ways:
difficult to securely install some manufac-
4 turer’s child restraint systems.
• Using the lower anchorage in the second
seat ONLY if the child restraint has ISOFIX
If the child restraint system can be pulled mountings (See page 4-26).
forward or to either side easily on the seat • Using the seat belt (See page 4-29).
cushion after the seat belt has been tight-
ened, choose another manufacturer’s child
restraint system. Older children
E00406701391
WARNING Children who have outgrown the child

 When installing a child restraint system, restraint system should be seated in the rear
refer to the instructions provided by the seat and wear combination lap shoulder belt.
manufacturer of the restraint system. The lap portion of the belt should be snug and
Failure to do so can result in severe or positioned low on the abdomen so that it is
fatal injury to your child.
below the top of the hip-bone. Otherwise, the
 After installation, push and pull the child
belt could intrude into the child’s abdomen
restraint system back and forth, and side
to side, to see that it is positively secured.
during an accident and cause injury.
If the child restraint system is not installed
securely, it may cause injury to the child
or other occupants in the case of accident
or sudden stops.
 When the child restraint system is not in
use, keep your child restraint system
secured with the seat belt or remove it
from the vehicle in order to prevent it
from being thrown around inside the vehi-
cle during an accident.

Child restraint
Suitability for various ISOFIX positions

E00411402003
Vehicle ISOFIX positions

Mass Group Size class Fixture
Second Outboard
carrycot F ISO/L1 X 4
G ISO/L2 X
0 -Up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X
0+ -Up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 X
D ISO/R2 X
C ISO/R3 X
I -9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 X
C ISO/R3 X
B ISO/F2 IUF
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
A ISO/F3 IUF
II & III -15 to 36 kg X
CAUTION
 When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat.
 Do not sit in the middle seating position of the second seat when installing a child restraint system to the left side of the second seat.

Child restraint
Key of characters to be inserted in the above table:

 IUF- Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
 X- ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group.
4 Suitability for various seating positions

E00406802777
Seating Position
Front Passenger
Mass Group Vehicles with front passenger’s airbag ON- Except for vehicles Second Second Third
OFF switch with front passen- Outboard Centre (7 persons)
ger’s airbag ON-
Activated Airbag Deactivated Airbag* OFF switch
0 -Up to 10 kg X U X U X U
0+ -Up to 13 kg X U X U X U
I -9 to 18 kg X U UF U X U
II & III -15 to 36 kg X U UF U X U
*: With front passenger’s airbag deactivated by means of front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
CAUTION
 When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat.
 When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger power seat, adjust the seat height to the highest position.
 When installing “universal” category child restraint system on the outboard seating position of the second seat, adjust the second seatback angle to 1 step
rearward from the most upright position.
 Do not sit in the middle seating position of the second seat when installing a child restraint system to the left side of the second seat.

Child restraint
Key of characters to be inserted in the above table:

 U- Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
 UF- Suitable for forward facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
 X- Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
4

Child restraint
securing a child restraint system tether strap
Installing a child restraint sys- to each of the 2 rear seating positions in your
tem to the lower anchorage vehicle.
(ISOFIX child restraint mount-
ings) and tether anchorage*
4 E00408902176
Lower anchorage location
Your vehicle’s rear seat is fitted with lower

anchorages for attaching a child restraint sys-
tem with ISOFIX mountings.
CAUTION
 The anchorages are only applicable for child
restraints fitted in the second seat with the
head restraints removed.
WARNING
 Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by Child restraint system with ISO-
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
FIX mountings
adult seatbelts, harnesses or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle. The child restraint system is designed only
for seats that incorporate lower anchorages.
Retain the child restraint system using the
Type 2 lower anchorages.
It is not necessary to retain the child restraint
There are 2 child restraint anchorage points
system using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Tether anchorage locations located on the headliner behind the second
seats.
Type 1
There are 2 attachment points located on the

back of the second seat cushion. These are for
Child restraint
Type 1
A: Child restraint system connectors

If your child restraint system with a tether
strap, perform the step 4 through 6.
To install If your child restraint system without a tether
strap, perform the step 6.
1. Remove any foreign material in or around Type 2
the connectors and ensure the vehicle seat 4. Open the cover from the tether anchor
belt is in its normal storage position. installation point with your hand as illus-
2. Remove the head restraint from the loca- trated (Type 2 only).
tion in which you wish to install a child 5. Latch the tether strap hook (C) of the
restraint system. child restraint system to the tether anchor-
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7. age bar (D)/the tether anchorage fitting
3. Push the child restraint system’s connec- (E) and tighten the top tether strap hook
tors (A) into the lower anchorages (B) in so it is securely fastened.
accordance with the instructions provided
by the child restraint system’s manufac-
turer.

Child restraint
3. To activate the ALR mode, slowly pull the
NOTE shoulder part of the belt all the way out
 If it is difficult to latch the tether strap hook,
until it stops, then let the belt feed back
turn the hook sideways.
into the retractor.
6. Push and pull the child restraint system in

4 all directions to be sure it is secured.
To remove
Remove the child restraint system in accord-

ance with the instructions provided by the
child restraint system’s manufacturer. To install
1. Put a child restraint system on the seat in
Installing a child restraint sys- which you wish to install it, and remove 4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If
tem to a 3-point type seat belt the head restraint from the seat. the belt is locked, you will not be able to
(with emergency/automatic Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7. pull it out. If you can pull the belt out, it is
2. Route the belt through the child restraint not locked and you will need to repeat
locking mechanism)*
according to the child restraint system these steps.
E00407002167
manufacturer’s instructions, then insert 5. After confirming that the belt is locked,
The 3-point type seat belts at the below illus- the latch plate into the buckle. grab the shoulder part of the belt near the
trated seating position can be converted from buckle and pull up to remove any slack
normal emergency locking retractor (ELR) from the lap part of the belt.
mode to automatic locking retractor (ALR)
mode. It should be so converted, when
installing a child restraint system to prevent
the child restraint system from moving in
case of an accident.

Child restraint
To remove CAUTION
 Do not sit in the left side of the second seat
1. Remove the plate from the buckle, then when installing a child restraint system to the
remove the seat belt from the child middle seating position of the second seat.
restraint system.
2. Fully rewind the seat belt to deactivate the
ALR mode. 4
Installation:
Installing a child restraint sys- 1. Put a child restraint system on the seat in
which you wish to install it, and remove
tem to a 3-point type seat belt the head restraint from the seat.
6. Before putting the child in the restraint, (with emergency locking mech- Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.
push and pull the restraint in all directions anism) or a lap belt* 2. Route the belt through the child restraint
to be sure it is secure. Do this before each according to the child restraint system
E00407101901
use. If the child restraint system is not manufacturer’s instructions, then insert
firmly secure, repeat steps 2 through 5. 5 persons the latch plate into the buckle.
3. Remove all slack of a lap belt by pulling
WARNING the webbing through the belt’s adjustment
feature.
 Before putting the child in the restraint,
be absolutely sure to make the conversion
3-point type seat belt requires no length
of the retractor from the ELR mode to the adjustment, remove all slack by using the
ALR mode. By doing so, the child locking clip.
restraint system is always tightly secured 7 persons 4. Before putting the child in the restraint,
to the seat by the automatic lock. If the push and pull the restraint in all directions
conversion to ALR is not made, the child to be sure it is secure. Do this before each
restraint system could move forward in use.
the event of sudden braking or an acci-
dent, seriously injuring the child or other
occupants. Use the ALR mode only for the To remove
installation of a child restraint.
Remove the plate from the buckle, then
remove the seat belt from the child restraint
system.
Seat belt inspection
WARNING WARNING WARNING

 For some type of child restraint, the lock-  All seat belt assemblies including retrac-  Do not insert any foreign objects (pieces of
ing clip (A) should be used to help avoid tors and attaching hardware should be plastic, paper clips, buttons, etc.) in the
personal injury during a collision or sud- inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI buckle or retractor mechanism. In addi-
den manoeuvre. MOTORS dealer after any collision. We tion, do not modify, remove, or install the
It must be fitted and used in accordance recommend that seat belt assemblies in seat belt. Otherwise, the seat belt may not
4 with the child restraint manufacturer’s use during a collision be replaced unless be able to provide adequate protection in a
instructions. the collision was minor and the belts show collision or other situation.
The locking clip must be removed when no damage and continue to operate prop-
the child restraint is removed. erly.
 Do not attempt to repair or replace any
part of the seat belt assemblies; this work
should be done by an authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. Failure
to have an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer perform the work could
reduce the effectiveness of the belts and
could result in serious injury in the event  A dirty belt should be cleaned with neu-
of a collision. tral detergent in warm water. After rins-
 Once the pre-tensioner has activated, it ing in water, let it dry in the shade. Do not
cannot be re-used. attempt to bleach or re-dye the belts
It must be replaced together with the because this affects their characteristics.
retractor.
Supplemental restraint sys-

Seat belt inspection tem (SRS)-airbag
E00406301733 E00407203502
Check the belts for cuts, worn or frayed web- The information for SRS airbags includes
bing and for cracked or deformed metallic important information concerning the driver’s
parts. Replace the belt assembly if defective. and front passenger’s airbags, the driver’s
knee airbag, the side airbags and the curtain
airbags.

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-airbag

The SRS driver’s and front passenger’s air- occupants, including the passengers as well
5 persons
bags are designed to supplement the primary as the driver, must wear their seat belts.
protection of the driver and front passenger
side seat belt systems by providing those
occupants with protection against head and
How the supplemental restraint
chest injuries in certain moderate-to-severe system works
frontal collisions. E00407303242 4
The SRS includes the following components:
The SRS driver’s knee airbag (if so equipped)
is designed to supplement the primary protec-
tion of the driver’s seat belt system. It can
reduce the forward movement of the driver’s
lower legs and provide increased overall body 7 persons
protection in certain moderate-to-severe fron-
tal collisions.
The SRS side airbags (if so equipped) are

designed to supplement properly worn seat
belts and provide the driver and front passen-
ger with protection against chest injuries in
certain moderate-to-severe side impact colli- 1- Airbag module (Driver)
sions. 2- Front passenger’s airbag indicator*
3- Airbag module (Passenger)
6- Side airbag modules*
The SRS curtain airbags (if so equipped) are 4- Driver’s knee airbag module*
7- Curtain airbag modules*
designed to supplement properly worn seat 5- Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
belts and provide the driver and passenger switch*
with protection against head injuries in cer- Only when the ignition switch or the opera-
tain moderate-to-severe side impact colli- tion mode is under the following conditions,
sions. the airbags will operate.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the key-
The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat less operation system]
belts. To ensure the maximum protection dur- The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
ing all types of collisions and accidents, all “START” position.


[Vehicles equipped with the keyless operation
system]
WARNING
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-
The operation mode is in ON.
ERLY SEATED.
The airbags deployment produces a sudden,
A driver or front passenger too close to
loud noise, and releases some smoke and the steering wheel or instrument panel
powder, but these conditions are not injuri- during airbag deployment can be killed or
4 ous, and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle. seriously injured.
People with respiratory problems may feel Airbags inflate very fast, and with great
some temporary irritation from chemicals force.
used to produce the deployment; open the If the driver and front passenger are not
windows after airbag deployment, if safe to properly seated and restrained, the air-
do so. bags may not protect you properly, and
The airbags deflate very rapidly after deploy- could cause serious or fatal injuries when WARNING
they inflate.  Infants and small children should never
ment, so there is little danger of obscured
 Do not sit on the edge of the seat, or sit be unrestrained, stand up against the
vision.
with your lower legs too close to the instrument panel or held in your arms or
instrument panel, or lean head or chest on your lap. They could be seriously
CAUTION close to the steering wheel or instrument injured or killed in a collision, including
 Airbags inflate at an extremely rapid speed. panel. Do not put feet or legs on or against when the airbag inflates. They should be
In certain situations, contact with inflating the instrument panel. properly seated in the rear seat in an
airbags can result in abrasions, bruises, light  Place all infants and small children in the appropriate child restraint system. See the
cuts, and the like. rear seat and properly restrained using an “Child restraint” section of this owner’s
appropriate child restraint system. manual.
The rear seat is the safest for infants and
children.


that cannot be fitted to any seat other than the
front passenger seat, be sure to turn OFF the
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch
before using it.
(Refer to “To turn an airbag off” on page
4-34)
Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is 4
located as shown in the illustration.
WARNING WARNING
 Older children should be seated in the  Extreme Hazard!
rear seat, properly wearing the seat belt, NEVER use a rearward facing child
with an appropriate booster seat if restraint on a seat protected by an
needed. ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.
Caution for installing the child
restraint on vehicle with front NOTE
passenger’s airbag  The labels may be in different positions Front passenger’s airbag indi-
E00408802191 depending on the vehicle model. cator*
The label shown here is attached on vehicles E00410201469
with front passenger’s airbag.
Front passenger’s airbag ON- The front passenger’s airbag indicator is
OFF switch* Not UK Spec located in the instrument panel.
E00410101497
The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch

can be used to disable the front passenger’s
airbag. If you have a child restraint system

To turn an airbag off* WARNING

E00412301217 • If the OFF indicator does not come on
when the front passenger’s airbag ON-
WARNING OFF switch is turned OFF, do not fit a
child restraint system to the front pas-
 To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury:
senger seat. We recommend you to have
4 • Always turn the ignition switch to the
the system inspected by an authorised
“LOCK” position or put the operation
mode in OFF, before operating the front
• If the OFF indicator remains on when
passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch. Fail-
the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
ure to do so could adversely affect the
switch is turned ON, do not allow anyone
airbag performance.
to sit on the front passenger seat. We rec-
The indicator normally comes on when the • Wait at least 60 seconds to operate the
ommend you to have the system
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch
inspected by an authorised
or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes after turning the ignition switch to the
off a few seconds later. “LOCK” position or putting the opera-
When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF tion mode in OFF. To turn an airbag off, follow these steps:
switch is turned OFF, the OFF indicator will The SRS airbag system is designed to
stay on to show that the front passenger’s air-
retain enough voltage to deploy the air- 1. Insert the key into the front passenger’s
bag. airbag ON-OFF switch, and turn it to the
bag is not operational. When the front passen-
• Always remove the key from the front “OFF” position.
ger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is turned ON, passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch after
the OFF indicator goes off, and the ON indi- 2. Remove the key from the front passen-
operating that switch. Failure to do so ger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
cator comes on for approximately 1 minute to could lead to improper position of the
show that the front passenger’s airbag is oper- 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
ational. switch.
tion or put the operation mode in ON. The
• Do not turn OFF the front passenger’s
front passenger’s airbag OFF indicator
airbag ON-OFF switch except when a lamp will stay on.
WARNING child restraint system is fitted to the
 Do not fit any accessory that makes the front passenger seat.
indicator impossible to see, and do not
cover the indicator with a sticker. You
would not be able to verify the status of
the passenger airbag system.

Deployment of front airbags

and driver’s knee airbag*
E00407502856
The front airbags and driver’s 4

knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO
DEPLOY when…
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

The front passenger’s airbag is now deacti- designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
vated and will not deploy until switched on moderate to severe frontal impact. The typi-
again.
Driver’s knee airbag system* cal condition is shown in the illustration.
E00412401191
Driver’s and front passenger’s The driver’s knee airbag is located under the
steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
airbag system designed to deploy at the same time as the
E00407401933
driver’s front airbag.
The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
the instrument panel above the glove box.
The driver’s airbag and the front passenger’s
airbag are designed to inflate at the same time
even if the passenger seat is not occupied. 1- Head-on collision with a solid wall at
speed of approximately 16 mph or
higher
2- Moderate to severe frontal impact
within the shaded area between the
arrows


The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
The front airbags and driver’s
will deploy if the severity of impact is above airbag do not protect the occupant in all types
the designed threshold level, comparable to knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY of frontal collisions, be sure to always prop-
an approximately 16 mph collision when when… erly wear your seat belts.
impacting straight into a solid wall that does
not move or deform. If the severity of the With certain types of frontal collisions, the The front airbags and driver’s
4 impact is below the above threshold level, the vehicle’s body structure is designed to absorb
front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may
knee airbag ARE NOT
the shock to help protect the occupants from
not deploy. However, this threshold speed harm. (The vehicle body’s front area may DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when…
will be considerably higher if the vehicle deform significantly as it absorbs the impact.)
strikes an object that absorbs the impact by Under such circumstances, the front airbags The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are
either deforming or moving (for example, and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy irre- not designed to deploy in conditions where
another stationary vehicle, pole or a guard spective of the deformation and damage to they cannot typically provide protection to
rail). the vehicle body. the occupant.
Because frontal collisions can easily move Examples of some typical conditions are Such conditions are shown in the illustration.
you out of position, it is important to always shown in the illustration.
properly wear your seat belts. Your seat belts
will help keep you a safe distance from the
steering wheel and instrument panel during
the initial stages of airbag deployment. The
initial stage of airbag inflation is the most
forceful, and can possibly cause serious or
fatal injuries. Moreover, the seat belts in your
vehicle are your primary means of protection
in a collision. The SRS airbags are designed
to provide additional protection. Therefore,
for your safety and the safety of all occu- 1- Rear end collisions
pants, be sure to always properly wear your 1- When colliding with a utility pole, tree 2- Side collisions
seat belts. or other narrow object. 3- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
2- Vehicle slides under the rear body of a
truck Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
3- Oblique frontal impacts airbag do not protect the occupant in all types

of collisions, be sure to always properly wear Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
your seat belts. airbag may deploy in certain types of unex-
pected impacts as shown in the illustration
The front airbags and driver’s that can easily move you out of position, it is
important to always properly wear your seat
knee airbag MAY DEPLOY belts. Your seat belts will help keep you a safe
when… distance from the steering wheel and instru- 4
ment panel during the initial stages of airbag
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag deployment. The initial stage of airbag infla-
may deploy if the bottom of the vehicle suf- tion is the most forceful and can possibly
fers a moderate to severe impact (undercar- cause serious or fatal injuries if you contact it
riage damage). at this stage.
Examples of some typical conditions are WARNING
shown in the illustration.  Do not attach accessories to, or put them
WARNING in front of, the windscreen. These objects
 Do not attach anything to the steering could restrict the airbag inflation, or
wheel’s padded cover, such as badges or strike and injure an occupant if the air-
accessories. It might strike and injure an bags inflate.
occupant if the airbag inflates.  Do not attach additional keys or accesso-
 Do not set anything on, or attach anything ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the
to, the instrument panel above the glove ignition key. Such objects could prevent
box. It might strike and injure an occu- the driver’s knee airbag from inflating
pant if the airbag inflates. normally or could be propelled to cause
serious injury if the airbag inflates.
 Do not attach accessories to the lower por-
tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.
Such objects could prevent the driver’s
1- Collision with an elevated
knee airbag from inflating normally or
median/island or kerb could be propelled to cause serious injury
2- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pot- if the airbag inflates.
hole
3- Vehicle drives down a steep slope and
hits the ground

Side airbag system*

E00407601821
The side airbags (A) are contained in the

driver and front passenger seatbacks.
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on
4 the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even
with no passenger in the front seat.
WARNING
 Do not put packages, pets or other objects Curtain airbag system*
between the airbags and the driver or E00409101875
front passenger. It could affect airbag per-
formance, or could cause injury when the The curtain airbags are contained in the front
airbag inflates. pillars and roof side rail. The curtain airbag is
 Right after the airbag inflation, several designed to inflate only on the side of the
airbag system components will be hot. Do vehicle that is impacted, even with no passen-
not touch these components. There is a ger in the front seat or rear seat.
danger of being burnt. The label shown here is attached to the seat-
 The airbag system is designed to work backs with a side airbag.
only once. Once the airbags have 5 persons
deployed, they will not work again. They
must promptly be replaced and we recom-
mend you to have the entire airbag system
inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.


vehicle body. Examples of some typical con-
7 persons
ditions are shown in the illustration.
The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-

mary means of protection in a collision. The
Deployment of side airbags and SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are 1- Side impacts in an area away from the
curtain airbags designed to provide additional protection. passenger compartment
E00407702630
Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all 2- Motorcycle or other similar small vehi-
occupants, be sure to always properly wear cle collides with the side of vehicle
The side airbags and curtain air- your seat belts. 3- Collision with a utility pole, tree or
bags ARE DESIGNED TO other narrow object
DEPLOY when... The side airbags and curtain air-
bags MAY NOT DEPLOY when...
The side airbags and curtain airbags are
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a With certain types of side collisions, the vehi-
moderate to severe side impact to the middle cle’s body structure is designed to absorb the
of the passenger compartment. shock to help protect the occupants from
The typical condition is shown in the illustra- harm. (The vehicle body’s side area may
tion. deform significantly as it absorbs the impact.)
Under such circumstances, the side airbags
and curtain airbags may not deploy irrespec-
tive of the deformation and damage to the
4- Oblique side impacts


5- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof Because the side airbags and curtain airbags
do not protect the occupant in all types of col-
WARNING
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags  Do not allow any rear seat occupant to
lisions, be sure to always properly wear your
do not protect the occupant in all types of side hold onto the seatback of either front seat,
seat belts.
collisions, be sure to always properly wear in order to reduce risk of injury from the
deploying side airbag. Special care should
your seat belts.
4 WARNING be taken with children.
 The side airbags and curtain airbags are  Do not place any objects near or in front
The side airbags and curtain air- designed to supplement the driver and of the seatback of either front seat. They
bags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO passenger seat belts in certain side could interfere with proper side airbag
impacts. Seat belts should always be worn inflation, and also could cause injury if
DEPLOY when... thrown free by side airbag deployment.
properly, and the driver and passenger
should sit well back and upright without  Do not place stickers, labels or additional
The side airbags and curtain airbags are not leaning against the window or door. trim on the seatback of either front seat.
designed to deploy in conditions where they  The side airbag and curtain airbag inflate They could interfere with proper side air-
cannot usually provide protection to the occu- with great force. The driver and passenger bag inflation.
pant. Typical conditions are shown in the should not put their arms out the window,  Do not install seat covers on seats with
illustration. and should not lean against the door, in side airbags.
order to reduce risk of serious or possible Do not re-cover seats that have side air-
fatal injury from the deploying side airbag bags. This could interfere with proper side
and curtain airbag. airbag inflation.
 Do not attach a microphone (A) or any
other device or object around the part
where the curtain airbags (B) activate
such as on the windscreen, side door glass,
front and rear pillars and roof side or
assist grips. When the curtain airbags
inflate, the microphone or other device or
object will be hurled with great force or
the curtain airbags may not activate cor-
rectly, resulting in death or serious injury.
1- Head-on collisions
2- Rear end collisions

5 persons WARNING SRS warning lamp/display*

 Do not put a hanger or any heavy or E00407803090
pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
tain airbag was activated, any such item Type 1
could be propelled away with great force
and could prevent the curtain airbag from
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly 4
on the coat hook (without using a hanger).
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
objects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.
 Do not allow the child to lean against or Type 2
7 persons close to the front door even if the child is
seated in a child restraint system.
The child’s head should also not be leaned
against or be close to the area where the
side airbag and curtain airbag are located.
It is dangerous if the side airbag and cur-
tain airbag inflate.
There is a supplemental restraint system
Failure to follow all of these instructions
could lead to serious or fatal injury to the
(“SRS”) warning lamp on the instrument
child. panel. The system checks itself every time the
 We recommend work around and on the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
side airbags and curtain airbags system to or the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS
be done by an authorised MITSUBISHI warning lamp will come on for several sec-
MOTORS dealer. onds and then go out. This is normal and
means the system is working properly.
If there is a problem involving one or more of
the SRS components, the warning lamp will
come on and stay on. At the same time, the
warning display will appear on the informa-
tion screen in the multi information display
(Type 1 only).


The SRS warning lamp/display is shared by
the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner
SRS servicing NOTE
E00407902775  If your vehicle has to be scrapped, do this in
system.
line with local legislation and contact an
WARNING authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
WARNING  We recommend any maintenance per- to safely dismantle the airbag system.
4  If any of the following conditions occur,

there may be a problem with the SRS air-
formed on or near the components of the
SRS to be performed by an authorised
bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
they may not function properly in a colli- Improper work on the SRS components or
sion or may suddenly activate without a wiring could result in inadvertent deploy-
collision: ment of the airbags, or could render the
• Even when the ignition switch or the SRS inoperative; either situation could
operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn- result in serious injury.
ing lamp does not come on or it remains  Do not modify your steering wheel, seat
on. belt retractor or any other SRS compo-
• The SRS warning lamp and/or the warn- nents. For example, replacement of the
ing display comes on while driving. steering wheel, or modifications to the
The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten- front bumper or body structure can
sioners are designed to help reduce the adversely affect SRS performance and
risk of serious injury or death in certain lead to possible injury.
collisions. If either of the above conditions  If your vehicle has received any damage,
occurs, immediately have your vehicle we recommend you to have the SRS
checked by an authorised MITSUBISHI inspected to ensure it is in proper working
MOTORS dealer. order.
 On vehicles with the side airbag, do not
modify your front seats, centre pillar and
centre console.
It can adversely affect SRS performance
and lead to possible injury.
 If you found any tear, scratch, crack or
damage to the portion where the airbag is
stored, you should have the SRS inspected
by an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer.

Instruments and controls
Instruments ......................................................................................5-2
Multi information display - Type 1 ..................................................5-3
Multi information display - Type 2 ................................................5-18 5
Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information
screen display list (multi information display - Type 1) ............5-26
Indicator and warning lamps
(multi information display - Type 2) ..........................................5-50
Indicator lamps ..............................................................................5-51
Warning lamps ...............................................................................5-52
Information screen display (Vehicle equipped
with the multi information display - Type 1) ............................5-55
Combination headlamps and dipper switch ...................................5-57
Headlamp levelling ........................................................................5-61
Turn-signal lever ............................................................................5-62
Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................................5-63
Fog lamp switch .............................................................................5-63
Wiper and washer switch ...............................................................5-64
Rear window demister switch ........................................................5-69
Horn switch ....................................................................................5-70
Instruments
2- Multi information display (Type 1:
Instruments Color liquid crystal display type) →
Meter illumination control -
E00500102812
P.5-3 Type 1
Type 1 Information screen display list (Type 1) E00531301116
→ P.5-28 Each time you press the rheostat illumination

Multi information display (Type 2: button, there is a sound and the brightness of
Mono-color liquid crystal display type) the instruments changes.
→ P.5-18
5 3- Speedometer (mph + km/h)
4- Rheostat illumination button (Type 1)
→ P.5-2
5- Multi information display switch (Type
2) → P.5-19
Type 2
CAUTION
 When driving, watch the tachometer to make
sure that the engine speed indication does
not rise into the red zone (excessive engine
r/min). 1- Brightness level
2- Rheostat illumination button
NOTE
 You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
1- Tachometer tively for when the position lamps are illumi-
The tachometer indicates the engine nated and when they are not.
speed (r/min). The tachometer can help  If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic
you obtain more economical driving lamp control, when the lamp switch is in a
and also warns you of excessive engine position other than the “OFF” position, the
speeds (Red zone). meter illumination switches automatically to
the adjusted brightness, depending on the
brightness outside the vehicle.
5-2 Instruments and controls

Multi information display - Type 1

[When the ignition switch or the operation [When the ignition switch or the operation
NOTE mode is OFF] mode is ON]
 The brightness level of the instruments is
stored when the ignition switch is turned off
or the operation mode is put in OFF.
 If you press and hold the button for approxi-
mately 2 seconds or more when the position
lamps are illuminated, the brightness level
changes to the maximum level. Pressing and
holding the button for approximately 2 sec-
5
onds or more again returns the brightness
level to the previous level.
Multi information display -

Type 1 1- mark display  P.5-6
E00519902656
2-Information screen  P.5-4
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before Interrupt display screen  P.5-6
operating. 3-Door ajar warning display  P.5-7 1-Off Road mode indicator display*
The following information is included on the 4-Odometer  P.5-8  P.6-61
multi information display: warnings, odome- 5-“ ” or “ ” mark indicator P.5-6 2-Drive mode indicator display*
ter, tripmeter, average and momentary fuel
 P.6-50
consumption, average speed etc.
3- mark display  P.5-6
4-Forward Collision Mitigation System
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indica-
tor display*  P.6-102, 6-109
5-Cruise control indicator display* 
P.6-85
6-Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)
display*  P.6-90
7-“ ” or “ ” mark indicator P.5-6
Instruments and controls 5-3


8-Information screen  P.5-5
9-Selector lever position indicator display
Information screen (when the
(vehicles with 5A/T)  P.6-34 ignition switch or the operation
(Vehicles with 8A/T)  P.6-41 mode is OFF)
10-Engine coolant temperature display E00520201955
 P.5-7 Each time you lightly press the multi infor-

11-Odometer  P.5-8 mation display switch, the display screen
12-Fuel remaining display  P.5-7
5 13-Outside temperature display  P.5-8
switches in the following order.
NOTE
 The fuel units, outside temperature units,
display language, and other settings can be NOTE
changed.  Each time the multi information display back
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on switch is operated, the buzzer sounds and the *1
page 5-13. multi information display return to the posi-
tion before pressing the multi information
display switch. *2
Multi information display

switch
E00520001881
*1: When there is no warning display
Each time the multi information display *2: When there is a warning display
switch is operated, the buzzer sounds and the 1- Tripmeter  P.5-8
multi information display changes between 2- Tripmeter  P.5-8
information such as warnings, tripmeter, 3- ECO score display*  P.5-12
average and momentary fuel consumption, 4- Service reminder  P.5-9
distance range etc. 5- Redisplay of a warning display screen
It is also possible to change elements such as  P.5-6
the language and units used on the multi
information display by operating the multi
information display switch.


1- Tripmeter  P.5-8
Information screen (when the Information screen (when the
2- Tripmeter  P.5-8
ignition switch is turned from ignition switch or the operation
3- Driving range display  P.5-10
the “LOCK” position to the mode is ON) ECO drive assist display*  P.5-12
“ON” position or the operation E00521101935
4- Average fuel consumption display 
mode is changed from OFF to Each time you lightly press the multi infor- P.5-11
mation display switch, the display screen ECO drive assist display*  P.5-12
ON)
E00520702090
switches in the following order. 5- Average speed display  P.5-11 5
Momentary fuel consumption display
When the ignition switch is turned to the  P.5-12
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in 6- ECO score display*  P.5-12
ON, the display screen switches in the fol- 7- 2WD/4WD operation indicator dis-
lowing order. play* P.6-56
Off Road mode indicator display*
P.6-61
8- Service reminder  P.5-9
9- Function setting screen  P.5-13
* *1 10- Redisplay of a warning display screen
 P.5-6
*2
NOTE
 While driving, the service reminder are not
displayed even if you operate the multi infor-
mation display switch. Always stop the vehi-
*: When the inspection time has arrived cle in a safe place before operating.
1- Screen when the ignition switch or the
operation mode is OFF
2- System check screen  P.5-10
3- Screen when the ignition switch or the
operation mode is ON *1: When there is no warning display
4- Service reminder  P.5-9 *2: When there is a warning display

NOTE To return to the screen displayed before “ ”: Press lightly.

 While driving, the function setting screen is the warning display “ ”: Press for approximately 2 seconds or
not displayed even if you operate the multi more.
information display switch. Even if the cause of the warning display is
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place not eliminated, you can return to the screen
before operating and firmly apply the park- that was displayed before the warning dis- Redisplay of a warning display
ing brake and put the gearshift lever into the play. screen
5 “N” (Neutral) position (M/T) or the selector
lever into the “P” (PARK) position (A/T). If you press the multi information display
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on switch, the display screen switches to the When the mark is displayed, if you lightly
page 5-13. screen that was displayed before the warning press the multi information display switch a
 When there is information to be announced, few times, the warning display screen you
display and the mark (A) is displayed.
such as a system fault, the buzzer sounds and switched from is redisplayed.
the screen display is switched.
Refer to “Interrupt display screen” on page
5-6. Other interrupt displays
The operation status of each system is dis-

Interrupt display screen played on the information screen.
E00522001944
Refer to the appropriate page in the warning
display list for further details.
Warning display Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page
5-46.
When there is information to be announced,
such as a system fault, the buzzer sounds and
the information screen is switched to the
mark display
warning display screen. If you want to switch the display E00533901060
Refer to the warning list and take the neces- This is displayed when you press the multi
sary measures. Warning display screens with a “ ” or “ ” information display switch and return from
Refer to “Warning display list” on page 5-28. mark displayed in the upper right of the the warning display screen to the previous
When the cause of the warning display is screen can be switched. If you want to switch screen.
eliminated, the warning display goes out the display, press the multi information dis- This mark is also displayed if there is another
automatically. play switch as follows. warning other than the one displayed.


When the cause of the warning display is
CAUTION Fuel remaining display
eliminated, the mark goes out automati-  Before moving your vehicle, check that the E00522201702
cally. warning lamp is OFF. This displays the amount of fuel remaining.
NOTE
 When the mark is displayed, the warning
Engine coolant temperature
display
display screen can be redisplayed on the
information screen. E00533801085
5
Refer to “Information screen (when the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode is OFF)”
on page 5-4.
Refer to “Information screen (when the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode is ON)” on
page 5-5.
F- Full
E- Empty
Door ajar warning display
E00522601764
This indicates the engine coolant tempera-
ture.
NOTE
If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink.  It may take several seconds to stabilise the
Pay careful attention to the engine coolant display after refilling the tank.
temperature display while you are driving.  If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
the operation mode is in ON, the fuel gauge
If any of the doors or the tailgate is not com- CAUTION may incorrectly indicate the fuel level.
 The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
pletely closed, this displays the open door or  If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink. filler is located on the left side of the body.
tailgate. In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone.
When the ignition switch or the operation Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place
mode is ON, if the vehicle speed exceeds and take the required measures. Refer to
approximately 5 mph while a door is ajar, a “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
buzzer sounds 4 times. This notifies the
driver that a door is ajar.

Fuel remaining warning display CAUTION NOTE

E00522402264  For petrol-powered vehicles, do not run out  Depending on factors such as the driving
When the fuel is reduced to approximately of fuel, or the catalytic converter may be conditions, the displayed temperature may
9 litres, the information screen switches to the adversely affected. If the warning display vary from the actual outside temperature.
interrupt display of the fuel remaining warn- appears, refuel as soon as possible.
 For diesel-powered vehicles, do not drive
ing display, and the “ ” mark (B) on the fuel with an extremely low fuel level; running out
Odometer
remaining display flashes slowly (approxi-
5
E00527800083
of fuel could cause damage to the fuel sys-
mately once per second). After a few seconds, tem. The odometer indicates the distance travelled.
the information screen returns from the fuel
remaining warning display to the previous
screen. NOTE Tripmeter
E00527901124
If the remaining fuel level is reduced further,  On inclines or curves, the display may be
the information screen switches to the fuel incorrect due to the movement of fuel in the The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled
tank. between two points.
remaining warning display and the “ ” mark
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes
Example usage of tripmeter and tripmeter
quickly (approximately twice per second).
Outside temperature display
E00522101554 It is possible to measure two currently
This displays the temperature travelled distances, from home using trip-
outside the vehicle. meter and from a particular point on
the way using tripmeter .
To reset the tripmeter

NOTE
 The display setting can be changed to the To return the display to 0, hold down the
preferred units (°C or °F). multi information display switch for approxi-
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on mately 2 seconds or more. Only the currently
page 5-13. displayed value will be reset.
Example

If tripmeter is displayed, only tripmeter
will be reset.
NOTE
 When disconnecting the battery terminal, the
memory of tripmeter and are 3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
cleared, and the display returns to “0”. authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer, it displays the time until the next 5
periodic inspection.
Service reminder
E00522502177 1. Displays the time until the next periodic To reset
Displays the approximate time until the next inspection.
periodic inspection recommended by The “---” display can be reset while the igni-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS. “---” is displayed NOTE tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.
when the inspection time has arrived.  The distance is shown in units of 100 km When the display is reset, the time until the
(100 miles). The time is shown in units of next periodic inspection is displayed and the
months. warning display is no longer displayed when
NOTE
the ignition switch is turned from the
 Depending on the vehicle specifications, the
displayed time may differ from the next peri- 2. This informs you that a periodic inspec- “LOCK” position to the “ON” position or the
odic inspection time recommended by tion is due. Please consult an authorised operation mode is changed from OFF to ON.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
In addition, the display settings for the next 1. When you lightly press the multi informa-
periodic inspection time can be modified. At that time, when the ignition switch is tion display switch a few times, the infor-
To modify the display settings, have it turned from the “LOCK” position to the mation screen switches to the service
adjusted at an authorised MITSUBISHI "ON" position or the operation mode is reminder display screen.
MOTORS dealer. changed from OFF to ON, the warning
For more details, consult an authorised display is displayed for a few seconds on
the information screen.

System check screen

E00531001126
When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
ON, the system check screen is displayed for
approximately 4 seconds. If there is no fault,
information screen (when the ignition switch
5 or the operation mode is ON) is displayed.
If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn-
ing display.
Refer to “Warning display list” on page 5-28.
2. Press and hold the multi information dis- CAUTION
play switch for approximately 2 seconds  The customer is responsible for making sure
that periodic inspection and maintenance are
or more to display “ ” and make it flash. performed.
(If there is no operation for approximately Inspections and maintenance must be per-
10 seconds with flashing, the display formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
returns to the previous screen.) tions.
NOTE
3. Lightly press the multi information dis-  The system check screen display varies
play switch while the icon is flashing to NOTE depending on the customer’s equipment.
change the display from “---” to  “---” display cannot be reset when the igni-
“CLEAR”. After this, the time until the tion switch or the operation mode is in ON.
next periodic inspection will be displayed.  When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis- Driving range display
tance and a certain period of time, the dis- E00538001095
play is reset and the time until the next This displays the approximate driving range
periodic inspection is displayed.
(how many more kilometres or miles you can
 If you accidentally reset the display, we rec-
drive). When the driving range falls below
ommend you to consult an authorised
approximately 50 km (30 miles), “---” is dis-
played.
Refuel as soon as possible.


The reset mode conditions for the average
fuel consumption display can be switched
NOTE
 The memory of the auto reset mode or man-
between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”.
ual reset mode for the average fuel consump-
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver-
tion display is erased if the battery is
age fuel consumption and average speed” on disconnected.
page 5-14.  The display setting can be changed to the
NOTE For information on how to change the aver- preferred units {km/L, mpg (US), mpg (UK)
age fuel consumption display setting, refer to
 The driving range is determined based on the
fuel consumption data. This may vary “Changing the function settings” on page
or L/100 km}.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
5
depending on the driving conditions and hab- 5-13. page 5-13.
its. Treat the distance displayed as just a
rough guideline.
 When you refuel, the driving range display is
Average speed display
E00533701084
updated.
However, if you only add a small amount of This displays the average speed from the last
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. reset to the present time.
Fill with a full tank whenever possible. The reset mode conditions for the average
 On rare occasions, the value displayed for NOTE speed display can be switched between “Auto
the driving range may change if you are  The average fuel consumption display can be
reset” and “Manual reset”.
parked on an extremely steep incline. This is reset separately for the auto reset mode and
for the manual reset mode. Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver-
due to the movement of fuel in the tank and
 “---” is displayed when the average fuel con- age fuel consumption and average speed” on
does not indicate any malfunction.
sumption cannot be measured. page 5-14.
 The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units (km or miles).  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset For the method for changing the average
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on mode”. speed display setting, refer to “Changing the
page 5-13.  The average fuel consumption will depend function settings” on page 5-13.
on the driving conditions (road conditions,
how you drive, etc.). The displayed fuel con-
sumption may vary from the actual fuel con-
Average fuel consumption dis- sumption. Treat the fuel consumption
play displayed as just a rough guideline.
E00531201157
This displays the average fuel consumption

from the last reset to the present time.


momentary fuel consumption is displayed
NOTE with a green bar graph.
 The average speed display can be reset sepa- ECO drive level
Be conscious of maintaining the momentary
rately for the auto reset mode and for the
fuel consumption above the average fuel con-
manual reset mode.
sumption, driving with the better fuel con-
 “---” is displayed when the average speed
cannot be measured. sumption can be possible.
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset Low High
5 mode”. NOTE
 The display setting can be changed to the  When the momentary fuel consumption can-
preferred units (km/h or mph). not be measured, the bar graph is not dis-
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on played.
page 5-13.  The display setting can be changed to the
 The memory of the auto reset mode or man- preferred units {km/L, mpg (US), mpg (UK)
NOTE
ual reset mode for the average speed display or L/100 km}.  On vehicles with A/T, the ECO drive assist is
is erased if the battery is disconnected. Refer to “Changing the function settings” on displayed only when vehicle is driving with
page 5-13. the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) posi-
 It is possible to cancel the green bar graph. tion or when vehicle is driving in the sport
mode.
Momentary fuel consumption Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
page 5-13.
display
E00533601113
ECO score display*
While driving, this displays the momentary ECO drive assist display* E00531601106
fuel consumption, using a bar graph.
E00531501121
ECO score indicates the points you have
This function displays how fuel-efficiently scored on fuel-efficient driving by the num-
A ber of leaves as follows:
you are driving under different driving condi-
tions.
[When the ignition switch or the operation
The ECO drive assist display will change as
mode is ON]
The “ ” mark (A) in the momentary fuel follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using
The display shows the score you achieved in
gauge shows the average fuel consumption. the accelerator in a way well matched with
the last several minutes.
When the momentary fuel consumption sur- the vehicle speed.
passes the average fuel consumption, the [When the ignition switch is turned off or the
operation mode is put in OFF]

The display shows the overall ECO score the 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
function has counted from the time when the play switch a few times to switch the
ignition switch is turned to “ON” to the time information screen to the function setting
when it is turned to “LOCK” or “ACC”, or screen.
from the time when the operation mode is set Refer to “Information screen (when the
to “ON” to the time when it is set to “OFF”. ignition switch or the operation mode is
ON)” on page 5-5.
5
ECO drive level
NOTE
CAUTION  To return the menu screen to the function set-
Low High  For safety, stop the vehicle before operating. ting screen, press and hold the multi infor-
While driving, even if you operate the multi mation display switch for approximately
information display switch, the function set- 2 seconds or more.
ting screen is not displayed.  If no operations are made within approxi-
mately 30 seconds of the menu screen being
displayed, the display returns to the function
3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
Changing the function settings play switch for approximately 2 seconds
setting screen.
E00522702065
or more to switch from the setting mode
The “Display language”, “Temperature unit”, screen to the menu screen. 4. Select the item to change on the menu
“Fuel consumption unit”, and “Average fuel screen and change to the desired setting.
consumption and speed reset method” etc. Refer to the following items for further
setting can be modified as desired. details on the operation methods.
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Refer to “Changing the reset mode for
Firmly apply the parking brake and put average fuel consumption and average
the gearshift lever into the “N” (Neutral) speed” on page 5-14.
position (M/T) or the selector lever into Refer to “Changing the fuel consumption
the “P” (PARK) position (A/T). display unit” on page 5-15.


Refer to “Changing the temperature unit”
Changing the reset mode for aver- Manual reset mode
on page 5-15.
Refer to “Changing the display language” age fuel consumption and average
 When the average fuel consumption and
on page 5-16. speed average speed are being displayed, if you
Refer to “Operation sound setting” on E00522902227
hold down the multi information display
page 5-16. The mode conditions for the average fuel switch, the average fuel consumption and
Refer to “Changing the time until “REST consumption and average speed display can average speed displayed at that time are
REMINDER” is displayed” on page 5-16. be switched between “Auto reset” and “Man-
5 Refer to “Changing the turn-signal sound” ual reset”.
reset.
 When the following operation is per-
on page 5-17. formed, the mode setting is automatically
Refer to “Changing the momentary fuel 1. Press and hold the multi information dis- switched from manual to auto.
consumption display” on page 5-17. play switch for approximately 2 seconds
Refer to “Reset of low tyre pressure warn- or more to switch from the setting mode [Except for vehicles equipped with the
ing threshold” on page 6-121. screen to the menu screen. keyless operation system]
Refer to “Tyre ID set change” on page Refer to “Changing the function settings” Turn the ignition switch from the “ACC”
6-121. on page 5-13. or “LOCK” position to the “ON” position.
Refer to “Returning to the factory set- 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
tings” on page 5-17. play switch to select [For vehicles equipped with the keyless
“AVG (average fuel consumption and operation system]
NOTE average speed setting)”. Change the operation mode from ACC or
 If the battery is disconnected, these function 3. Press and hold the multi information dis- OFF to ON.
settings are reset from memory and is auto- play switch for approximately 2 seconds
matically to the factory settings (except the
Switching to auto occurs automatically. If
or more to switch from A/1 (Auto reset
low tyre pressure warning threshold and tyre switching to manual mode is done, how-
mode) to M/2/P (Manual reset mode), or
ID set). ever, the data from the last reset is dis-
from M/2/P to A/1.
played.
The setting is changed to the selected
mode condition.


5. Press and hold the multi information dis-
Auto reset mode NOTE play switch for approximately 2 seconds
 The memory of the auto reset mode or man-
 When the average fuel consumption and or more to change the setting to the
ual reset mode for the average fuel consump-
average speed are being displayed, if you selected unit.
tion display and average speed display is
hold down the multi information display erased if the battery is disconnected.
switch, the average fuel consumption and NOTE
average speed displayed at that time are
Changing the fuel consumption  The display units for the driving range, the
reset.
 When the engine switch or the operation display unit average fuel consumption, the average speed 5
and the momentary fuel consumption are
mode is in the following conditions, the E00523001879
switched, but the units for the indicating nee-
average fuel consumption display and The display unit for fuel consumption can be dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip-
average speed display are automatically switched. The distance, speed, and amount meter will remain unchanged.
reset. units are also switched to match the selected
fuel consumption unit.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the The distance and speed units are also
keyless operation system] 1. Press and hold the multi information dis- switched in the following combinations to
The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or play switch for approximately 2 seconds match the selected fuel consumption unit.
“LOCK” position for approximately or more to switch from the setting mode
4 hours or longer. screen to the menu screen. Distance Speed
Fuel con-
Refer to “Changing the function settings” (driving (average
sumption
[For vehicles equipped with the keyless on page 5-13. range) speed)
operation system] 2. Lightly press the multi information dis- L/100 km km km/h
The operation mode is in ACC or OFF for play switch to select mpg (US) mile (s) mph
approximately 4 hours or longer. “AVG UNIT (fuel consumption display
mpg (UK) mile (s) mph
setting)”.
NOTE 3. Press and hold the multi information dis- km/L km km/h
 The average fuel consumption display and play switch for approximately 2 seconds
average speed display can be reset separately or more to display “AVG UNIT”.
for the auto reset mode and for the manual 4. Lightly press the multi information dis-
Changing the temperature unit
E00523101900
reset mode. play switch to select the units.
The display unit for temperature can be
switched.


1. Press and hold the multi information dis- 1. Press and hold the multi information dis- 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
play switch for approximately 2 seconds play switch for approximately 2 seconds play switch for approximately 2 seconds
or more to switch from the setting mode or more to switch from the setting mode or more to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen. screen to the menu screen. screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” Refer to “Changing the function settings” Refer to “Changing the function settings”
on page 5-13. on page 5-13. on page 5-13.
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- 2. Lightly press the multi information dis- 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
5 play switch to select “ ” (temperature play switch to select
“LANGUAGE” (language setting).
play switch to select “ ” (operation
unit setting). sound setting).
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- 3. Press and hold the multi information dis- 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
play switch for approximately 2 seconds play switch for approximately 2 seconds play switch for approximately 2 seconds
or more to switch in from °C to °F, or or more to display “LANGUAGE”. or more to switch from ON (operation
from °F to °C. 4. Lightly press the multi information dis- sound on) to OFF (operation sound off),
The setting is changed to the selected tem- play switch to select the desired language. or from OFF to ON.
perature unit. 5. If you hold down the multi information The setting is changed to the selected con-
display switch for approximately 2 sec- dition.
NOTE onds or more, the setting is changed to the
 The temperature value on air conditioner selected language. NOTE
panel is switched in conjunction with outside  The operation sound setting only deactivates
temperature display unit of the multi infor- NOTE the operation sound of the multi information
mation display.  If “---” is selected in the language setting, a display switch and rheostat illumination but-
However, “°C” or “°F” are not shown to tem- warning message is not displayed when there ton. The warning display and other sounds
perature display of an air conditioner. is a warning display or interrupt display. cannot be deactivated.
Changing the display language Operation sound setting Changing the time until “REST
E00523201800 E00523401798 REMINDER” is displayed
The language of the multi information display You can turn off the operation sounds of the E00523501816
can be switched. multi information display switch and rheostat The time until the display appears can be
illumination button. changed.


1. Press and hold the multi information dis- 1. Press and hold the multi information dis- 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
play switch for approximately 2 seconds play switch for approximately 2 seconds play switch to select (changing
or more to switch from the setting mode or more to switch from the setting mode the momentary fuel consumption display).
screen to the menu screen. screen to the menu screen. 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
Refer to “Changing the function settings” Refer to “Changing the function settings” play switch for approximately 2 seconds
on page 5-13. on page 5-13. or more to switch from ON (with the
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- 2. Lightly press the multi information dis- green bar graph) to OFF (without the
play switch to select “ALARM” (rest time
setting).
play switch to select (changing the green bar graph), or from OFF to ON. 5
turn-signal sound). The setting changes to the selected bar
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- 3. Press and hold the multi information dis- graph setting.
play switch for approximately 2 seconds play switch for approximately 2 seconds
or more to display “ALARM”. or more to switch from 1 (turn-signal
4. Lightly press the multi information dis- Returning to the factory settings
sound 1) to 2 (turn-signal sound 2), or
play switch to select the time until the dis- from 2 to 1.
E00523602058
play. Many of the function settings can be returned

The setting changes to the selected turn-
5. Press and hold the multi information dis- to their factory settings.
signal sound.
play switch for approximately 2 seconds
or more, the setting is changed to the 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
selected time. Changing the momentary fuel con- play switch for approximately 2 seconds
sumption display or more to switch from the setting mode
NOTE E00529201408 screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings”
 The drive time is reset when the ignition It is possible to change the bar graph setting
switch is turned off or the operation mode is on page 5-13.
of the momentary fuel consumption display.
put in OFF. 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
1. Press and hold the multi information display switch to select “RESET” (returning
play switch for approximately 2 seconds to the factory settings).
Changing the turn-signal sound or more to switch from the setting mode 3. When you press and hold the multi infor-
E00529101481 screen to the menu screen. mation display switch for approximately
Refer to “Changing the function settings” 5 seconds or more, the buzzer sounds and
It is possible to change the turn-signal sound.
on page 5-13. all of the function settings are returned to
the factory settings.

NOTE
 The factory settings are as follows.
• Average fuel consumption and average
speed reset mode: A (Auto reset)
• Fuel consumption display unit: L/100 km
• Temperature unit: °C (Celsius)
• Display language: ENGLISH
5 • Operation sounds: ON (Operation sounds
on)
• “REST REMINDER” display: OFF
• Turn-signal sound: Turn-signal sound 1 1- Engine coolant temperature display
• Momentary fuel consumption with the  P.5-22
green bar graph: ON 2- Selector lever position display* →
 The low tyre pressure warning threshold and P.6-34
tyre ID set cannot be returned to their factory
3- Fuel remaining display  P.5-22
settings.
4- Frozen road warning*  P.5-21
5- Information display  P.5-19
6- Service reminder  P.5-23
Multi information display -
Type 2
E00519902698
NOTE
 When the ignition switch or the operation
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before
mode is OFF, the information display and the
operating. service reminder are displayed.
The following information is included on the
multi information display: odometer, tripme-
ter, average fuel consumption etc.

Information display
E00528201355
Each time you lightly press the multi information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order.
1- Odometer  P.5-20 4- Meter illumination control  P.5-20 7- Outside temperature display*  P.5-21
2- Tripmeter  P.5-20 5- Driving range display  P.5-20 8- Service reminder (distance)  P.5-23
3- Tripmeter  P.5-20 6- Average fuel consumption display  9- Service reminder (month)  P.5-23
P.5-21
NOTE
 When the ignition switch or the operation mode is OFF, the information display and the service reminder are displayed.
 While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi information display switch.

Odometer NOTE NOTE

E00527801123  When disconnecting the battery terminal, the  You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
The odometer indicates the distance travelled. memory of tripmeter and are tively for when the position lamps are illumi-
cleared, and the display returns to “0”. nated and when they are not.
Each time you reduce two brightness levels,
Tripmeter the segment display of the brightness level
decreases one by one.
E00527901137
Meter illumination control
5 The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled E00537901097
 The brightness level of the instruments is
stored when the ignition switch is turned off
between two points.
Each time you press and hold the multi infor- or the operation mode is put in OFF.
mation display switch (2) for approximately
Example usage of tripmeter and tripmeter
2 seconds or more, there is a sound and the
brightness of the instruments changes. Driving range display
It is possible to measure two currently
E00538001079
travelled distances, from home using trip-
This displays the approximate driving range
meter and from a particular point on
(how many more kilometres or miles you can
the way using tripmeter . drive). When the driving range falls below
approximately 50 km (30 miles), “---” is dis-
played.
To reset the tripmeter
NOTE
To return the display to 0, hold down the  The driving range is determined based on the
multi information display switch for approxi- fuel consumption data. This may vary
mately 2 seconds or more. Only the currently depending on the driving conditions and hab-
displayed value will be reset. 1- Brightness level its. Treat the distance displayed as just a
2- Multi information display switch rough guideline.
Example  When you refuel, the driving range display is
updated.
If tripmeter is displayed, only tripmeter
However, if you only add a small amount of
will be reset. fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.
Fill with a full tank whenever possible.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 On rare occasions, the value displayed for  “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-  Depending on factors such as the driving
the driving range may change if you are sumption cannot be measured. conditions, the displayed temperature may
parked on an extremely steep incline. This is  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset vary from the actual outside temperature.
due to the movement of fuel in the tank and mode”.
does not indicate any malfunction.  The average fuel consumption will depend
 The display setting can be changed to the on the driving conditions (road conditions,
Frozen road warning*
preferred units (km or miles).
how you drive, etc.). The displayed fuel con-
sumption may vary from the actual fuel con-
E00533401081
5
page 5-24.
If the outside air temperature drops below
sumption. Treat the fuel consumption
displayed as just a rough guideline.
approximately 3 °C (37 °F), the alarm sounds
 The memory of the manual reset mode or
and the outside air temperature warning sym-
Average fuel consumption dis- auto reset mode for the average fuel con- bol (A) flashes for approximately 10 seconds.
play sumption display is erased if the battery is
E00531201144 disconnected.
This displays the average fuel consumption  The display setting can be changed to the
from the last reset to the present time. preferred units {km/L, L/100 km, mpg}.
The reset mode conditions for the average
page 5-24.
fuel consumption display can be switched
between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”.
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver- Outside temperature display*
age fuel consumption” on page 5-24. E00533501082
For information on how to change the aver-

age fuel consumption display setting, refer to This displays the temperature outside the
“Changing the function settings” on page vehicle.
5-24. CAUTION
NOTE  There is a danger the road might be icy, even
NOTE  The display setting can be changed to the when this symbol is not flashing, so please
preferred units (°C or °F). take care when driving.
 The average fuel consumption display can be
reset separately for the auto reset mode and
page 5-24.
for the manual reset mode.


flashes. If the remaining fuel level is reduced
Engine coolant temperature further, the last segment of the fuel gauge
display goes out and “ ” flash.
E00533801098
1- Full
0- Empty
This indicates the engine coolant tempera-
ture.
If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink. NOTE
Pay careful attention to the engine coolant
temperature display while you are driving.
 It may take several seconds to stabilise the CAUTION
display after refilling the tank.
 For petrol-powered vehicles with catalytic
 If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
converter, do not drive with an extremely
CAUTION the operation mode is ON, the fuel gauge
low fuel level; running out of fuel could
may incorrectly indicate the fuel level.
cause damage to the catalytic converter.
 If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink.  The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
 For diesel-powered vehicles, do not drive
In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone. filler door is located on the left side of the
with an extremely low fuel level; running out
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place vehicle.
of fuel could cause damage to the fuel sys-
and take the required measures. Refer to
tem.
“Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
Fuel remaining warning display
E00522402121
NOTE
Fuel remaining display If the remaining fuel level is approximately  On inclines or curves, the display may be
E00522201715
9 litres or less (one segment displayed) when incorrect due to the movement of fuel in the
The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” tank.
level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch position or the operation mode is changed to
or the operation mode is ON. ON, the last segment of the fuel gauge


1. Displays the time until the next periodic 2. Press and hold the multi information dis-
Service reminder inspection. play switch for approximately 2 seconds
E00522502180
or more to make the spanner mark start
Displays the approximate time until the next NOTE flashing. (If there is no operation for
periodic inspection that MITSUBISHI  The distance is shown in units of 100 km approximately 10 seconds with flashing,
MOTORS recommends.“---” is displayed (100 miles). The time is shown in units of the display will revert to its original indi-
when the inspection time has arrived. months. cation.)
The spanner mark indicates the periodic 3. Lightly press the multi information dis-
inspection. 2. This informs you that a periodic inspec- play switch while the icon is flashing to
5
tion is due. Please consult an authorised change the display from “---” to “cLEAr”.
NOTE MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. After this, the time until the next periodic
 Depending on the vehicle specifications, the 3. After your vehicle is inspected at an inspection will be displayed.
displayed time until the next periodic inspec- authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
tion may differ from that of MITSUBISHI dealer, it displays the time until the next
MOTORS recommends. periodic inspection.
In addition, the display settings for the next
periodic inspection time can be modified.
To modify the display settings, have it To reset
adjusted at an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer. The “---” display can be reset while the igni-
For more details, contact an authorised tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.
1. When you lightly press the multi informa-
tion display switch a few times, the infor-
Distance mation display switches to the service CAUTION
reminder display.  The customer is responsible for making sure
Refer to “Information display” on page that periodic inspection and maintenance are
5-19. performed.
Month
Inspections and maintenance must be per-
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
tions.

NOTE Changing the reset mode for aver- Manual reset mode
 “---” display cannot be reset when the igni- age fuel consumption
tion switch or the operation mode is in ON. • When the average fuel consumption is
E00522902197
 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis- being displayed, if you hold down the
The mode conditions for the average fuel multi information display switch, the
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
consumption display can be switched average fuel consumption displayed at
play is reset and the time until the next
periodic inspection is displayed.
between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”. that time is reset.
5  If you accidentally reset the display, consult
an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
1. When you lightly press the multi informa-
• When the following operation is per-
formed, the mode setting is automati-
tion display switch a few times, the infor-
dealer. cally switched from manual to auto.
mation display switches to the driving
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
range display.
keyless operation system]
Refer to “Information display” on page
Changing the function settings 5-19.
Turn the ignition switch from the “ACC”
E00522701967 or “LOCK” position to the “ON” posi-
2. Each time you press the multi information
The “Average fuel consumption reset mode”, tion.
display switch for 2 seconds or more on
“Fuel consumption unit” and “Temperature [For vehicles equipped with the keyless
driving range display, you can switch
unit” setting can be modified as desired, operation system]
reset mode for average fuel consumption.
when the ignition switch or the operation Change the operation mode from ACC
(A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset
mode is ON. or OFF to ON.
mode)
Switching to auto occurs automatically.
CAUTION Auto reset mode Manual reset mode If switching to manual mode is done,
 The driver should not operate the display however, the data from the last reset is
while the vehicle is in motion. displayed.
 When operating the system, stop the vehicle
in a safe area. Auto reset mode
• When the average fuel consumption is

being displayed, if you hold down the
multi information display switch, the
average fuel consumption displayed at
that time are reset.


• When the engine switch or the operation also switched to match the selected fuel con-
mode is in the following conditions, the sumption unit.
NOTE
 The display units for the driving range, the
average fuel consumption display is
1. When you lightly press the multi informa- average fuel consumption are switched, but
automatically reset.
tion display switch a few times, the infor- the units for the indicating needle (speedom-
[Except for vehicles equipped with the eter), the odometer, the tripmeter and the ser-
keyless operation system] mation display switches to the average
vice reminder will remain unchanged.
The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or fuel consumption display.
 The memory of the unit setting is erased if
“LOCK” position for approximately Refer to “Information display” on page
4 hours or longer. 5-19.
the battery is disconnected, and it returns
automatically to factory setting.
5
[For vehicles equipped with the keyless 2. Press and hold the multi information dis-
operation system] play switch for approximately 5 seconds
The distance units is also switched in the fol-
The operation mode is in ACC or OFF or more until buzzer sound is heard twice.
lowing combinations to match the selected
for approximately 4 hours or longer. 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
fuel consumption unit.
play switch to switch in sequence from
“km/L”  “L/100 km”  “mpg” 
NOTE “km/L”. Fuel consumption
Distance
 The average fuel consumption display can be (driving range)
reset separately for the auto reset mode and km/L km
for the manual reset mode.
 The memory of the manual reset mode or L/100 km km
auto reset mode for the average fuel con- mpg mile (s)
sumption display is erased if the battery is
disconnected.
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset Changing the temperature unit
mode”. E00523101753
The display unit for outside temperature can

be switched.
Changing the fuel consumption
display unit 1. When you lightly press the multi informa-
E00523001853 tion display switch a few times, the infor-
The display unit for fuel consumption can be mation display switches to the outside
switched. The distance and amount units are temperature display.

Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi information display - Type 1)
Refer to “Information display” on page
5-19.
NOTE
 The temperature value on air conditioner
2. Each time you press the multi information
panel is switched in conjunction with outside
display switch for 2 seconds or more on
temperature display unit of the multi infor-
outside temperature display, you can mation display.
switch from °C to °F or from °F to °C unit However, “°C” or “°F” are not shown to tem-
of outside temperature display. perature display of an air conditioner.
5
Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi information display
- Type 1)
E00523701254
Indicator and warning lamp list

E00523802379
1- Position lamp indicator lamp  P.5-51 2- Turn-signal indicator lamps/Hazard 3- Front fog lamp indicator lamp*
warning indicator lamps  P.5-51  P.5-51

4- High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-51 20- Speed warning lamp* P.5-55
5- Rear fog lamp indicator lamp* 21- Electric parking brake warning lamp
P.5-51 (yellow) P.5-53
6- Rear differential lock indicator lamp* 22- Hill Descent Control indicator lamp*
P.6-62 P.6-78
7- Security indicator lamp  P.3-20 23- Brake warning lamp (red)  P.5-52
8- Check engine warning lamp  P.5-53 5
9- Blind Spot Warning indicator lamp* 
P.6-116
10- Diesel preheat indicator lamp (diesel-
powered vehicles)  P.5-51
11- Charge warning lamp  P.5-54
12- LED headlamp warning lamp*
P.5-55
13- Information screen display list
 P.5-28
14- Seat belt warning lamp  P.4-16
15- Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
warning lamp  P.4-41
16- Tyre pressure monitoring system warn-
ing lamp* P.6-118
17- Active Stability & Traction Control
(ASTC) OFF indicator lamp* P.6-84
18- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning
lamp  P.6-80
(ASTC) indicator lamp* P.6-84

Information screen display list

E00523901445
When there is information to be announced, such as lamp reminder, the buzzer sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below. Refer
to the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to “Warning display list” on page 5-28.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page 5-46.
5
NOTE
 A warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound in the following rare cases.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as noise or strong electromagnetic waves, and is not a functional problem.
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of installed electrical equipment (including after-market parts).
If the warning display appears many times, consult an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Warning display list

E00524002280
Screen Cause Solution (Reference)

 There is a fault in the electronic immobi-  Put the operation mode in OFF, and then
lizer (Anti-theft starting system). start the engine again.
If the warning is not cancelled, please con-
tact an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
 There is a fault in the electrical system.  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and consult an authorised

 There is a fault in the keyless operation Refer to “Keyless operation system” on page
system. 3-7.
 You turned the ignition switch to the “ON”  Fasten your seat belt properly. Refer to
position or put the operation mode in ON “Seat belt reminder” on page 4-16.
without fastening your seat belt.
 There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the  Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI

pre-tensioner system. MOTORS dealer to have the system
checked, immediately.
Refer to “SRS warning lamp/display” on
page 4-41.
 One of the doors or the tailgate is not com-  Close the door or tailgate.
pletely closed. Refer to “Door ajar warning display” on
The open door is displayed. page 5-7.

 The outside temperature is 3 °C (37 °F) or  Be careful of ice on the road.
less.  The road can be icy even when this warn-
ing is not displayed, so drive carefully.
 The fuel is running low.  Refuel as soon as possible. Refer to “Fuel

5 remaining warning display” on page 5-8.
 There is a fault in the fuel system.  Have your vehicle inspected at an author-
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
 You are driving with the parking brake still  Release the parking brake. Refer to “Brake
applied. warning display” on page 5-55.
 The brake fluid level in the reservoir has  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
fallen to a low level. place and consult an authorised
 There is a fault in the brake system. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “Brake warning display” on page
5-55.
 There is a fault in the Electric parking  Immediately have your vehicle inspected at
brake. an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer.
Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page
6-8.

 The parking brake cannot be applied tem- Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page 6-8.
porarily due to repeated operation of the
Electric parking brake switch within a
short time.
 You try to release the Electric parking Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page 6-8.
brake switch without depressing the brake 5
pedal.
 There is a fault in the charging system.  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and consult your nearest authorised
Refer to “Charge warning display” on page
5-56.
 There is a fault in the engine oil circulation  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
system. place and consult your nearest authorised
Refer to “Oil pressure warning display” on
page 5-57.
 It is suspected that the engine oil level has  Immediately have your vehicle checked by
increased excessively. an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer.
Refer to “Engine oil level warning display”
on page 5-57.

 An excessive amount of particulate matter Refer to “Diesel particulate filter (DPF)” on
(PM) accumulates inside the diesel particu- page 6-28.
late filter (DPF).
 The washer fluid is running low.  Replenish the container with washer fluid.
5 Refer to “Washer fluid” on page 10-9.
Refer to “Refill capacities” on page 11-11.
 You have forgotten to turn off the lamps. Refer to “Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.)
auto-cutout function” on page 5-59.
 There is a fault in the LED headlamps.  Please consult an authorised MITSUBISHI

MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “LED headlamp warning lamp”
on page 5-55.
 An attempt was made to open the driver’s  Put the operation mode in OFF.
door with the operation mode in any mode Refer to “Operation mode ON reminder
other than OFF. system” on page 6-20.
 An attempt was made to lock all the doors  Put the operation mode in OFF.
and the tailgate with the operation mode is Refer to “Operation mode OFF reminder
put in a mode other than OFF. system” on page 6-20.

 There is a fault in the steering wheel lock.  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and consult an authorised
 The steering wheel is locked.  Press the engine switch while turning steer-
ing wheel. 5
Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page
6-20.
 The engine is stopped and the selector  Place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK)
lever is in a position other than the “P” position to put the operation mode in OFF.
(PARK) position.
 The driver’s door is opened with the steer-  Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page
ing wheel unlocked. 6-20.
 The keyless operation key is not detected.  Insert the keyless operation key into the
key slot.
Refer to “If the keyless operation key is not
operating properly” on page 6-27.
 You have forgotten to remove the keyless  Remove the keyless operation key from the
operation key from the key slot. key slot.
Refer to “Keyless operation key reminder”
on page 6-28.

 The A/T fluid temperature is too high. Refer to “5-Speed automatic transmission with
sports mode: When a malfunction occurs in
the A/T” on page 6-36.
Refer to “8-Speed automatic transmission with
sports mode: When a malfunction occurs in
the A/T” on page 6-43.
5  There is a fault in the A/T.  Have your vehicle inspected at an author-
with sports mode: When a malfunction
occurs in the A/T” on page 6-36.
with sports mode: When a malfunction
occurs in the A/T” on page 6-43.
 The clutch pedal is not depressed during Refer to “Drive mode indicator display and
shifting process between “4HLc”  2WD/4WD operation indicator display” on
“4LLc”. page 6-56.
 The selector lever is shifted from the Refer to “Drive mode indicator display and
“N”(NEUTRAL) position to the 2WD/4WD operation indicator display” on
“D”(DRIVE) position during shifting pro- page 6-56.
cess between “4HLc”  “4LLc”.
 There is a fault in the A/T. Shifting Refer to “Drive mode indicator display and
between a “2H”  “4H”  “4HLc” selec- 2WD/4WD operation indicator display” on
tion can be made, but when the drive page 6-56.
mode-selector is in “4LLc”, the transfer
mode cannot be switched.

 There is a fault in the Super select 4WD II.  Have your vehicle inspected at an Author-
Refer to “Drive mode indicator display and
2WD/4WD operation indicator display” on
page 6-56.
 The Off Road mode will not be available Refer to “Off Road mode-selector operation”
even if the Off Road mode selector is on page 6-60. 5
pressed because the drive mode-selector is
in “2H” or “4H”.
 The Off Road mode will not be available Refer to “Off Road mode indicator display” on
even if the Off Road mode selector is page 6-61.
pressed because the brake system is abnor-
mally overheated.
 The Off Road mode will not be available Refer to “Off Road mode indicator display” on
even if the Off Road mode selector is page 6-61.
pressed because the rear differential lock is
ON.
 There is a fault in the rear differential lock  Have your vehicle inspected at an author-
system. ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “The rear differential lock indica-
tor lamp/display” on page 6-62.
 You try to be turned on the rear differential Refer to “Rear differential lock” on page 6-61.
lock switch during driving.

 The Hill Descent Control (HDC) brake Refer to “To operate” on page 6-78.
control is not available because the brake
system is abnormally overheated.
 The Hill Descent Control (HDC) cannot be Refer to “To operate” on page 6-78.
5 set to ON (stand by) because the vehicle
speed is 12 mph or more.
 The Hill Descent Control (HDC) cannot be Refer to “To operate” on page 6-78.
set to ON (stand by) because the rear dif-
ferential lock is ON.
 There is a fault in the hill start assist.  Have your vehicle inspected at an Author-
Refer to “Warning lamp/display” on page
6-77.
 There is a fault in the active stability &  Have your vehicle inspected at an Author-
traction control (ASTC). ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “ASTC warning lamp/display” on
page 6-85.
 There is a fault in the ABS.  Avoid sudden braking and high-speed driv-
ing, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
take corrective measures. Refer to “ABS
warning lamp/display” on page 6-80.

 The braking system temperature is too  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
high. place.
Refer to “ASTC indicator lamp or ASTC
OFF indicator lamp” on page 6-84.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control System  Increase the following distance by depress-
(ACC) has detected the approach of the ing the brake pedal or making other decel- 5
vehicles in front. erating control.
Refer to “Proximity alarm” on page 6-92.
 The Forward Collision Mitigation System  Take appropriate action such as depressing
(FCM) has detected the danger of collision. the brake to avoid collision.
Refer to “Forward collision warning func-
tion” on page 6-103.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control System  Depress the brake pedal as soon as your
(ACC) detected a stop of the vehicle in vehicle comes to a stop.
front and stopped your vehicle, but the Refer to “When ACC detects a vehicle in
brake will be released soon. front within the set distance” on page 6-91.

 The Adaptive Cruise Control System Refer to “How to use ACC” on page 6-95.
(ACC) control is automatically cancelled.
 Conditions for the start of control are not

5 met, the Adaptive Cruise Control System
(ACC) can not start the control.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control System

(ACC) can not start the control because the
speed is out of speed range.

(ACC) can not start the control because not
detected the approach of the vehicles in
front.

(ACC) is not available temporarily.

 The Adaptive Cruise Control System Refer to “How to use ACC” on page 6-95.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is operating.

(ACC) can not start the control because the 5
rear differential lock is ON.

drive mode-selector of Super select 4WD
II is in “4HLc” or “4LLc”.
 There is a fault in the Adaptive Cruise  We recommend you to have it checked.

Control System (ACC). Refer to “To terminate ACC control” on
page 6-99.
 FCM braking function of the Forward Col- Refer to “FCM braking function” on page
lision Mitigation System (FCM) has been 6-104.
activated.
 There is a fault in the Forward Collision  Have your vehicle inspected at an author-
Mitigation System (FCM). ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “FCM braking function” on page
6-104.

 The Forward Collision Mitigation System Refer to “FCM braking function” on page
(FCM) is not available temporarily. 6-104.
 Foreign matter such as dirt adheres to the Refer to “To terminate ACC control” on page
5 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) 6-99.
sensor. Refer to “FCM braking function” on page
 Foreign matter such as dirt adheres to the 6-104.
Forward Collision Mitigation System
(FCM) sensor.
 Foreign matter such as dirt adheres to the Refer to “FCM braking function” on page
Forward Collision Mitigation System 6-104.
(FCM) sensor.
 When the Forward Collision Mitigation Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation Sys-
System (FCM) is ON, if the drive mode- tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
selector of Super select 4WD II is set to Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch”
“4LLc”, the FCM will be switched to OFF on page 6-107.
automatically.
 When the FCM is OFF, the FCM will not
be switched to ON even if the Forward
Collision Mitigation System (FCM) and
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Sys-
tem (UMS) ON/OFF switch is pressed
because the drive mode-selector of Super
select 4WD II is in “4LLc”.

System (FCM) is ON, if the rear differen- tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
tial lock switch is set to ON, the FCM will Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch”
be switched to OFF automatically. on page 6-107.
 When the FCM is OFF, even if the For-
ward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)
and Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation 5
System (UMS) ON/OFF switch is pressed,
the FCM will not be switched to ON
because the rear differential lock switch is
ON.
System (FCM) is ON, if the Hill Descent tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
Control (HDC) is set to ON, the FCM will Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch”
be switched to OFF automatically. on page 6-107.
 When the FCM is OFF, even if the For-
ward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)
and Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
System (UMS) ON/OFF switch is pressed,
the FCM will not be switched to ON
because the Hill Descent Control (HDC)
operates.

 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation  When the warning display does not disap-
System (UMS) sensor is temporarily not pear after waiting for a while, contact an
available for some reason such as the envi- authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
ronmental condition or increase of the sen- dealer.
sor temperature. Refer to “When the sensor is temporarily
not available” on page 6-113.
5
 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation  Immediately have your vehicle inspected at

System (UMS) does not operate normally an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
because there are some malfunctions in the dealer.
sensor or the system. Refer to “When there is a malfunction in
the system or the sensor” on page 6-114.

 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Refer to “Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitiga-
System (UMS) is activated. tion System (UMS)” on page 6-109.
 When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti- Refer to “When the Ultrasonic misacceleration
gation System (UMS) is ON, if the drive Mitigation System is not available” on page
mode-selector of Super select 4WD II is set 6-114.
to “4LLc”, the Ultrasonic misacceleration
Mitigation System (UMS) will be switched
to OFF automatically.
 When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti-
gation System (UMS) is OFF, even if the
Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch
is pressed, the Ultrasonic misacceleration
Mitigation System (UMS) will not be
switched to ON because the drive mode-
selector of Super select 4WD II is in
“4LLc”.

gation System (UMS) is ON, if the rear dif- Mitigation System is not available” on page
ferential lock switch is set to ON, the 6-114.
tem (UMS) will be switched to OFF auto-
matically.
5  When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti-
switched to ON because the rear differen-
tial lock switch is ON.
gation System (UMS) is ON, if the Hill Mitigation System is not available” on page
Descent Control (HDC) is set to ON, the 6-114.
tem (UMS) will be switched to OFF auto-
matically.
 When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti-
switched to ON because the Hill Descent
Control (HDC) operates.

 The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) sensor is  When the warning display does not disap-
temporarily not available for some reason pear after waiting for a while, contact an
such as the environmental condition or authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
increase of the sensor temperature. dealer.
Refer to “When the sensor is temporarily
not available” on page 6-117.
 The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) does not  Immediately have your vehicle inspected at 5
operate normally because there are some an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
malfunctions in the sensor or the system. dealer.
Refer to “When there is a malfunction in
the system or the sensor” on page 6-117.
 The tyre pressure in one of the tyres is Refer to “Tyre pressure monitoring system
low. Not UK Spec warning lamp/display” on page 6-118.
 There is a fault in the tyre pressure moni- Refer to “Tyre pressure monitoring system
toring system. Not UK Spec warning lamp/display” on page 6-118.
 The engine is overheated.  Stop the vehicle in a safe place and take
corrective measures.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.

 More than specified limit water has accu-  Refer to “Removal of water from the fuel
mulated in the fuel filter. filter (diesel-powered vehicles)” on page
8-5.
5 Other interrupt displays

E00524202165
Screen System operation status Reference

 When starting the engine, you pressed the  Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neu-
engine switch without depressing the tral) position, fully depress the clutch
clutch pedal (M/T). pedal, depress the brake pedal with the
right foot. Then, press the engine switch.
Refer to “Starting the engine (diesel-pow-
ered vehicles)” on page 6-25.
 When starting the engine, the selector lever  Place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK)
is in a position other than the “P” (PARK) position, depress the brake pedal with the
or the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or you right foot. Then, press the engine switch.
pressed the engine switch without depress- Refer to “Starting the engine (petrol-pow-
ing the brake pedal (A/T). ered vehicles)” on page 6-23.
Refer to “Starting the engine (diesel-pow-
ered vehicles)” on page 6-25.
The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. Refer to the appropriate page for the system for further details.

 When the drive mode is shifted by operat- Refer to “Super select 4WD Ⅱ ”on page 6-50.
ing the drive mode-selector.
 When “ROCK” mode of Off Road mode is Refer to “Control mode” on page 6-60.
selected. 5
 When “MUD/SNOW” mode of Off Road Refer to “Control mode” on page 6-60.
mode is selected.
 When “SAND” mode of Off Road mode is Refer to “Control mode” on page 6-60.
selected.
 When “GRAVEL” mode of Off Road Refer to “Control mode” on page 6-60.
mode is selected.
System (FCM) is deactivated. tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
 When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti- Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch”
gation System (UMS) is deactivated. on page 6-107.

System (FCM) is activated or the timing of tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
an alarm is changed. Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch”
on page 6-107.
 When the reversing sensor system detects Refer to “To operate” on page 6-123.
an obstruction.
 When the sensor system detects an obstruc- Refer to “To operate” on page 6-127.
tion.
This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.
Screen Solution
We recommend you to have it checked. Refer to “Service reminder” for further details on page
5-9.

The setting for rest interval can be changed.
Screen Solution
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the time until “REST REMINDER” is displayed” on page 5-16.
The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to drive
without having a rest, the buzzer sounds approximately every 5 minutes to encourage you to
5
take a rest.
 In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous dis-
play screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the buzzer and display encourage
you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds 3 times.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or put the operation mode in OFF.
• The multi information display switch is held for approximately 2 seconds or more.

Indicator and warning lamps (multi information display - Type 2)
Indicator and warning lamps (multi information display - Type 2)

E00501504022
1- Front fog lamp indicator lamp* 9- Rear fog lamp indicator lamp* → 15- Fuel filter indicator lamp (diesel pow-
 P.5-51 P.5-51 ered vehicles) → P.5-52
2- Turn-signal indicator lamps/Hazard 10- Cruise control indicator lamp* → 16- A/T fluid temperature warning lamp
warning indicator lamps  P.5-51 P.6-86 (vehicles with A/T) → P.6-37
3- High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-51 11- Engine oil level warning lamp/Diesel 17- Oil pressure warning lamp  P.5-54
4- Rear differential lock indicator lamp* particulate filter (DPF) warning lamp* 18- Washer fluid level warning lamp* 
→ P.6-62 If this lamp blinks, refer to “Engine oil P.5-55
5- 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp* level warning lamp”  P.5-55 19- Multi information display  P.5-18
→ P.6-48, 6-54 If this lamp illuminates, refer to “Die- 20- Security indicator lamp → P.3-20
6- Low-range indicator lamp* → P.6-48, sel particulate filter (DPF)”  P.6-28 For details, refer to “Steering wheel
6-54 12- Diesel preheat indicator lamp (diesel lock” on page 6-20. (if so equipped)
7- Position lamp indicator lamp  P.5-51 powered vehicles) → P.5-51 21- For details, refer to “Warning activa-
8- LED headlamp warning lamp* → 13- Charge warning lamp  P.5-54 tion” on page 3-11. (if so equipped)
P.5-55 14- Check engine warning lamp  P.5-53 22- Door-ajar warning lamp  P.5-54

Indicator lamps
23- Seat belt warning lamp When the hazard warning lamp switch is
 P.4-16 pressed, all turn-signal lamps will flash on
Position lamp indicator lamp
E00508901314
24- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning and off continuously.
lamp  P.6-80 This indicator lamp illumi-
25- Active Stability & Traction Control nates while the position lamps
High-beam indicator lamp are on.
(ASTC) indicator lamp*  P.6-84 E00501801297
(ASTC) OFF indicator lamp*  P.6-84 This indicator lamp illumi-
27- Supplemental restraint system (SRS) nates when the high-beam is 5
warning lamp  P.4-41 used.
28- Brake warning lamp (red)  P.5-52 Diesel preheat indicator lamp
(diesel-powered vehicles)
Indicator lamps E00502301420
This indicates the glow plug

E00501600100
Front fog lamp indicator lamp* preheat condition.
E00501901634
[Except for vehicles equipped
Turn-signal indicator with the keyless operation
lamps/Hazard warning indica- This lamp illuminates while
system]
the front fog lamps are on.
tor lamps When the ignition switch is turned to the
E00501701645 “ON” position, the lamp illuminates. As the
glow plug becomes hot, the lamp goes out
These indicator lamps blink on
and the engine can be started.
and off when a turn-signal
[For vehicles equipped with the keyless oper-
lamp is operating.
ation system]
Rear fog lamp indicator lamp* When the operation mode is put in ON, the
E00502001401
lamp illuminates and preheating of the glow
plug starts automatically. As the glow plug
This lamp illuminates while
NOTE the rear fog lamp is on.
becomes hot, the lamp goes out and the
 If the blinking is too fast, the cause may be a engine starts.
blown lamp bulb or a faulty turn-signal con-
nection.

Warning lamps
CAUTION Fuel filter indicator lamp (die- Warning lamps

 If the diesel preheat indicator lamp comes on sel- powered vehicles equipped E00502400147
after the engine is started, the engine speed
may not rise above the idling speed because with the multi information dis-
of fuel freezing. In this case, keep the engine play - type 2) Brake warning lamp (red)
E00502503918
idling for approximately 10 minutes, then E00509901382
turn off the ignition switch or put the opera- This lamp illuminates when
This indicator lamp illumi-
the ignition switch is turned to
5 tion mode in OFF and immediately turn it on
or put in ON again to confirm that the diesel
nates when the ignition switch
the “ON” position or the oper-
is turned to the “ON” position
preheat indicator lamp is off. ation mode is put in ON, and
or the operation mode is put in
goes off after a few seconds.
ON, and goes off after the
Always make sure that the lamp goes off
engine has started. If it lights up while the
NOTE engine is running, it indicates that water has before driving.
 If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indi- With the ignition switch or the operation
accumulated inside the fuel filter; if this hap-
cator lamp is on for a longer time. mode in ON, the brake warning lamp illumi-
pens, take action as follows.
 [Except for vehicles equipped with the key- nates under the following conditions:
less operation system] Remove the water from the fuel filter. Refer
When the engine has not been started within  When the parking brake has been applied.
to “Removal of water from the fuel filter” on
approximately 5 seconds after the diesel pre-  When the brake fluid level in the reservoir
heat indicator lamp went out, return the igni-
page 8-5.
falls to a low level.
tion switch to the “LOCK” position. Then,  When the brake force distribution func-
When the lamp goes out, you can resume
turn the switch to the “ON” position to pre-
driving. If it either does not go out or comes tion is not operating correctly.
heat the engine again.
 When the engine is warm, the diesel preheat on from time to time, we recommend you to
have the vehicle inspected. With the ignition switch or the operation
indicator lamp does not come on even if the
mode in ON, a buzzer sounds under the con-
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or the operation mode is put in ON. dition that the vehicle speed exceeds a certain
speed with the parking brake applied.

Warning lamps
CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION

 In the situations listed below, brake perfor- • Should the brakes fail, use engine braking  When the warning lamp remains on or does
mance may be compromised or the vehicle to reduce your speed and observe the fol- not come on, there is the possibility that the
may become unstable if brakes are applied lowings. parking brake cannot be operated or
suddenly; consequently, avoid driving at [Vehicles with the parking brake of the released. Immediately contact the nearest
high speeds or applying the brakes suddenly. lever type] authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Furthermore, immediately the vehicle should Carefully pull the parking brake lever. When the warning lamp comes on during
be brought to a stop in a safe location and
your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI
[Vehicles with the Electric parking brake]
Keep pulling the Electric parking brake
driving, immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and contact your authorised
5
MOTORS dealer should be contacted. switch. (Refer to “Electric parking brake” MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. If you inev-
• The brake warning lamp does not illumi- on page 6-8) itably have to park, park the vehicle on level
nate when the parking brake is applied or and stable ground, shift the select position in
does not turn off when the parking brake is Depress the brake pedal to operate the stop “P” (PARK) position and place chocks or
released. lamp to alert the vehicles behind you. blocks.
• The brake warning lamp and the ABS
warning lamp illuminate at the same time. Electric parking brake warning
For details, refer to “ABS warning
lamp (yellow) (Vehicle equipped Check engine warning lamp
lamp/display” on page 6-80. E00502603179
• The brake warning lamp remains illumi- with the multi information dis- This lamp is a part of an
nated while driving.
play - Type 1) onboard diagnostic system
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
E00568900070 which monitors the emissions,
following manner when brake performance
This warning lamp will illu- engine control system or A/T
has deteriorated.
minate when there is a fault in control system.
• Depress the brake pedal harder than usual.
Even if the brake pedal moves down to the the Electric parking brake sys- If a problem is detected in one of these sys-
very end of its possible stroke, keep it tem. tems, this lamp illuminates or flashes.
pressed down hard. Normally, this warning lamp Although your vehicle will usually be driva-
illuminates when the ignition switch is turned ble and not need towing, we recommend you
to the “ON” position or the operation mode is to have the system checked as soon as possi-
put in ON, and goes off in a few seconds. ble.
This lamp will also illuminate when the igni-
tion switch is turned “ON” or the operation
mode is put in ON, and goes off after the
engine has started. If it does not go off after
Warning lamps
the engine has started, we recommend you to started. If it illuminates while the engine is
have the vehicle checked.
Charge warning lamp running, the oil pressure is too low.
E00502702362
Turn the engine off and have it inspected.
This lamp illuminates when
CAUTION the ignition switch is turned to
 Prolonged driving with this lamp on may the “ON” position or the oper- CAUTION
cause further damage to the emission control ation mode is put in ON, and  This warning lamp does not indicate the
system. It could also affect fuel economy and goes off after the engine has amount of oil level in the engine. This must
5 drivability.
 If the lamp does not illuminate when the
started. be determined by checking the oil level on
the dipstick, while the engine is switched off.
On vehicle equipped with the multi informa-
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi- Refer to “Maintenance: Engine oil” on page
tion or the operation mode is put in ON, we
tion display - type 1, a warning is also dis- 10-5.
recommend you to have the system checked. played on the multi information display.  If this lamp illuminates when the engine oil
 If the lamp illuminates while the engine is level is not low, have it inspected.
running, avoid driving at high speeds and CAUTION  If you continue driving with low engine oil
have the system inspected by an authorised  If it illuminates while the engine is running, level or with this warning lamp illuminated,
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon as there is a problem in the charging system. engine seizure may occur.
possible. Immediately park your vehicle in a safe
Accelerator pedal and brake pedal response place and we recommend you to have it
may be negatively influenced under these
conditions.
checked. Door-ajar warning lamp (Vehi-
cle equipped with the multi
Oil pressure warning lamp information display - Type 2)
NOTE E00503302004
 The engine electronic control module (Vehicle equipped with the This lamp illuminates when a
accommodating the onboard diagnostic sys- multi information display - door or the tailgate is either
tem has various fault data (especially about open or not completely closed.
the exhaust emission) stored.
Type 2)
E00502801829
If the vehicle speed reaches
This lamp illuminates when approximately 5 mph with a
This data will be erased if a battery cable is the ignition switch is turned to door or the tailgate open or incompletely
disconnected which will make a rapid diagno- the “ON” position or the oper- closed, a buzzer sounds 4 times as a warning.
sis difficult. Do not disconnect a battery cable ation mode is put in ON, and
when the check engine warning lamp is ON. goes off after the engine has

Information screen display (Vehicle equipped with the multi information display - Type 1)
CAUTION Engine oil level warning lamp Washer fluid level warning
 Before moving your vehicle, check that the (Vehicle equipped with the lamp (Vehicle equipped with
warning lamp is OFF.
multi information display - the multi information display -
Type 2)* Type 2)*
E00502901253 E00569300039
This lamp comes on when the

This lamp blinks when the
ignition switch or the opera-
washer fluid is running low. 5
If the lamp comes on, replen-
tion mode is in ON, if it is
ish the container with washer
suspected that the engine oil
fluid.
level has increased exces-
Refer to “Washer fluid” on page 10-9.
sively.
Refer to “Refill capacities” on page 11-11.
CAUTION Information screen display

LED headlamp warning lamp*
E00569000078
 If this warning lamp blinks while driving, (Vehicle equipped with the
stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
This warning lamp in the engine, and check the engine oil level. multi information display -
instrument cluster will illumi- Refer to “Engine oil” on page 10-5. Type 1)
nate when there is a fault in E00524601191
the LED headlamps.
NOTE Brake warning display
 Immediately have your vehicle checked by
E00524701512
CAUTION an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer.
 If the warning lamp illuminates, there may
 If this warning lamp illuminates (not blink-
be a fault on the unit. Have the vehicle
ing), refer to “Diesel particulate filter (DPF)”
checked at an authorised MITSUBISHI
on page 6-28.
MOTORS dealer.
This warning is displayed if you drive with

the parking brake still applied. The warning

Information screen display (Vehicle equipped with the multi information display - Type 1)
lamp in the instrument cluster also illumi-
nates when the parking brake is applied.
CAUTION CAUTION
 If this warning stays illuminated and does • Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
If this warning is displayed, release the park-
not go out while driving, there is a danger of to reduce your speed and observe the fol-
ing brake as follows.
ineffective braking. If this happens, immedi- lowings.
[Vehicles with the parking brake of the lever ately park your vehicle in a safe place and [Vehicles with the parking brake of the
type] we recommend you to have it checked. lever type]
Lower the parking brake lever fully.  If the brake warning display is displayed and Carefully pull the parking brake lever.
5 Press down the Electric parking brake switch
the brake warning lamp and the ABS warn-
ing lamp are illuminated at the same time,
Keep pulling the Electric parking brake
while depressing the brake pedal. the braking force distribution function will switch. (Refer to “Electric parking brake”
not operate, so the vehicle may be destabi- on page 6-8)
lised during sudden braking. Avoid sudden
CAUTION braking and high-speed driving, stop the Depress the brake pedal to operate the stop
 If a vehicle is driven without releasing the vehicle in a safe place, and we recommend lamp to alert the vehicles behind you.
parking brake, the brake will be overheated, you to have it checked.
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the Charge warning display
following manner when brake performance
E00524801311
has deteriorated.
• Depress the brake pedal harder than usual.
Even if the brake pedal moves down to the
very end of its possible stroke, keep it
pressed down hard.
When the ignition switch or the operation If there is a fault with the charging system,
mode is put in ON, if the brake fluid is low, the warning display is displayed on the infor-
this warning is displayed. mation screen in the multi information dis-
The warning lamp in the instrument cluster play. The warning lamp in the instrument
also illuminates. cluster also illuminates.

Combination headlamps and dipper switch
CAUTION Engine oil level warning Combination headlamps

 If the warning is displayed while the engine display (diesel- powered vehi- and dipper switch
is running, immediately park your vehicle in
a safe place and we recommend you to have cles) E00506004123
it checked. E00526701183
Headlamps
Oil pressure warning display

NOTE
5
E00524901396
 When entering a country in which vehicles
are driven on the opposite side of the road to
When the ignition switch or the operation the country in which your vehicles is sup-
mode is in ON, if it is suspected that the plied, necessary measures have to be taken to
engine oil level has increased excessively, the avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. However,
warning display is displayed on the informa- headlamps on this vehicle do not need any
tion screen in the multi information display. adjustment.
If the engine oil pressure drops while the  Do not leave the lamps on for a long time
engine is running, the warning display is dis- while the engine is stationary (not running).
played on the information screen in the multi CAUTION A run-down battery could result.
information display.  If this warning is displayed while driving,  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
engine, and check the engine oil level. becomes foggy, but this does not indicate a
CAUTION Refer to “Maintenance: Engine oil” on page functional problem.
 If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is 10-5. When the lamp is switched on, the heat will
low, or the oil level is normal but the warn- remove the fog. However, if water gathers
ing is displayed, the engine may burn out and inside the lamp, we recommend you to have
be damaged.
 If the warning is displayed while the engine
NOTE checked.
 Immediately have your vehicle checked by
is running, immediately park your vehicle in
a safe place and check the engine oil level.
dealer.
Refer to “Maintenance: Engine oil” on page
10-5.
 If the warning is displayed while the engine
oil level is normal, have it inspected.

Type 1 Type 2 NOTE

 The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con-
Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps. Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps. trol can be adjusted. For further information,
contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
 If the front fog lamps (if so equipped) turn
on when they are supposed to with the switch
5 in the “AUTO” position, the lamps turn off
automatically with the ignition switch or the
operation mode off.
 When the headlamps are turned off by the
automatic on/off control with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position or the operation
mode in ON, the front fog lamps (if so
equipped) and rear fog lamp (if so equipped)
also go off. When the headlamps are subse-
OFF All lamps off OFF All lamps off quently turned back on by the automatic
on/off control, the front fog lamps also come
Position, tail, licence plate and instru- With the ignition switch or the
on but the rear fog lamp stay off. If you wish
ment panel lamps on operation mode is in ON, head- to turn the rear fog lamp back on, operate the
lamps, position, tail, licence plate switch again.
Headlamps and other lamps go on
and instrument panel lamps turn on  Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic
and off automatically in accord- on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to
AUTO
ance with outside light level. All the windscreen.
lamps turn off automatically when
the ignition switch is turned to
“OFF” position or the operation
mode is put in OFF.
Position, tail, licence plate and
instrument panel lamps on
Headlamps and other lamps go on


The ignition switch is turned to the If the driver’s door is opened when the opera-
NOTE “LOCK” or “ACC” position, or the key is tion mode is in ACC or OFF while the lamps
 If the lamps do not turn on or off with the
removed from the ignition switch. are on.
switch in the “AUTO” position, manually
[For vehicles equipped with the keyless
operate the switch and we recommend you to In both cases, the buzzer will automatically
have your vehicle checked. operation system]
The operation mode is put in OFF or stop if the auto-cutoff function is activated,
ACC. the lamp switch is turned off, or the door is
Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, closed.
etc.) auto-cutout function 5
NOTE
E00532701641
 The lamp auto-cutout will not function when Daytime running lamp*
 If the following operation is performed E00530601356
the lamp switch is in the “ ” position.
while the lamp switch is in the “ ” posi-
 The lamp auto-cutout function can also be The daytime running lamps comes on when
tion, the lamps are automatically turned disabled.
off when the driver’s door is opened. the engine is running and the lamp switch is
For further information, please contact your
[Except for vehicles equipped with the in the “OFF” or “AUTO” position and the tail
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
keyless operation system] lamps are off.
The ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK” or “ACC” position, or the key is Lamp monitor buzzer Dipper (High/Low beam
removed from the ignition switch. E00506101761 change)
[For vehicles equipped with the keyless
If the following operation is performed, a E00506201733
operation system]
buzzer will sound to remind the driver to turn When the lamp switch is in the “ ” posi-
The operation mode is put in OFF or
off the lamps. tion, the beam changes from high to low (or
ACC.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the key- low to high) each time the lever is pulled
 If the following operation is performed
less operation system] fully (1). While the high-beam is on, the
while the lamp switch is in the “ ” posi- If the driver’s door is opened when the key is
tion, the lamps are automatically turned high-beam indicator lamp in the instrument
in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or cluster will also illuminate.
off if the driver’s door then remains removed from the ignition switch while the
closed for approximately 3 minutes. lamps are on.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the [For vehicles equipped with the keyless oper-
keyless operation system] ation system]

Welcome light Coming home light

E00528902014 E00529001770
This function turns on the position and tail This function turns on the headlamps in the
lamps for approximately 30 seconds after the low beam setting for approximately 30 sec-
UNLOCK switch on the remote control trans- onds after the ignition switch is turned to the
mitter is pressed when the combination head- “OFF” position or the operation mode is put
lamps and dipper switch is in the “OFF” or in OFF.
5 “AUTO” position (for vehicles equipped with
the automatic lamp control). 1. Turn the combination headlamps and dip-
per switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO” posi-
tion (for vehicles equipped with the
NOTE automatic lamp control).
 While the welcome light function is operat-
Headlamp flasher ing, perform one of the following operations
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
E00506301428 position or put the operation mode in
to cancel the function.
The high-beams flash when the lever is OFF. Also, if a key was used to start the
• Press the LOCK switch on the remote con-
pulled slightly (2), and will go off when it is trol transmitter. engine, remove the key from the ignition
released. • Turn the combination headlamps and dip- switch.
When the high-beam is on, the high-beam 3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition
per switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster will switch to the “LOCK” position or putting
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
illuminate. tion or put the operation mode in ON.
the operation mode in OFF, pull the turn-
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
signal lever towards you.
NOTE • The headlamps can be set to come on in the

low beam setting.
 The high-beams can also flash when the
lamp switch is OFF. • The welcome light function can be deacti-
vated.
 If you turn the lamps off with the headlamps
set to high-beam, the headlamps are auto- For further information, please contact your
matically returned to their low-beam setting authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
when the lamp switch is next turned to the
“ ” position.

Headlamp levelling
4. The headlamps will come on in the low
beam setting for approximately 30 sec- Headlamp levelling CAUTION
 Always perform adjustments before driving.
onds. After the headlamps go off, the E00517400031
Do not attempt to adjust while driving, as it
headlamps can be turned on again in the
could cause an accident.
low beam setting for approximately Headlamp levelling switch
30 seconds by pulling the turn-signal (except for vehicle with LED 5 - person seat
lever towards you within 60 seconds of
turning the ignition switch to the “OFF”
headlamps)* Vehicle condition Switch position
position or putting the operation mode in E00517501912 5
OFF. The angle of the headlamp beam varies “0”
To turn on the headlamps again after depending upon the load carried by the vehi-
60 seconds of turning the ignition switch cle.
to the “LOCK” position or putting the The headlamp levelling switch can be used to
operation mode in OFF, repeat the process adjust the headlamp illumination distance “0”
from step 1. (when the lower beam is illuminated) so that
the headlamps’ glare does not distract other
NOTE drivers.
 While the coming home light function is Set the switch according to the following “1”
operating, perform one of the following table.
operations to cancel the function.
• Pull the turn-signal lever towards you.
• Turn the combination headlamps and dip- “3”
per switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in ON.
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
“4”
• The time that the headlamps remain on can
be changed.
• The coming home light function can be : 1 person
deactivated. :Full luggage loading
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. Switch position 0-

Turn-signal lever
Driver only / Driver + 1 front passenger Vehicle condition Switch position minated with the ignition switch in the “ON”
Switch position 1- position or the operation mode in ON, the
5 passengers (including driver) beam position of the headlamps is automati-
Switch position 3- “4” cally adjusted when the vehicle is stopped.
5 passengers (including driver) + Full
luggage loading
Switch position 4- :1 person
Turn-signal lever
E00506502892
Driver + Full luggage loading
5 : Full luggage loading
The turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is
7 - person seat operated (with the ignition switch or the oper-
Switch position 0-
Vehicle condition Switch position Driver only / Driver + 1 front passenger ation mode is in ON). At the same time, the
Switch position 1- turn-signal indicator flashes.
“0” Driver + 1 front passenger + 2 passen-
gers on third seat
Switch position 2-
7 passengers (including driver)
“0” Switch position 3-
7 passengers (including driver) + Full
luggage loading
Switch position 4-
“1” Driver + Full luggage loading
Automatic headlamp levelling 1- Turn-signals

“2” When making a normal turn, use posi-
(vehicles with LED headlamps) tion (1). The lever will return automati-
E00517601649
cally when cornering is completed.
This mechanism automatically adjusts the
“3” direction of the headlamps (beam position)
depending on changes in the condition of the
vehicle, such as the number of occupants or
luggage weight. When the headlamps are illu-

Hazard warning flasher switch

2- Lane-change signals
When moving the lever to (2) slightly
NOTE
 It is possible to change the tone of a sound-
to change a lane, the turn-signal lamps
ing buzzer as the turn-signal lamps flash.
and indicator lamp in the instrument [Vehicle equipped with the multi information
cluster will only flash while the lever is display - type 1]
operated. Refer to “Changing the turn-signal sound”
Also, when you move the lever to (2) on page 5-17.
slightly then release it, the turn-signal
lamps and indicator lamp in the instru-
[Vehicle equipped with the multi information
display - type 2]
5
ment cluster will flash 3 times. For further information, please contact your
NOTE
 If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the Hazard warning flasher Fog lamp switch
bulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burned
out. Have the vehicle inspected by an author-
switch E00506701233
E00506602239
 It is possible to activate the following func- Use the hazard warning flasher switch when
tions: the vehicle has to be parked on the road for
• Flashing of the turn-signal lamps when the any emergency.
Front fog lamp switch*
E00508301868
lever is operated with the ignition switch or The hazard warning flashers can always be
the operation mode is in ACC. operated, regardless of the ignition switch The front fog lamps can be operated while the
• The turn-signal lamps 3-flash function for position or the operation mode. headlamps or tail lamps are on. Turn the knob
lane changes can be deactivated.
in the “ON” direction to turn on the front fog
• The time required to operate the lever for Press the switch to turn on the hazard warn-
the 3-flash function can be adjusted.
lamps. An indicator lamp in the instrument
ing flashers, all turn-signal lamps flash con-
cluster will also come on. Turn the knob in
tinuously.
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. the “OFF” direction to turn off the front fog
To turn them off, press the switch again.
lamps. The knob will automatically return to
its original position when you release it.

Wiper and washer switch

[Vehicle without front fog lamps]
Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to
NOTE
 The rear fog lamp is automatically turned off
turn on the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog
when the headlamps or front fog lamps (if so
lamp off, turn the knob once in the “OFF”
equipped) are turned off.
direction. The knob will automatically return
 To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the
to its original position when you release it. knob once in the “ON” direction after turn-
ing on the headlamps. (Vehicle without front
[Vehicle with front fog lamps]
5 Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to
fog lamps)
 To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the
turn on the front fog lamps. Turn the knob knob twice in the “ON” direction after turn-
once more in the “ON” direction to turn on ing on the headlamps. (Vehicle with front fog
the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog lamp lamps)
NOTE off, turn the knob once in the “OFF” direc-
 The front fog lamps are automatically turned tion. Turn the knob once more in the “OFF”
off when the headlamps or tail lamps are direction to turn off the front fog lamps. The Wiper and washer switch
turned off. To turn the front fog lamps on knob will automatically return to its original
E00507102808
again, turn the knob in the “ON” direction position when you release it.
after turning on the headlamps or tail lamps. The windscreen wipers and washer can be
 Do not use fog lamps except in conditions of operated with the ignition switch or the oper-
fog, otherwise excessive lamp glare may ation mode in ON or ACC.
temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers. If the blades are frozen to the windscreen or
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
Rear fog lamp switch* otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
E00508401768
The rear fog lamp can be operated when the CAUTION

headlamps or front fog lamps (if so equipped)  If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
turn on.
freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
An indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
the glass with the defroster or rear window
comes on when the rear fog lamp is turned demister before using the washer.
on.


HI- Fast Use this function when you are driving in
Windscreen wipers mist or drizzle.
E00516901892
To adjust intermittent intervals
NOTE With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive)
 On vehicles with A/T, to ensure a clear rear-
position, the intermittent intervals can be
ward view, the rear window wiper will auto-
matically perform several continuous adjusted by turning the knob (A).
operations if the selector lever is put in the
“R” position while the windscreen wipers are
5
operating.
Refer to “Rear window wiper and washer”
on page 5-68.
Except for vehicles equipped with

rain sensor Vehicles equipped with rain sensor
E00517001627
1- Fast
2- Slow
NOTE
 The speed-sensitive-operation function of
the windscreen wipers can be deactivated.
Misting function MIST- Misting function
OFF- Off Move the lever in the direction of the arrow OFF- Off
INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive) and release, to operate the wipers once. AUTO- Auto-wiper control
LO- Slow


Rain sensor
The wipers will automatically oper-
CAUTION NOTE
 With the ignition switch or the operation  Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker
ate depending on the degree of wet-
mode in ON and the lever in the “AUTO” or label to the windscreen. Also, do not put
ness on the windscreen. position, the wipers may automatically oper- any water-repellent coating on the wind-
LO- Slow ate in the situations described below. screen. The rain sensor would not be able to
HI- Fast If your hands get trapped, you could suffer detect the extent of rain, and the wipers
injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be might stop working normally.
5 Rain sensor sure to turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position or put the operation mode
 In the following cases, the rain sensor may
be malfunctioning.
Can only be used when the ignition switch or in OFF, or move lever to the “OFF” position For further information, please contact your
the operation mode is in ON. to deactivate the rain sensor. authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the • When cleaning the outside surface of the • When the wipers operate at a constant inter-
rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain windscreen, if you touch on top of the rain val despite changes in the extent of rain.
(or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the sensor. • When the wipers do not operate even
wipers will operate automatically. • When cleaning the outside surface of the though it is raining.
windscreen, if you wipe with a cloth on top  The wipers may automatically operate when
Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the
of the rain sensor. things such as insects or foreign objects are
windscreen is dirty and the weather is dry.
• When using an automatic car wash. affixed to the windscreen on top of the rain
Wiper operation under these conditions can
• A physical shock is applied to the wind- sensor or when the windscreen is frozen.
scratch the windscreen and damage the wip-
screen. Objects affixed to the windscreen will stop
ers. the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
• A physical shock is applied to the rain sen-
sor. them. To operate the wipers again, move the
lever in the “LO” or “HI” position.
Also, the wipers may operate automatically
NOTE due to strong direct sunlight or electromag-
netic wave. To stop the wipers, place the
 To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this
lever in the “OFF” position.
operation of the wipers does not take place
 Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
even if the lever is put in the “AUTO” posi-
MOTORS dealer when replacing the wind-
tion when the vehicle is stationary and the
screen or reinforcing the glass around the
ambient temperature is approximately 0 °C
sensor.
or lower.

To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor Misting function
With the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor) Move the lever in the direction of the arrow
position, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity and release, to operate the wipers once.
of the rain sensor by turning the knob (B).
Use this function when you are driving in
mist or drizzle.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is
raised to the “MIST” position and released 5
when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will con-
tinue to operate while the lever is held in the
“MIST” position.
Windscreen washer
E00507202492
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the

windscreen by pulling the lever towards you.
“+”- Higher sensitivity to rain
The wipers operate automatically several
“-”- Lower sensitivity to rain
times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.
On vehicles equipped with the headlamp
washer, while the headlamps are on, the head-
NOTE lamp washer will operate once together with
 It is possible to activate the following func-
the windscreen washer.
tions:
• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensitive)
can be changed to intermittent operation
(vehicle-speed sensitive). The wipers will operate once if the lever is
• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensitive) moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob
can be changed to intermittent operation (C) is turned in the “+” direction when the
(except vehicle-speed sensitive). ignition switch is in the “ON” position or the
For further information, please contact your operation mode is in ON.

NOTE
 On vehicles with A/T, the rear window wiper
will automatically perform several continu-
ous operations if the selector lever is put in
the “R” position while the windscreen wipers
or the rear window wiper is operating. (auto-
matic operation mode)
5 After the automatic operation, the rear win-
dow wiper will stop operating if the knob is
in the “OFF” position. If the knob is in the
“INT” position, the rear window wiper will
INT - The wiper operates continuously return to the intermittent operation.
CAUTION for several seconds then operates It is possible to set the rear window wiper to
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the intermittently at intervals of perform the automatic operation only if the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may approximately every 8 seconds. selector lever is put in the “R” position while
freeze resulting in poor visibility. Heat the OFF - Off the rear window wiper is operating with the
glass with the defroster or demister before The washer fluid will be sprayed knob in the “INT” position.
using the washer.
- For further information, please contact your
onto the rear window when the
knob is turned fully in either direc-
 If the knob is in the “OFF” position, turn the
tion.
knob to the “INT” position twice quickly to
NOTE The wipers operate automatically operate the rear window wiper continuously.
 The wipers’ operation combined with spray- several times while the washer fluid (continuous operation mode)
ing the washer fluid can be deactivated. For is being sprayed. Turn the knob to the “OFF” position to stop
more details, consult an authorised the rear window wiper continuous operation.
 The interval for intermittent operation can be
adjusted.
Rear window wiper and washer authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
E00507302477
The rear window wiper and washer switch

can be operated with the ignition switch or
the operation mode in ON or ACC.

Rear window demister switch

During cold weather, add a recommended
Headlamp washer switch* Precautions to observe when washer solution that will not freeze in the
E00510101603 using wipers and washers washer reservoir. Failure to do so could
The headlamp washer can be operated with
E00507601529 result in loss of washer function and frost
 If the moving wipers become blocked damage to the system components.
the ignition switch or the operation mode in
partway through a sweep by ice or other
ON or ACC and the lamp switch at the “ ” deposits on the glass, the wipers may tem-
position. porarily stop operating to prevent the Rear window demister
motor from overheating. In this case, park switch 5
Push the button once and the washer fluid
will be sprayed on to the headlamps. the vehicle in a safe place, turn the igni- E00507902617
tion switch to the “LOCK” position or put
The rear window demister switch can be
the operation mode in OFF, and then
operated when the engine is running.
remove the ice or other deposits. Because
Press the switch to turn on the rear window
the wipers will start operating again after
demister. It will be turned off automatically in
the wiper motor cools down, check that
approximately 20 minutes. To turn off the
the wipers operate before using them.
demister within approximately 20 minutes,
 Do not use the wipers when the glass is
press the switch again.
dry.
The indicator lamp (A) will illuminate while
They may scratch the glass surface and
the demister is on.
the blades wear out prematurely.
 Before using the wipers in cold weather,
check that the wiper blades are not frozen Type 1
onto the glass. The motor may burn out if
NOTE the wipers are used with the blades frozen
 If the ignition switch or the operation mode onto the glass.
is in ON or ACC and the headlamps are on,  Avoid using the washer continuously for
the headlamp washer operates together with more than 20 seconds. Do not operate the
the windscreen washer the first time the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.
windscreen washer lever is pulled. Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
 Periodically check the level of washer
fluid in the reservoir and refill if required.

Horn switch
Type 2 Customizing the automatic rear NOTE

window demister (Vehicles  The factory setting is “Disable automatic
rear window demister”.
equipped with the rear window
demister switch - Type 2)
Horn switch
Function can be changed as desired, as stated
5
E00508001777
below.
Press the steering wheel on or around the
 Enable automatic rear window demister “ ”mark.
If the outside air temperature drops below
NOTE approximately 3 °C (37 °F), the rear win-
dow demister operates once automatically
 The demister switch is not to melt snow but
to clear mist. Remove snow before use of the after the engine starts.
demister switch.
 Disable automatic rear window demister
 To avoid unnecessary discharge of the bat-
tery, do not use the rear window demister
The rear window demister does not oper-
during starting of the engine or when the ate automatically.
engine is not running. Turn the demister off
immediately after the window is clear.  Setting change method
 When cleaning the inside of the rear window, Hold down the rear window demister
use a soft cloth and wipe gently along the switch for approximately 10 seconds or
heater wires, being careful not to damage the more.
wires. • When the setting is changed from enable
 Do not allow objects to touch the inside of to disable
the rear window glass, damaged or broken 3 sounds are emitted and the indicator
wires may result. lamp flashes 3 times.
• When the setting is changed from disa-
ble to enable
2 sounds are emitted and the indicator
lamp flashes 3 times.

Starting and driving
Economical driving ..........................................................................6-2 Hill Descent Control (HDC)*.........................................................6-77

Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-3 Brake assist system*.......................................................................6-79
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-3 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ......................................................6-80
Running-in recommendations ..........................................................6-4 Power steering system ...................................................................6-82
Parking brake ...................................................................................6-6 Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC)* ...............................6-82 6
Parking ...........................................................................................6-12 Cruise control* ...............................................................................6-85
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment ..................................6-13 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)* ......................................6-90
Inside rear-view mirror ..................................................................6-13 Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)* ............................6-102
Outside rear-view mirrors ..............................................................6-14 Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS)* ..............6-109
Ignition switch* ..............................................................................6-17 Blind Spot Warning (BSW)*........................................................ 6-114
Engine switch*................................................................................6-18
Steering wheel lock ........................................................................6-20 Reversing sensor system*.............................................................6-122
Starting and stopping the engine ....................................................6-23 Sensor system* .............................................................................6-125
Diesel particulate filter (DPF)* ......................................................6-28 Rear-view camera* .......................................................................6-129
Turbocharger operation*.................................................................6-29 Multi Around Monitor*................................................................6-133
Manual transmission* ....................................................................6-30 Cargo loads ..................................................................................6-142
5-Speed automatic transmission with sports mode*.......................6-32
8-Speed automatic transmission with sports mode*.......................6-39
Super select 4WD* .........................................................................6-46
Super select 4WD II*......................................................................6-50
Off Road mode*..............................................................................6-60
Rear differential lock* ....................................................................6-61
4-wheel drive operation* ................................................................6-66
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation ........6-73
Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles*...........................6-73
Limited-slip differential*................................................................6-75
Braking ..........................................................................................6-75
Hill start assist*...............................................................................6-76
Economical driving
The transfer shift lever or the drive mode-
Economical driving selector should be set to“2H” when driving
Tyre inflation pressure
E00600102435
4WD vehicles on normal roads and express
For economical driving, there are some tech- ways to obtain best possible fuel economy. Check the tyre inflation pressures at regular
nical requirements that have to be met. The intervals. Low tyre inflation pressure
prerequisite for low fuel consumption is a increases road resistance and fuel consump-
properly adjusted engine. In order to achieve
City traffic tion. In addition, low tyre pressures adversely
longer life of the vehicle and the most eco- affect tyre wear and driving stability.
nomical operation, have the vehicle Serviced Frequent starting and stopping increases the
average fuel consumption. Use roads with
6 by an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer at regular intervals in accordance with smooth traffic flow whenever possible. When
Cargo loads
the service standards. driving on congested roads, avoid use of a
low shift position at high engine speeds. Do not drive with unnecessary articles in the
Fuel economy and generation of exhaust gas
luggage compartment. Especially during city
and noise are highly influenced by personal
driving where frequent starting and stopping
driving habits as well as the particular operat- Idling is necessary, the increased weight of the vehi-
ing conditions. The following points should
cle will greatly affect fuel consumption. Also
be observed in order to minimize wear of
The vehicle consumes fuel even during avoid driving with unnecessary luggage or
brakes, tyres and engine as well as to reduce
idling. Avoid extended idling whenever pos- carriers, etc., on the roof; the increased air
environmental pollution.
sible. resistance will increase fuel consumption.
Starting the engine Speed Cold engine starting

Avoid sudden acceleration and sudden starts,
At higher the vehicle speed, more fuel is con- Starting of a cold engine consumes more fuel.
as they will increase fuel consumption.
sumed. Avoid driving at full speed. Even a Unnecessary fuel consumption is also caused
slight release of the accelerator pedal will by keeping a hot engine running. After the
Shifting save a significant amount of fuel. engine is started, commence driving as soon
as possible.
Shift only at an appropriate speed and engine
speed. Always use the highest shift position
possible.
6-2 Starting and driving

Driving, alcohol and drugs
Cooler or air conditioning Safe driving techniques

E00600300446
The use of the air conditioner will increase Driving safety and protection against injury
the fuel consumption. cannot be fully ensured. However, we recom-
mend that you pay extra attention to the fol-
lowing:
Driving, alcohol and drugs
E00600200070
Drink driving is one of the most frequent Seat belts

causes of accidents. 6
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired Before starting the vehicle, make sure that
even with blood alcohol levels far below the you and your passengers have fastened your
legal minimum. If you have been drinking, seat belts. Carrying children in the vehicle
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use  Never leave your vehicle unattended with
public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
Floor mats the key and children inside the vehicle.
ing a cold shower will not make you sober. Children may play with the driving con-
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription trols and this could lead to an accident.
WARNING  Make sure that infants and small children
drugs affect your alertness, perception and  Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by cor-
reaction time. Consult with your doctor or are properly restrained in accordance with
rectly laying floor mats that are suitable
pharmacist before driving while under the for the vehicle.
the laws and regulations, and for maxi-
influence of any of these medications. To prevent the floor mats from slipping mum protection in case of an accident.
out of position, securely retain them using  Prevent children from playing in the lug-
the hook etc. gage compartment. It is quite dangerous
WARNING Note that laying a floor mat over a pedal to allow them to play there while the vehi-
 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE. or laying one floor mat on top of another cle is moving.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your can obstruct pedal operation and lead to a
reflexes are slower and your judgment is serious accident.
impaired. Loading luggage
When loading luggage, be careful not to load

above the height of seats. This is dangerous
Starting and driving 6-3

Running-in recommendations
not only because rearward vision will be jected into the passenger compartment under
obstructed, but also the luggage may be pro- hard braking.
Running-in recommendations
E00600403956
During the running-in period for the first 1,000 miles, it is advisable to drive your new vehicle using the following precautions as a guideline to
aid long life as well as future economy and performance.
 Do not race the engine at high speeds.

6  Avoid rapid starting, accelerating, braking and prolonged high-speed running.
 Keep to the running-in speed limit shown below.
Please note that the legal speed limits displayed must be adhered to.
 Do not exceed loading limits.
 Refrain from towing a trailer.

Parking brake
4WD models
Speed limit
Diesel-powered vehicles
Shift point Petrol-powered vehicles
4D56 4N15
2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc 2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc 2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc
1st gear 9 mph 3 mph
2nd gear 19 mph 6 mph
6 3rd gear 31 mph 12 mph
4th gear 40 mph 16 mph
7th gear 71 mph
28 mph
8th gear 75 mph
CAUTION
 On 4WD vehicles, the “4LLc” range gives maximum torque for low-speed driving on steep slopes, as well as sandy, muddy, and other difficult surfaces.
On vehicles with A/T, do not exceed speeds of approximately 44 mph in “4LLc” range.
Parking brake Lever type parking brake*

E00600502859 E00641800046
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-

plete stop, fully apply the parking brake suffi-
ciently to hold the vehicle.

Parking brake
To apply NOTE CAUTION

E00641900047  Apply sufficient force to the parking brake  Before driving, be sure that the parking
lever to hold the vehicle stationary after the brake is fully released and brake warning
foot brake is released. lamp is off.
 If the parking brake does not hold the vehicle If you drive without the parking brake fully
stationary after the foot brake is released, released, the warning display will appear on
contact your authorised MITSUBISHI the information screen in the multi informa-
MOTORS dealer. tion display and a buzzer sound when the
vehicle speed exceeds 8 km/h.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
parking brake, the brake will be overheated,
6
To release
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
E00642000045
brake failure.
1- Firmly depress and hold the brake Warning lamp
pedal, then pull the lever up without
pushing the button at the end of hand
grip.
Warning display
CAUTION
 Normally, when you intend to apply the
parking brake, firmly press the brake pedal
to bring the vehicle to a complete stop before
pulling the parking brake lever. 1- Firmly depress and hold the brake  If the brake warning lamp does not extin-
Pulling the parking brake lever with the pedal, then pull the lever up slightly. guish when the parking brake is fully
vehicle moving could make the rear wheels 2- Push the button at the end of hand grip. released, the brake system may be an abnor-
lock up, thereby making the vehicle unstable. 3- Lower the lever fully. mal.
It could also make the parking brake mal-
Contact your authorised MITSUBISHI
function.
MOTORS dealer.
For details, refer to “Brake warning lamp
(red)” on page 5-52.

Parking brake
NOTE To apply CAUTION

 To prevent the parking brake from being E00642200047  When the need arises to apply the parking
released unintentionally, the lever must be brake as the emergency brake for a failure of
pulled up slightly before it can be pushed the foot brake etc. during driving, pull and
down. Simply pressing the button does not hold the Electric parking brake switch.
enable the lever to be pushed down. While holding it, the brake is applied. At this
time, the following warning display appears
with a buzzer sound, but you should continue
to pull and hold the Electric parking brake
Electric parking brake*
6 E00642100046
switch.
The Electric parking brake is the system that

applies the parking brake by the electric
motor. 1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Pull up the Electric parking brake switch
while depressing the brake pedal. Use the parking brake only in emergency. By
NOTE the excessive use of the brake, the brake
 You may hear an operation noise from the parts are possibly worn early and the brake is
vehicle body when operating the Electric When the parking brake is applied, the brake disabled by the overheat.
parking brake. This does not indicate a mal- warning lamp (red) and the indicator lamp  If you operate the Electric parking brake
function and the Electric parking brake is (A) on the Electric parking brake switch switch repeatedly within a short time, the
operating normally. come on. warning display may appear and the parking
 When the battery is weak or dear, the parking brake cannot be applied temporarily. In such
brake cannot be released. Refer to “Emer- a case, wait for approximately one minute
gency starting” on page 8-2. and operate the Electric parking brake switch
again after the warning display disappears.

Parking brake
NOTE To release CAUTION

 When parking on steep grades, pull up the E00642300064  Before driving, be sure that the parking
Electric parking brake switch twice (once brake is released, the brake warning lamp
more after the operation is completed once). and the Electric parking brake indicator lamp
The maximum effect of the parking brake are off.
will be obtained. If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
 If the parking brake does not hold the vehicle parking brake, the brake will be overheated,
stationary after the foot brake is released, resulting in ineffective braking and possible
contact your authorised MITSUBISHI brake failure.
MOTORS dealer.  If the brake warning lamp does not extin-
guish when the parking brake is released, the
6
 When the operation mode is other than ON,
if the parking brake is applied, the Electric brake system may be an abnormal.
parking brake indicator lamp comes on for a Contact your authorised MITSUBISHI
while. 1. Make sure that the operation mode is MOTORS dealer.
 The brake warning lamp (red) and the indica- For details, refer to “Brake warning lamp
ON.
tor lamp on the Electric parking brake switch (red)” on page 5-52.
2. Press down the Electric parking brake
may blink. This does not indicate a malfunc-  If the vehicle is operated in cold weather and
switch while depressing the brake pedal. the vehicle speed does not increase more
tion if the lamps go off when the Electric
parking brake is released. than usual after releasing the electric parking
When the parking brake is released, the brake brake, the Electric parking brake may not be
warning lamp (red) and the indicator lamp on fully released. In this case, park the vehicle,
the Electric parking brake switch go off. and apply and release the Electric parking
brake again. When the vehicle speed does
not increase even if this operation is made,
CAUTION contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
 If the Electric parking brake switch is oper- MOTORS dealer.
ated when the Electric parking brake cannot
be applied or released due to a system mal-
function or failure, the brake warning lamp NOTE
(red) and the Electric parking brake indicator  When the operation mode is other than ON,
lamp will blink. If the lamps remain blink- the parking brake cannot be released.
ing, immediately park your vehicle in a safe
place and contact an authorised

Parking brake
Warning display
NOTE When the Electric parking brake
 When there is a malfunction in the Electric cannot be released
parking brake, release the Electric parking E00648500068
brake manually. Refer to “When the Electric
When the parking brake cannot be released
parking brake cannot be released” on page
6-10 for manual release of the Electric park-
because even if the Electric parking brake
ing brake. switch is operated, it can be released manu-
 When in other than “P” (PARK) position, if ally in the following procedures. The manual
If there is a malfunction in the system, the
you try to release the Electric parking brake release of the Electric parking brake can be
warning lamp will come on. In addition, the
6 without depressing the brake pedal, the
warning display will appear.
warning display appears on the information
used only when the Electric parking brake
needs to be released in an emergency.
screen in the multi information display.
Under normal conditions, the warning lamp
only comes on when the operation mode is WARNING
put in ON and goes off a few seconds later.  Before the manual release of the Electric
parking brake, check the area around the
vehicle is safe.
 If you start driving without releasing the CAUTION  After the manual release of the Electric
Electric parking brake, the warning display  When the warning lamp remains on or does parking brake, have the vehicle inspected
will appear. not come on, there is the possibility that the at an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
parking brake cannot be operated or dealer immediately.
released. Immediately contact the nearest
When the warning lamp comes on during
driving, immediately stop the vehicle in a
CAUTION
safe place, and contact your authorised  Do not drive with the Electric parking brake
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. If you inev- applied. The brake parts may be worn early
Warning display itably have to park, park the vehicle on level and the brake may be disabled by overheat.
E00642400065 and stable ground, shift the selector lever in  Do not use the hexagon wrench for any pur-
Warning lamp (yellow) the “P” (PARK) position and place chocks or pose other than releasing the Electric parking
blocks. brake in an emergency.
1. Apply chocks to wheels.

2. Move the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position.
Parking brake
WARNING
 When releasing the Electric parking brake
manually, be sure to move the selector
lever to the “P” (PARK) position. Other-
wise, the vehicle may begin to move, which
may lead to an unexpected accident.
3. Stop the engine if it is running.

4. Make sure that the indicator lamp on the
Electric parking brake switch is off. 6
WARNING 8. Insert the hexagon wrench into the hole
 Be sure to ensure that the indicator lamp
where the plug was installed, and con-
on the Electric parking brake switch is off tinue to turn it anticlockwise while push-
before releasing the Electric parking ing it in.
6. Remove the cap by hooking the jack han-
brake manually. Otherwise, the Electric
dle (D) to the cap.
parking brake may operate and the hexa-
gon wrench may move suddenly, which
may cause injury.
5. Remove the bolts (A) (3 locations) secur-

ing the cap (B) with a hexagon wrench
(C).
CAUTION
7. Pull out the plug (E).  When performing the release operation, use
the hexagon wrench which are on-vehicle
tools, and do not use the power tool. Other-
wise, it may cause damage to the Electric
parking brake.

Parking
9. After turning the tool approximately 50 to On vehicles equipped with M/T, apply the
100 times while pushing it, it becomes parking brake and place the gearshift lever
Parking with the engine run-
hard to turn it. into the “R” (Reverse) position. ning
When the tool in turned to the opposite On vehicles equipped with A/T, apply the
direction by relaxing force to turn while parking brake and place the selector lever into Never leave the engine running while you
pushing it, the parking brake is released the “P” (PARK) position. take a short sleep/rest. Also, never leave the
completely. If necessary, apply chocks to wheels. engine running in a closed or poorly venti-
10. Install the plug and the cap in the reverse lated place.
procedure of removal. Parking on an uphill slope
6 WARNING
Parking Turn the front wheels away from the kerb and  Leaving the engine running risks injury or
E00600602704 move the vehicle back until the kerb side death from accidentally moving the gear-
wheel gently touches the kerb. shift lever (with M/T) or the selector lever
To park the vehicle, fully engage the parking (with A/T) or the accumulation of toxic
brake, and then move the gearshift lever to On vehicles equipped with M/T, apply the
exhaust fumes on the passenger compart-
1st or “R” (Reverse) position for vehicles parking brake and place the gearshift lever
ment.
equipped with M/T, or set the selector lever to into the 1st position.
“P” (PARK) position for vehicles equipped On vehicles equipped with A/T, apply the
with A/T. parking brake and place the selector lever into
the “P” (PARK) position. Where you park
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.
Parking on a hill
WARNING
NOTE  Do not park your vehicle in areas where
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, follow  If your vehicle is equipped with A/T, be sure combustible materials such as dry grass or
these procedures: to apply the parking brake before moving leaves can come in contact with a hot
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. If exhaust, since a fire could occur.
Parking on a downhill slope you move selector lever to the “P” (PARK)
position before applying the parking brake, it
may be difficult to disengage selector lever
Turn the front wheels towards the kerb and from the “P” (PARK) position when next you
When leaving the vehicle
move the vehicle forward until the kerb side drive the vehicle, requiring application of a
wheel gently touches the kerb. strong force the selector lever to move from Always carry the key and lock all doors when
the “P” (PARK) position. leaving the vehicle unattended.

Steering wheel height and reach adjustment

Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit
area. Inside rear-view mirror To adjust the vertical mirror
E00600802038 position
Adjust the rear-view mirror only after making
Steering wheel height and any seat adjustments so you have a clear view It is possible to move the mirror up and down
reach adjustment to the rear of the vehicle. to adjust its position.
E00600701649
1. Release the lever while holding the steer-

Type 1
ing wheel up.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
6
3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pull-
ing the lever fully upward. Type 2
WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view To adjust the mirror position
mirror while driving. This can be danger-
ous.
It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
Always adjust the mirror before driving.
left/right to adjust its position.
A- Locked Adjust the rear-view mirror to maximize the
B- Release view through the rear window.
WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while you are driving the vehicle.

Outside rear-view mirrors

When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON, the reflection factor of the mirror is auto-
matically changed.
NOTE
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity
could result.
6
1- Normal
2- Anti-glare Outside rear-view mirrors
To reduce the glare E00600900628
Type 2 To adjust the mirror position

Type 1 E00601001984
When the headlamps of the vehicles behind

The lever (A) at the bottom of the mirror can you are very bright, the reflection factor of WARNING
the rear-view mirror is automatically changed  Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view
be used to adjust the mirror to reduce the
to reduce the glare. mirrors while driving. This can be danger-
glare from the headlamps of vehicles behind
ous.
you during night driving. Always adjust the mirrors before driving.
 Your vehicle is equipped with convex type
mirrors.
Please take into consideration, but objects
you see in the mirror will look smaller and
farther away compared to a normal flat
mirror.
Do not use this mirror to estimate distance
of following vehicles when changing lanes.

Electric remote-controlled outside 3- Right

4- Left
rear-view mirrors 3. Return the lever (A) back to the middle
position (•).
The outside rear-view mirrors can be oper-
ated when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
or “ACC” position or the operation mode is Retracting and extending the
put in ON or ACC. outside mirrors
E00601101897
1. Place the lever (A) to the same side as the
mirror whose adjustment is desired.
The outside mirror can be folded in towards 6
the side window to prevent damage when
parking in narrow areas.
For vehicles equipped with the mirror
Except for vehicles retractor switch
equipped with the mir- CAUTION
ror retractor switch  Do not drive the vehicle with the mirror
folded in. Retracting and extending the mir-
The lack of rearward visibility normally pro- rors using the mirror retractor
vided by the mirror could lead to an accident.
switch
Vehicles equipped
with the mirror retrac- Except for vehicles equipped with the
tor switch mirror retractor switch With the ignition switch or the operation
mode in ON or ACC, press the mirror retrac-
Push the mirror towards the back of the vehi- tor switch to retract the mirrors.
cle with your hand to retract it in. When Press it again to extend the mirrors to their
extending the mirror, pull it out towards the original positions.
L- Left outside mirror adjustment front of the vehicle until it clicks to lock in After turning the ignition switch to the
R- Right outside mirror adjustment place. “LOCK” position or putting the operation
mode in OFF, it is possible to retract and
2. Press the switch (B) to the left, right, up or extend the mirrors using the mirror retractor
down to adjust the mirror position. switch for approximately 30 seconds.
1- Up
2- Down

Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 3-4.
NOTE Refer to “Keyless operation system: To oper-
 If you move a mirror by hand or it moves
ate using the keyless operation function” on
after hitting a person or object, you may not
pages 3-9.
be able to return it to its original position
using the mirror retractor switch. If this hap-
pens, push the mirror retractor switch to NOTE
place the mirror in its retracted position and  Functions can be modified as stated below.
then push the switch again to return the mir- Please consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
ror to its original position. MOTORS dealer.
6  When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail
to operate as intended, please refrain from
• Automatically extend when the driver’s
door is closed, and then the following oper-
repeated pushing of the retractor switch as ation is performed.
CAUTION this action can result in burn-out of the mir- [Except for vehicles equipped with the key-
 It is possible to retract and extend the mirrors ror motor circuits. less operation system]
by hand. After retracting a mirror using the Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” or
mirror retractor switch, however, you should Retracting and extending the mir- “ACC” position.
extend it by using the switch again, not by [Vehicles equipped with the keyless opera-
hand. If you extended the mirror by hand rors without using the mirror tion system]
after retracting it using the switch, it would retractor switch Put the operation mode in ON or ACC.
not properly lock in position. As a result, it • Automatically retract when the ignition
could move because of the wind or vibration [Except for vehicles equipped with keyless switch is turned to the “LOCK” position or
while you are driving, taking away your rear- the operation mode is put in OFF, and the
operation system]
ward visibility. driver’s door is then opened.
The mirrors automatically retract or extend
• Automatically extend when the vehicle
when the doors and tailgate are locked or
speed reaches 19 mph.
unlocked using the key switches of the key-
NOTE
less entry system.
 Be careful not to get your hands trapped
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 3-4.
while a mirror is moving.
[Vehicles with the keyless operation system]
The mirrors automatically retract or extend
when the doors and tailgate are locked or
unlocked using the key switches or the key-
less operation function of the keyless opera-
tion system.

Ignition switch*
NOTE LOCK NOTE

• Deactivate the automatic extension func-  Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
tion. The engine is stopped and the steering wheel immobilizer.
To start the engine, the ID code which the
The outside rear-view mirrors can be folded
locked. The key can only be inserted and
transponder inside the key sends must match
or extended by the following operations, removed in this position.
the one registered in the immobilizer com-
even if changing to the any of above. After puter.
pressing the “LOCK” switch to lock the ACC Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
doors and tailgate, if the “LOCK” switch is starting system)” on page 3-3.
pressed again twice in a row within approx-
imately 30 seconds, the outside rear-view The engine is stopped, but the audio system 6
mirrors will retract. After pressing the and other electric devices can be operated.
“UNLOCK” switch to unlock the doors and To remove the key
tailgate, if the “UNLOCK” switch is E00620401596
pressed again twice in a row within approx- ON For vehicles equipped with a M/T, when
imately 30 seconds, the outside rear-view removing the key, push the key in at the
mirrors will extend again. All the vehicle’s electrical devices can be “ACC” position and keep it depressed until it
operated. is turned to the “LOCK” position and remove
Ignition switch* it. For vehicles equipped with A/T, when
E00601403344 START removing the key, first set the selector lever
to the “P” (PARK) position, and push the key
in at the “ACC” position and keep it
The starter motor operates. After the engine
depressed until it is turned to the “LOCK”
has started, release the key and it will auto-
position, and remove it.
matically return to the “ON” position.

Engine switch*
Engine switch* NOTE

E00631801415  When operating the engine switch, press the
switch all the way in. If the switch is not
In order to prevent theft, the engine will not fully pressed, the engine may not start or the
start unless a preregistered keyless operation operation mode may not change. If the
key is used. (Engine immobilizer function) engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no
If you are carrying the keyless operation key, need to hold the engine switch down.
you can start the engine.  When the battery in the keyless operation
key has worn out, or the keyless operation
6 key is out of the vehicle, a warning lamp will
blink for 5 seconds or warning display will
appear.
CAUTION
 Do not remove the ignition key from the Warning lamp (mono-color liquid crystal
ignition switch while driving. The steering display)
wheel will be locked, causing loss of control.
 If the engine is stopped while driving, the
brake servomechanism will cease to function
and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, Warning display (color liquid crystal dis-
the power steering system will not function play)
and it will require greater manual effort to
operate the steering.
 Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for CAUTION
a long time when the engine is not running,  The indicator lamp (A) will flash orange
doing so will cause the battery to be dis- when there is a problem or malfunction in
charged. the keyless operation system. Never drive if
 Do not turn the key to the “START” position the indicator lamp on the engine switch is
while the engine is running. Doing so could flashing orange. Immediately contact your
damage the starter motor. authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
 If the engine switch operation is not smooth
and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the
switch. Immediately contact your authorised

Engine switch*
Operation mode of the engine NOTE CAUTION

switch and its function  Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic  When the engine is not running, put the oper-
immobilizer. ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation
To start the engine, the ID code which the mode in ON or ACC for a long time when
OFF transponder inside the key sends must match the engine is not running may cause the bat-
the one registered in the immobilizer com- tery to be discharged, making it impossible
The indicator lamp on the engine switch turns puter. Refer to “Electronic immobilizer to start the engine, lock and unlock the steer-
off. (Anti-theft starting system)” on page 3-3. ing wheel.
The operation mode cannot be put in OFF  When the battery is disconnected, the current
when the selector lever is in any position operation mode is memorized. After recon-
necting the battery, the memorized mode is
6
other than the “P” (PARK) position. (A/T) Changing the operation mode
selected automatically. Before disconnect-
E00631901227
ing the battery for repair or replacement,
ACC If you press the engine switch without make sure to put the operation mode in OFF.
depressing the brake pedal (A/T) or the clutch Be careful if you are not sure which opera-
Electrical devices such as the audio and
pedal (M/T), you can change the operation tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery
accessory socket can be operated. is run down.
mode in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF.
The indicator lamp on the engine switch illu-  The operation mode cannot be changed from
minates orange. OFF to ACC or ON if the keyless operation
key is not detected to be in the vehicle. Refer
ON to “Keyless operation system: Operating
range for starting the engine and changing
All vehicle’s electrical devices can be oper- the operation mode” on page 3-8.
ated.  When there is the keyless operation key in
The indicator lamp on the engine switch illu- the vehicle and the operation mode isn’t
minates green. The indicator lamp turns off change, the keyless operation key may have
worn out.
when the engine is running.

Steering wheel lock

reminder inner buzzer sounds intermittently
ACC power auto-cutout func- Operation mode OFF reminder to remind you to put the operation mode in
tion system OFF.
E00632801180 E00632201142
After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed Warning lamp (mono-color liquid crystal dis- Warning display (color liquid crystal display)
with the operation mode in ACC, the function play)
automatically cuts out the power for the audio
system and other electric devices that can be
operated with that position. {only that
6 driver’s door has closed and the selector lever
Warning display (color liquid crystal display)
in the “P” (PARK) position (A/T)}
When you open driver’s door or the engine Steering wheel lock
switch operate again, the power is supplied E00601501947
again.
Except for vehicles equipped with the
keyless operation system
NOTE
 When ACC power supply automatic stop, the When the operation mode is in any mode
steering wheel can’t lock and you can’t lock other than OFF, if you close all the doors and To lock
and unlock the doors by the keyless entry the tailgate then try to lock the doors and the
key and keyless operation key. tailgate by pressing the driver’s or front pas- Remove the key at the “LOCK” position.
 It is possible to modify functions as follows: senger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the tail- Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
• The time until the power cuts out can be gate LOCK switch, warning display will
changed to approximately 60 minutes. appear and the outer buzzer will sounds and
• The ACC power auto-cutout function can you cannot lock the doors. To unlock
be deactivated.
For details, consult an authorised Turn the key to the “ACC” position while
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. Operation mode ON reminder moving the steering wheel slightly right and
system left.
E00632301114
If the driver’s door is opened with the engine

stopped and the operation mode in any mode
other than OFF, the operation mode ON

Steering wheel lock
NOTE CAUTION
• Close all the doors and the tailgate.  If the engine is stopped while driving, do not
• Open one of the doors or the tailgate when open a door or press the LOCK switch on the
all the doors and the tailgate are closed. key until the vehicle stops in a safe place.
• Lock all the doors and the tailgate with the This could cause the steering wheel to lock,
keyless entry system or the keyless opera- making it impossible to operate the vehicle.
tion function.  Carry the key with you when leaving the
• Shift the selector lever to the “P”(PARK) vehicle.
position. (A/T)  If your vehicle needs to be towed, perform
 When the door or the tailgate is opened while the following operation to unlock the steer- 6
the steering wheel does not lock, warning ing wheel.
display will appear and the buzzer sounds to • On vehicles with M/T, put the operation
CAUTION alert the steering wheel is unlocked. mode in ACC or ON.
• On vehicles with A/T, put the operation
 Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.
mode in ON.
In some countries, it is prohibited to leave
the key on the vehicle when parked.
For vehicles equipped with the keyless

operation system
To unlock
To lock
The following methods can be used to unlock
After pressing the engine switch and opera- the steering wheel.
tion mode in OFF, when driver’s door is  Put the operation mode in ACC.
opened, the steering wheel is locked.  Start the engine.
NOTE
 When the following operation is performed
with the operation mode in OFF, the steering
wheel is locked.
• Open or close the driver’s door.

Steering wheel lock
NOTE NOTE NOTE

 When the steering wheel does not unlock,  When the steering wheel lock is abnormal,  If there is a fault in the steering wheel lock,
the warning lamp will blink and the inner the warning lamp illuminates or warning dis- the warning lamp illuminates and the inner
buzzer will sounds and warning lamp illumi- play will appear and the inner buzzer will buzzer sounds or warning display will
nates. Press the engine switch again while sounds. Put the operation mode in OFF and appear. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
moving the steering wheel slightly right and then press the lock switch of the keyless safe place and contact your nearest author-
left. operation key. And then press the engine ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
switch, If the warning lamp illuminates
Warning lamp (mono-color liquid crystal again, contact an authorised MITSUBISHI Warning lamp (mono-color liquid crystal
6 display) MOTORS dealer. display)
Warning lamp (mono-color liquid crystal

display)
Warning display (color liquid crystal dis- Warning display (color liquid crystal dis-
play) play)
Warning display (color liquid crystal dis-

play)

Starting and stopping the engine
Starting and stopping the CAUTION WARNING

engine  Do not run the engine at high speeds or drive
the vehicle at high speeds until the engine
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
ventilated area any longer than is needed
E00620601530
has had a chance to warm up. to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
 Release the ignition key as soon as the Carbon monoxide gases are odourless and
Tips for starting engine starts to avoid damaging the starter can be fatal.
motor.
 If your vehicle is equipped with a turbo-
Except for vehicles equipped with the charger, do not stop the engine immediately CAUTION
keyless operation system after high-speed or uphill driving. First allow  Never attempt to start the engine by pushing 6
the engine to idle to give the turbocharger a or pulling the vehicle.
 Do not operate the starter motor continu- chance to cool down.  Do not run the engine at high speeds or drive
ously longer than 10 seconds; doing so
the vehicle at high speeds until the engine
could run down the battery. If the engine For vehicles equipped with the keyless has had a chance to warm up.
does not start, turn the ignition switch operation system  If your vehicle is equipped with a turbo-
back to “LOCK”, wait a few seconds, and charger, do not stop the engine immediately
then try again. Trying repeatedly with the  The operation mode can be in any mode after high-speed or uphill driving. First allow
starter motor still turning will damage the to start the engine. the engine to idle to give the turbocharger a
starter mechanism.  The starter motor will be turning for up to chance to cool down.
approximately 15 seconds if the engine
switch is released at once. Pressing the
WARNING
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
engine switch again while the starter Starting the engine (petrol-pow-
motor is still turning will stop the starter
ventilated area any longer than is needed
motor. The starter motor will be turning
ered vehicles)
to move your vehicle in or out of the area. E00620701791
Carbon monoxide gases are odourless and for up to approximately 30 seconds while
can be fatal. the engine switch is pressed. Your vehicle equipped with an electronically
If the engine does not start, wait for a controlled fuel injection system. When start-
while and then attempt to start the engine ing the engine, do not depress the accelerator
CAUTION again. Trying repeatedly with the starter pedal.
motor still turning will damage the starter The starting procedure is as follows:
 Never attempt to start the engine by pushing
or pulling the vehicle. mechanism.
1. Fasten the seat belt.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.


3. Press and hold the brake pedal down 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
firmly with your right foot.
NOTE as lamps, air conditioning blower and rear
 A ticking noise may be heard after starting
window demister, are turned off.
the engine. This is not an abnormal condi-
NOTE tion. The noise will disappear after a short
2. While depressing the brake pedal, press
 When the engine is not started, it may time of engine running. the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
become hard to depress the brake pedal and If the ticking noise continues after the engine there, then crank the engine. Release the
the vehicle may not be able to detect the is warmed up, have your vehicle checked at accelerator pedal, immediately after the
pedal operation. an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS engine starts.
Therefore the engine may not be started. In dealer. 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
such a case, depress the brake pedal more
6 firmly than usual.
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
up. These will disappear as the engine warms
could be flooded with too much petrol.
While depressing the brake pedal, push
up. the accelerator pedal all the way down
4. Make sure the selector lever is in the  When starting the engine, the selector lever and hold it there, then press the engine
“P”(PARK) position. is in a position other than the “P” (PARK) or switch to crank the engine. If the engine
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or you
does not start after 5 to 6 seconds, press
pressed the engine switch without depressing
the engine switch to stop the engine, and
the brake pedal, warning display will appear.
release the accelerator pedal.Put the oper-
Warning display ation mode in OFF. Wait a few seconds,
and then press the engine switch to crank
the engine again while depressing the
brake pedal, but do not push the accelera-
tor pedal. If the engine fails to start, repeat
these procedures. If the engine still will
not start, contact your authorised
5. Press the engine switch. When the engine is hard to start
6. Make certain that all warning lamps are Using the MIVEC engine
functioning properly. After several attempts, you may experience
that the engine still does not start. The MIVEC engine automatically switches
its intake-valve control between a low-speed
mode and a high-speed mode in accordance


with driving conditions for maximum engine 6. Turn the ignition key to the “START”
Vehicles Vehicles Vehicles
performance. position without depressing the accelera-
with 6M/T with 5M/T with A/T
tor pedal, and release it when the engine
NOTE starts.
 To protect the engine, the high-speed mode
may not be selected while the engine coolant NOTE
temperature is low. In such a case, the engine  Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
revolutions do not rise to over 5,000 r/min up. These will disappear as the engine warms
even if the accelerator pedal is depressed. up.
6
Starting the engine (diesel-pow- 5. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi- operation system
ered vehicles) tion.
E00625501404
The diesel preheat indicator lamp will 1. Fasten the seat belt.
first illuminate, and then after a short time 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
Except for vehicles equipped with the go out, indicating that preheating is com- 3. Press and hold the brake pedal down
keyless operation system pleted. firmly with your right foot.
1. Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat
belt.
NOTE NOTE
 If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indi-  When the engine is not started, it may
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
cator lamp is on for a longer time. become hard to depress the brake pedal and
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
 When the engine has not been started within the vehicle may not be able to detect the
4. On vehicles equipped with M/T, depress approximately 5 seconds after the diesel pre- pedal operation.
the clutch pedal all the way and place the heat indicator lamp went out, return the igni- Therefore the engine may not be started. In
gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position switch to the “LOCK” position. Then, such a case, depress the brake pedal more
tion. turn the switch to the “ON” position to pre- firmly than usual.
On vehicles equipped with A/T, make heat the engine again.
sure the selector lever is in the “P”  When the engine is warm, the diesel preheat
4. On vehicles equipped with M/T, depress
(PARK) position. indicator lamp does not come on even if the
the clutch pedal all the way and place the
ignition key is placed in the “ON” position.
Start the engine by turning the ignition key gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
right to the “START” position. tion.


On vehicles equipped with A/T, make
sure the selector lever is in the
NOTE NOTE
 If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indi-  When starting the engine, the selector lever
“P”(PARK) position.
cator lamp is on for a longer time. is in a position other than the “P” (PARK) or
Vehicles Vehicles  Putting the operation mode in ON will also the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or you
with 6M/T with 5M/T start preheating the engine. When the engine pressed the engine switch without depressing
has not been started within approximately 5 the brake pedal, warning display will appear.
seconds after the diesel preheat indicator (A/T)
lamp went out, put the operation mode in
OFF. Then, attempt the engine start proce- Warning display (color liquid crystal dis-
6 dure to preheat the engine again. play)

 Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
up. These will disappear as the engine warms
up.
 When starting the engine, you pressed the
engine switch without depressing the clutch
Vehicles Vehicles pedal, warning display will appear (M/T).
with 5A/T with 8A/T
Warning display (color liquid crystal dis- Stopping the engine
play) E00620801369
Except for vehicles equipped with the

keyless operation system
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. Fully engage the parking brake while
depressing the brake pedal.
3. For vehicles equipped with M/T, turn the
5. Press the engine switch. ignition switch to the “LOCK” position to
The diesel preheat indicator lamp will stop the engine, and then move the gear-
first illuminate, and then after a short time shift lever to the 1st (on a uphill) or “R”
go out, indicating that preheating is com- (Reverse) (on a downhill) position.
pleted. The engine will start. For vehicles equipped with A/T, place the
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position,
and stop the engine.


2. Fully engage the parking brake while Remove the keyless operation key from the
depressing the brake pedal. key slot after starting the engine or changing
operation system
3. On vehicles with M/T, press the engine the operation mode.
switch to stop the engine, move the gear-
WARNING shift lever to the 1st (on a uphill) or “R”
Except for vehicles with 8A/T
 Do not operate the engine switch while (Reverse) (on a downhill) position.
driving except in an emergency. If the On vehicles with A/T, move the selector
engine is stopped while driving, the brake
lever to the “P” (PARK) position, press
servomechanism will cease to function and
the engine switch to stop the engine.
braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
the power steering system will not func- 6
tion and it will require greater manual Fuel injection amount learning
effort to operate the steering. This could
result in a serious accident. process (diesel-powered vehi-
cles)
E00627900027
NOTE To keep exhaust emissions and engine noise
 If you have to bring the engine to an emer- Vehicles with 8A/T
low, the engine very occasionally performs a
gency stop while driving, press and hold the
learning process for the fuel injection
engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press
amount.
it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will
stop and the operation mode will go to ACC. The engine sounds slightly different from
 Do not stop the engine with the selector lever usual while the learning process is taking
in any position other than the “P” (PARK) place. The change in the engine sound does
position (A/T). If the engine is stopped with not indicate a fault.
the selector lever in any position other than
the “P” (PARK) position, the operation mode
will go to ACC rather than OFF.
If the keyless operation key is
Put the operation mode in OFF after placing not operating properly
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi- E00632901165
NOTE
tion.  Do not insert into the key slot anything other
Insert the keyless operation key into the key
than the keyless operation key. This could
slot. Starting the engine and changing the cause damage or a malfunction.
1. Stop the vehicle. operation mode should be now possible.

Diesel particulate filter (DPF)*

ation key in the key slot, the warning lamp
NOTE will blink and the outer buzzer sounds for
CAUTION
 Remove the object or additional key from the  Do not use any type of fuel or engine oil that
approximately 3 seconds and the inner buzzer
keyless operation key before inserting the is not specified for your vehicle. Also, do not
sounds for approximately 1 minute or warn-
key into the key slot. The vehicle may not be use any moisture-removing agent or other
able to receive the registered ID code from ing display will appear to remind you to fuel additive. Such substances could have a
the registered key. Therefore, the engine may remove the key. detrimental effect on the DPF.
not start and the operation mode may not Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 2-2 and
change. “Engine oil” on page 10-5.
 The keyless operation key is fixed by insert-
Diesel particulate filter
6 ing the key into the key slot as illustrated. (DPF)*
When removing the key, pulling out the key E00619801431 NOTE
from the slot.  To minimize the likelihood of excessive
The diesel particulate filter (DPF) is a device accumulation of PM, try to avoid driving for
that captures most of the particulate matter
Keyless operation key (PM) in the exhaust emissions of the diesel
long periods at low speeds and repeatedly
driving short distances, and try to keep high
reminder* engine. The DPF automatically burns away engine speed driving as much as possible.
E00633001118 trapped PM during vehicle operation. Under  The engine sounds slightly different from
certain driving conditions, however, the DPF usual while the DPF automatically burns
Warning lamp (mono-color liquid crystal dis- is not able to burn away all of the trapped PM away trapped PM. The change in the engine
play) and, as a result, an excessive amount of PM sound does not indicate a fault.
accumulates inside it.
WARNING DPF warning lamp/warning

Warning display (color liquid crystal display)  The DPF reaches very high temperatures. display
Do not park your vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as dry grass or Warning lamp (mono-color liquid crystal dis-
leaves can come in contact with a hot play)
exhaust system since a fire could occur.
If the operation mode is in OFF and the

driver’s door is opened with the keyless oper-

Turbocharger operation*
Warning display (color liquid crystal display) nate. Have the system inspected by an
CAUTION authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
 You do not have to continuously drive
exactly as indicated above. Always strive to
drive safely in accordance with road condi- CAUTION
tions.  Continuing to drive with the DPF warning
display and check engine warning lamp illu-
minating could result in engine trouble and
The DPF warning lamp comes on or warning
DPF damage.
display will appear in the event of an abnor- If the DPF warning lamp and
mality in the DPF system. check engine warning lamp or 6
the DPF warning display and Turbocharger operation*
If the DPF warning indica- check engine warning lamp illu- E00611200083
tor/warning display appears minate at the same time during
during vehicle operation vehicle operation CAUTION
 Do not run the engine at high speeds (for
Steady illumination of the DPF warning indi- Warning lamp example, by revving it or by accelerating
cator/warning display shows that the DPF has rapidly) immediately after starting it.
not been able to burn away all of the trapped  Do not stop the engine immediately after
high-speed or uphill driving. First allow the
PM and that, as a result, an excessive amount
engine to idle to give the turbocharger a
of PM has accumulated inside it. To enable
Warning display (color liquid crystal display) chance to cool down.
the DPF to burn away the PM, try to drive the
vehicle as follows:
 With the bar graph of engine coolant tem- Turbocharger

perature display stabilized in roughly the
middle of the scale, drive for approxi- The turbocharger increases engine power by
mately 20 minutes at a speed of at least pushing large amounts of air into the engine’s
If an abnormal condition occurs in the DPF
25 mph. cylinders. The finned parts inside the turbo-
system, the DPF warning lamp and check
engine warning lamp or the DPF warning dis- charger turn at extremely high speeds and are
If the DPF warning indicator lamp/warning subjected to extremely high temperatures.
play and check engine warning lamp illumi-
display subsequently stays on, contact your They are lubricated and cooled by engine oil.
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. If the engine oil is not replaced at the speci-
Manual transmission*
fied intervals, the bearings may seize or emit
abnormal noise.
CAUTION Moving the gearshift lever to
 Do not put the gearshift lever into the reverse the “R” (Reverse) position
position while the vehicle is moving for- E00615401266
ward. Doing so could damage the transmis-
sion.
 Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
Vehicles equipped with 5 M/T
while driving as this will cause premature
clutch wear or damage. To shift into the “R” (Reverse) position from
 Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position. 5th gear, move the gearshift lever to the “N”
6  Do not use the gearshift lever as a hand rest, (Neutral) position, and then move it to the
because this can result in premature wear of “R” (Reverse) position.
the transmission shift forks.
 Quick or slight clutch engagement made
while the engine is running at high speed Vehicles equipped with 6 M/T
1- Air compressor
will cause damage to the clutch and trans-
2- Compressed air mission because the tractive force is very Depress and hold the gearshift lever to the
3- Cylinder great. “R” (Reverse) position.
4- Turbo fin
5- Turbine
6- Exhaust gas NOTE
 During cold weather, shifting may be diffi-
cult until the transmission lubricant has
Manual transmission* warmed up. This is normal and not harmful
E00602002034 to the transmission.
 If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the
The shift pattern is shown on the gearshift
clutch pedal again; the shift will then be eas-
lever knob. To start off, depress the clutch ier to make.
pedal all the way down and shift into 1st or  On vehicles equipped with 6M/T, in case of
“R” (Reverse) position. Then gradually hot weather condition or long time cruising
release the clutch pedal while depressing the with high speed, a speed limitation function
accelerator pedal. may work to restrict the oil temperature ris-
ing of the M/T. After the oil temperature
drops to the appropriate level, the speed lim-
itation function is cancelled.

Manual transmission*
CAUTION
 Do not depress the gearshift lever when
moving it to any position other than the “R”
(Reverse) position. If you always depress the
gearshift lever when moving it, you could
unintentionally move the gearshift lever to
the “R” (Reverse) position and cause an acci-
dent and/or a transmission fault.
Possible driving speed 6

E00610802796
Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this may cause excessive engine speed (the tachometer needle into the red zone) and damage the engine.
2WD models - Not UK Spec

Speed limit
Shift point
4D56 4N15
1st gear 35 km/h 35 km/h
2nd gear 65 km/h 65 km/h
3rd gear 110 km/h 105 km/h
4th gear 160 km/h 150 km/h
5th gear − 180 km/h
Vehicles with 5 M/T, use 5th gear whenever vehicle speed allows, for maximum fuel economy.

5-Speed automatic transmission with sports mode*

4WD models - Not UK Spec
Speed limit
Shift point 4D56 4N15
2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc 2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc
1st gear 35 km/h 15 km/h 35 km/h 10 km/h
2nd gear 65 km/h 35 km/h 65 km/h 25 km/h
3rd gear 110 km/h 55 km/h 105 km/h 40 km/h
6 4th gear 160 km/h 80 km/h 150 km/h 55 km/h
5th gear − − 180 km/h 75 km/h
5-Speed automatic transmis- Selector lever operation LHD

sion with sports mode* E00603302236
E00603202017
The transmission has 5 forward gears and
1 reverse gear.
The individual gears are selected automati-
NOTE cally, depending on the speed of the vehicle
 During running-in period or immediately
and the position of the accelerator pedal.
after reconnection of the battery cable, there
may be a case where gear shifts are not made
The selector lever (A) has 2 gates; the main
smoothly. This does not indicate a faulty gate (B) and the manual gate (C).
transmission.
Gear shifts will become smooth after the
transmission has been shifted several times
by the electronic control system.


the battery may be flat or the shift-lock mech-
RHD WARNING anism may be malfunctioning. Immediately
 Always depress the brake pedal when
have your vehicle checked by an authorised
shifting the selector lever into a gear from
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
tion. If you need to move the vehicle, shift the
Never put your foot on the accelerator selector lever as follows.
pedal while shifting the selector lever from
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- For LHD vehicles
tion.
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully
applied.
6
NOTE 2. Stop the engine if it is running.
LHD  To avoid erroneous operation, move the 3. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-
selector lever firmly into each position and driver with a cloth over its tip into the
briefly hold it there. Always check the posi- notch (A) of the cover. Pry gently as
tion shown by the selector lever position dis- shown to remove the cover.
play after moving the selector lever.
 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
selector lever from being moved from the
RHD “P” (PARK) position.
When the selector lever cannot be

shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi-
tion
E00629101176
While depressing the brake pedal,
move the selector lever through the When the selector lever cannot be shifted 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
gate. from the “P” (PARK) position to another foot.
position while the brake pedal is pressed and
Move the selector lever through the
held down with the ignition switch at the
gate.
“ON” position or the operation mode in ON,


5. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw- Vehicles equipped with the color liquid crystal
driver in the shift-lock release hole (B). display
Shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU-
TRAL) position while pressing the
straight blade (or minus) screwdriver
down.
Selector lever position indicator Selector lever positions

display E00603801898
E00603502007
When the ignition switch is turned to the “P” PARK

For RHD vehicles ON, the position of the selector lever is indi- This position locks the transmission to pre-
cated in the multi information display. vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully be started in this position.
applied.
2. Stop the engine if it is running. Vehicles equipped with the mono-color liquid
3. Depress the brake pedal with the right crystal display “R” REVERSE
foot.
4. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw- This position is to back up.
driver in the shift-lock release hole (A).
Shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU- CAUTION
TRAL) position while pressing the  Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”
straight blade (or minus) screwdriver (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
down. motion to avoid a transmission damage.

“N” NEUTRAL CAUTION + (SHIFT UP)

 To prevent transmission damage, never shift
into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R” The transmission shifts up by one gear with
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in each operation.
gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on
a M/T, and should only be used when the motion.
vehicle is stationary for an extended length of - (SHIFT DOWN)
time during driving, such as in a traffic jam.
Sport mode The transmission shifts down by one gear
with each operation.
WARNING E00603902652
6
 Never move the selector lever to the “N” Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
(NEUTRAL) position while driving. A motion, sports mode is selected by gently CAUTION
pushing the selector lever from the “D”  In sports mode, the driver must execute
serious accident could occur since you
(DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A). upward shifts in accordance with prevailing
could accidentally move the lever into the
road conditions, taking care to keep the
“P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position To return to “D” range operation, gently push
engine speed below the red zone.
or you will lose engine braking. the selector lever back into the main gate (B).
 On a gradient, the engine should be  Repeated continuous operation of the selec-
tor lever will continuously switch shift posi-
started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in In sports mode, gear shifts can be made rap-
tion.
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position. idly simply by moving the selector lever
 To prevent rolling, always keep your foot backward and forward. In contrast to a M/T,
on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in the sports mode allows gear shifts with the
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift- accelerator pedal depressed.
NOTE
ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-  Only the 5 forward gears can be selected. To
tion. reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector
lever to the “R” (REVERSE) or “P” (PARK)
position as required.
SHIFT
“D” DRIVE UP
This position is used for most city and high- SHIFT

way driving. The transmission will automati- DOWN
cally change its gear depending on road and
driving conditions.

NOTE Sports mode indicator display When a malfunction occurs in

 To maintain good running performance, the E00612301613
the A/T
transmission may refuse to perform an In sports mode, the currently selected posi- E00615101377
upshift when the selector lever is moved to tion is indicated by the indicator (A) shown
the “+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehi- on the instrument panel.
cle speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of Vehicles equipped with the mono-
the engine, the transmission may refuse to color liquid crystal display
perform a downshift when the selector lever Vehicles equipped with the mono-color liquid E00660800029
is moved to the “— (SHIFT DOWN)” posi- crystal display
6 tion at certain vehicle speeds. When this hap-

pens, a buzzer sounds to indicate that a
 When the selector lever position
downshift is not going to take place.
display blinks
E00660900020
 Downward shifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When the When the selector lever position display
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically blinks while you are driving, there could be a
selected. malfunction in the A/T system.
 When driving away on a slippery road, push
the selector lever forward into the “+ (SHIFT
UP)” position. This cause the transmission to
shift into the 2nd gear which is better for Vehicles equipped with the color liquid crystal
smooth driving away on a slippery road. display
Push the selector lever to the “— (SHIFT
DOWN)” side to shift back to the 1st gear.
 If the A/T fluid temperature is high, the pro-
tection function operates. In this case, the
transmission may refuse to perform an
upshift when the selector lever is moved to , , , ,
the “+ (SHIFT UP)” position in sports mode,
or it may automatically downshift.
or through

NOTE
or
 “A” indicator does blink only the condition
that the A/T positional switch is broken.
It does not indicate in normal driving condi-
tion. NOTE
 The buzzer may sounds at the time of
warning display appears.
CAUTION  The selector lever position indicator blinks at
 If the selector lever position display blinks
while you are driving, it is likely that a safety the time of warning display appears. 6
device is operating because of a malfunction  The “A” indicator on the selector lever posi-
in the A/T. Immediately have the vehicle tion display will only blink if there is a prob-
inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI CAUTION lem with the A/T position switch.
MOTORS dealer.  If the lamp comes on, reduce the engine If is not seen during normal driving.
speed and stop the vehicle in a safe area.
Then set the selector lever to “P” (PARK)
 When the A/T fluid temperature position and idle the engine until the warning CAUTION
lamp goes off. When the warning lamp goes
warning lamp comes on  If malfunction occurs in the A/T while driv-
off, resume normal driving. If the warning
E00661000028
lamp does not go off, please have your vehi- ing, the warning display or the warn-
The A/T fluid temperature warning lamp cle inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI ing display appears on the information
comes on and a buzzer may sound, when the MOTORS dealer. screen in the multi information display.
A/T fluid temperature becomes abnormally In this case, immediately park your vehicle
high. Normally the warning lamp comes on in a safe place and follow these procedures:
when the ignition switch is turned to the Vehicles equipped with the color
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in When warning display is showing
liquid crystal display
ON, and then will go off after a few seconds. The A/T fluid is overheating. The engine
E00661100029
control may activate to lower the A/T fluid
There could be a system malfunction if the temperature, causing the engine revolutions
warning display or the warning display and vehicle speed to decrease, or the gear
shift timing may change by activating the
is displayed on the information screen in the
A/T control. In this case, take one of the fol-
multi information display. lowing procedures.
• Slow down your vehicle.

CAUTION CAUTION Passing acceleration

• Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the  Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at E00604501342
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position, all times. To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE)
and open the bonnet with the engine run- Using the left foot could cause driver move- position, push the accelerator to the floor. The
ning to allow the engine to cool down. ment delay in case of an emergency. A/T will automatically downshift.
After a while, confirm that the warning  To prevent sudden acceleration, never race
the engine when shifting from the “P”
display is no longer showing. It is safe to
(PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position. NOTE
continue driving if the display is no longer
 Operating the accelerator pedal while the  In sports mode, downshifts do not take place
showing. If the warning display remains or
6 appears frequently, have your vehicle other foot is resting on the brake pedal will when the accelerator is depressed all the way
to the floor.
inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
MOTORS dealer. mature wear of brake pads.
 Use the selector lever in the correct shift
When warning display is showing position in accordance with driving condi- Waiting
It may be that there is something unusual tions. E00604601398
happening in the A/T, causing a safety Never coast downhill backward with the
device to activate. Have your vehicle selector lever in the {“D” (DRIVE) or sports For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI mode} or coast forward with the selector signals the vehicle can be left in gear and held
MOTORS dealer. lever in the “R” (REVERSE) position. stationary with the service brake.
The engine may stop and the unexpected For longer waiting periods with the engine
increase in brake pedal effort and steering running, place the selector lever in the “N”
Operation of the A/T wheel weight could lead to an accident. (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking
E00604201697
 Do not race the engine with brake pedal brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
pressed when the vehicle is stationary. with the service brake.
CAUTION This can damage the A/T.
 Before selecting a gear with the engine run- Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal
ning and the vehicle stationary, fully depress while holding down the brake pedal with the CAUTION
the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from selector lever in the “P” (PARK), “N” (NEU-  Never hold the vehicle stationary on a hill
creeping. TRAL) or “D” (DRIVE) position, the engine using the accelerator pedal (without using
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the revolutions may not rise as high as when per- the brake pedal). Always apply the parking
gear is engaged, especially when the engine forming the same operation with the selector brake and/or service brakes.
speed is high, at fast idle or with the air con- lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
ditioner operating, the brakes should only be
released when you are ready to drive away.


your vehicle checked at an authorised
Parking 8-Speed automatic transmis-
E00604701302
sion with sports mode*
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com- 1. If your vehicle has difficulty moving E00603202020
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake, uphill, shift the selector lever into 2nd
and then move the selector lever to the “P” gear of the sports mode. This method
(PARK) position. might not work depending on the trans-
NOTE
If you are going to leave the vehicle unat-  During running-in period or immediately
mission malfunction.
after reconnection of the battery cable, there
tended, always switch off the engine and 2. Once the vehicle is moving on a level
may be a case where gear shifts are not made
carry the key. road, move the selector lever back to “D”
(DRIVE).
smoothly. This does not indicate a faulty 6
transmission.
NOTE Gear shifts will become smooth after the
 On a slope, be sure to apply the parking NOTE transmission has been shifted several times
brake before moving the selector lever to the  When the selector lever position display in by the electronic control system.
“P” (PARK) position. If you move the selec- the instrument panel blinks, it means that
tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position before there is an abnormal condition in the trans-
applying the parking brake, it may be diffi- mission. Selector lever operation
cult to disengage the selector lever from the Refer to “When the selector lever position
E00603302278
“P” (PARK) position when next you drive display blinks” on page 6-36.
the vehicle, requiring application of a strong The transmission has 8 forward gears and
force to the selector lever to move from the 1 reverse gear.
“P” (PARK) position. The individual gears are selected automati-
cally, depending on the speed of the vehicle
and the position of the accelerator pedal.
When the A/T makes no speed The selector lever (A) has 2 gates; the main
change gate (B) and the manual gate (C).
E00604801824
If the transmission does not change speeds

while driving, or your vehicle does not pick
up enough speed when starting on an uphill
slope, it may be that there is something unu-
sual happening in the transmission, causing a
safety device to activate. Immediately have
WARNING
 Always depress the brake pedal when
shifting the selector lever into a gear from
tion.
Never put your foot on the accelerator
pedal while shifting the selector lever from
tion.
6
In the main gate, selector lever has 4 posi- NOTE
The lock button must be pushed while
tions, and is equipped with a lock button (D)  To avoid erroneous operation, move the
the brake pedal is depressed to move selector lever firmly into each position and
to avoid inadvertent selection of the wrong the selector lever. briefly hold it there. Always check the posi-
gear.
Lock button must be pushed to move tion shown by the selector lever position dis-
the selector lever. play after moving the selector lever.
 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
Lock button need not be pushed to the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
move the selector lever. selector lever from being moved from the
“P” (PARK) position.
WARNING
 If the lock button is always pushed to When the selector lever cannot be
operate the selector lever, the lever may be
accidentally shifted into the “P” (PARK) shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi-
or “R” (REVERSE) position. Be sure not tion
to push the lock button when performing E00629101222
the operations indicated by in the illus- When the selector lever cannot be shifted
tration. from the “P” (PARK) position to another
position while the brake pedal is pressed and
held down with the operation mode in ON,
the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunc-


tioning. Immediately have your vehicle
checked by an authorised
NOTE Selector lever positions
 If you would like to move your vehicle when E00603801885
the selector lever cannot be moved from the
If you need to move the vehicle, shift the
“P” (PARK) position and the Electric park- “P” PARK
selector lever as follows. ing brake cannot be released, release the
Electric parking brake manually before shift-
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied. ing the selector lever. After releasing the This position locks the transmission to pre-
2. Stop the engine if it is running. Electric parking brake manually, shift the vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
3. Depress the brake pedal with the right selector lever in Step 3 and after. be started in this position.
foot.
4. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-
Refer to “When the Electric parking brake
cannot be released” on page 6-10 for manual
6
driver in the shift-lock release hole (A). release of the Electric parking brake.
“R” REVERSE
Shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU-
TRAL) position while pressing the This position is to back up.
straight blade (or minus) screwdriver Selector lever position indicator
down. display CAUTION
E00603501983  Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
When the operation mode is put in ON, the motion to avoid a transmission damage.
position of the selector lever is indicated in
the multi information display.
“N” NEUTRAL

gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on
a M/T, and should only be used when the
vehicle is stationary for an extended length of
time during driving, such as in a traffic jam.

WARNING NOTE NOTE

 Never move the selector lever to the “N”  While driving on uphills or downhills, when  You can shift into sports mode with shift
(NEUTRAL) position while driving. A the accelerator pedal is suddenly released or paddles when the selector lever is in the
serious accident could occur since you depressed or when the brake pedal is main gate as well. Also, you can return to the
could accidentally move the lever into the strongly depressed, the transmission shifts “D” range operation in any of following
“P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position up or shifts down its gear depending on road ways.
or you will lose engine braking. and driving conditions. Therefore, the gear When returning to “D” range operation, the
 On a gradient, the engine should be shift timing may change depending on road selector lever position display will change to
started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in and driving conditions, which does not indi- “D” (DRIVE) position.
6 the “N” (NEUTRAL) position. cate a malfunction. • Pull the + (SHIFT UP) side shift paddle for-
ward (toward the driver) for over 2 seconds.
 To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in • Stop the vehicle.
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift- Sport mode • Push the selector lever from the “D”
ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- (DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A)
E00603902665
tion. and push the selector lever back into the
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in main gate (B).
motion, sports mode is selected by gently
“D” DRIVE pushing the selector lever from the “D”
(DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A).
To return to “D” range operation, gently push SHIFT
This position is used for most city and high- the selector lever back into the main gate (B). UP SHIFT SHIFT
way driving. The transmission will automati-
DOWN UP
cally change its gear depending on road and In sports mode, gear shifts can be made rap- SHIFT
driving conditions. idly simply by moving the selector lever DOWN
backward and forward or shift paddles at the
CAUTION steering wheel can also be used to perform
 To prevent transmission damage, never shift gearshift. In contrast to a M/T, the sports
into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R” mode allows gear shifts with the accelerator
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in pedal depressed.
motion.
+ (SHIFT UP)
The transmission shifts up by one gear with

each operation.

- (SHIFT DOWN) NOTE

 To maintain good running performance, the
The transmission shifts down by one gear transmission may refuse to perform an
with each operation. upshift when the selector lever is moved to
the “+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehi-
CAUTION cle speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of
the engine, the transmission may refuse to
 In sports mode, the driver must execute
perform a downshift when the lever is moved
upward shifts in accordance with prevailing
to the “— (SHIFT DOWN)” position at cer-
road conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
tain vehicle speeds. When this happens, a
buzzer sounds to indicate that a downshift is
6
 Repeated continuous operation of the selec-
not going to take place.
tor lever or the shift paddles will continu-
 Downward shifts are made automatically
ously switch shift position.
 For vehicles equipped with the shift paddles,
when the vehicle slows down. When the When a malfunction occurs in
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically
do not use the left- and right-hand shift pad-
selected.
the A/T
dles at the same time. Doing so could cause a E00615101449
 When driving away on a slippery road, push
shift of gear ratio that you do not expect. There could be a system malfunction if the
the selector lever forward into the “+ (SHIFT
UP)” position. This cause the transmission to warning display or the warning display
shift into the 2nd gear which is better for
NOTE is displayed on the information screen in the
smooth driving away on a slippery road.
 Only the 8 forward gears can be selected. To
multi information display.
Push the selector lever to the “— (SHIFT
reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector DOWN)” side to shift back to the 1st gear.
lever to the “R” (REVERSE) or “P” (PARK) or
position as required.
Sports mode indicator display
E00612301596
NOTE
In sports mode, the currently selected posi-
tion is indicated by the indicator (A) shown  The buzzer may sounds at the time of
on the instrument panel. warning display appears.
 The selector lever position indicator blinks at
the time of warning display appears.

NOTE CAUTION CAUTION

 The “A” indicator on the selector lever posi- After a while, confirm that the warning  To prevent sudden acceleration, never race
tion display will only blink if there is a prob- the engine when shifting from the “P”
display is no longer showing. It is safe to
lem with the A/T position switch. (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
continue driving if the display is no longer
If is not seen during normal driving.  Operating the accelerator pedal while the
showing. If the warning display remains or
appears frequently, have your vehicle other foot is resting on the brake pedal will
inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
CAUTION MOTORS dealer. mature wear of brake pads.
 If malfunction occurs in the A/T while driv-  Use the selector lever in the correct shift
6 ing, the warning display or the warn-
When warning display is showing
It may be that there is something unusual
position in accordance with driving condi-
tions.
ing display appears on the information happening in the A/T, causing a safety Never coast downhill backward with the
screen in the multi information display. device to activate. Have your vehicle selector lever in the {“D” (DRIVE) or sports
In this case, immediately park your vehicle inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI mode} or coast forward with the selector
in a safe place and follow these procedures: MOTORS dealer. lever in the “R” (REVERSE) position.
The engine may stop and the unexpected
When warning display is showing increase in brake pedal effort and steering
The A/T fluid is overheating. The engine
Operation of the A/T wheel weight could lead to an accident.
E00604201730
control may activate to lower the A/T fluid  Do not race the engine with brake pedal
temperature, causing the engine revolutions pressed when the vehicle is stationary.
and vehicle speed to decrease, or the gear CAUTION This can damage the A/T.
shift timing may change by activating the  Before selecting a gear with the engine run- Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal
A/T control. In this case, take one of the fol- ning and the vehicle stationary, fully depress while holding down the brake pedal with the
lowing procedures. the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from selector lever in the “P” (PARK), “N” (NEU-
• Slow down your vehicle. creeping. TRAL) or “D” (DRIVE) position, the engine
• Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the revolutions may not rise as high as when per-
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position, gear is engaged, especially when the engine forming the same operation with the selector
and open the bonnet with the engine run- speed is high, at fast idle or with the air con- lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
ning to allow the engine to cool down. ditioner operating, the brakes should only be
released when you are ready to drive away.
 Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at
all times.
Using the left foot could cause driver move-
ment delay in case of an emergency.


If you are going to leave the vehicle unat-
CAUTION NOTE tended, always switch off the engine and
 If the engine stalled, a creep phenomenon  In sports mode, downshifts do not take place
carry the key.
will not occur after engine restart causing the when the accelerator is depressed all the way
A/T control to activate. In this case, after to the floor.
driving for a while, the A/T control is NOTE
released and a creep phenomenon comes  On a slope, be sure to apply the parking
back again.
Waiting
brake before moving the selector lever to the
E00604601372
When the warning display appears, the A/T “P” (PARK) position. If you move the selec-
will be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle For short waiting periods, such as at traffic tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position before
inspected at an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
signals the vehicle can be left in gear and held applying the parking brake, it may be diffi- 6
stationary with the service brake. cult to disengage the selector lever from the
For longer waiting periods with the engine “P” (PARK) position when next you drive
running, place the selector lever in the “N” the vehicle, requiring application of a strong
(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking force to the selector lever to move from the
“P” (PARK) position.
brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
with the service brake.
Passing acceleration When the A/T makes no speed

CAUTION change
E00604501371
 Never hold the vehicle stationary on a hill
E00604801837
To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) using the accelerator pedal (without using
position, push the accelerator to the floor. The the brake pedal). Always apply the parking If the transmission does not change speeds
A/T will automatically downshift. brake and/or service brakes. while driving, or your vehicle does not pick
up enough speed when starting on an uphill
slope, it may be that there is something unu-
NOTE
 When the accelerator pedal is depressed, the
Parking sual happening in the transmission, causing a
E00604700187 safety device to activate. Immediately have
force on the pedal changes. When the accel-
erator pedal is fully depressed, the transmis- To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com- your vehicle checked at an authorised
sion shifts down automatically. The plete stop, fully engage the parking brake, MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
transmission can control to shift down for and then move the selector lever to the “P”
rapid acceleration with the selector lever in (PARK) position.
the “D” (DRIVE) position by changing the
force on the pedal.

Super select 4WD*
Super select 4WD* Transfer shift lever position Transfer shift Indica- Driving con-
lever position tor lamp ditions
E00605701295 and 2WD/4WD operation indi-
When driv-
Shifting to rear-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive cator lamp ing up or
can be made by operating the transfer shift E00605801397
Low range down steep
lever (A). Shift the transfer shift lever to an Transfer shift Indica- Driving con- centre dif- hills, on
appropriate position according to the road lever position tor lamp ditions ferential rough or
surface conditions. In addition, the 4LLc lock muddy roads
Rear- When driv- and
2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp and engaged (especially
6 low-range indicator lamp indicates the trans-
2H wheel ing on dry
4-wheel when
drive paved road.
fer shift lever shifting state. Refer to drive increased
“2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp and The basic torque is
low-range indicator lamp” on page 6-48. position for required).
super select
Full-time 4WD.
: Illuminate
4H 4-wheel When driv-
drive ing on dry : Remain off
paved or
slippery CAUTION
roads.  The “4LLc” range gives maximum torque
Centre dif- for low-speed driving on steep slopes, as
When driv- well as sandy, muddy, and other difficult sur-
ferential
ing on rough, faces.
lock
4HLc sand or snow
engaged
covered
4-wheel
roads.
drive

Super select 4WD*

The transfer shift lever should be positioned To shift
CAUTION in accordance with the following operating To Procedure
 Do not drive your vehicle in the “4HLc” or
from
conditions:
“4LLc” on dry paved roads and highways. 4HLc 4LLc Stop the vehicle, depress
Doing so may result in excessive tyre wear, the clutch pedal to the
increased fuel consumption, and possible : Not push down the transfer
floor and operate the
noise generation. It may also increase the shift lever
transfer shift lever while
differential oil temperature, which may dam- : Push down the transfer shift keeping the transfer shift
age the drive system. Further, the drive train lever
will be subjected to excessive loading,
lever pushed down.
4LLc 4HLc Keep depressing the
resulting in oil leakage, component seizure,
or other serious problems. On dry paved clutch pedal while the 6
To shift
roads and highways, drive the vehicle in To Procedure 2WD/4WD operation
from
“2H” or “4H” only. indicator lamp contin-
The transfer shift lever ues to blink.
2H 4H can be operated while
Transfer shift lever operation the vehicle is either
E00605901356 NOTE
2H or moving or stationary.  Shifting of the transfer shift lever between
The shift pattern is shown on the transfer shift 4H
4HLc When the vehicle is not “2H” ↔ “4H” should only be done at speeds
lever knob. in motion, shift the gear-
below 62 mph.
shift lever to the “N”
 During driving, never attempt to shift from
(Neutral) position before
“4HLc” to “4LLc”.
operating the transfer
 When shifting from “2H” to “4H” in cold
shift lever. weather while the vehicle is in motion, the
When the vehicle is transmission gear may make some noise. In
4HLc 4H moving, and only while cold weather, try to shift the gear while the
it can be steered straight vehicle is stopped.
ahead, release the accel-
erator pedal before oper-
ating the transfer shift
lever.

Super select 4WD*
NOTE 2WD/4WD operation indicator “2H”  “4H”

 When the transfer shift lever is shifted from lamp and low-range indicator
“4H” to “4HLc” while the vehicle is stopped,
the 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp lamp Transfer shift lever
Indicator lamp
position
blinks while the selection is in process. Drive E00606001396
slowly and normally after confirming that

the lamp is illuminated. (Refer to
“2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp and 2H
low-range indicator lamp” on page 6-48.)
6  The 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp
will go out momentarily during shifting pro-
cess from “4HLc” to “4LLc” or vice versa,
as the transfer shift lever passes through the
neutral position. Drive mode switch-
Be sure to operate the transfer shift lever ing in progress
until the 2WD/4WD operation indicator
lamp illuminates again. A: Front wheel lamp
 There may be a case that the transfer shift B: Centre differential lock lamp
lever feels heavy when it is moved from 4H
C: Rear wheel lamp
“2H” to “4H” with the steering wheel in
D: Low-range indicator lamp
turned position.
This is normal and not any indication of
trouble. When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- : Blink
tion or the operation mode is put in ON, the : Illuminate
2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp and the
CAUTION : Remain off
low-range indicator lamp shows the shifting
 Do not operate the transfer shift lever while condition. The 2WD/4WD operation indica-
the rear wheels of the vehicle are slipping on tor lamp comes on at each drive mode-selec-
snow or ice. tor position as follows:

Super select 4WD*
“4H”  “4HLc” “4HLc”  “4LLc” NOTE

• Keep the steering wheel in the straight
ahead position while making range selec-
Transfer shift lever Transfer shift lever
Indicator lamp Indicator lamp tions. If you attempt to drive forward with
position position
the steering wheel turned, gear rattling may
occur and the desired range may not actu-
ally be selected.
4H 4HLc • If you move the transfer shift lever from
“4H” to “4HLc” while the vehicle is sta-
tionary, keep your speed initially very low
when you subsequently make a standing
6
start. Before driving at normal speeds, con-
firm that the centre differential lock lamp
Drive mode switch- Drive mode switch-
has changed from blinking to steady illumi-
ing in progress ing in progress
nation.
• If you move the transfer shift lever from
“4HLc” to “4H” and the centre differential
lock lamp does not stop blinking, place the
4HLc steering wheel in the straight ahead position
and slowly depress the accelerator pedal
4LLc and several times.
• If you move the transfer shift lever from
: Blink “4H” to “2H” and the front wheel lamp
: Illuminate does not stop blinking, confirm safety
around the vehicle then accelerate, deceler-
: Remain off ate, and reverse until the front wheel lamp
: Illuminate
goes off. When the front wheel lamp goes
: Remain off off, you can then proceed to drive the vehi-
cle.
NOTE If you accelerate, decelerate, and reverse
 The 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp but the front wheel lamp still does not stop
blinks while the selection is in process. Take blinking, return the transfer shift lever to
the following precautions when the indicator “4H” then have your vehicle inspected.
lamp is blinking or remains off.

Super select 4WD II*

Refer to “Drive mode indicator lamp/display Vehicles with 8A/T
NOTE and 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp/dis-
 When you move the transfer shift lever from
play” on page 6-54, 6-56.
“4H” to “4HLc”, there may be a slight delay
before the centre differential lock lamp illu- Except for vehicles with 8A/T
minates.

E00605701282
6 Shifting to rear-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive

can be made by operating the drive mode-
selector (A). Set the drive mode-selector to an
appropriate position according to the road
surface conditions.
The Drive mode indicator display and the
2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp/display
indicate the drive mode-selector setting state.
Drive mode-selector position, drive mode indicator display, 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp/dis-
play and low-range indicator lamp
E00650700038
Indicator lamp/display
Drive mode-selector position Mono-color liquid Color liquid crystal Driving conditions
crystal display display
2H Rear-wheel drive When driving on dry paved road.


Indicator lamp/display
Drive mode-selector position Mono-color liquid Color liquid crystal Driving conditions
crystal display display
Full-time 4-wheel The basic position for Super select 4WD II.
4H
drive When driving on dry paved or slippery roads.
Centre differential 6
4HLc lock engaged 4-wheel When driving on rough, sand or snow covered roads.
drive
Low range centre dif- When driving up or down steep hills, on rough or
4LLc ferential lock engaged and muddy roads (especially when increased torque is
4-wheel drive required).
: Illuminate
: Remain off
CAUTION
 The “4LLc” range gives maximum torque for low-speed driving on steep slopes, as well as sandy, muddy, and other difficult surfaces. On vehicles with
A/T, do not exceed speeds of approximately 44 mph in “4LLc” range.
 Do not drive your vehicle in the “4HLc” or “4LLc” position on dry paved roads and highways. Doing so may result in excessive tyre wear, increased fuel
consumption, and possible noise generation. It may also increase the differential oil temperature, which may damage the drive system. Further, the drive
train will be subjected to excessive loading, resulting in oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious problems. On dry paved roads and highways,
drive the vehicle in “2H” or “4H” only.

Drive mode-selector operation : Turn the drive mode-selector while

holding it down
E00650900030
The drive mode is shown on the drive mode- The drive mode-selector should be positioned
selector knob. in accordance with the following operating
conditions:
6
: Turn the drive mode-selector
Procedure
To shift from To
Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with A/T
The drive mode-selector can be operated while the vehicle The drive mode-selector can be operated while the vehicle
2H 4H is either moving or stationary. is either moving or stationary.
When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the gearshift lever When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the selector lever
2H or to the “N” (Neutral) position before operating the drive to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position before operating the
4H
4HLc mode-selector. drive mode-selector.
When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be
steered straight ahead, release the accelerator pedal before steered straight ahead, shift the selector lever to the “D”
4HLc 4H operating the drive mode-selector. (DRIVE) position, and release the accelerator pedal
before operating the drive mode-selector.


Procedure
To shift from To
Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with A/T
4HLc 4LLc Stop the vehicle, depress the clutch pedal to the floor and Stop the vehicle, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU-
operate the drive mode-selector. TRAL) position, depress and hold the brake pedal, and
Keep depressing the clutch pedal while the 2WD/4WD operate the drive mode-selector.
operation indicator lamp/display continues to blink. If operation is made with the selector lever placed in any
4LLc 4HLc other position than “N” (NEUTRAL) position or release
the brake pedal, a gear noise may be generated, with a
possible failure to shift into a proper gear. 6
NOTE
 Setting of the drive mode-selector between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc” should only be done at speeds below 62 mph.
 During driving, never attempt to shift from “4HLc” to “4LLc”.
 When shifting between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc” in cold weather while the vehicle is in motion, the transfer gear may make some noise. In cold weather,
try to shift the gear while the vehicle is stopped.
 When shifting between “4LLc” and “4HLc”, the transfer gear may make some noise.
 When the drive mode-selector is set between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc” while the vehicle is stopped, the 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp/display
blinks while the selection is in process. Drive slowly and normally after confirming that the display is illuminated. (Refer to “Drive mode-selector
position, drive mode indicator display, 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp/display and low-range indicator lamp” on page 6-50.)
 When the drive mode-selector is set between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc” while the cruise control or the Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) is
activated, the transfer gear may make some noise.
 When the drive mode-selector is set between“4HLc” ↔ “4LLc” in cold weather, its selection may not complete. Return the drive mode-selector to its pre-
vious position. After the engine is warmed up, make the range selection again.
CAUTION
 Do not operate the drive mode-selector while the rear wheels of the vehicle are slipping on snow or ice.
crystal display, refer to “2WD/4WD opera- Vehicles equipped with the color liquid crys-
Indicator lamp/display tion indicator lamp and low-range indicator tal display, refer to “Drive mode indicator
E00651000025
lamp” on page 6-54. display and 2WD/4WD operation indicator
Vehicles equipped with the mono-color liquid

display” on page 6-56.  “2H”  “4H”  “4H”  “4HLc”
2WD/4WD operation indicator Drive mode-selec- Drive mode-selec-

lamp and low-range indicator Indicator lamp Indicator lamp
tor position tor position
lamp
E00651100026
2H 4H

ing in progress ing in progress
A: Front wheel lamp 4H 4HLc

B: Centre differential lock lamp
C: Rear wheel lamp
D: Low-range indicator lamp
: Blink : Blink
: Illuminate : Illuminate
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
: Remain off : Remain off
tion or the operation mode is put in ON, the
2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp and the
low-range indicator lamp shows the shifting
condition. The 2WD/4WD operation indica-
tor lamp comes on at each drive mode-selec-
tor position as follows:

 “4HLc”  “4LLc” : Remain off NOTE

 On vehicles with A/T, when parking, apply
Drive mode- NOTE the parking brake before stopping the engine
selector Indicator lamp  When the drive mode-selector is set between and make sure that the front and the rear
position “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc”, the front wheel wheel lamps and the low range lamp are not
and/or centre differential lock lamps blink blinking during shifting process between
while the selection is in process. Take the “4HLc”  “4LLc”. Otherwise, the vehicle
following precautions when the indicator could unexpectedly move even if the A/T is
4HLc lamp is blinking. in the “P” (PARK) position.
• Keep the steering wheel in the straight  If, after a “4HLc”  “4LLc” selection has
been made, front and the rear wheel lamps
6
ahead position while making range selec-
tions. If you attempt to drive forward with continue blinking and the desired range is
the steering wheel turned, gear rattling or not actually selected, return the drive mode-
shock may occur and the desired range may selector to its previous position. Place the
not actually be selected. steering wheel in the straight ahead position,
• When the drive mode-selector is set drive the vehicle forward, and release the
Drive mode accelerator pedal. Next, hold down the clutch
between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc”, while the
switching in pedal (with M/T) or place the selector lever
vehicle is stopped, the front wheel and/or
progress and centre differential lock lamps blink while in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (with A/T)
the selection is in process. Drive slowly and and make the range selection again.
normally after confirming that the lamp is  If the low range lamp blinks when you
switched. attempt to make a “4HLc”  “4LLc” selec-
• If the front wheel and/or centre differential tion, a “4HLc”  “4LLc” selection cannot
lock lamps blinking after a “2H”  “4H” be made. Stop the vehicle and release the
 “4HLc” selection has been made with accelerator pedal. Next, hold down the clutch
the vehicle moving, hold the steering wheel pedal (with M/T) or place the selector lever
in the straight ahead position and slowly in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (with A/T)
4LLc and and and make the range selection again.
depress the accelerator pedal several times.
 The front and the rear wheel lamps will
blink during shifting process from “4HLc” to
“4LLc” or vice versa, as the transfer passes
through the neutral position. Be sure to oper-
: Blink ate the drive mode-selector until the front
: Illuminate and the rear wheel lamps illuminate again.

NOTE CAUTION Drive mode indicator display and

 On vehicles with the active stability & trac-  If a problem is detected in the transfer sys- 2WD/4WD operation indicator
tion control (ASTC), the active stability con- tem, a safety device will activate. The front display
trol function is suspended while “4LLc” is and rear wheel lamps will go out, the centre E00651200043
selected. indicator lamp is illuminated differential lock lamp will blink rapidly
(twice per second), and transfer shifting will
while these functions are suspended. It does
become impossible. Park your vehicle in a
not indicate a problem. When “2H” or “4H”
safe place, turn off the engine for a few
or “4HLc” is selected, this lamp goes out and
moments. Restart the engine. The lamp
function again. Refer to “ASTC indicator
6 lamp or ASTC OFF indicator lamp” on page
should resume normal operation. If the
lamps continue to blink, have the vehicle
6-84.
checked by an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer as soon as possible.
A: Drive mode indicator display

B: Front wheel indicator display
C: Centre differential lock indicator dis-
play
D: Rear wheel indicator display
E: Low-range indicator display
When the operation mode is put in ON, drive

mode indicator display and 2WD/4WD oper-
ation indicator display shows the shifting
condition. The drive mode indicator display
and 2WD/4WD operation indicator display
comes on at each drive mode-selector posi-
tion as follows:

 “2H”  “4H”  “4H”  “4HLc”  “4HLc”  “4LLc”
Drive mode-selec- Drive mode-selec- Drive mode-

Indicator display Indicator display
tor position tor position selector Indicator display
position
2H 4H
4HLc
6

ing in progress ing in progress Drive mode
switching in
progress
4H 4HLc
4LLc
: Blink (Drive mode indicator dis- : Blink (Drive mode indicator dis-
play also blinks) play also blinks)
: Blink (Drive mode indicator dis-
: Illuminate : Illuminate
play also blinks)
: Remain off : Remain off
: Illuminate
: Remain off

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 When the drive mode-selector is set between  When parking, apply the parking brake  If the selector lever is shifted from the “N”
“2H”, “4H” and “4HLc”, the front wheel before stopping the engine and make sure (NEUTRAL) position to the other position or
and/or centre differential lock displays blink that the front and the rear wheel displays and release the brake pedal during shifting pro-
while the selection is in process. Take the the low range indicator display are not blink- cess between “4HLc  4LLc”, the warning
following precautions when the indicator ing during shifting process between “4HLc” display will appear and the shifting process
display is blinking.  “4LLc”. Otherwise, the vehicle could will be stopped (A/T).
• Keep the steering wheel in the straight unexpectedly move even if the A/T is in the
ahead position while making range selec- “P” (PARK) position.
6 tions. If you attempt to drive forward with
the steering wheel turned, gear rattling or
 If, after a “4HLc”  “4LLc” selection has
been made, front and the rear wheel lamps
shock may occur and the desired range may continue blinking and the desired range is
not actually be selected. not actually selected, return the drive mode-  If the clutch pedal is released during shifting
• When the drive mode-selector is set selector to its previous position. Place the process between “4HLc  4LLc”, the warn-
between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc”, while the steering wheel in the straight ahead position, ing display will appear and the shifting pro-
vehicle is stopped, the front wheel and/or drive the vehicle forward, and release the cess will be stopped (M/T).
centre differential lock displays blink while accelerator pedal. Next, hold down the clutch
the selection is in process. Drive slowly and pedal (with M/T) or place the selector lever
normally after confirming that the display in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (with A/T),
is switched. depress and hold the brake pedal and make
• If the front wheel and/or centre differential the range selection again.
lock displays blinking after a “2H”  “4H”  If the low range indicator display blinks
 On vehicles with the active stability & trac-
 “4HLc” selection has been made with when you attempt to make a “4HLc” 
tion control (ASTC), the active stability con-
the vehicle moving, hold the steering wheel “4LLc” selection, a “4HLc”  “4LLc”
selection cannot be made. Stop the vehicle trol function is suspended while “4LLc” is
in the straight ahead position and slowly
depress the accelerator pedal several times. and release the accelerator pedal. Next, hold selected. indicator lamp is illuminated
 The front and the rear wheel displays will down the clutch pedal (with M/T) or place while these functions are suspended. It does
blink during shifting process from “4HLc” to the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) not indicate a problem. When “2H” or “4H”
“4LLc” or vice versa, as the transfer passes position (with A/T), depress and hold the or “4HLc” is selected, this lamp goes out and
through the neutral position. Be sure to oper- brake pedal and make the range selection function again. Refer to “ASTC indicator
ate the drive mode-selector until the front again. lamp or ASTC OFF indicator lamp” on page
and the rear wheel displays illuminate again. 6-84.

CAUTION
 If the warning display is displayed on the
information screen in the multi information
display, a problem has occurred with the
Super select 4WD II and the safety device
has activated. If this happens, please contact
your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer for inspection.
 On vehicles with A/T, if the warning display

is displayed on the information screen in the
multi information display, a problem has
occurred with the A/T. If this happens, please
contact your nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer for inspec-
tion.
When this warning display appears, shifting
only between a “2H”  “4H”  “4HLc”
selection can be made. In addition, when the
drive mode-selector is in “4LLc”, the trans-
fer mode cannot be switched.

Off Road mode*
Off Road mode*

E00642500040
The Off Road mode is the function that enhances driving smoothly on the off-road by selecting the most suitable engine, transmission, and brake
control according to the road surface conditions when the drive mode position of Super select 4WD II is in “4HLc” or “4LLc”. Also refer to
“Super select 4WD II” on page 6-50.
NOTE
6  If the driver fails to select an appropriate mode in the Off Road mode, driving will be difficult.
 Depending on the mode selected, you may hear the operation noise or feel the vibration, or shock on the vehicle body.
Control mode
E00642600041
It is possible to select the control mode from the followings according to the road surface conditions.
Control mode Functions Drive mode-selector dial position

GRAVEL Suitable to drive on unpaved road surfaces with gravel and soil. 4HLc or 4LLc
MUD/SNOW Suitable to drive on muddy areas or deep snows. 4HLc or 4LLc
SAND Suitable to drive on fine sand areas. 4HLc or 4LLc
Suitable to drive on the rough road surface such as rocky roads or with some
ROCK 4LLc
wheels suspended in the air.
NOTE
 When stuck, use the rear differential lock (if so equipped). (Refer to page 6-61)
E00642700068
Off Road mode-selector opera- 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
tion

Rear differential lock*

2. Set the drive mode-selector from “2H” or In addition, the selected mode is displayed as
“4H” to “4HLc” or “4LLc”. At this time,
NOTE an interrupt display on the information screen
 The Off Road mode is not activated when the
the OFF Road mode is switched to of the multi information display (B) by
drive mode is in “2H” or “4H”. If the Off
“GRAVEL” automatically. switching the control mode. The control
Road mode-selector is pressed when the
3. The control mode is switched in the order drive mode-selector is set to “2H” or “4H”, mode display on the information screen will
of GRAVEL  MUD/SNOW  SAND the warning display will appear and the oper- return to the previous display after a few sec-
 ROCK*  GRAVEL by pressing the ation will be cancelled. onds.
Off Road mode-selector.
NOTE
*: Only in 4LLc
 The Off Road mode will not operate even if 6
pressing the Off Road mode-selector in the
following conditions.
• Brake System: brake temperature high
Off Road mode indicator dis- • Rear Differential Lock (if so equipped):
activating
play • ASTC warning lamp: illuminating or blink-
E00642800072
ing
refer to “ASTC warning lamp/display” on
page 6-85

NOTE E00606201330
 When the rear differential lock switch is If one wheel starts to spin freely and the vehi-
turned on while the Off Road mode is acti-
cle becomes stuck and cannot be freed even
vated, the Off Road mode is returned to
“GRAVEL” automatically if the rear differ-
using 4-wheel drive, the rear differential lock
ential lock switch is turned off. switch (A) can be used to activate the rear
 When changing the drive mode-selector to differential lock for extra traction.
“4HLc” while the Off Road mode is in
Example: When “GRAVEL” mode is selected
“ROCK” mode, the Off Road mode is The selected control mode is displayed on the
switched to “GRAVEL” automatically. Off Road mode indicator display (A).

NOTE
 Vehicles equipped with the color liquid crys-
tal display, if the rear differential lock switch
is turned on during driving, the warning dis-
play will appear and the rear differential lock
will remain deactivated.
Operating the rear differential CAUTION The rear differential lock indi-
 Operate the rear differential switch after the
lock wheels are stopped. Operating the switch
cator lamp/display
E00606301504
with the wheels turning may cause the vehi-
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. cle to dart in unexpected directions. When the ignition switch is turned to the
2. Move the drive mode-selector to “4LLc” “ON” position or the operation mode is put in
or “4HLc” position. ON, the rear differential lock indicator
3. To activate the rear differential lock, press NOTE lamp/display in the meter cluster illuminates
the rear differential lock switch (1).  The rear differential lock does not operate for a few seconds then indicates the rear dif-
4. To deactivate the rear differential lock, when the drive mode-selector is in “2H” or ferential lock’s operating status (activated or
press the rear differential lock switch (2). “4H” position. deactivated).
 When the rear differential is locked with the
drive mode-selector in “4LLc” or “4HLc” [Vehicles equipped with the mono-color liq-
position, changing the drive mode-selector to uid crystal display]
“2H” or “4H” position makes the rear differ-
ential unlock automatically.


Indicator lamp : Blink
NOTE
 The status of the rear differential lock : Illuminate (steady)
(resulting from depression of the rear differ- : Remain off
ential lock switch) is shown by blinking or
steady illumination of the rear differential [Vehicles equipped with the color liquid
lock indicator lamp/display. crystal display]
The opera- Rear differential lock
[Vehicles equipped with the mono-color indicator lamp/display
tion state of
liquid crystal display]
The operation state
rear differ-
ential lock
Indicator Indicator 6
Rear differential lamp display
of rear differential
lock indicator lamp
lock
[Vehicles equipped with the color liquid crys-
tal display] Rear differ-
ential lock
Rear differential lock deactivated
Indicator lamp
deactivated
Switching in
Indicator display Switching in pro- progress
gress
Rear differ-
ential lock
activated
activated


: Blink (Drive mode indicator dis- NOTE CAUTION
play also blinks)  If the indicator lamp/display continues blink-  If a problem is detected in the rear differen-
: Illuminate (steady) ing after the switch has been pressed to acti- tial lock system, a safety device will activate.
vate the rear differential lock, bear in mind
: Remain off the following instructions: The rear differential lock indicator lamp will
blink rapidly (twice per second), warning
• If the vehicle speed is 7 mph or higher, display will appear, and the rear differential
NOTE decelerate to a speed of 1 mph or lower. lock will deactivate. Park your vehicle in a
 The indicator lamp/display and drive mode The indicator lamp/display will illuminate safe place, turn off the engine for a few
indicator display (vehicles equipped with the steadily and the rear differential lock will moments. Restart the engine. It is safe to
6 color liquid crystal display) blink while the
rear differential lock is being switched
be activated. continue driving if the lamps/warning dis-
play resume normal operation. If the rear dif-
• If the vehicle speed is 7 mph or lower,
between its activated and deactivated condi- turn the steering wheel from side to side ferential lock indicator lamp blinks and
tions. When the switching operation is com- until the indicator lamp/display illuminates warning display appears, when the rear dif-
plete, the indicator lamp is either illuminated steadily. If the vehicle is stuck in soft ferential lock is reactivated, have the vehicle
steadily or not illuminated. ground, make sure the area around the vehi- checked by an authorised MITSUBISHI
 The ASTC and ABS functions are suspended cle is clear then repeatedly attempt to drive MOTORS dealer as soon as possible.
while the rear differential lock is activated. forward and backward. The indicator
ASTC indicator lamp, ASTC OFF indicator lamp/display will illuminate steadily and Warning display (color liquid crystal dis-
lamp and ABS warning lamp are illuminated the rear differential lock will be activated. play)
while these functions are suspended.
It does not indicate a problem. When the rear
differential lock is disengaged, these lamps
go out and function again.
Refer to “ABS warning lamp/display” on
page 6-80, “ASTC indicator lamp or ASTC
OFF indicator lamp” on page 6-84.
 If the indicator lamp continues blinking after
the switch has been pressed to deactivate the
rear differential lock, hold the steering wheel
in the straight ahead position then slowly
depress and release the accelerator pedal sev-
eral times.

Examples of effective use of the When driving on rocky roads

rear differential lock
E00606401156 When the vehicle is unable to move because
one of the wheels is suspended in the air.
CAUTION
 Use the rear differential lock only as an
emergency measure when the vehicle is
stuck and cannot be freed with the drive
mode-selector in “4LLc” or “4HLc” posi-
tion. Deactivate the rear differential lock 6
immediately after using it.
Examples of incorrect use of the

When one of the wheels has fallen
rear differential lock
in a ditch E00606501157
WARNING
When getting out of snow  If the “4LLc” or “4HLc” position is
selected along with the rear differential
lock, the following phenomena appear and
When the vehicle is unable to get going it is very dangerous.
because one of the wheels is on the snow and Please be sure to release the rear differen-
the other on a paved road. tial lock on normal roads.
• If the rear differential lock is used by
mistake when driving on a paved road:
With the rear differential lock on, the
power to drive the vehicle straight ahead
becomes very strong, which may make it
difficult to turn the steering wheel.

6
WARNING WARNING
 If the rear differential lock is used by mis-  If the rear differential lock is used by mis-
take when turning a curve or making a take except when making an emergency
right or left turn at a crossing or the like: escape on snow or frozen road: It becomes
The vehicle is unable to make a turn and difficult to make a steady turn.
may go straight ahead.  In the case where the condition of the road
is different for the right tyre to drive from
the left tyre (such as one tyre on a paved
road and the other on ice), direction of the
vehicle may change abruptly when engine
braking or accelerating.
Do not use the rear differential lock except
when making an emergency escape on a
snow or frozen road, but drive with 4WD.

E00606602269
By selecting 4-wheel drive, both axles of the vehicle are rigidly connected with each other. This improves the traction characteristics. When turn-
ing sharp corners or moving forward and backward repeatedly, however, the drive line is stressed, which is felt as a braking effect. A 4-wheel
drive vehicle can accelerate more quickly and smoothly.


However, note that the braking distance is not shorter than that of a rear-wheel drive vehicle.
When using 4-wheel drive on rough roads (snow, mud, sand, etc.), it is important to operate the vehicle correctly.
WARNING
 Control the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, steering wheel, etc. according to the landform and nature of the soil. The driver should accurately
grasp the surrounding circumstances and drive carefully according to the respective circumstances. Especially, the off-road may lead to loss of
control and roll onto vehicle’s side or roof, which may cause an accident resulting in serious personal injury or death in the worst case.
NOTE 6
 The driving posture should be more upright and closer to the wheel than usual; adjust the seat to a good position for easy steering and pedal operation. Be
sure to wear the seat belt.
 After driving on rough roads, check each part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly with water. Refer to the “Vehicle care” section and “Inspection and
maintenance following rough road operation” on page 6-73.


Even a vehicle without the equipment for Off Road mode and rear differential lock (if so equipped) run each road condition.
The vehicle with each equipment set the recommended mode of the list shown below in each road condition, it may help you drive smoothly.
Road conditions
Driving mode Dry paved road Packed snow Deep snow or
Gravel road Sandy road Rocky road
and highway road muddy road
Super select 4WD
( P.6-46)
2H or 4H 4H 4HLc or 4LLc 4HLc or 4LLc 4HLc or 4LLc 4HLc or 4LLc
Super select 4WD II
6 ( P.6-50)
Off Road mode-selector
− − GRAVEL MUD/SNOW SAND ROCK
( P.6-60)
− − − Active* Active* Active*
( P.6-61)
*:The Off Road mode and the rear differential lock cannot be used at the same time. When the rear differential lock is set to ON, the Off Road
mode turns off. In addition, when the rear differential lock is ON, the Off Road mode will be deactivated even if the Off Road mode-selector
is operated.
CAUTION
 When driving on the off-road, confirm the conditions of the road surface and the landscape, and drive after confirming that the components of the suspen-
sion and the bottom of the front and rear bumper do not contact with the road surface. (Refer to “Vehicle dimensions” on page 11-4.)

Driving on dry paved road and Driving on packed snow roads Driving on unpaved roads
highway E00646500048 E00646600049
E00646400047
Set the transfer shift lever or the drive mode- Check the road surface conditions and set the
Set the transfer shift lever or the drive mode- selector to “4H” position, in accordance with transfer shift lever or the drive mode-selector
selector to “2H” or “4H” position to drive on the road conditions, and then gradually to “4HLc” or “4LLc”. Setting the Off Road
the dry paved road. Especially on dry high- depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth mode-selector (if so equipped) to “GRAVEL”
way, never select the “4HLc” or “4LLc” posi- start. may help you drive smoothly.
tion.
NOTE Driving on deep snow or muddy
CAUTION  The use of snow tyres and/or tyre chains is roads
 Selecting “4HLc” or “4LLc” position to recommended.
E00647300043
drive on dry paved road will increase the fuel  Maintain a safe distance between vehicles,
avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak- Set the transfer shift lever or the drive mode-
consumption with possible noise generation
and early tyre wear. ing (downshifting). selector to “4HLc” or “4LLc” position and
It may also increase the differential oil tem- then gradually depress the accelerator pedal
perature, resulting in possible damage to the for a smooth start. Keep the pressure on the
driving system. CAUTION accelerator pedal as constant as possible, and
Further, the drive train will be subjected to  Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration, drive at low speed.
excessive loading, possibly leading to oil and sharp turning; such operations could Set the Off Road mode-selector (if so
leakage, component seizure, or other serious cause skidding and spinouts. equipped) to “MUD/SNOW”, or set the rear
faults. differential lock to ON if the vehicle is likely

to get stuck. This may help you drive
smoothly.
NOTE Driving on sandy roads
 If the vehicle becomes stuck in deep snow or E00646700040
muddy roads, it can often be moved a rock-

WARNING ing motion. Move the selector lever rhythmi-
 When attempting to rock your vehicle out cally between the “D” (DRIVE) and “R”
of a stuck position, be sure that the area (REVERSE) position (with M/T, between 1st
around the vehicle is clear of people and and Reverse), while applying slight pressure
physical objects. The rocking motion may to the accelerator pedal.
cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for-  If it is necessary to drive in extremely muddy
6 ward or backward, causing injury or
damage to nearby people or objects.
conditions, the use of tyre chains is recom-
mended. Because the extent of muddy condi-
tions is difficult to judge and the vehicle
could become bogged down very deeply,
CAUTION operation should be at a low speed. If possi-
ble, get out of the vehicle and check the con- Check the sandy road condition and set the
 If any of following conditions occur while
ditions ahead before proceeding. transfer shift lever or the drive mode-selector
the vehicle is being driven, immediately park
your vehicle in a safe place and follow these  Driving over roads in coastal areas or roads to “4HLc” or “4LLc”. Gradually depress the
procedures: on which anti-skid preparations have been
accelerator pedal to start the vehicle and drive
spread can cause rust on the vehicle; wash
• The bar graph of engine coolant tempera- at a possible constant low speed. Either set
the vehicle thoroughly as soon as possible
ture display approaches the overheating the Off Road mode-selector (if so equipped)
after such use.
zone. to “SAND”, or set the rear differential lock (if
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
so equipped) to ON if the vehicle is likely to
• A/T fluid temperature warning display
get stuck. This may help you drive smoothly.
comes on.
Refer to “When a malfunction occurs in the
A/T” on page 6-43. CAUTION
 Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly
on sandy surfaces. In comparison with nor-
NOTE mal road surfaces, the engine and other
 Avoid sudden braking, acceleration, and drive-system components are put under
turning; such operations could result in the excessive strain when driving on such a sur-
vehicle becoming stuck. face, and this could lead to accidents.

Driving on rocky road Descending steep grades NOTE

E00646800041 E00646900042  When descending a sharp grade, if the brakes
are applied suddenly because of an obstacle
encountered, control of the vehicle could be
lost. Before descending the slope, walk down
it and confirm the path.
 Before descending a grade, it is necessary to
choose the appropriate gear. Avoid changing
gears or depressing the clutch while descend-
ing the grade. 6
 MITSUBISHI MOTORS is not responsible
to the operator for any damage or injury
caused or liability incurred by the improper
and negligent operation of a vehicle. All
Set the transfer shift lever or the drive mode- Set the transfer shift lever or the drive mode- techniques of vehicle operation described
selector to “4HLc” or “4LLc” and drive at a selector to “4HLc” or “4LLc” position, use herein depend on the skill and experience of
low speed. Depending on the road condition, the engine brake (downshifting) and descend the operator and other participating parties
and any deviation from the recommended
either set the Off Road mode-selector (if so slowly.
operation instructions above is at their own
equipped) to “ROCK”, or set the rear differ- If the vehicle cannot descend slowly even
risk.
ential lock (if so equipped) to ON if the vehi- using the engine brake. The Hill Descent
cle is likely to get stuck. This may help you Control may help drive smoothly.
drive smoothly. For details, refer to “Hill Descent Control
(HDC)” on page 6-77.
CAUTION
 Avoid driving alone on rocky roads. When WARNING
driving on rocky roads, follow an experi-  Avoid snaking down a sharp grade.
enced driver’s instruction for safe driving. Descend the grade as straight as possible.
NOTE
 Drive on a road surface where the tyre treads
contact with rocks as far as possible.

Climbing steep grades Turning sharp corners Crossing a stream

E00647000040 E00647100041 E00647200042
Set the transfer shift lever or the drive mode- When turning a sharp corner in “4HLc” or 4-wheel drive vehicles are not necessarily
selector to “4LLc” position to maximize the “4LLc” position at low speed, a slight differ- waterproof. If the electrical circuits become
engine torque. ence in steering may be experienced similar wet, further operation of the vehicle will be
to as if the brakes were applied. This is called impossible; therefore, avoid crossing streams
WARNING tight corner braking and results from each of unless absolutely necessary. If crossing a
 Go straight up. Do not try to traverse
the 4 tyres being at a different distance from stream is unavoidable, use the following pro-
across a steep slope. the corner. cedure:
 If you begin to lose traction, ease off the The phenomenon is peculiar to 4-wheel drive
vehicles. If this occurs, either straighten the 1. Check depths of a stream and geographi-
accelerator pedal and gently turn the
steering wheel alternatively left and right steering wheel, or change to “2H” or “4H” cal features before attempting to cross a
to regain adequate traction again. position. stream and ford the stream where the
water is as shallow as practicable.
2. Set the transfer shift lever or the drive
NOTE mode-selector to “4LLc” position.
 Choose as smooth a slope as possible with 3. Drive slowly at a speed of approximately
few stones or other obstacles. 3 mph to avoid splashing too much water.
 Before attempting to drive up the slope, walk
up it to confirm that the vehicle can handle
the grade.

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation

Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly
CAUTION depressing the brake pedal in order to dry Cautions on handling of
 Never cross a stream where the water is
deep.
out the brakes. If the brakes still do not 4-wheel drive vehicles*
function properly, contact an authorised E00606802030
Do not change gears while crossing the
stream. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon
Frequent crossing of streams can adversely as possible to have the brakes checked.
affect the life span of the vehicle; consult an  Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clog- Tyres and wheels
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer ging the radiator core and A/T oil cooler.
and take the necessary measures to prepare,  After crossing a stream, be sure to have Since the driving torque can be applied to the
inspect, and repair the vehicle.
 After crossing a stream, apply the brakes to
the following items inspected at an 4 wheels, the performance of the vehicle 6
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS when operating in 4-wheel drive is greatly
be sure they are functioning properly. If the dealer and take the necessary measures. affected by the condition of the tyres.
brakes are wet and not functioning properly, • Check the brake system and, if neces-
dry them out by driving slowly while lightly Pay close attention to the tyres.
sary, have it serviced.
depressing the brake pedal.
• Check the engine, transmission, transfer,
and differential oil or grease level and  Install specified tyres on all wheels. Refer
turbidity. If the oil or grease is milky, it to “Tyres and wheels” on page 11-10.
Inspection and maintenance indicates water contamination. Replace  Be sure to the appropriate tyre inflation
pressure according to load or trailer tow-
following rough road opera- it with new oil or grease.
ing. Refer to “Tyre inflation pressures” on
• Grease the propeller shaft.
tion • Check the inside of the vehicle. If page 10-16.
E00606701524
ingress of water is found, dry the carpet  Be sure to fit all 4 tyres and wheels of the
After operating the vehicle in rough road con- etc. same size and type.
ditions, be sure to perform the following • Inspect the headlamps. If the headlamp When replacement of any of the tyres or
inspection and maintenance procedures: bulb is flooded with water, have the wheels is necessary, replace all of them.
headlamp drained off.  All tyres should be rotated whenever the
 Check that the vehicle has not been dam- wear difference between the front and rear
aged by rocks, gravel, etc. tyres is recognizable.
 Carefully wash the vehicle with water.
Good vehicle performance cannot be
expected if there is a difference in wear
between tyres. Refer to “Tyre rotation” on
page 10-18.

Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles*

 Check the tyre inflation pressure regu- Only when you cannot receive a towing ser-
larly. vice from a MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
CAUTION
 Be sure to shift the transfer shift lever or set
or commercial tow truck service, tow your
the drive mode-selector to “2H” position and
vehicle carefully in accordance with the
CAUTION instructions given in “Towing” on page 8-15.
transport the vehicle with the driving wheels
 Always use tyres of the same size, same on a carriage {Type A (vehicles with the
type, and same brand which have no wear transfer shift lever), C or D} as illustrated.
differences. Using the tyres which differ in If you can shift the transfer shift lever to Never try to tow with the transfer shift lever
size, type, brands or the degree of wear or the “2H” position. or the drive mode-selector in “4H”, “4HLc”
the inappropriate tyre inflation pressure, will or “4LLc” position and with the front or rear
6 increase the differential oil temperature and wheels on the ground (Type A or B) as illus-
trated. This could result in damage to the
may be impossible to shift the transfer,
resulting in possible damage to the driving drivetrain, or unstable towing.
system. Further, the drive train will be sub- If you cannot shift the transfer shift lever or
jected to excessive loading, possibly leading set the drive mode-selector to “2H” position
to oil leakage, component seizure, or other or the transmission is malfunctioning or
serious faults. damaged, transport the vehicle with all the
wheels on a carriage (Type C or D) as illus-
If you can not shift the transfer shift lever
trated.
or set the drive-mode selector to the “2H”
Towing position.
Jacking up a 4-wheel drive

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
have it done by your MITSUBISHI vehicles
MOTORS dealer or a commercial tow truck
service.
In the following cases, transport the vehicle
WARNING
 Do not crank the engine while jacking up
using a tow truck.
the vehicle.
The tyre on the ground may turn and the
 The engine runs but the vehicle does not
vehicle may roll off the jack.
move or abnormal noise is produced.
 Inspection of the vehicle’s underside
reveals that oil or some other fluid is leak-
ing.

Limited-slip differential*
being depressed, keep depressing the brake
Limited-slip differential* CAUTION pedal down harder and further than usual;
 When attempting to extract the vehicle from
E00606900037 stop driving as soon as possible and have the
snow, mud, etc., and the engine is run contin-
brake system repaired.
A limited-slip differential is applied for the uously at high speed, the limited-slip differ-
rear wheel differential only. The features of ential will be adversely affected.
this limited-slip differential are described WARNING
below:  Do not turn off the engine while your vehi-
Braking cle is in motion.
Just as with a conventional differential, the E00607003094
If you turn off the engine while driving,
wheel on one side is allowed to turn at a dif- All the parts of the brake system are critical the power assistance for the braking sys- 6
ferent speed from the wheel on the other side to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an tem will stop working and your brakes
when the vehicle is cornering. The difference authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer at will not work effectively.
between the limited-slip differential and a regular intervals according to the service  If the power assist is lost or if either brake
conventional differential is that if the wheel booklet. hydraulic system stops working properly,
take your vehicle to an authorised
on one side of the vehicle loses traction, a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer immedi-
greater amount of torque is applied to the CAUTION ately.
wheel on the other side to improve traction.
 Avoid driving habits that cause heavy brak-
ing and never “ride” the brakes by resting
NOTE your foot on the brake pedal while driving. Warning display
 Even if there is a difference in the amount of It causes brake overheating and fade.
traction the wheels can get, if both of them
are spinning, the limited-slip differential will
The brake warning lamp illuminates to indi-
cate a fault in the braking system. A warning
not be effective. Brake system is also displayed on the multi information dis-
play. Refer to “Brake warning lamp (red)”
The service brake is divided into two brake and “Brake warning display” on page 5-52,
CAUTION circuits. And your vehicle is equipped with
 Never start the engine while one of the rear 5-55.
power brakes. If one brake circuit fails, the
wheels is jacked up and the other in contact
other is available to stop the vehicle. If your
with the ground; doing so may cause the
vehicle should lose the power assist for some When brakes are wet
vehicle to jump forward.
reason, the brakes will still work. In these sit-
uations, even if the brake pedal moves down Check the brake system while driving at a
to the very end of its possible stroke or resists low speed immediately after starting, espe-
Hill start assist*

cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm  The disc brakes are provided with a warn-
they work normally. ing device which emits a shrieking metal-
CAUTION
 The hill start assist is not designed to keep
A film of water can be formed on the brake lic sound while braking if the brake pads
the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes
discs or brake drums and prevent normal have reached their wear limit. If you hear
for more than 2 seconds.
braking after driving in heavy rain or through this sound, have the brake pads replaced
 When facing uphill, do not rely on using the
large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed. immediately by your MITSUBISHI hill start assist to maintain a stopped position
If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving MOTORS dealer. as an alternative to depressing the brake
slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal.
pedal. WARNING Doing so could cause an accident.
6  Driving with worn brake pads will make it  Do not turn the ignition switch to the
harder to stop, and can cause an accident. “LOCK” or “ACC” position or put the oper-
When driving downhill ation mode in ACC or OFF while the hill
start assist is operating. The hill start assist
It is important to take advantage of the engine could stop operating, which could result in
braking by shifting to a lower shift position
Hill start assist* an accident.
while driving on steep downhill roads in E00628001325
order to prevent the brakes from overheating. The hill start assist makes it easy to start off To operate
on a steep uphill slope by preventing the E00628101414
WARNING vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the 1. Stop the vehicle completely using the
 Do not leave any objects near the brake braking force for approximately 2 seconds brake pedal.
pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; when you move your foot from the brake 2. On vehicles equipped with M/T, place the
doing so could prevent the full pedal pedal to the accelerator pedal. gearshift lever into the 1st position.
stroke that would be necessary in an On vehicles equipped with A/T, place the
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can selector lever into the “D” (DRIVE) posi-
be operated freely at all times. Make sure CAUTION
 Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to tion.
the floor mat is securely held in place.
prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.
Under certain circumstances, even when hill NOTE
start assist is activated, the vehicle may  When reversing on an uphill slope, place the
Brake pads move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf- selector lever or gearshift lever into the “R”
ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily position.
 Avoid hard braking situations. loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-
New brakes need to be broken-in by mod- pery.
erate use for the first 125 miles.

Hill Descent Control (HDC)*

3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start
assist will maintain the braking force
NOTE CAUTION
• The vehicle is completely stationary, with  If the warning is displayed, the hill start
applied while stopping for approximately
the brake pedal depressed. assist will not operate. Start off carefully.
2 seconds.
• The parking brake is released.  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill
 The hill start assist will not operate if the engine.
start assist gradually will decrease the Restart the engine and check whether the dis-
accelerator pedal is depressed before the
braking force as the vehicle starts moving. brake pedal is released. play/indicator goes out, in which case the hill
 The hill start assist also operates when start assist is again working normally. If they
remain displayed or reappear frequently, it is
NOTE reversing on an uphill slope.
 The hill start assist is activated when all of  When the hill start assist is activated, you not necessary to stop the vehicle immedi-
ately, but the vehicle should be inspected by
6
the following conditions are met. may feel the operating sound.
This is a normal result of the hill start assist an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
• The engine is running. dealer.
operation, and does not indicate a problem.
(The hill start assist will not be activated
while the engine is starting or immediately
after the engine is started.) Warning lamp/display
• On vehicles equipped with M/T, the gear- E00628201532
Hill Descent Control
shift lever is in the following position.
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- (HDC)*
[When starting an uphill slope forwards.] tem, the warning lamp/display will turn on. E00642900044
The gearshift lever is in any position other

Warning lamp The Hill Descent Control is the system that
than “R” (Return).
(The hill start assist will operate, even if the
assists the steady driving with the constant
gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) posi- speed when descending steep grades where it
tion.) is impossible to decelerate the vehicle suffi-
Warning display ciently by the engine brake only or rough
[When starting an uphill slope backwards.] roads.
The gearshift lever is in the “R” (Return)
position.
(The hill start assist will not operate when WARNING
the gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral)  The driver has the responsibility to drive
position.) safely. Make sure to drive safely according
• On vehicles equipped with A/T, the selector to road conditions without relying too
lever is in any position other than “P” much on the Hill Descent Control.
(PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).

Hill Descent Control (HDC)*
WARNING NOTE
 When driving slippery roads such as  If pressing the Hill Descent Control switch
muddy, icy or unpaved roads, the vehicle continuously after setting the Hill Descent
will not allow you to stay at a certain low Control to ON (stand by), the Hill Descent
speed, which may lead to a serious acci- Control will return to OFF as a protection
dent. function is operated. After returning to OFF,
the Hill Descent Control will not be switched
to ON (Stand by) even if the Hill Descent
CAUTION Control switch is pressed. To set the Hill
6  When there is a malfunction in the Hill Descent Control to ON, restart the engine
and press the Hill Descent Control switch
Descent Control system, ASTC Warning
lamp come on. When ASTC Warning lamp again.
3. Make sure that Hill Descent Control indi-
come on, have the vehicle inspected at an  It is impossible to set the Hill Descent Con-
cator lamp comes on.
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. trol to ON (stand by) in the following condi-
When the Hill Descent Control indicator tions.
(Refer to “ASTC warning lamp/display” on
lamp comes on, the Hill Descent Control • Vehicle speed: More than approximately
page 6-85)
When the warning lamp comes on, the warn-
set to ON (stand by). 12 mph
ing display may also appear. • Rear differential lock (if so equipped)：acti-
Indicator lamp vating
• Brake system: brake temperature high
To operate • ASTC warning lamp: illuminating or blink-
E00643000071
ing
Refer to “ASTC warning lamp/display” on
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Press the Hill Descent Control switch. NOTE page 6-85
 The indicator lamp should illuminate when In the following cases, the Hill Descent Con-
the operation mode is put in ON and should trol brake control operates.
go off after a few seconds.
 Vehicle speed: 12 mph or less
 The accelerator pedal or the brake pedal is
not operated.
When the control operates, the Hill Descent

Control indicator lamp blinks, and the brake

Brake assist system*

lamps and the high mounted stop lamp are 2. Make sure that the Hill Descent Control
illuminated. It is possible to change the con- indicator lamp is off.
CAUTION
 The brake assist system is not a device
trolled vehicle speed by operating the acceler-
designed to exercise braking force greater
ator pedal or the brake pedal.
When you lift your foot off the pedal, the Hill
NOTE than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a
 The Hill Descent Control turns off automati- sufficient distance between your vehicle and
Descent Control performs brake control so as cally and the Hill Descent Control indicator a vehicle in front of you without relying too
to keep the vehicle speed at that time. lamp in the meter goes off without pressing much on the brake assist system.
the Hill Descent Control switch in the fol-
lowing conditions.
NOTE
 The Hill Descent Control will not operate • Vehicle speed: More than approximately NOTE 6
even if the Hill Descent Control is in ON 50 mph  Once the brake assist system is operational,
(stand by), and the control will temporarily • Rear differential lock (if so equipped): acti- it maintains great braking force even if the
stop during the activation of it in the follow- vating brake pedal is lightly released.
ing conditions. • ASTC warning lamp: ON To stop its operation, completely remove
• Vehicle speed: More than approximately • Brake system: brake temperature high your foot from the brake pedal.
12 mph  When the brake assist system is in use while
 When the Hill Descent Control is activated, driving, you may feel the brake pedal
attempt to resist, the pedal moves in small
you may feel the vehicle body, the steering
wheel and the brake pedal vibrate and hear
Brake assist system* motions in conjunction with the operation
the operation noise. You may also feel the E00627001719 noise, or the vehicle body and the steering
depressed brake pedal is solid or loose. This wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake
The brake assist system is a device assisting assist system is operating normally and does
does not indicate a malfunction and the Hill
Descent Control is operating normally.
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
 The Hill Descent Control indicator lamp
firmly such as in emergency stop situations depress the brake pedal.
blinks on a flat road, but this does not indi- and provides greater braking force.  When the anti-lock brake system warning
cate a malfunction. lamp or only the active stability & traction
If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the control (ASTC) indicator lamp is illumi-
brakes will be applied with more force than nated, the brake assist system may not func-
usual. tion.
To deactivate
E00643200044
1. Press the Hill Descent Control switch.

The Hill Descent Control will be gradu-
ally released.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

 When the ABS is in use, you may feel the
Anti-lock brake system brake pedal pulsation and the vibrations
ABS warning lamp/display
(ABS) of the vehicle body and steering wheel. It
Warning lamp
E00607202510
E00607102610 may also feel as if the pedal resists being

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps pre- pressed.
vent the wheels from locking up when brak- In this situation, simply hold the brake
ing. This helps maintain vehicle drivability pedal down firmly. Do not pump the
and steering wheel handling. brake, which will result in reduced Warning display
braking performance.
6 Driving hints  An operation noise is emitted from the
engine compartment or feel a shock from
the brake pedal when start driving imme-
 Always keep a safe distance from the diately after starting the engine. These are
vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi- normal sound or operation that the ABS
cle is equipped with the ABS, leave a makes when performing a self-check. It If there is a malfunction in the system, the
greater braking distance when: does not indicate a malfunction. ABS warning lamp will come on and the
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered warning display will appear on the informa-
 The ABS can be used after the vehicle has
roads. tion screen in the multi information display.
reached a speed over approximately
• Driving with tyre chains installed.
6 mph. It stops working when the vehi- Under normal conditions, the ABS warning
• Driving on roads where the road surface
cle slows below 4 mph. lamp only comes on when the ignition switch
is pitted or has other differences in sur- is turned to the “ON” position or the opera-
face height. tion mode is put in ON and goes off a few
• Driving on uneven road surfaces. CAUTION seconds later.
 Operation of ABS is not restricted situa-  The ABS cannot prevent accidents. It is your
tions where brakes are applied suddenly. responsibility to take safety precautions and
This system may also prevent the wheels to drive carefully. CAUTION
from locking when you drive over man-  To prevent failure of the ABS, be sure all  Any of the following warning lamp/display
holes, steel roadwork plates, road mark- 4 wheels and tyres are the same size and the behaviour indicates that the ABS is not func-
same type. tioning and only the standard brake system is
ings, or any uneven road surface.
 Do not install any aftermarket limited slip working. (The standard brake system is func-
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ABS tioning normally.) If this happens, please
may stop functioning properly. contact your nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer for inspec-
tion.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

Warning display
CAUTION If the warning lamp / display illu-
• When the ignition switch is turned to the minate while driving
“ON” position or the operation mode is put
in ON, the warning lamp does not come on
or it remains on and does not go off  If only the ABS warning lamp/dis-
• The warning lamp comes on while driving
play illuminate
• The warning display appears while driving
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
NOTE Restart the engine and check to see whether
6
 On vehicles with the rear differential lock
the lamp goes out after a few minutes driving;
and the active stability & traction control The ABS and brake force distribution func-
(ASTC), the ASTC and ABS functions are if it then remains off during driving, there is
no problem. tion may not work, so hard braking could
suspended while the rear differential lock is
However, if the warning lamp/display do not make the vehicle unstable.
activated.
disappear, or if they come on again when the Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
ASTC indicator lamp, ASTC OFF indicator
lamp and ABS warning lamp are illuminated vehicle is driven, have the vehicle checked by Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an
while these functions are suspended. an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
It does not indicate a problem. When the rear dealer as soon as possible.
differential lock is disengaged, these indica- NOTE
tor lamp go out and function again.
 If the ABS warning lamp / display  The ABS warning lamp and brake warning
Refer to “ASTC indicator or ASTC OFF
lamp illuminate at the same time and the
lamp” on page 6-84. and brake warning lamp / display
warning displays appear alternately on the
illuminate at the same time information screen in the multi-information
display.
Warning lamp
After driving on icy roads

E00618801290
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove

any snow and ice which may have be left
around the wheels. When doing this, be care-

Power steering system

ful not to damage the wheel speed sensors
(A) and cables located at each wheel.
WARNING CAUTION
 Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is  Do not over-rely on the ASTC. Even the
moving. Stopping the engine would make ASTC cannot prevent the natural laws of
Front Rear the steering wheel extremely hard to turn, physics from acting on the vehicle.
possibly resulting in an accident. This system, like any other system, has lim-
its and cannot help you to maintain traction
and control of the vehicle in all circum-
CAUTION stances. Reckless driving can lead to acci-
dents. It is the driver’s responsibility to drive
 Do not leave the steering wheel turned all the
6 way in one direction. This can cause damage
carefully. This means into account the traffic,
road and environmental conditions.
to the power steering system.
 Be sure to use the same specified type and
size of tyre on all 4 wheels. Otherwise, the
ASTC may not work correctly.
Active Stability & Traction  Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
Control (ASTC)* differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The
Power steering system E00616701628
active stability control function may stop
E00607401472
functioning properly.
The power steering system operates while the The active stability & traction control
engine is running. It helps reduce the effort (ASTC) takes overall control of the anti-lock
needed to turn the steering wheel. brake system, traction control function and NOTE
active stability control function to help main-  An operation noise may be emitted from the
The power steering system has mechanical
tain the vehicle’s control and traction. Please engine compartment in the following situa-
steering capability in case the power assist is tions. The sound is associated with checking
lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea- read this section in conjunction with the page
the operations of the ASTC. At this time, you
son, you will still be able to steer your vehi- on the anti-lock brake system, traction control
may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you
cle, but you will notice it takes much more function and active stability control function. depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-
effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi- tion.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)  P.6-80
cle inspected at an authorised MITSUBISHI • When the ignition switch is set to the “ON”
Active Stability Control function  P.6-83
MOTORS dealer. position or the operation mode is put in ON.
Active Traction Control function  P.6-84 • When the vehicle is driven for a while after
the engine is turned on.

Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC)*
NOTE NOTE
 When the ASTC is activated, you may feel a  Vehicles with super select 4WD II, the active
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin- stability control function does not operate
ing sound from the engine compartment. when the drive mode-selector is in the
This indicates that the system is operating “4LLc” position. When the active stability
normally. It does not indicate a malfunction. control function is operating with the drive
 When the anti-lock brake system warning mode-selector in the “2H”, “4H” or “4HLc”
lamp is illuminated, the ASTC is not active. position, setting the drive mode-selector to
 On vehicles with the rear differential lock, the “4LLc” position makes the active stabil-
the ASTC and ABS functions are suspended ity control function deactivate automatically.
 The active stability control function operates
6
while the rear differential lock is activated.
ASTC indicator lamp, ASTC OFF indicator at speeds of approximately 9 mph or
lamp and ABS warning lamp are illuminated higher. CAUTION
while these functions are suspended. It does  For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch
not indicate a problem. When the rear differ- should only be operated when the vehicle is
ential lock is disengaged, these indicator “ASC OFF” switch stopped.
lamp go out and function again. Refer to E00639800078  Be sure to keep the active stability control
“ABS warning lamp/display” on page 6-80, function on while driving in normal circum-
“ASTC indicator lamp or ASTC OFF indica- The active stability control function is auto-
stances.
tor lamp” on page 6-84. matically activated when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position or the opera-
tion mode is put in ON. You can deactivate
Active Stability Control func- the system by pressing down the “ASC OFF” Driving hints
tion switch for 3 seconds or longer. E00616801111
E00616901239 When the active stability control function is When extricating the vehicle from mud, sand
The active stability control function is or fresh snow with the drive mode-selector in
deactivated, the indicator will turn on. To
designed to help the driver maintain control the “2H”, “4H” or “4HLc” position, you may
reactivate the ASC, momentarily press the
of the vehicle on slippery roads or during find that operation of the ASTC prevents the
“ASC OFF” switch; the indicator is turned engine speed from increasing in response to
rapid steering maneuvers. It works by con-
off. depression of the accelerator pedal. If this
trolling the engine output and the brake on
each wheel. happens and the vehicle remains stuck as a
result, place the drive mode-selector in the
“4LLc” position or turn the active stability
control switch OFF. The vehicle will then be
Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC)*

easier to extricate. (Brake control of the
active traction control function is still work-
ASTC indicator lamp or ASTC CAUTION
ing to prevent wheel spins when ASC OFF OFF indicator lamp  When indicator lamp blinks, ASTC is
switch “OFF” or “4LLc” position selected.) E00619301742 operating, which means that the road is slip-
The indicator lamps should illuminate when pery or that your vehicle’s wheels are begin-
ning to slip. If this happens, drive slower
NOTE the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
with less accelerator input.
 If you continue to press the “ASC OFF” position or the operation mode is put in ON
 If the temperature in the braking system con-
switch after the active stability control func- and should go off after a few seconds. If the
tinues to increase due to continuous brake
tion is turned off, the “mistaken operation indicator lamps stay on or do not illuminate
control on a slippery road surface, the warn-
6 protection function” will activate and the when the ignition switch is turned to the ing display will appear and the warning
active stability control function will turn “ON” position or the operation mode is put in buzzer will sound intermittently to give a
back on. ON, please contact your nearest authorised warning to the driver. If the driver continues
 Even if the active stability control function is MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer for inspec- driving even after the warning buzzer sounds
turned off, it may activate depending on the tion. and then the temperature is further increased,
vehicle’s movement. the warning display will appear again, and
ASTC indicator lamp the buzzer will sound continuously for sev-
- eral seconds. To prevent the brake system
The indicator lamp will blink when
Active Traction Control func- the ASTC is operating. from overheating, the brake control of the
traction control function will be temporarily
tion -
ASTC OFF indicator lamp
This indicator lamp will turn on when suspended. At this time, the indicator
E00617001048
the active stability control function is lamp blinks slowly.
On slippery surfaces, the active traction con- The engine control of the traction control
deactivated by either of the following
trol function prevents the drive wheels from function and normal brake operation will not
operations:
spinning excessive, thus helping the vehicle be affected. Park your vehicle in a safe place.
to start moving from a stopped condition. It When the temperature in the braking system
 The ASC OFF switch is pressed to deacti-
also provides sufficient driving force and has come down, the indicator lamp will
vated the system.
steering performance as the vehicle turns be turned off and the traction control func-
 The drive mode-selector is placed in the
while pressing the acceleration pedal. tion will start operating again.
“4LLc” position.
CAUTION
 When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
road, be sure to install snow tyres and drive
the vehicle at moderate speeds.

Cruise control*
NOTE NOTE CAUTION

 The indicator lamp may turn on when  The ASTC function indicator display illumi-  The system may be malfunctioning.
nates only when the 2WD/4WD operation Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
you start the engine. This means that the bat-
indicator display is selected. (Vehicles engine.
tery voltage momentarily dropped when the
equipped with the color liquid crystal display Restart the engine and check whether the dis-
engine was started. It does not indicate a
only) play/indicator lamp goes out. If they go out,
malfunction, provided that the indicator
there is no abnormal condition. If they do not
lamp goes out immediately.
go out or appear frequently, it is not neces-
sary to stop the vehicle immediately, but we
ASTC warning lamp/display
ASTC function indicator display E00619401743
recommend you to have your vehicle
inspected.
6
E00647400060 If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
When the ASTC is operating, the indicator tem, the following warning lamp/warning
display of the wheels that are controlled by display will turn on. Towing
the ASTC will blink. E00624401145
Warning lamp
The indicator for the wheel being subjected to
antispin control blinks. CAUTION
- ASTC indicator lamp  If the vehicle is towed with the ignition
- ASTC OFF indicator lamp mode in ON and only the front wheels or
only the rear wheels raised off the ground,
the ASTC may operate, resulting in an acci-
Warning display
dent.
Refer to “Towing” on page 8-15.
Cruise control*
E00609102340
Cruise control is an automatic speed control

Example indication: ASTC function control-
system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-
ling front-right wheel
vated at approximately 25 mph or more.

Cruise control*
CAUTION Cruise control switches NOTE

 When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,  When operating the cruise control switches,
turn off the cruise control for safety. press the cruise control switches correctly.
 Do not use cruise control when driving con- The set speed driving may be deactivated
ditions will not allow you to stay at the same automatically if two or more switches of the
speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads cruise control are pressed at the same time.
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
 On vehicles with M/T, do not move the gear- To activate
6 shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position E00609302472
while driving at a set speed without depress-
1. With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
ing the clutch pedal. The engine will run too
fast and might be damaged.
tion or the operation mode in ON, press
the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch
(A) to turn on the cruise control. The indi-
A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch cator lamp/indicator display in the meter
NOTE
cluster will come on.
 Cruise control may not be able to keep your Used to turn on and off the cruise control.
speed on uphills or downhills.
 Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
B- SET - switch
You may use the accelerator pedal if you
want to stay at your set speed.
Used to reduce the set speed and to set the
 Your speed may increase to more than the set
desired speed.
speed on a steep downhill. You have to use
the brake to control your speed. As a result,
the set speed driving is deactivated. C- RES + switch
Used to increase the set speed and to return to

the original set speed.
Indicator lamp
D- CANCEL switch
Used to deactivate the set speed driving.

Cruise control*
Indicator display
To increase the set speed Accelerator pedal
E00609401841
There are 2 ways to increase the set speed. While driving at the set speed, use the accel-
erator pedal to reach your desired speed and
2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired then push down the SET - switch (B) and
RES + switch
speed, then push down and release the release the switch momentarily to set a new
SET - switch (B) when the indicator desired cruising speed.
Push up and hold the RES + switch (C) while
lamp/indicator display is illuminated. The
driving at the set speed, and your speed will
vehicle will then maintain the desired
speed. The “SET” indicator appears on
then gradually increase. 6
When you reach your desired speed, release
the information display in the meter clus-
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
ter. (For vehicles equipped with color liq-
set.
uid crystal display meter)
To decrease the set speed

E00609501783
There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.
NOTE To increase your speed in small amounts, SET - switch

 When you release the SET - switch (B), the push up the RES + switch (C) for less than
vehicle speed will be set. approximately 1 second and release it.
Each time you push up the RES + switch (C), Push down and hold the SET - switch (B)
your vehicle will go approximately 1 mph while driving at the set speed, and your speed
will slow down gradually.
faster.

Cruise control*
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
set.
To temporarily increase or To temporarily decrease the speed

decrease the speed
To slow down your speed in small amounts, E00609601351 Depress the brake pedal to decrease the
push down the SET - switch (B) for less than speed. To return to the previously set speed,
approximately 1 second and release it. To temporarily increase the speed push up the RES + switch (C).
Each time you push down the SET - switch Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page
(B), your vehicle will slow down by approxi- 6-89.
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would
mately 1 mph. normally. When you release the pedal, you
will return to your set speed.
Brake pedal
While driving at the set speed, use the brake

pedal, which disengages the cruise control,
then push down the SET - switch (B) and
release the switch momentarily to set a new
desired cruising speed.

Cruise control*
 When the active stability & traction con-
To deactivate trol (ASTC) starts operating. (if so
To resume the set speed
E00609702652 E00609801946
equipped)
The set speed driving can be deactivated as Refer to “Active stability & traction con- If the set speed driving is deactivated by the
follows: trol (ASTC)” on page 6-82. condition described in “To deactivate” on
page 6-89, you can resume the previously set
 Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF speed by push up the RES + switch (C) while
switch (A) (Cruise control will be turned WARNING driving at a speed of approximately 25 mph
off.)  On vehicles with A/T, although the set or higher. The “SET” indicator appears on the
 Press the CANCEL switch (D). speed driving will be deactivated when
information display in the meter cluster. (For
 Depress the brake pedal. shifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position,
vehicles equipped with color liquid crystal
6
never move the selector lever to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position while driving. display meter)
You would have no engine braking and
could cause a serious accident.
Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-

vated as follow:
 When the engine speed rises and

approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the
red-colored part of the tachometer dial).
The set speed driving is deactivated automati- CAUTION

cally in any of the following ways.  When the set speed driving is deactivated Under either of the following conditions,
automatically in any situation other than however, using the switch does not allow you
 When you depress the clutch pedal (on those listed above, there may be a system
to resume the previously set speed. In these
vehicles with M/T). malfunction.
Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
 When your speed slows to approximately
9 mph or more below the set speed switch to turn off the cruise control and have
 The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
because of a hill, etc. your vehicle inspected by an authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. switch is pressed.
 When your speed slows to approximately  The ignition switch is turned OFF or the
25 mph or less. operation mode is put in OFF.


 Indicator lamp go off.
WARNING CAUTION
 A driver is responsible for driving safely.  In the following situations, the system may
Adaptive Cruise Control Even if the ACC is in use, always grasp become transiently unable to detect a vehicle
the surrounding circumstances and pro- in front or triggers its control and alarm
System (ACC)* vide for safe driving. functions by detecting something other than
E00634601209
 Never rely solely on the ACC. The ACC is a vehicle in front.
the system to reduce load on the driver. • When driving in curved sections of road
The ACC maintains a set speed with no need
The ACC is not a collision avoidance sys- including their entrance/outlet or running
for you to use the accelerator pedal. Using a tem or an automatic driving system. The beside a closed lane in a traffic work or
sensor (A), the system also measures the rela-
6 tive speed and distance between your vehicle
system is not intended to compensate for
driver’s loss of attention to the front dur-
similar zone.
and a vehicle in front, and maintains a set fol- ing driving due to distraction or careless-
lowing distance between your vehicle and the ness or supplement a drop in visibility due
vehicle in front by automatically decelerating to the rain and fog.
your vehicle if it becomes too close to the It is never a substitute for your safe and
vehicle in front. careful driving. Always be ready to apply
The ACC is the driver assist system to aid the brakes manually.
comfortable driving on a freeway. Stop lamps  This system may not correctly detect the
• When your vehicle position in a lane is
actual situation depending on the type of
are illuminated during automatic braking. instable, is frequently steered to right and
vehicle in front and its conditions, the
If you desire, a cruise control without inter- weather conditions, and the road condi-
left, or running unstably due to a traffic
vention of the following distance control is accident, trouble with some vehicles, etc.
tions.
also selectable. Additionally, the system may be unable to • When driving on the road that the vehicle in
decelerate sufficiently if the vehicle in front runs in offset position from your vehi-
front applies the brakes suddenly or cle.
another vehicle cuts into your path, so
your vehicle approaches the front vehicle.
Improper usage of this system or loss of
attention to the front by the over-rely on
the ACC, may result in a serious accident.

CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

 Never use the ACC in any of the following • Avoid application of strong shock loads to  When depressing the brake pedal while auto-
situations. Failure to follow this instruction the sensor and never tamper with or remove matic brake is applied, the brake pedal is felt
could lead to an accident. the sensor mounting screws. solidly, but it is not abnormal. You can more
• On roads with heavy traffic or roads includ- • The emblem and the sensor should be kept depress the pedal and it provides greater
ing many winding or steep curves clean. braking force.
• On roads with slippery surfaces, such as • Do not cover the sensor mounted area of  Sound is heard while automatic brake, but it
frozen, snow-covered, and dirt roads the vehicle or the emblem on the front is operated a brake control and not abnormal.
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain, bumper with a sticker or anything such as a
snow, sand storms, etc.) grill guard etc.
When ACC detects a vehicle in 6
• On steep downslopes • The emblem should not be modified or
• On roads including steep up and down painted. front within the set distance
slopes or many changes in inclination • Avoid using different size tyres from those E00638000057
• In traffic requiring frequent acceleration specified and maintain even tyre wear. The ACC makes control to maintain a follow-
and deceleration • Do not modify the suspension of your vehi- ing distance (time gap) matched with the
• When the proximity alarm sounds fre- cle. vehicle speed between your vehicle and a
quently  When the emblem or the sensor is deformed vehicle in front while also activating brakes
• When your vehicle is towed or your vehicle for an accident, please do not use the ACC
as necessary.
tows another vehicle. and contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
• When your vehicle is on a chassis MOTORS dealer.
dynamometer or free rollers.
• When the air pressure in the tyres is not When ACC detects no vehicle
correct.
• When installing the spare tyre for emer-
in front within the set distance
E00638100045
gency.
• When snow traction device (tyre chains) are Your vehicle runs at a speed to which you set.
attached. It is possible to set the speed between approx-
 Be sure to take the following precautions to imately 25 and 93 mph.
keep the system in proper operating condi-
If the vehicle in front stops, the ACC reacts to
tions.
Improper handling of the system components NOTE it by stopping your vehicle.
may result in degraded sensor performance.  If the vehicle speed exceed the set speed on Depress the brake pedal as soon as your vehi-
down slope, the system automatically applies cle comes to a stop.
the brake to maintain the vehicle speed.


resume the set speed and continues running at
that speed.
WARNING
• When driving on a curve.
6 NOTE  If the vehicle in front turns off or changes

 If you do not depress the brake pedal within lane and another stationary vehicle is
1.5 seconds after an automatic stop, you are located in front of that vehicle, the ACC
alerted to automatic cancellation of the ACC WARNING will not make deceleration control to the
by a buzzer and display message and the  Your vehicle may accelerate up to the set stationary vehicle.
ACC shift into the ‘standby state’. speed in the following situations. Apply
the brake, if necessary, to slow down.
The vehicle will then start creeping as the Proximity alarm
brakes are released. • When your vehicle no longer follows the
E00634701095
 If the turn-signal lever is operated while the vehicle in front, e.g. at a freeway exit or
ACC is active, the system may accelerate the when your vehicle or the vehicle in front While the ACC is active, if your vehicle
vehicle to assist you in passing a vehicle in changes its lane. approaches too closely to a vehicle in front
front, which reduces the distance between because the ACC cannot allow for an ade-
your vehicle and the vehicle in front. quate deceleration in such cases as rapid
deceleration of the vehicle in front or appari-
tion of a vehicle cutting in front of your vehi-
CAUTION cle, the ACC gives a warning by sounding a
 Never leave the vehicle during stopping by buzzer and displaying a message.
automatic braking. If this happens, increase the following dis-
tance by depressing the brake pedal or mak-
ing other decelerating control.
When the ACC no longer detects any vehicle
in front, a buzzer sounds and the symbol of
vehicle running ahead disappears from the
screen. The vehicle is slowly accelerated to

CAUTION CAUTION
 The ACC may not be able to maintain the set • When the emblem and the sensor become
speed or the distance to a vehicle in front and dirty or adhering snow and ice*.
may not alert the driver, if the system cannot • When water, snow or sand on the road are
detect the front vehicle properly in the fol- thrown up by the vehicle in front or an
lowing situations. oncoming vehicle*.
• When a vehicle enters in front of your vehi- • When driving on a road surrounded by a
cle very closely. tall wall etc.*
• When a vehicle in front is offset to the left • When being driven in a tunnel*.
CAUTION
or right. • Under adverse weather conditions (rain, 6
• When a vehicle in front is towing a trailer. snow, sand storms, etc.)*
 When the ACC is not in use, turn off the sys-
• The vehicle in front is moving at a speed • An extremely strong electromagnetic wave
tem to prevent it from operating by mistake
much lower than your vehicle. is received from a source such as an illegal
and an unexpected accident.
• A motorcycle or a bicycle. radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar sta-
 Never operate the ACC from outside the
• A freight trailer that is not carrying a con- tion*.
vehicle.
tainer. *: After the ACC control has been cancelled
 Neither control nor a warning are performed
• The vehicle has a protruding load from the automatically due to detection of a state of
by the following situation.
carrier. decline in performance, the ACC will not
• Something other than vehicle such as a operate in the temporary condition and will
• The vehicle has a low vehicle height.
pedestrian. inform the driver by buzzer and indication.
• The vehicle has an extremely high ground
• A vehicle that is stationary or moving at a When the ACC is in the state in which it can
clearance.
very slow speed. operate, indication is cancelled.
• When there is repeated steep uphill and
• When there is abnormality in the system Should indications not cancel there is a pos-
downhill driving.
(When the ACC detected abnormality, sible abnormality in the system.
“ACC SERVICE REQUIRED” is indi- • When driving on an irregular or uneven
Please contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
cated.) road surface.
MOTORS dealer.
• When the system is temporarily not availa- • When you are carrying extremely heavy
ble, “ACC TEMPORARILY NOT AVAIL- loads in the rear seats or luggage area*.
ABLE” appears. • After the engine starting for a while.
• When the sensor is not clean, “ACC/FCM • When driving in curved sections of road
RADAR BLOCKED” appears. including their entrance/outlet or running
beside a closed lane in a traffic work or
similar zone.

Cruise control switch NOTE State

Display
E00634801067  Operate the individual switches correctly and Stand by Active
one after another.
The ACC may be turned off or its control Vehicle in
function may be cancelled if two or more front
switches are pressed concurrently.
detected
Driving aid display 5-Following distance setting symbol:

6 E00634901055
Indicates the set following distance. Two
types of indication; “Stand by” and
“Active”
1- “ACC ON/OFF” switch
Used to turn on and off ACC or the
Following State
cruise control function.
distance set-
2- “SET -” switch Stand by Active
ting symbol
Used to set a desired speed and to
reduce the set speed. Long
3- “RES +” switch
Used to make ACC operate at the origi-
1- ACC indicator: Middle
nally set speed and also to increase the
set speed. Indicates that the ACC is ON.
4- “CANCEL” switch 2- Control state indicator: Short
Used to cancel the control function of Indicates that the ACC is active.
ACC or the cruise control. 3- Set speed:
5- ACC distance switch Indicates the target speed.
Used to change the setting of the fol- 4- Vehicles in front symbol:
lowing distance between your vehicle Comes on when the radar detects a
and a vehicle in front. vehicle ahead. Two types of indication;
“Stand by” and “Active”


The display on the information screen of the
How to use ACC To activate ACC control
multi information display will switch to show
E00635001242
information on the ACC. With the ACC turned on (in the ‘standby
When the ACC is activated, it is placed in the state’), push down the “SET -” switch while
To start up (place in ‘standby ‘standby state’ at which any control function driving.
state’) the system is not started. When your desired speed is reached, release
the “SET -” switch; then this speed is set and
With the operation mode set to “ON”, press
the ACC initiates the speed control to the set
“ACC ON/OFF” switch shortly to activate
speed.
the ACC.
6
NOTE
 Even if the ACC is in the activated state
when the operation mode is set to “OFF”, the
system does not automatically become acti-
vated when the operation mode is set to
“ON” next time.


The set speed is indicated on the information
screen of the multi information display.
NOTE NOTE
• When the vehicle speed is lower than • The Hill Descent Control is operating (if so
The ACC can be selected between approxi-
approximately 6 mph or 93 mph or equipped).
mately 25 mph to 93 mph.
higher. Example: When the drive mode-selector of
You can set and initiate the speed control Super select 4WD II is in “4HLc” or
• When the vehicle is running at a speed
when driving at approximately 6 to 25 mph between approximately 6 and 25 mph and “4LLc”.
while a vehicle in front is being detected. In the ACC is not detecting any vehicle in
this case, the target speed is set to 25 mph. front.
Setting the ACC to any speed outside of this • When the ASTC is in the OFF state.
6 range is not possible. • When ABS, ASTC, TCL or FCM is work-
When the ACC is initialized, the “SET” indi- ing.
cator lights up on the screen. At the same • When the selector lever is in the
time, the display showing the following dis- “P” (PARK), the “R” (REVERSE), the
To increase the set speed
tance setting and the running-ahead vehicle “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
symbol (only when the ACC is detecting a • While the brake pedal is being depressed.
vehicle in front) is switched to the in-control • When the parking brake is engaged. There are two ways to increase the set speed.
mode display. • When the system determines that its perfor-
mance has been degraded due to contami-
nants adhered to the sensor or interference
by strong electromagnetic wave from a
source such as an illegal radio set, a spark
from a wire, or a radar station.
• When there is any abnormality in the sys-
tem.
• The engine is not running.
• The elapsed time after the engine start is
less than 2 seconds.
• The drive mode-selector of Super select
NOTE 4WD II is in “4HLc” or “4LLc” (if so
 The ACC cannot be set when any of the fol- equipped).
lowing conditions is present. You are alerted • The rear differential lock is ON.
to this state by a sounding buzzer.

By using the “RES +” switch: By using the accelerator pedal: NOTE

 The ACC control at the original set speed
The set speed increases by 1 mph every time When the accelerator pedal is depressed resumes as soon as you release the accelera-
you push up the “RES +” switch while the while driving with the ACC control working, tor pedal. Under certain conditions, however,
ACC control is working. If you hold the you can accelerate the vehicle temporarily the braking control and alarming functions of
switch pushed up, the set speed increases in beyond the presently set speed. the ACC may not work for a short while after
3 mph increments. At the point where the vehicle speed is raised releasing the accelerator pedal.
to your desired speed, push down and release  Set speed adjustment is impossible while the
the “SET -” switch; the new speed is then set accelerator pedal is in a depressed position.
in the system. 6
To decrease the set speed
There are two ways to decrease the set speed.
By using the “SET -” switch:
The set speed decreases by 1 mph every time

you push down the “SET -” switch while the
ACC control is working. If you hold the
switch pushed down, the set speed decreases
NOTE in increments of 3 mph.
 There is some time lag between the setting to
a new speed and actually accelerating to that
speed. CAUTION
 Speed setting operation is possible even in  The ACC braking control and proximity
presence of a vehicle in front. In this case, alarm functions will not work while the
however, the set speed alone increases with- accelerator pedal is depressed.
out actual acceleration taking place.
NOTE
CAUTION  The set speed indication on the display turns
 The setting speed should be set up the suita- to “---” when the accelerator pedal is
ble speed according to a situation. depressed.

NOTE By using the brake pedal: To temporarily accelerate the vehi-

 There is some time lag between the setting to cle
a new speed and actually decelerating to that If you depress the brake pedal while the ACC
speed. control is working, the control is cancelled, Simply depress the accelerator pedal to tem-
 If there is a vehicle in front and your vehicle allowing you to decelerate the vehicle. porarily accelerate the vehicle.
is following that vehicle at a speed lower At the point where the vehicle slows down to
than the set speed, the set speed alone your desired speed, push down the “SET -”
decreases with no actual deceleration taking switch; the new speed is then set in the sys-
place. tem.
6
CAUTION
 The setting speed should be set up the suita-
ble speed according to a situation.
CAUTION
 The ACC braking control and proximity
alarm functions will not work while the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
NOTE  The setting speed should be set up the suita-
 The ACC control is cancelled if you depress ble speed according to a situation.
the brake pedal and the ACC control does
not resume even when you release the pedal.
NOTE
 The set speed indication on the display turns
to “---” when the accelerator pedal is
depressed.


When the control is cancelled, the system is When the system shifts into the ‘standby
NOTE placed in the ‘standby state’. You can make state’ as a result of cancellation of the ACC
 In certain conditions, the braking control and
the system restart the control by using the control, the “SET” indicator goes out. At the
alarming functions of the ACC may not work
“SET -” or “RES +” switch if the conditions same time, the display of the following dis-
for a short while after releasing the accelera-
tor pedal. for activating the control are met. tance setting and running-ahead vehicle sym-
 Set speed adjustment is impossible while the bol (only when the ACC is detecting a
 Press the “CANCEL” switch. vehicle) is placed in the standby state of dis-
accelerator pedal is in a depressed position.
 Depress the brake pedal. play.
To terminate ACC control
E00638200105
6
To cancel of ACC control
You can cancel the ACC control by using

either of the methods below.
NOTE
 You can also cancel the ACC control by
pressing the “ACC ON/OFF” switch. If this
switch is pressed, the ACC is turned off.


The ACC control is automatically cancelled  The Hill Descent Control is operating (if
and the ACC is placed in the ‘standby’ state so equipped).
in any of the situations listed below; you are  The vehicle speed reaches approximately
alerted to this condition by the sound of a 99 mph or higher.
buzzer and a message on the display. You can  The ACC no longer detects the vehicle in
make the system restart the control by using front when your vehicle is close to the
the “SET -” or “RES +” switch if the condi- vehicle in front.
tions for resuming the control are reestab-  Interference by strong electromagnetic
lished. wave from a source such as an illegal For example: The brake pads are overheating.
6 radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar
station. If the display keeps showing the message,
 The FCM is activating. (In this case, there is a possibility that the ACC has a mal-
“ACC CANCELLED” does not appear.) function. contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
WARNING
 Although the set speed driving will be
deactivated when shifting to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position, never move the
 When your vehicle stops as the vehicle in selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL)
front stops. position while engine braking and could
 When the ASTC is turned off. cause a serious accident.
 When ABS, ASTC or TCL is in opera-
tion. When the ACC system determines that its
 When the parking brake is engaged. performance has been degraded, a buzzer will  In adverse weather conditions, such as
 When the selector lever is in the “P” sound and a message will be displayed in the rain, snow or sand storms, etc.
(PARK), the “R” (REVERSE), the “N” multi information display.  Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,
(NEUTRAL) position. adhere to the surface of the sensor.
 The engine stops while driving.  A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is
 The drive mode-selector of Super select splashing water, snow or dirt.
4WD II is in “4HLc” or “4LLc” (if so  Driving on a nonbusy road with a few
equipped). vehicles and obstacles in front.
 The rear differential lock is ON.


When the ACC system detects an abnormal-
ity in the system, the ACC system will be
NOTE NOTE
 Pressing the switch turns off the ACC even if  The conditions to be met before the ACC
turned off, a buzzer will sound and a message
it is engaged. control can be resumed are the same as those
will be displayed in the multi information dis-
 The set speed is cancelled when the ACC is for starting the ACC control.
play. If the message remains after the opera-
turned off or the operation mode is set to
tion mode has been turned to the “OFF” “OFF”.
position and then turned back to the “ON”  If the ACC is in the ‘ON state’ when the To change the following distance
position, contact an authorised operation mode is set to “OFF”, the system is
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. setting
set to the ‘OFF state’ when the operation
6
E00638400051
mode is set to “ON” next time.
Every time you press the following distance
setting switch, the setting changes sequen-
To resume the control tially through three options “Long”, “Middle”
E00638300063 and “Short”, cycling back to “Long” after
“Short”. Even after turning off the ACC or
After cancelling the ACC control (i.e. placing
setting the operation mode to “OFF”, the sys-
the system in the ‘standby state’) by pressing
tem retains your last selected the distance set-
the “CANCEL” switch or depressing the
ting in memory.
brake pedal, you can resume the ACC control
To turn off ACC at the originally set speed if you push up the
Press the “ACC ON/OFF” switch when the “RES +” switch.
ACC is in the ‘ON state’ to turn off the ACC.

Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)*

 Cruise control (automatic speed control When the risk of collision increases more, the
NOTE system) P.6-85 system causes the brakes to work moderately
 The following distance varies as a function
to encourage you to apply brakes. If the sys-
of the speed; the faster the set speed, the
tem judges that a potential collision is immi-
longer the following distance.
nent, it initiates automatic emergency braking
Following distance setting: “Long” to mitigate collision-caused damages or to
CAUTION avoid possible collision (FCM braking func-
tion).
 Cruise control (automatic vehicle speed con-
trol system) does not alert by proximity
Stop lamps are illuminated during automatic
6 Following distance setting: “Middle” alarm and control distance between vehicles braking.
to the vehicle in front.
Forward Collision Mitiga-

Following distance setting: “Short”
tion System (FCM)*
E00635101113
The FCM uses a sensor (A) to determine the

distance to a vehicle in front in the same lane
To activate cruise control (auto- and its speed relative to your vehicle’s speed.
matic speed control) If the system judges that your vehicle is in
E00638500081 danger of colliding against the vehicle almost
If you hold the “ACC ON/OFF” switch straight from behind, it gives you visual and
pressed with the operation mode set to “ON” audible alarms (Forward collision warning
and the ACC in the ‘OFF state’, the cruise function), increases the brake fluid pressure
control is activated. The information screen (FCM brake prefill function), provides the
of the multi information display then changes warnings with automatic short time braking
to the cruise control screen and a buzzer (FCM warning brake) and also provides brak-
sounds at the same time. ing force assistance when you depress the
Cruise control is turned off if you set the brake pedal (FCM brake assist function) to
operation mode to “OFF”. avoid frontal collision.

WARNING Forward collision warning FCM brake prefill function

 A driver is responsible for driving safely. function E00635200016
The FCM is the system to mitigate colli- E00635401103 If the system judges that there is a risk of
sion-caused damages or to avoid collisions
If the system judges that there is a risk of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle in front,
as much as possible.
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle in front, this function prefills the brake line with addi-
The system is not intended to compensate
for driver’s loss of attention to the front this function warns you of the potential haz- tional brake fluid to make the brakes more
during driving due to distraction or care- ard with visual and audible alarms. responsive to your brake pedal operation.
lessness or supplement a drop in visibility When this function is triggered, a buzzer
sounds and, at the same time, a “BRAKE!”
due to the rain and fog.
It is never a substitute for your safe and message appears on the information screen of
FCM warning brake function 6
E00643300045
careful driving. Always be ready to apply the multi information display.
the brakes manually. If the system judges that there is a risk of
 The FCM works to avoid frontal collisions your vehicle colliding with a vehicle in front,
as much as possible. However, the effect of the automatic braking system may work mod-
its operation varies depending on situa- erately for a short time to give a warning to
tions and conditions, such as driving con- the driver.
ditions, road conditions, and steering,
acceleration and braking operations, so
that the performance the function can CAUTION FCM brake assist function
deliver is not always the same.  This function does not work for a vehicle in E00635301056
If your vehicle is in danger of collision, front which is moving extremely slower than If the system judges that there is a risk of
take all necessary collision-evading your vehicle.
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle in front,
actions, such as depressing the brake  Under certain conditions, the audible alarm
pedal strongly regardless of whether the and the brake pedal is not sufficiently
may not work at all or may be scarcely audi-
system is activated or not. ble. Do not overly rely on the system; if your
depressed, this function will provide greater
vehicle is in danger of collision, take all nec- braking force automatically.
essary collision-evading actions, such as
depressing the brake pedal strongly regard-
less of whether the system is activated or not.

CAUTION FCM braking function CAUTION

 The brake assist function may not be trig- E00635501348  When applying the brake during the auto-
gered when the brake pedal is operated in If the system judges that there is a high risk of matic braking condition the pedal will feel
certain ways. your vehicle colliding with a vehicle in front, firm. This is not abnormal. You can apply
Do not overly rely on the system; if your the system applies the automatic brakes mod- more pressure to the pedal to assist in brak-
vehicle is in danger of collision, take all nec- erately to encourage you to apply the brakes. ing.
essary collision-evading actions, such as  In the following situations, the system pro-
If the system judges that a collision is una-
depressing the brake pedal strongly regard- vides neither control nor alarming.
voidable, it initiates emergency braking con-
less of whether the system is activated or not. • The vehicle in front of your vehicle is mov-
trol to mitigate collision-caused damages or,
6 if the situation permits, to avoid a collision.
ing at a speed much lower than your vehi-
cle’s speed.
When the emergency braking control is trig-
• When a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of
gered, you are warned of the hazard with vis- your vehicle.
ual and audible alarms like the Forward • When the distance from a vehicle in front is
collision warning function. extremely short.
Once the emergency braking has worked, you • To an oncoming vehicle.
are alerted to this by a message on the infor- • When your vehicle’s speed is much lower.
mation screen of the multi information dis- • When the selector lever is in the “P”
play. (PARK) or the “R” (REVERSE) position.
(A/T)
• The gearshift lever is in the “R” (Reverse)
position. (M/T)
CAUTION
 Do not use the FCM as a normal braking.
 After your vehicle has stopped following the
activation of the FCM, automatic braking is
released. As the vehicle will then start creep-
ing, be sure to depress the brake pedal to
hold the vehicle stationary.


• When the system is faulty (if the system • When the system is temporarily not availa- • When the sensor is not clean, “FCM
self-detects any fault) the “FCM SERVICE ble, “FCM TEMPORARILY NOT AVAIL- RADAR BLOCKED” or “ACC/FCM
REQUIRED” message is indicated and the ABLE” appears and the indicator lights up RADER BLOCKED” appears and the indi-
“FCM OFF” indicator lights up on the on the information screen of the multi cator lights up on the information screen of
information screen of the multi information information display. the multi information display.
display. Type 1
If the message remains after the operation
mode has been turned to the “OFF” position
and then turned back to the “ON” position,
6
MOTORS dealer.
Type 2
• Braking function will not work when your

vehicle is driving at approximately 19 mph
or faster while the vehicle in front is sta-
tionary or moving extremely slowly.
 The forward collision warning function
and/or the FCM braking function may not
activate in the following situations.


• When a motorcycle, bicycle, pedestrian, • When a road surface is surging, and there is *: When judging the state that detection per-
animal, fallen objects, or anything other unevenness. formance deterioration by these situations
than a vehicle is present in front of your • When driving on a road surrounded by a automatically, “FCM RADAR BLOCKED”
vehicle. tall wall etc.* or “ACC/FCM RADAR BLOCKED” mes-
• When a vehicle suddenly appear just in • When being driven in a tunnel*. sage is indicated, and a “FCM OFF” indica-
front of your vehicle. • When the your vehicle changed lanes, and tor lights up. Additionally, it may be
• When a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle your vehicle approached immediately indicated when you are driving in light traf-
very closely. behind the vehicle in front. fic with few vehicles and obstacles in front.
6 • When the vehicle in front is offset to the • During a certain time after your vehicle  When judging the state that the FCM can’t
operate temporarily automatically, “FCM
left or right. turns left or right.
• When the vehicle in front is towing a TEMPORARILY NOT AVAILABLE” mes-
• When you are carrying extremely heavy
trailer. sage is indicated, and a “FCM OFF” indica-
loads in the rear seats or luggage area*.
• A freight trailer that is not carrying a con- tor lights up.
• After the engine has been running for an
tainer.  When the FCM will be in the state which can
extended period of time.
• The vehicle has a protruding load from the operate, indication is released automatically.
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain,
When indication keeps lighting up, there is
carrier. snow, sand storms, etc.)*
an abnormal possibility of the system. Please
• The vehicle has a low vehicle height. • When the emblem on the front bumper and
• The vehicle has an extremely high ground the sensor become dirty or adhering snow
MOTORS dealer.
clearance. and ice*.
 Factors such as the lateral positional rela-
• When there is a different object near the • When water, snow or sand on the road are
tionship between your vehicle and a vehicle
vehicle. thrown up by the vehicle in front or an
in front, driver’s own technique of steering
• When driving on a road with many and suc- oncoming vehicle*.
the vehicle and irregularly moving traffic
cessive curves, including when passing • An extremely strong electromagnetic wave due to accidents or vehicle trouble may deter
their entrances and outlets. is received from a source such as an illegal the FCM control and alarm from function-
• When accelerating and decelerating radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar sta- ing.
quickly. tion.
 When the system recognises driver’s steering
• When the system recognises driver’s steer- or accelerating actions as evasive actions to
ing, accelerating, braking or gear shifting avoid collision, the FCM control and alarm
actions as evasive actions to avoid colli- functions may be cancelled.
sion.  Be careful when cleaning the emblem and
• When driving on a road with steep and the sensor so as not to cause damage.
alternating up and down slopes.


 The FCM control and alarm functions may • When your vehicle’s wheels are driven by • Never spray or splash water on the emblem
be triggered in the following situations. the engine on a lift. on the front bumper and the sensors.
• When there is a structure beside the • When your vehicle is towed or your vehicle  If the sensor mounted area of the vehicle is
entrance of a curve and intersection. tows another vehicle. deformed or is applied strong shock loads
• When running on a narrow iron bridge. • When your vehicle is carried on a truck. due to an accident or some other causes, turn
• When passing through a gate with small • When making sports driving on a circuit. off the system and please contact an author-
head or side clearances. • When your vehicle is on a chassis ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
• When there are metallic objects, steps or dynamometer or free rollers.
projections on the road surface. • When the tyre pressure is not proper. 6
• When quickly approaching a vehicle in • When tyre chains are attached. NOTE
front to overtake it.  Improperly handling the system components  A sound will be heard during the activation
• When passing an electronic toll collection may result in such problems as degraded sen- of automatic braking, this is a function of the
gate. sor performance and ultimately in an acci- brake control and is not abnormal.
• When running under an overpass, an pedes- dent. Be sure to take the following
trian overpass or a tunnel. precautions to keep the system in good oper-
• When running in multi-storey car park. ating conditions. Forward Collision Mitigation
• When running the road the gradient • Avoid application of strong shock loads to
changes suddenly. the sensor and never tamper with or remove
System (FCM) and Ultrasonic
• When stopping very close to a wall or a the emblem and the sensor mounting misacceleration Mitigation Sys-
vehicle in front. screws. tem (UMS) (if so equipped)
• When passing close to the vehicle or an • The emblem and the sensor should be kept
object. clean. ON/OFF switch
E00635601248
• When driving on the road that the vehicle in • Do not cover the sensor mounted area of
front runs in offset position from your vehi- the vehicle or the emblem on the front This switch is used to turn on and off the
cle. bumper with a sticker or anything such as a FCM and also to select your desired collision
• When the course of the vehicle is over- grill guard etc. alarm timing.
grown with weeds. • The emblem and the sensor should not be When the switch is held pressed, the ON/OFF
 Turn off the system beforehand when the modified or painted. state of the FCM changes from ON to OFF
vehicle is placed in any of the following situ- • Avoid using different size tyres from those and vice versa. If you give the switch a short
ations as the system can operate unexpect- specified and maintain even tyre wear.
press with the FCM in the ON state, you can
edly. • Do not modify the suspension of your vehi-
check the current alarm timing and also
cle.
change the collision alarm timing.


tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF” indicator on
CAUTION
 In the following conditions, even if the FCM
the screen goes out.
is ON, the FCM is automatically switched to
OFF. In this case, the warning display may
appear if you press the Forward Collision
Mitigation System (FCM) and Ultrasonic
misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS)
ON/OFF switch.
When you turn off the system, the “Forward • When the drive mode-selector of Super
Collision Mitigation System (FCM) and
6 Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System
select 4WD II is in “4LLc” (if so equipped).
• The rear differential lock is ON (if so
OFF” message appears on the screen and the equipped).
NOTE “Forward Collision Mitigation System • The Hill Descent Control is ON (if so
 When the Forward Collision Mitigation Sys- (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti- equipped).
tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration gation System OFF” indicator comes on. • The ASTC is OFF.
Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch is Example: When the drive mode-selector of
held pressed to change the ON/OFF state of Super select 4WD II is in “4LLc”.
the FCM, the ON/OFF state of the Ultrasonic
misacceleration Mitigation System is also
changed at the same time.
Even if you switch the FCM from ON to
OFF, when the operation mode becomes ON,
To turn on/off the system the FCM will be set ON.
If you press and hold the Forward Collision NOTE To change alarm timing
Mitigation System (FCM) and Ultrasonic
 The OFF indicator of the FCM and the OFF
misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS) indicator of the Ultrasonic misacceleration Give a short press to the Forward Collision
ON/OFF switch, you can switch the system Mitigation System are the same indicator. Mitigation System (FCM) and Ultrasonic
from OFF to ON or ON to OFF. misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS)
Once the system is turned on, the information ON/OFF switch to change the timing at
screen of the multi information display shows which the frontal collision alarm is triggered.
the collision alarm timing currently selected, Every time you press the switch, the alarm
and the “Forward Collision Mitigation Sys-

Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS)*

timing changes alternately between “FAR” When “NEAR” is selected When “FAR” is selected
(earlier alarming), “MIDDLE” (normally
alarming) and “NEAR” (later alarming).
As you make selection, the selected alarm
timing is displayed on the information screen
of the multi information display. Even after
turning off the FCM or setting the operation
When “MIDDLE” is selected
mode to “OFF”, the system retains your last NOTE
selected alarm timing in memory.  When the Forward Collision Mitigation Sys-
tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration 6
Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch is
pressed, the information screen of the multi
information display shows the collision
alarm timing currently selected at first.

E00643400121
The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System operates to prevent sudden starts and mitigate collision-caused damages by suppressing the
engine output for up to approximately 5 seconds when the system judges that the system is detected the vehicle or obstacles within approximately
4 m in front and behind your vehicle and judges that accelerator pedal was depressed promptly and too strongly such as misoperation of it. This
system operates when the vehicle is at stop or moving forward or backward at speed of approximately 6 mph.
When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System operates, the warning display appears on the information screen of the multi information
display, and the buzzer sounds intermittently.


Situation Operation display Buzzer
When an obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle with the Intermittent
gearshift lever in a position other than “R”(Reverse) (vehicles beeping sound
with M/T), or the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position
or in the sport mode (vehicles with A/T), if the accelerator
pedal is depressed promptly and too strongly, the engine out-
put is suppressed for up to approximately 5 seconds.
When an obstacle is detected behind your vehicle with the

gearshift lever or the selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE)
position, if the accelerator pedal is depressed promptly and
too strongly, the engine output is suppressed for up to approx-
imately 5 seconds.

WARNING WARNING CAUTION

 Do not overly rely on the Ultrasonic mis- • Repeat to press the accelerator pedal  The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
acceleration Mitigation System. It is never quickly to its full stroke more than System may not operate in the following
a substitute for your safe and careful driv- 3 times. conditions.
ing. Always be careful to operate the  Do not perform inspection of the system • The sensors or surroundings have been
accelerator pedal perceiving the environ- operation on your own. Depending on the wiped by hand.
mental conditions. Misoperation can lead situation, this may cause the system to not • The stickers or accessories have been
to a serious accident. operate properly and lead to a serious attached to the sensors or surroundings.
 As the Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitiga- accident. • When there is an extremely change in the
tion System is not a function to keep the
stop condition of the vehicle, depress the
outside temperature. 6
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain,
brake pedal according to the environmen- CAUTION strong winds, snow, sand storms, etc.)
tal condition.  The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation • When approaching an obstacle too closely.
 Depending on the situation, the system System does not operate in the following • When a vehicle cuts in front or behind your
does not operate even if the vehicle or the conditions: vehicle very closely.
obstacle in front and behind your vehicle • The operation mode is other than ON. • When only a part of the obstacle is within
and this may cause the vehicle to start
• The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation the detection areas of the sensor.
suddenly and lead to a serious accident.
System is set to OFF by operating the For- • When the rain, snow, water or dirt adheres
 If the vehicle is trapped in the railway ward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) to the sensor.
crossing because the system is activated as and Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
the crossing barrier is misrecognised as an • When the sensor is extremely hot or cold
System (UMS) ON/OFF switch. (while the vehicle is parked for a long
obstacle, escape from the railway crossing
• The Forward Collision Mitigation System period of time under a blazing sun or in
without any panic by one of the following
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration Mit- cold weather).
methods.
igation System (UMS) OFF indicator lights • Immediately after engine starting.
• Release the foot from the accelerator up.
pedal and lightly depress the pedal again. • When driving on a road with many and suc-
• The selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) cessive curves, including when passing
• Turn the system OFF. (Continuously or “N” (NEUTRAL) position. (A/T) their entrances and outlets.
press the Forward Collision Mitigation
 It sometimes happens that a motorcycle, • When driving on a road with steep and
System (FCM) (if so equipped) and
bicycle or pedestrian are detected as obsta- alternating up and down slopes.
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
cles, but these are not the object of the Ultra- • When a road surface is surging, and there is
System (UMS) ON/OFF switch for more
sonic misacceleration Mitigation System unevenness or gravel.
than 3 seconds.)
operation.
• Continuously depress the accelerator
pedal for more than 5 seconds.


• When the system judges driver’s steering or • When there are objects, steps or projections • Do not modify the suspension of your vehi-
gear shifting actions as evasive actions to on the road surface. cle.
avoid collision. • When the parking gate or railway barrier is • When your vehicle’s wheels are driven by
• For a short period after the system judges raised imperfectly. the engine on a lift.
the repeated depression of the accelerator • When running the road, the gradient • When your vehicle is towed or your vehicle
pedal at a few seconds interval as a release changes suddenly. tows another vehicle.
operation. • When passing through the mass of the • When your vehicle is carried on a truck.
• When the vehicle body is extremely steam, fog. • When enjoying sports driving on a circuit.
6 inclined by carrying heavy loads or • When passing close to the vehicle or an • When your vehicle is on a chassis
improper adjustment of the tyre pressure. obstacle. dynamometer or free rollers.
• When the driving is unstable due to an acci- • When passing through a vinyl curtain etc. • When the tyre pressure is not proper.
dent or trouble. • When the surrounding area is overgrown • When tyre chains are attached.
• The system receives ultrasonic noise from with weeds.
other sources (the horns of other vehicles, • When leaving from a parallel parking.
motorcycle engines, brakes, radios, pouring
• The system receives ultrasonic noise from
Obstacle detection areas
rain, splashing water, snow traction device E00643500050
other sources (the horns of other vehicles,
(tyre chains), etc.).
motorcycle engines, brakes, radios, pouring The detection areas of the front and rear sen-
• When the obstacle is not horizontal to the rain, splashing water, snow traction device sors are limited. Moreover, the sensors are
ground or not perpendicular to the vehicle (tyre chains), etc.).
traveling direction.
unable to detect low or thin objects or objects
 Turn off the system by pressing the Forward near the rear bumper. Make sure to check the
 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Collision Mitigation System (FCM) and
System operation can be cancelled when the surroundings as you operate the vehicle in a
system judges the handle operation as eva- safe manner.
tem (UMS) ON/OFF switch beforehand
sive actions or when the obstacle moves out when the vehicle is placed in any of the fol-
of the detectable area of the sensor. lowing situations as the system can operate Sensor locations
 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation unexpectedly. E00643600080
System may be triggerd operate in the fol- • When using an automatic car wash.
lowing situations. There are the sensors (A) on each of 4 places
• When returning the fallen wheel in a ditch
• When the surrounding vehicle or oncoming of the front bumper and the rear bumper.
or escaping from mud.
vehicle drives blowing up the water, snow
• When using a vehicle elevator or a multi-
or sand on the road.
storey car park.
• When the rain, snow, water or dirt adheres
to the sensor.


Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System
CAUTION ON/OFF is switched in conjunction with the
• Obstacles that exists in the high position
ON/OFF state of the FCM.
from the ground.
Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation Sys-
• Obstacles that are soft and absorb ultra-
tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
sonic easily, such as spongy material or
snow. Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch”
• Obstacles that are shaped with a sharp on page 6-107.
angle.
• A wall surface is not flat Warning display
E00643900054 6
NOTE When the sensor is temporarily
CAUTION  If the bumper has been exposed to an impact,
 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation the sensors may fail and prevent the system not available
System may not operate because the sensor from functioning properly. Have the vehicle E00647600059
cannot detect the vehicle or obstacle as fol- inspected at an authorised MITSUBISHI Example: When the front and/or rear sensors
lows. MOTORS dealer. are temporarily not available
• Vehicle towing a trailer etc.  The sensors do not detect objects located in
• A freight trailer that is not carrying a con- the area directly below or near the bumper. If
tainer. the height of an object is lower than the
• Vehicle that has a protruding load from the mounted position of the sensors, the sensors
carrier. may not continue detecting it even if they
• Obstacles that have low positions. detected it initially.
• Vehicle that is extremely stained. When the warning display appears, the sen-
• Vehicle or obstacle that is covered with sors are temporarily not available for some
snow. To turn on/off the Ultrasonic reason such as the environmental condition or
• A large mesh screen fence.
• The vehicle is the specific shape such as the
misacceleration Mitigation Sys- increase of the sensor temperature. When the
warning display does not disappear after
carrier car. tem waiting for a while, contact an authorised
• Obstacles that have irregular surface. E00643800040
• Obstacles that have the shape of the pole The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
such as the road marker or the streetlight. System is automatically turned ON by setting
the operation mode to ON. In addition, the

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)*

vehicle by informing the presence of another
When there is a malfunction in the
vehicle running diagonally behind your vehi-
system or the sensor cle that may be in the blind spot of the outside
E00644000052
rear-view mirrors. When a vehicle which is
Example: When there is a malfunction in travelling diagonally behind at approximately
both sensors the same speed as your vehicle is detected,
In the following conditions, even if the Ultra- the Blind Spot Warning lamp located inside
sonic misacceleration Mitigation System is the outside rear-view mirror illuminates.
ON, the Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitiga- (Refer to page 6-116)
tion System is automatically switched to
6 OFF. In addition, when the Ultrasonic misac-
In this state, when turn-signal lever is moved
to the side where the Blind Spot Warning
celeration Mitigation System is OFF, the lamp is illuminated, the Blind Spot Warning
When the warning display appears, the Ultra- Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Sys- lamp blinks to inform the danger to the driver.
sonic misacceleration Mitigation System does tem is not switched to ON even if the For-
not operate normally because there are some ward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) and
malfunctions in the system. Have the vehicle Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Sys- WARNING
inspected at an authorised MITSUBISHI tem (UMS) ON/OFF switch is pressed.  The driver has the responsibility to drive
MOTORS dealer as soon as possible. safely. The Blind Spot Warning is an assis-
• The drive mode-selector of Super select
tance system that checks for the view
4WD II is in “4LLc” (if so equipped).
behind your vehicle. Be sure to visually
When the Ultrasonic misaccelera- • The rear differential lock switch is set to ON confirm the environmental conditions
tion Mitigation System is not avail- (if so equipped). with your own eyes. Do not depend
• The Hill Descent Control is operating (if so entirely on the Blind Spot Warning. The
able
equipped). effect of the Blind Spot Warning operation
E00644200041
• The ASTC is set to OFF by operating the varies depending on situations and condi-
Example: When trying to set the Ultrasonic ACS OFF switch. tions, such as driving conditions road con-
misacceleration Mitigation System to ON by ditions, and steering, acceleration and
pressing the Forward Collision Mitigation braking operations, so that the perfor-
System (FCM) and Ultrasonic misaccelera- mance the function can deliver is not
tion Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF Blind Spot Warning (BSW)* always the same.
switch with the rear differential lock ON. E00644300055
The Blind Spot Warning is an assistance sys-

tem that checks for the view behind your

Detection areas CAUTION CAUTION

E00644400085 • When only a part of the vehicle is in the
The detection area is shown as illustrated. detection area of the sensor.
• When the surrounding vehicle or oncoming
vehicle drives with blowing up the water,
snow or sand on the road.
• When driving on a road with many and suc-
cessive curves, including when passing
their entrances and outlets.
AHZ101261
• Compact size motorcycles and bicycles.
• When driving on a road with steep and 6
alternating up and down slopes.
• Vehicle that is not approaching to your • When a road surface is surging, and there is
vehicle even if in the detection area. unevenness.
(Approaching vehicle is judged based on • When the vehicle body is extremely
the detected data by the sensors) inclined by carrying heavy loads or
• There is a difference in height between the improper adjustment of the tyre pressure.
travelling lane of your vehicle and the adja- • When the driving is unstable due to an acci-
CAUTION cent lane of approaching vehicle. dent or trouble.
 Depending on the situation, the Blind Spot • When the speed difference between your • The system receives ultrasonic noise from
Warning may not operate even if the vehicle vehicle and an approaching vehicle is large. other sources (the horns of other vehicles,
drives within the detection area. • Immediately after setting the Blind Spot motorcycle engines, brakes, radios, pouring
 The Blind Spot Warning may not operate or Warning to stand by state rain, splashing water, snow traction device
may be delayed operation in the following • Immediately after engine starting (tyre chains), etc.).
conditions. • When there is an extremely change in the • When the rain, snow, water or dirt adheres
• The sensors (A) or surroundings have been outside temperature. to the sensor.
wiped by hand. • Under adverse weather conditions (rain, • When the sensor is extremely hot or cold
• The stickers or accessories have been strong winds, snow, sand storms, etc.) (while the vehicle is parked for a long
attached to the sensors (A) or surroundings. • When approaching a vehicle too closely. period of time under a blazing sun or in
• When multiple vehicles pass in succession. cold weather).
• When driving near a pot hole and tramline.
• When there is a vehicle with an ultrasonic
sensor around your vehicle.


 When all the following conditions are sat-
NOTE NOTE isfied, the Blind Spot Warning indicator
 If the bumper has been exposed to an impact,  When the operation mode is set to OFF, the
lamp in the meter comes on.
the sensors may fail and prevent the system selected condition just before setting to OFF
• The operation mode is ON.
from functioning properly. Have the vehicle is retained. However, the retained Blind Spot
inspected at an authorised MITSUBISHI Warning state is cleared when the battery is
• The selector lever is in the “D” (DRIVE)
MOTORS dealer. removed, and the Blind Spot Warning turns position or in the sport mode.
ON when the operation mode is set to ON at • The indicator in the switch is on.
next time. • The speed of your vehicle is approxi-
mately 12 mph through 87 mph.
When using the Blind Spot  When the Blind Spot Warning indicator
6 Warning lamp in the meter is on, if a vehicle is
approaching your vehicle in the detection
E00644500073
Blind Spot Warning indicator area, the Blind Spot Warning lamp in the
When the Blind Spot Warning switch is
lamp, Blind Spot Warning lamp outside rear-view mirror illuminates.
E00644600074
pressed while the operation mode is ON, the
indicator (A) in the Blind Spot Warning Blind Spot Warning indicator lamp  When the turn-signal lever is moved to
switch comes on and the Blind Spot Warning the lighting side while the Blind Spot
becomes in stand by state. When the Blind Warning lamp in the outside rear-view
Spot Warning switch is pressed again, the mirror is on, the Blind Spot Warning lamp
indicator (A) in the Blind Spot Warning in the outside rear-view mirror blinks to
switch goes off and the Blind Spot Warning Blind Spot Warning lamp inform the danger to the driver.
turns off.
NOTE
 The Blind Spot Warning lamp in the outside
rear-view mirror may come on or blink in the
following conditions.
• When driving very near the guardrail or the
concrete wall.
• When driving on the entrance and outlet of
the tunnel or very near the wall or near the
evacuation area inside the tunnel.
• When turning a intersection in a town area

Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*

The system only indicates when a tyre is sig-
NOTE NOTE nificantly under-inflated.
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain,  When the warning display appears, the indi-
The base tyre pressure can be set at desired
snow, sand stream etc.) cator in the Blind Spot Warning switch
value by the driver with the reset function
• When the your vehicle drives with blowing comes off and the Blind Spot Warning turns
off. execution. (The low pressure warning thresh-
up the water, snow or sand on the road.
old is set based on the reset.)
• When driving near a curb, pot hole and
tramline. The tyre inflation pressure sensor IDs for two
• When there is a vehicle with an ultrasonic When the sensor is temporarily sets of tyres can be registered by an author-
sensor around your vehicle. ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer, and the
not available
 Set the Blind Spot Warning to OFF when E00644800050
valid ID set can be switched by the multi 6
towing. information display switch (It’s beneficial in
 The Blind Spot Warning lamp in the outside case of seasonal tyre change between summer
rear-view mirror may not look due to strong tyre and winter tyre.)
direct sunlight or the glare from the head-
lamps of vehicles behind you during night
driving.
When the warning display appears, the sensor
When there is a malfunction in the is temporarily not available for some reason
system or the sensor such as the environmental condition or
E00644700059 increase of the sensor temperature. When the
warning display does not disappear after
waiting for a while, contact an authorised
Tyre pressure monitoring

When the warning display appears, the Blind system (TPMS)* Not UK Spec NOTE
Spot Warning does not operate normally  The tyre pressure monitoring system
E00637100237
because there are some malfunctions in the (TPMS) is not a substitute for regularly
checking tyre inflation pressures.
system or the sensor. Have the vehicle The tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
Be sure to check the tyre inflation pressures
inspected at an authorised uses tyre inflation pressure sensors (A) on the
as described in “Tyres” on page 10-13.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon as wheels to monitor the tyre inflation pressures.
possible.

If one or more of the vehicle tyres is signifi-
NOTE cantly under-inflated, the warning lamp will
CAUTION
 The tyre inflation pressure sensor (B) is  If the warning lamp does not illuminate
remain illuminated while the operation mode
installed in the illustrated location. when the operation mode is put in ON, it
is in ON.
Replace rubber air valve (C) with a new one means that the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
when the tyre is replaced. Refer to “If the warning lamp/display illumi- tem (TPMS) is not working properly. Have
For details, please contact an authorised nates while driving” on page 6-119 and take the system inspected by an authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. the necessary measures. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
NOTE system may be preventing the monitoring of
6  When the spare tyre is stored in the luggage
the tyre pressure. Avoid sudden braking,
sharp turning and high-speed driving.
compartment, the tyre inflation pressure of
 If a malfunction is detected in the tyre pres-
the tyre will not be monitored even if it is
sure monitoring system (TPMS), the warning
equipped with a tyre inflation pressure sen-
lamp will blink for approximately 1 minute
sor.
and then remain continuously illuminated.
 In addition, the warning display is displayed
The warning lamp will issue further warn-
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
 The spare tyre also has tyre inflation pres- ings each time the engine is restarted as long
mation display.
sure sensor, so it can be used for tyre rota- as the malfunction exists.
tion. Check to see whether the warning lamp goes
off after few minutes driving.
If it then goes off during driving, there is no
Tyre pressure monitoring sys- problem.
tem warning lamp/display However, if the warning lamp does not go
E00637200166 off, or if it blinks again when the engine is
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
system may be preventing the monitoring of
When the operation mode is put in ON, the the tyre pressure. For safety reasons, when
tyre pressure monitoring system warning the warning lamp appears while driving,
lamp normally illuminates and goes off a few avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and
seconds later. high-speed driving.


Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency monitoring system (TPMS) malfunction tell-
NOTE and tyre tread life, and may affect the vehi- tale after replacing one or more tyres or
 In addition, the warning display is displayed
cle’s handling and stopping ability. wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
Please note that the tyre pressure monitoring replacement or alternate tyres and wheels
mation display.
system (TPMS) is not a substitute for proper allow the tyre pressure monitoring system
tyre maintenance, and it is the driver’s (TPMS) to continue to function properly.
responsibility to maintain correct tyre pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the tyre
If the warning lamp/display
illuminates while driving
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) low tyre 6
pressure telltale. E00637300170
Each tyre, including the spare, should be 1. If the warning lamp illuminates, avoid
Your vehicle has also been equipped with the
checked monthly when cold and inflated to hard braking, sharp steering maneuvers
warning lamp to indicate when the system is
the inflation pressure recommended by the and high speeds. You should stop and
not operating properly.
vehicle manufacturer on the tyre inflation adjust the tyres to the proper inflation
The warning lamp is combined with the low
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tyres of a pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the
tyre pressure telltale.
different size than the size indicated on the spare tyre at the same time. Refer to
When the system detects a malfunction, the
tyre inflation pressure label, you should “Tyres” on page 10-13.
telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute
determine the proper tyre inflation pressure
and then remain continuously illuminated.
for those tyres.)
This sequence will continue upon subsequent NOTE
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has  In addition, the warning display is displayed
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
been equipped with the tyre pressure monitor- on the information screen in the multi-infor-
exists.
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low mation display.
When the warning lamp is illuminated, the
tyre pressure telltale when one or more of  When inspecting or adjusting the tyre pres-
system may not be able to detect or signal
your tyres is significantly under-inflated. sure, do not apply excessive force to the
low tyre pressure as intended.
Accordingly, when the low tyre pressure tell- valve stem to avoid breakage.
The tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
tale illuminates, you should stop and check  After inspecting or adjusting the tyre pres-
malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea- sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the
your tyres as soon as possible, and inflate
sons, including the installation of replace- valve stem.
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-
ment or alternate tyres or wheels on the Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could
nificantly under-inflated tyre causes the tyre
vehicle that prevent the tyre pressure moni- get into the valve, resulting in damage to the
to overheat and can lead to tyre failure.
toring system (TPMS) from functioning prop- tyre inflation pressure sensor.
erly. Always check the tyre pressure


 A window tint that affects the radio wave
NOTE NOTE signals is installed.
 Do not use metal valve caps, which may  To avoid the risk of damage to the tyre infla-
cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion tion pressure sensors, have any punctured
and damage of the tyre inflation pressure tyre repaired by an authorised MITSUBISHI NOTE
sensors. MOTORS dealer. If the tyre repair is not  Tyre inflation pressures vary with the ambi-
 Once adjustments have been made, the warn- done by an authorised MITSUBISHI ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to
ing lamp will go off after a few minutes of MOTORS dealer, damage to the tyre infla- large variations in ambient temperature, the
driving. tion pressure sensor is not covered by your tyre inflation pressures may be low (causing
warranty. the warning lamp/display come on) when the
2. If the warning lamp remains illuminated
6 after you have been driving for approxi-
 Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray
on any tyre.
ambient temperature is relatively low. If the
warning lamp/display comes on, adjust the
mately 10 minutes after you adjust the Such a spray could damage the tyre inflation tyre inflation pressure.
tyre inflation pressure, one or more of the pressure sensors.
tyres may have a puncture. Inspect the Have any puncture repaired by an authorised
tyre and if it has a puncture, have it MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Whenever the tyres and wheels
repaired by an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer as soon as possible. are replaced with new ones
The tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) E00637400083
may not work normally in the following cir-
WARNING cumstances: If new wheels with new tyre inflation pres-
 If the warning lamp/display illuminates sure sensors are installed, their ID codes must
while you are driving, avoid hard braking,  A wireless facility or device using the be programmed into the tyre pressure moni-
sharp steering maneuvers and high same frequency is near the vehicle. toring system. Have tyre and wheel replace-
speeds.  Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders ment performed by an authorised
Driving with an under-inflated tyre MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer to avoid the
and/or on the wheels.
adversely affects vehicle performance and risk of damaging the tyre inflation pressure
 The tyre inflation pressure sensor’s bat-
can result in an accident.
tery is dead. sensors. If the wheel replacement is not done
 Wheels other than MITSUBISHI by an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
MOTORS GENUINE wheels are being dealer, it is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION
used.
 The warning lamp/display may not illumi-
 Wheels that are not fitted with tyre infla-
nate immediately in the event of a tyre blow-
out or rapid leak. tion pressure sensors are being used.
 Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-
rized by the vehicle are used.

1. Operate the multi-information display
CAUTION switch to switch the information screen to
 The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
the menu screen.
the proper fit of the tyre inflation pressure
Refer to “Multi-information display
sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of
the sensors. switch” on page 5-4.
Refer to “Changing the function settings”
on page 5-13.
2. Lightly press the multi-information dis-
Reset of low tyre pressure
play switch to select “ ”
warning threshold (tyre ID set change). 6
E00637500101
3. Hold down the multi-information display
The threshold is set based on the tyre pressure 4. The warning lamp start flashing slowly. switch for approximately 3 seconds or
which the reset function is executed by fol- 5. Drive for a while. The reset is completed more. The setting changes to the selected
lowing procedure. if the warning lamp goes out. tyre ID set.
1. Operate the multi-information display NOTE
switch to switch the information screen to
 The reset function should be executed every
the menu screen. time when the tyre pressure is adjusted or
Refer to “Multi-information display tyre rotation.
switch” on page 5-4.  The reset function should be executed when
Refer to “Changing the function settings” the tyre is cold. If it is executed when the
on page 5-13. tyre is warm (e.g. after driving), there may
2. Lightly press the multi-information dis- be the low tyre pressure warning earlier than
play switch to select “ ” usual.
(reset of low tyre pressure warning thresh-
old).
3. Hold down the multi-information display Tyre ID set change
NOTE
switch for approximately 3 seconds or E00637600102
 Each time this procedure is done, the tyre ID
more, the buzzer sounds. In case that 2 sets of tyre inflation pressure set is changed. (1 - 2 - 1 - 2 …)
sensor ID are registered in the receiver, the  The tyre ID set is NOT changed, in case that
valid tyre ID set can be changed by following only 1 set of ID is registered.
procedure.

Reversing sensor system*
NOTE CAUTION Reversing sensor system detection

 When changing the tyre ID set, the reset  Make sure to check the surroundings with areas
function of low tyre pressure warning thresh- your own eyes to ensure safety. Do not oper-
old is automatically started. (The warning ate the vehicle by relying on the reversing
Depending on whether the vehicle is
lamp start flashing slowly.) If the tyre is sensor system alone.
warm at this time. the reset function should
equipped with a towbar, you can change the
be executed again when the tyre is cold. reversing sensor system between the standard
Obstacle detection areas mode and the towbar mode. The towbar mode
E00615601646 changes the system to exclude the area in
6 The detection areas of the corner and back which the towbar is mounted from the detec-
tion areas.
E00615501485 sensors are limited to those shown in the
illustration. Moreover, the sensors are unable
This system operates when you are backing Vehicles without a towbar
to detect low or thin objects or objects near
the vehicle. It uses corner and back sensors to
the rear bumper. Thus, make sure to check the The detection areas are within approximately
detect an obstacle and the information screen
surroundings as you operate the vehicle in a 60 cm (A) from the corner sensors, 125 cm
in the multi information display (vehicles
safe manner. (B) from the back sensors.
equipped with the color liquid crystal display)
and the buzzer to inform you of the approxi-
mate distance to the obstacle. Corner and back sensor locations
CAUTION There are four sensors (A) in the rear bumper.

 The reversing sensor system assists you in
determining the approximate distance
between the vehicle and an obstacle located
behind the vehicle. It has limitations in terms
of detectable areas and objects, and may not
properly detect some objects. Therefore, do
not place excessive confidence in the revers-
ing sensor system, and operate the vehicle as
carefully as you would a vehicle without this
system. Vehicles with a towbar
The detection areas are within approximately

60 cm (A) from the corner sensors, 125 cm

(B) from the back sensors. The non-detection
areas (C) are within approximately 20 cm (D)
CAUTION CAUTION
 The reversing sensor system may not operate • Objects with a smooth surface, such as
from the bumper.
properly under the following conditions: glass.
• The sensors or surroundings have been • Objects that are low, such as kerbstones.
wiped by hand.
• The stickers or accessories have been
attached to the sensors or surroundings. NOTE
• The sensors or surroundings are covered  The buzzer may sound lower than the normal
with ice, snow, or mud. warning sound when the reversing sensor
• When there is an extremely change in the system is receiving ultrasonic noise from 6
outside temperature. other sources, but this is not a malfunction.
• The sensors are frozen. The buzzer will stop sounding and the sys-
• The system receives ultrasonic noise from tem will return to normal operation after the
other sources (the horns of other vehicles, noise is no longer received.
motorcycle engines, brakes, radios, pouring
rain, splashing water, snow traction device
NOTE
 If the rear bumper has been exposed to an
(tyre chains), etc.). To operate
• The sensors are extremely hot or cold E00615701995
impact, the corner or back sensors may fail (while the vehicle is parked for a long
and prevent the system from functioning period of time under a blazing sun or in To operate the system, ignition switch is in
properly. Have the vehicle inspected at an cold weather). the “ON” position or the operation mode is
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. • The vehicle tilts significantly. put in ON. When the reversing sensor system
 The sensors do not detect objects located in • The vehicle is driven on a rough road (with is operated, the reversing sensor system oper-
the area directly below or near the bumper. If a bumpy, gravel, hilly, or grassy surface). ation indicator lamp (A) will turn on. To stop
the height of an object is lower than the the operation, press the “SONAR” switch; the
• The vehicle is too close to an obstacle.
mounted position of the corner or back sen-
• Immediately after engine starting. reversing sensor system operation indicator
sors, the sensors may not continue detecting
it even if they detected it initially.  The reversing sensor system may not prop- lamp (A) is turned off.
erly detect the following:
• Objects that are thin, such as wire nets or
For information on how to change the detec- ropes.
tion areas, please refer to “Changing the • Objects that absorb sound waves, such as
detection areas” on page 6-125. snow.
• Objects that are shaped with a sharp angle.


2- Back sensor Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis-
3- Corner sensor (right) distance play/sound cycle
Corner sensor Approximately 100
Fast intermittent
Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis- to 60 cm
distance play/sound cycle Within approxi-
Continuous
Approximately 60 to mately 60 cm
Intermittent
40 cm
Approximately 40 to CAUTION
6 30 cm
Fast intermittent  The distances given are to be used for refer-
ence only, as errors may be caused by vari-
Within approxi- ous factors, such as temperature, humidity,
Continuous
mately 30 cm or the shape of the obstacles.
Warning for obstacles
Back sensor (vehicles without a towbar)
If there is an obstacle behind the vehicle, a
warning will be issued with the information Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis- NOTE
distance play/sound cycle  When the sensors are detecting different
screen in the multi information display (vehi-
obstacles at the same time, the information
cles equipped with the color liquid crystal Approximately 125 screen in the multi information display
Intermittent
display) and a warning buzzer. to 80 cm (vehicles equipped with the color liquid
Approximately 80 to crystal display) indicates the directions of
Fast intermittent the obstacles each sensors are detecting.
40 cm
However, closer obstacles are given priority
Within approxi- over other detected obstacles and the warn-
Continuous
mately 40 cm ing buzzer sounds to inform you of closer
obstacles.
Back sensor (vehicles with a towbar)  The volume of the warning buzzer can be
adjusted.
Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis-
For details, consult an authorised
distance play/sound cycle MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Approximately 125
Intermittent
to 100 cm
1- Corner sensor (left)

Sensor system*
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorised
Changing the detection areas NOTE MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
E00615801286 • Setting when towbar is not equipped
The detection areas can be changed as fol- When the gearshift lever or selector lever is
lows: moved to the “R” (REVERSE) position, the
reversing sensor system will operate even if
Vehicles with a towbar corner sensor operation was stopped by
pressing the “SONAR” switch.
While the operation of the system is stopped • Setting when towbar is equipped
at the “SONAR” switch, press the “SONAR” When reversing sensor system operation
switch approximately 3 seconds or more, and was stopped by pressing the “SONAR”
switch, the reversing sensor system will not
6
release it. The buzzer sounds twice to indicate
that the detection area has been changed. operate until the engine has been stopped
even if the gearshift lever or selector lever
is moved to the “R” (REVERSE) position.
Vehicles without a towbar To resume reversing sensor system opera-
tion, press the “SONAR” switch or stop and
While the operation of the system is stopped
at the “SONAR” switch, press the “SONAR”
restart the engine, and then move the gear- Sensor system*
shift lever or selector lever to the “R”
E00647700050
switch approximately 3 seconds or more, and (REVERSE) position.
release it. The buzzer sounds once to indicate When parking in a garage or during parallel
that the detection area has been changed. parking, these sensors alert the driver to any
Reversing sensor system warn-
objects near the vehicle and their distance,
ing display
NOTE E00615901492
through a buzzer and the sensor display on
 The mode of the detection area can be the information screen in the multi-informa-
switched only when the gearshift lever or the In case there is a malfunction in the reversing tion display.
selector lever is in the “R” (REVERSE) posi- sensor system, the display (vehicles equipped
tion. with the color liquid crystal display) for the
 The detection area will not change if you malfunctioning sensor will blink and the
keep the “SONAR” switch pressed for warning buzzer will sound for approximately
10 seconds or more. 5 seconds. Even after the buzzer and display
 After pressing the “SONAR” switch, revers- has stopped warning, the indicator lamp (A)
ing sensor system operation differs accord- on “SONAR” switch will continue blinking
ing to the detection area setting. until the system reverts to the normal state.

Sensor system*
CAUTION
 The sensor system assists you in determining
the approximate distance between the vehi-
cle and any objects. It has limitations in
terms of detectable areas and objects, and
may not properly detect some objects. There-
fore, do not place excessive confidence in
the sensor system, and operate the vehicle as
carefully as you would a vehicle without this
6 system.
 Make sure to check the surroundings with
your own eyes to ensure safety. Do not oper-
ate the vehicle by relying on the sensor sys- Vehicles with a towbar
tem alone. Detection areas
The detection areas are within approximately
Depending on whether the vehicle is 60 cm (A) from the front and corner sensors
Obstacle detection areas equipped with a towbar, you can change the and 125 cm (B) from the back sensors. The
E00647800107 sensor system between the standard mode and non-detection areas (C) are within approxi-
The detection areas of the corner and back the towbar mode. The towbar mode changes mately 20 cm (D) from the bumper.
sensors are limited to those shown in the the system to exclude the area in which the
illustration. Moreover, the sensors are unable towbar is mounted from the detection areas.
to detect low or thin objects or objects near
Vehicles without a towbar
the front or rear bumper. Thus, make sure to
check the surroundings as you operate the The detection areas are within approximately
vehicle in a safe manner. 60 cm (A) from the front and corner sensors
and 125 cm (B) from the back sensors.
Front, corner and back sensor
locations
There are 8 sensors (A) in the front and rear

bumper.

Sensor system*
NOTE CAUTION NOTE

 If the bumper has been exposed to an impact, • The system receives ultrasonic noise from  The buzzer may sound lower than the normal
the sensors may fail and prevent the system other sources (the horns of other vehicles, warning sound when the sensor system is
from functioning properly. Have the vehicle motorcycle engines, brakes, radios, pouring receiving ultrasonic noise from other
inspected at an authorised MITSUBISHI rain, splashing water, snow traction device sources, but this is not a malfunction. The
MOTORS dealer. (tyre chains), etc.). buzzer will stop sounding and the system
 The sensors do not detect objects located in • The sensors are extremely hot or cold will return to normal operation after the
the area directly below or near the bumper. If (while the vehicle is parked for a long noise is no longer received.
the height of an object is lower than the period of time under a blazing sun or in
mounted position of the sensors, the sensors
may not continue detecting it even if they
cold weather). 6
• The vehicle tilts significantly. To operate
detected it initially. • The vehicle is driven on a rough road (with E00648100107
a bumpy, gravel, hilly, or grassy surface).
• The vehicle is too close to an obstacle.
To operate the system, the operation mode is
For information on how to change the detec-
• Immediately after engine starting.
put in ON. When the sensor system is oper-
tion areas, please refer to “Changing the
 The sensor system may not properly detect
ated, the sensor system operation indicator
detection areas” on page 6-128.
the following: lamp (A) will turn on. To stop the operation,
• Objects that are thin, such as wire nets or press the “SONAR” switch; the sensor sys-
CAUTION ropes. tem operation indicator lamp (A) is turned
 The sensor system may not operate properly • Objects that absorb sound waves, such as off.
under the following conditions: snow.
• The sensors or surroundings have been • Objects that are shaped with a sharp angle.
wiped by hand. • Objects with a smooth surface, such as
• The stickers or accessories have been glass.
attached to the sensors or surroundings. • Objects that are low, such as kerbstones.
• The sensors or surroundings are covered
with ice, snow, or mud.
• When there is an extremely change in the
outside temperature.
• The sensors are frozen.

Sensor system*
Back sensor (vehicles without a towbar)
Warning for obstacles NOTE
Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis-  When the sensors are detecting different
distance play/sound cycle obstacles at the same time, the information
If there is an obstacle in the vicinity of the
vehicle, a warning will be issued with the Approximately 125 screen in the multi information display indi-
Intermittent cates the directions of the obstacles each sen-
information screen in the multi information to 80 cm
sors are detecting. However, closer obstacles
display and a warning buzzer. Approximately 80 to
Fast intermittent are given priority over other detected obsta-
40 cm cles and the warning buzzer sounds to inform
Within approxi- you of closer obstacles.
Continuous
6 mately 40 cm  The volume of the warning buzzer can be
adjusted.
For details, consult an authorised
Back sensor (vehicles with a towbar) MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis-
distance play/sound cycle
Approximately 125 Changing the detection areas
Intermittent
to 100 cm E00648200052
Approximately 100 The detection areas can be changed as fol-

1- Corner sensors Fast intermittent lows:
to 60 cm
2- Front sensors
3- Back sensors Within approxi- Vehicles with a towbar
Continuous
mately 60 cm
While the operation of the system is stopped
Front and corner sensor at the “SONAR” switch, press the “SONAR”
Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis- CAUTION switch approximately 3 seconds or more, and
distance play/sound cycle  The distances given are to be used for refer- release it. The buzzer sounds twice to indicate
ence only, as errors may be caused by vari- that the detection area has been changed.
Approximately 60 to ous factors, such as temperature, humidity,
Intermittent
40 cm or the shape of the obstacles.
Vehicles without a towbar
Approximately 40 to
Fast intermittent
30 cm While the operation of the system is stopped
Within approxi- at the “SONAR” switch, press the “SONAR”
Continuous
mately 30 cm switch approximately 3 seconds or more, and

Rear-view camera*
release it. The buzzer sounds once to indicate (MMCS), the Mitsubishi Multi Entertainment
that the detection area has been changed.
Warning display System (MMES), the Smartphone Link Dis-
E00648300112
play Audio, the DVD AUDIO or the DIS-
In case there is a malfunction in the sensor PLAY AUDIO.
NOTE system, the display for the malfunctioning
 The mode of the detection area can be
sensor will blink and the warning buzzer will
switched only when the selector lever is in
sound for approximately 5 seconds. Even
WARNING
the “R” (REVERSE) position.  The rear-view camera is an assistance sys-
 The detection area will not change if you
after the buzzer and display has stopped
tem that enables the driver to check for
keep the “SONAR” switch pressed for warning, the indicator lamp (A) on obstacles behind the vehicle. Its range of
“SONAR” switch will continue blinking until
10 seconds or more.
the system reverts to the normal state. Have
view is limited, so you should not overly 6
 After pressing the “SONAR” switch, sensor depend on it. Please drive just as carefully
system operation differs according to the the vehicle inspected at an authorised as you would if the vehicle did not have
detection area setting. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. the rear-view camera.
• Setting when towbar is not equipped  Be sure to visually confirm safety around
When the selector lever is moved to the “R” the vehicle with your own eyes. Do not
(REVERSE) position, the sensor system depend entirely on the rear-view camera.
will operate even if corner sensor operation
was stopped by pressing the “SONAR”
switch.
Range of view of rear-view
• Setting when towbar is equipped
When sensor system operation was stopped camera
by pressing the “SONAR” switch, the sen-
sor system will not operate until the engine The range of view of the rear-view camera is
has been stopped even if the selector lever limited to the area shown in the illustrations.
is moved to the “R” (REVERSE) position.
It cannot show the both sides and the lower
To resume sensor system operation, press
the “SONAR” switch or stop and restart the
part of the rear bumper, etc.
engine, and then move the selector lever to When reversing, be sure to visually confirm
the “R” (REVERSE) position. Rear-view camera* safety around the vehicle.
E00618402219
The rear-view camera is a system that shows

the view behind the vehicle on a screen of the
Mitsubishi Multi Communication System

Rear-view camera*
Location of rear-view camera CAUTION

 The rear-view camera has a special lens that
The rear-view camera (A) is integrated into can make objects shown on the screen appear
the part near the rear gate handle. to be closer or further away than they actu-
ally are.
NOTE
 Because the rear-view camera has a special
6 lens, the lines on the ground between parking
spaces may not look parallel on the screen.
 In the following situations, the screen indica-
tion may be difficult to see. There is no
How to use the rear-view cam- abnormality.
era • Low light (nighttime)
• When the light of the sun or the light from a
When you place the gearshift lever or the vehicle’s headlamps shines directly into the
selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE) posi- lens.
Range of view of rear-view camera tion with the ignition switch is in the “ON” • If a fluorescent light shines directly into the
lens, the screen indication may be flicker.
position or the operation mode in ON, the
There is no abnormality.
view behind the vehicle will automatically
 If the camera is hot and is then cooled by
appear on the screen of the Mitsubishi Multi rain or a car wash, the lens can mist up. This
Communication System (MMCS), the Mit- phenomenon does not indicate a malfunc-
subishi Multi Entertainment System tion.
(MMES), the Smartphone Link Display  If the atmospheric temperature is extremely
Audio, the DVD AUDIO or the DISPLAY hot or extremely cold, the rear-view camera
AUDIO. When you move the gearshift lever images may not be clear.
or the selector lever to any other position, the There is no abnormality.
screen will return to its original indication.  If a radio set is installed near the camera, the
rear-view camera images may cause electri-
cal system interference and the system may
stop functioning properly.

Rear-view camera*
 Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
NOTE Errors between the display and
mately 20 cm outside of the vehicle body.
 It is not possible to fully see obstacles when
 Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis- the actual road surface
the lens is dirty. If the lens becomes contami-
tance from the rear bumper.
nated by water droplets, snow, mud, or oil,
The reference lines for distance and vehicle
wipe off the contamination, taking care not
to scratch the lens.
width are based on a level, flat road surface.
 Please observe the following cautions. Ignor-
In the following cases, errors are produced
ing them could lead to a camera malfunction. between the display reference lines and the
• Do not subject the camera to physical shock distance on the actual road surface.
such as striking it strongly or throwing a 6
thing.  When the rear of the vehicle is
• Do not adhere organic substances, waxes, weighed down with the weight of
oil remover, and glass cleaner to the cam-
passengers and luggage in the vehi-
era.
If adhered to them, immediately wipe off. cle
• Do not splash the camera with boiling
water. 1: Approximately at the rear edge of the The reference lines are displayed closer than
• Never spray or splash water on the camera rear bumper the actual distance.
or around it. 2: Approximately 100 cm Therefore when there is an obstacle on the
• Do not disconnect, disassemble or modify 3: Approximately 200 cm upward slope, it appears farther than its actual
the camera. position.
• Do not scratch the camera, as this may
cause damage to the rear-view camera CAUTION
images.  Due to the number of people in the vehicle,
the fuel quantity, the weight and positioning
of luggage, and/or the condition of the road
Reference lines on the screen surface, the lines in the view from the rear-
view camera may not be accurately posi-
Reference lines and upper surface of the rear tioned relative to the actual road.
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen. Use the reference lines only as a guideline,
and always do a safety check of your behind
 Red line (B) indicates approximately and surroundings directly while driving.
50 cm behind the rear bumper.
A: Actual objects
Rear-view camera*
B: Objects shown on the screen Therefore when there is an obstacle on the
downward slope, it appears closer than its
 When there is an upward slope actual position.
behind the vehicle
The reference lines are displayed closer than

the actual distance.
Therefore when there is an obstacle on the
upward slope, it appears farther than its actual
6 position.
A: Actual objects
B: Objects shown on the screen
 When solid objects are located close

to the vehicle
A: Actual objects When solid objects are located close to the

B: Objects shown on the screen vehicle, the displayed distance on the screen
may differ from the actual distance.  When approaching to solid objects
Because the reference lines do not contact the
 When there is a downward slope body of the truck, it looks as if it would not The reference lines for distance and vehicle
behind the vehicle hit the vehicle in following illustration. width are intended to indicate the distance to
However, the vehicle may hit the truck a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.
because the body of the truck strays onto the This may make the distance to a projecting
The reference lines are displayed farther than
course in reality. object shown on the screen differ from the
the actual distance.
actual distance to the projecting object. Do

Multi Around Monitor*

not use them as a guide to distances to solid cles in parking spaces and to parallel park
objects. their vehicles.
Example: On the screen the point B appears
the nearest, then the point C and A in order of CAUTION
distance. The point A and B actually are the  The Multi Around Monitor is an assistance
same distances from the vehicle, and the system that enables the driver to check the
point C is farther off than the point A and B. safety around the vehicle. The range where
the image can be displayed is limited. Do not
place too much confidence in the Multi
Around Monitor and try to drive carefully in
the same way as for the vehicle not equipped
6
with the Multi Around Monitor. A- Rear-view camera
Its range of view is limited, so you should B- Front-view camera
not overly depend on it. Please drive just as C- Side-view camera
carefully as you would if the vehicle did not
have the Multi Around Monitor.
 Be sure to visually confirm safety around the WARNING
vehicle with your own eyes. Especially, the  Do not install anything which will disturb
four corners of the vehicle become blind the operation of the cameras around the
spots where an object is not displayed on the location of them.
Multi Around Monitor. Do not depend
entirely on the Multi Around Monitor.
Multi Around Monitor*  Do not use the Multi Around Monitor with
E00645000118 the door mirrors folded in and/or with the
doors and/or the tailgate open. It will prevent
The Multi Around Monitor is a system that the Multi Around Monitor from displaying
shows the view combined with four cameras, the appropriate range.
i.e., “Front-view camera”, “Side-view cam-
eras (right and left)” and “Rear-view camera”
on a screen of the Mitsubishi Multi Commu-
Location of each cameras
nication System (MMCS), the Mitsubishi
Multi Entertainment System (MMES), the The cameras are integrated into the location
Smartphone Link Display Audio or DVD as shown below.
AUDIO. It assists drivers to park their vehi-

Range of view of the Multi Around Monitor

E00645100122
The range of view of the Multi Around Monitor cameras is limited to the area shown in the illustrations. It cannot show around the both sides and
the lower part of the front and rear bumpers, etc. While driving, be sure to visually confirm safety around the vehicle.
Range of view of the Multi Around Monitor cameras
6 Side-view camera (right)
Front-view camera
Rear-view camera
Side-view camera (left)
Front-view camera Side-view camera

Types of views of the Multi Side-view/Front-view mode

Around Monitor
Views of the passenger’s side of the vehicle
Two different types of views are displayed on and the front of the vehicle are displayed.
the left side and the right side respectively.
Bird’s eye-view/Rear-view mode

6
Views of the surroundings of the vehicle and
behind the vehicle are displayed.
Bird’s eye-view/Front-view mode
Views of the surroundings of the vehicle and

the front of the vehicle are displayed.
CAUTION
 The cameras have special lenses that can
make objects shown on the screen appear to
be closer or further away than they actually
are.
NOTE
Side-view/Rear-view mode  Because the cameras has a special lens, the
lines on the ground between parking spaces
Views of the passenger’s side of the vehicle may not look parallel on the screen.
and behind the vehicle are displayed.  In the following situations, the screen indica-
tion may be difficult to see. There is no
abnormality.
• Low light (nighttime)

NOTE NOTE NOTE

• When the light of the sun or the light from a • Do not splash the camera with boiling  The passenger’s side screen can be switched
vehicle’s headlamps shines directly into the water. to the side view by pressing the switch.
lens. • Never spray or splash water on the camera
• If a fluorescent light shines directly into the or around it.
lens, the screen indication may be flicker. • Do not disconnect, disassemble or modify Operation with the switch
There is no abnormality. the camera.
 If the camera is hot and is then cooled by • Do not scratch the camera, as this may
rain or a car wash, the lens can mist up. This When the switch (A) is pressed, the bird’s-
cause damage to the camera images.
eye view/front view is displayed.
6 phenomenon does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
 If the atmospheric temperature is extremely
How to use the Multi Around
hot or extremely cold, the camera images Monitor
may not be clear.
There is no abnormality. The Multi Around Monitor can only be used
 If a radio set is installed near the camera, the when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
camera images may cause electrical system
tion or the operation mode is ON.
interference and the system may stop func-
tioning properly.
 It is not possible to fully see obstacles when Operation with the selector lever
the lens is dirty. If the lens becomes contami-
nated by water droplets, snow, mud, or oil, When you place the gearshift lever or the
wipe off the contamination, taking care not
selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE) posi-
to scratch the lens.
tion, the bird’s-eye view/rear view is dis- NOTE
 Please observe the following cautions. Ignor-  If there is no operation for 3 minutes after
ing them could lead to a camera malfunction.
played on the Mitsubishi Multi
Communication System (MMCS), the screen the Multi Around Monitor is displayed by
• Do not subject the camera to physical shock pressing the switch with the gearshift lever
such as striking it strongly or throwing a of the Mitsubishi Multi Entertainment System
or the selector lever in a position other than
thing. (MMES), the Smartphone Link Display
“R” (REVERSE), the display disappears.
• Do not adhere organic substances, waxes, Audio or DVD AUDIO. When you move the
oil remover, and glass cleaner to the cam- gearshift lever or the selector lever to any
era. other position, the display disappears.
If adhered to them, immediately wipe off.


 The approximate distance from the vehi-
Switching of the screen How to read the screen cle body is as follows:
E00645400053
Each time the switch is pressed, the mode of In any mode other than the Bird’s eye-view
Multi Around Monitor is switched as follows. mode, the lines in the screen give the follow-
Bird’s eye-view/Front-view mode  Side- ing information. Use them only as a guide.
view/Front-view mode  Multi Around
Monitor is turned OFF.
CAUTION
 When you accidentally hit the camera and its
NOTE circumference against something, the view 6
 When you place the gearshift lever or the and the lines in the screen may not be dis-
selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE) posi- played correctly. Be sure to have it inspected
tion with the front view displayed on the by an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
driver’s side screen, the driver’s side screen dealer.
switches to the Rear-view mode. When you 1- Approximately 100 cm from the front
move the gearshift lever or the selector lever
to any other position, the driver’s side screen edge of the front bumper
switches to the Front-view mode. Front-view mode

When the switch is pressed at the vehicle
speed of approximately 6 mph or higher,
NOTE
Reference lines for the distance and the vehi-
only the side view can be displayed on the  The orange line (D) is displayed only for
passenger’s side screen. cle width and upper surface of the front vehicles equipped with the active stability &
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen. traction control (ASTC).
 The front view will not be displayed when  When the expected course lines are dis-
the vehicle speed exceeds approximately  The Red line (B) indicates approximately played in the front view, the expected course
6 mph. 50 cm from the front edge of the front lines are also displayed in the bird’s-eye
 The display of the view may be delayed dur- bumper. view (Front: solid line, Rear: broken line).
ing switching of the screen.  The Two Green lines (C) indicate the
approximate vehicle width.
 The Orange line (D) indicates an expected
course when the vehicle moves forward
with the steering wheel turned. It disap-
pears when the steering wheel is in the
neutral position.

NOTE NOTE
 When the expected course lines are dis-
played in the rear view, the expected course
lines are also displayed in the bird’s-eye
view (Front: broken line, Rear: solid line).
6
1- Approximately 100 cm from the rear
Rear-view mode edge of the rear bumper
E00645600055
2- Approximately 200 cm from the rear
Reference lines for the distance and the vehi- edge of the rear bumper
cle width and upper surface of the rear
Errors between the display and
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.
CAUTION the actual road surface
 The Red line (B) indicates approximately  Due to the number of people in the vehicle,
E00645900058
50 cm behind the rear edge of the rear the fuel quantity, the weight and positioning The reference lines for distance and vehicle
bumper. of luggage, and/or the condition of the road width are based on a level, flat road surface.
 The Two Green lines (C) indicate the surface, the lines in the view from the rear- In the following cases, errors are produced
approximately vehicle width. view camera may not be accurately posi- between the display reference lines and the
 The Orange line (D) indicates an expected tioned relative to the actual road. distance on the actual road surface.
course when the vehicle is reserved with Use the reference lines only as a guideline,
the steering wheel turned. It disappears and always do a safety check of your behind
and surroundings directly while driving.  When the rear of the vehicle is
when the steering wheel is in the neutral
weighed down with the weight of
position.
 The approximate distance from the vehi-
passengers and luggage in the vehi-
cle body is as follows: NOTE cle
 The orange line (D) is displayed only for E00648600043
vehicles equipped with the active stability & The reference lines are displayed closer than
traction control (ASTC). the actual distance.


Therefore when there is an obstacle on the
upward slope, it appears farther than its actual
position.
6
A: Actual objects A: Actual objects
B: Objects shown on the screen B: Objects shown on the screen
A: Actual objects  When there is a downward slope  When solid objects are located close
B: Objects shown on the screen behind the vehicle to the vehicle
E00648800045 E00648900046
The reference lines are displayed farther than When solid objects are located close to the
 When there is an upward slope the actual distance. vehicle, the displayed distance on the screen
behind the vehicle may differ from the actual distance.
E00648700044
Therefore when there is an obstacle on the Because the reference lines do not contact the
The reference lines are displayed closer than downward slope, it appears closer than its body of the truck, it looks as if it would not
the actual distance. actual position. hit the vehicle in following illustration.
Therefore when there is an obstacle on the However, the vehicle may hit the truck
upward slope, it appears farther than its actual because the body of the truck strays onto the
position. course in reality.


not use them as a guide to distances to solid
objects.
Example: On the screen the point B appears
the nearest, then the point C and A in order of
distance. The point A and B actually are the
same distances from the vehicle, and the
point C is farther off than the point A and B.
Bird’s eye-view mode

E00646200045
An overhead view in which the vehicle is

looked down is displayed so that you can eas-
ily identify the location of your vehicle and
the course to enter the parking space.
Side-view mode
E00646100057
Reference lines for the vehicle width and the

 When approaching to solid objects front end of the vehicle are displayed on the
E00649000044
screen.
The reference lines for distance and vehicle
width are intended to indicate the distance to 1- Approximate vehicle width including
a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. the door mirror.
This may make the distance to a projecting 2- Approximate location of the axle centre
object shown on the screen differ from the of the front wheel.
actual distance to the projecting object. Do 3- Approximate 50 cm from the front edge
of the front bumper.


1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
CAUTION NOTE
 The bird’s-eye view is an simulated view  In the Bird’s eye-view mode, since the views
processed by combining view captured by captured by the four cameras, “Front-view
CAUTION
 For reasons of safety, do not operate the
“Front-view camera”, “Side-view cameras camera”, “Side-view cameras (right and
switch while driving.
(right and left)” and “Rear-view camera”. left)” and “Rear-view camera” are processed
Because of this, in the Bird’s eye-view mode, based on a level flat road surface, an image
objects will appear to be farther away than may be displayed as follows: 2. Press the switch (A) to display the bird’s
they actually are. In addition, there are blind • An object appears to have fallen down and eye-view/front-view.
spots in the vicinity of the actual vehicle looks longer or larger.
which are not displayed on the screen. You
may crash your vehicle even if there seems
• An object having a height from the road 6
surface may seem to appear from the joint
to be a little distance between your vehicle of the view composition processing
and an object, and there may be an object in regions.
the area where there seems to be nothing. Be  The brightness of the views from each cam-
sure to check the safety around the vehicle era may vary depending on the illuminance
with your own eyes. conditions.
 The vehicle icon displayed in the Bird’s eye-  An object above the camera is not displayed.
view mode differs from the actual vehicle in
 The object displayed in the Front-view mode
color and size. Because of this, an object
or the Rear-view mode may not be displayed
near the vehicle may appear to be in contact
in the Bird’s eye-view mode.
with the vehicle, and the positional relation-
 The view in the Bird’s eye-view mode may 3. Press and hold down the switch (A) until
ship between the vehicle and the object may
differ from the actual one.
be displaced from its true position when the the vehicle icon blinks to enter the selec-
mounting location and angle of each camera tion mode of the vehicle icon color in the
 The view composition processing regions are
are changed. bird’s eye-view.
present in the four corners of the Bird’s eye-
 The lines on the road may appear to be dis- 4. Press the switch until the desired color
view display, mainly at the boundary sec-
placed or bent at the joint of the views. appears on the display.
tions of views from each camera. Because of
this, in the vicinity of the boundary sections, Each time you press the switch, the vehi-
the sharpness of the views may decrease and cle icon color in the bird’s eye-view will
an object may disappear and reappear on the To change the vehicle icon color change to the next one.
screen. in the bird’s eye-view 5. When it is changed to your desired color,
E00693000021 press and hold the switch (A) for a few
It is possible to change the vehicle icon color seconds. This completes the setting.
in the bird’s eye-view.
Cargo loads
NOTE Loading a roof carrier CAUTION

 When the selection mode is in the following  When luggage is loaded onto the vehicle,
situations, the vehicle icon color does not please make sure to drive slowly and avoid
change. CAUTION excessive maneuvers such as sudden braking
• When you place the gearshift lever or the  Use a roof carrier that properly fits your or quick turning.
selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE) posi- vehicle. Do not load luggage directly onto In addition, place the luggage on the carrier
tion. the roof. so that its weight is distributed evenly with
• When you do not operate anything for For installation, refer to the instruction man- the heaviest items on the bottom. Do not load
30 seconds. ual accompanying the roof carrier. items that are wider than the roof carrier.
6 • The operation mode is put in OFF. The additional weight on the roof could raise
the vehicle’s centre of gravity and affect
NOTE vehicle handling characteristics.
As a result, driving errors or emergency
Cargo loads  Use a genuine MITSUBISHI roof carrier,
maneuvers could lead to a loss of control and
since the brackets to be used have a special
E00609902667 result in an accident.
shape. For details, consult a nearby author-
 Before driving and after travelling a short
distance, always check the load to make sure
Cargo loads precautions it is securely fastened to the roof carrier.
Check periodically during your travel that
Roof carrier precaution the load remains secure.
CAUTION
 When loading luggage, be careful to the fol-
lowing. CAUTION NOTE
• Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage
 Make sure that the weight of the luggage  To prevent wind noise or reduction in fuel
compartment whenever possible.
does not exceed the allowable roof load. economy, remove the roof carrier when not
• Distribute cargo or luggage evenly not to be If the allowable roof load is exceeded, this in use.
unbalanced in weight of a load. may cause damage to the vehicle.  Remove the roof carrier before using an
• Do not place cargo or luggage on the instru- The roof load is the total allowable load on automatic car wash.
ment panel. the roof (the weight of the roof carrier plus  Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
Also, do not stack up cargo or luggage on the weight of luggage placed on the roof car- tained for raising the sunroof (if so
the front passenger’s seat or the rear seat. rier). equipped) and/or the tailgate when installing
Having the driver’s vision blocked, and For the specific value, refer to “Maximum a roof carrier.
your cargo being thrown inside the cabin if roof load” on page 11-5.
you suddenly have to brake can cause a
serious accident or injury.

For pleasant driving
Important operation tips for the air conditioner ...............................7-2 Antenna ..........................................................................................7-57
Ventilators ........................................................................................7-2 Link System*..................................................................................7-58
Front cooler/Manual air conditioning*.............................................7-6 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface* ..............................................................7-58
Automatic climate control air conditioner*....................................7-10 USB input terminal*.......................................................................7-80
Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioner* ...................7-15 HDMI terminal* .............................................................................7-84
Rear cooler*....................................................................................7-20
Customising the air conditioning ...................................................7-21
Sun visors ......................................................................................7-85 7
Vanity mirror .................................................................................7-86
Air purifier* ....................................................................................7-22 Ashtray ..........................................................................................7-86
Audio system* ................................................................................7-22 Cigarette lighter* ............................................................................7-87
Handling of Discs ..........................................................................7-25 Accessory socket ...........................................................................7-87
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) ....................................................7-26 Interior lamps .................................................................................7-88
Important Points on Safety for the Customer ................................7-30 Storage spaces ................................................................................7-91
Operation Keys ..............................................................................7-31 Cup holder .....................................................................................7-94
Listen to Radio ...............................................................................7-35 Bottle holder ..................................................................................7-95
Listen to Traffic Messages (Type 2) ..............................................7-36 Cargo area cover (5 persons)* ........................................................7-95
Listen to CDs .................................................................................7-37 Convenient hook ............................................................................7-97
Listen to MP3s ...............................................................................7-38 Assist grip ......................................................................................7-97
Listen to an iPod ............................................................................7-39 Coat hook .......................................................................................7-97
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device .........................................7-41 Luggage hooks ...............................................................................7-97
To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation Luggage net (5 persons)* ...............................................................7-98
(vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) ...................................7-44
Listen to Bluetooth Audio .............................................................7-46
To listen to a disc in the rear-seat display
(vehicles with rear-seat display) ...............................................7-48
Display Indicator ...........................................................................7-48
Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment ...........................7-50
System Settings ..............................................................................7-51
Troubleshooting .............................................................................7-55
Important operation tips for the air conditioner

 When operating the system, make sure the
Important operation tips for air intake, which is located in front of the
During a long period of disuse
the air conditioner windscreen, is free of obstructions such as
E00708302229 leaves and snow. Leaves collected in the The air conditioning should be operated for at
air-intake plenum may reduce air flow least 5 minutes each week, even in cold
CAUTION and plug the plenum water drains. weather. This is to prevent poor lubrication of
 The engine speed may increase when the air the compressor internal parts and to maintain
conditioning is operating. the air conditioning in the best operating con-
With an increased engine speed, an A/T Air conditioning system refrig- dition.
vehicle will creep to a greater degree than erant and lubricant recommen-
with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the
brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from
dations Ventilators
7 creeping. E00700102133
If the air conditioning seems less effective
than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant
 Park the vehicle in the shade. Front ventilators
Parking in the hot sun will make the vehi- leak. We recommend you to have the system
E00774900035
cle inside extremely hot, and it will inspected.

require more time to cool the interior. For petrol-powered vehicles or diesel-pow-
If it is necessary to park in the sun, open ered vehicles with the rear cooler, the air con-
the windows for the first few minutes of ditioning system in your vehicle must be
air conditioning operation to expel the hot charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a and
air. the lubricant ND-OIL8.
 Close the windows when the air condi- For diesel-powered vehicles without the rear
tioning is in use. The entry of outside air cooler, the air conditioning system in your
through open windows will reduce the vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant
*
cooling efficiency. HFC-134a and the lubricant DH-PR.
*
 Too much cooling is not good for the Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will
health. The inside air temperature should cause severe damage which will result in the *: Optional equipment
only be 5 to 6 °C below the outside air need to replace your vehicle’s entire air con- 1- Centre ventilators
temperature. ditioning system. The release of refrigerant 2- Side ventilators
into the atmosphere should be prevented.
It is recommended that the refrigerant be
recovered and recycled for further use.
7-2 For pleasant driving

Ventilators
Rear ventilators* Left Right

E00775000033
1- Close 1- Close
2- Open 2- Open
7
Front side ventilators Rear ventilators*

Adjusting the air flow direction
E00700202121
Move the knob (A) to adjust the air flow Move the knob (A) to adjust the air flow
direction. direction.
Front centre ventilators To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the
outside as far as possible.
Move the knob (A) to adjust the air flow
direction.
To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the
inside as far as possible.
For pleasant driving 7-3

Ventilators
NOTE NOTE
 The cool air from the ventilators may appear  Be careful not to spill beverages, etc., into
as a mist. the ventilators.
This is due to moist air being suddenly Doing so might cause the air conditioner not
cooled by the air conditioning. This will to function normally.
clear after a few moments.
7 Changing the position of air flowing from the front ventilators

E00700302555
On Vehicle with the cooler/manual air conditioning, to change the position and amount of air flowing from the front ventilators, turn the mode
selection dial.
On vehicle with the automatic climate control air conditioner/dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioner, each time the MODE switch is
pressed, the mode changes to the next one in the following sequence: “ ”  “ ”  “ ”  “ ”  “ ”. To change to the “ ” position,
press the demister switch.
These symbols are used in the next several illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air coming from the front ventilators.
: Small amount of air from the ventilators
: Medium amount of air from the ventilators
: Large amount of air from the ventilators

Ventilators
The mode selection and air flowing from the front ventilators
Face position Foot/Face position Foot position
* *
* *
7
Foot/Demister position* Demister position*
*
*
*: Optional equipment
NOTE
 On vehicle with the automatic climate control air conditioner/dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioner, when using the “ ” or “ ” position,
set the outside position to prevent the windows from fogging up.
 On vehicle with the front cooler/manual air conditioning, with the mode selection dial between the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to the upper
part of the passenger compartment. With the mode selection dial between the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to the leg area.
 On vehicle with the manual air conditioning, with the mode selection dial between the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to the leg area. With the
mode selection dial between the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to the windscreen and door windows.

Front cooler/Manual air conditioning*

 Usage
Front cooler/Manual air • Changing the position of air flowing Demisting of the windscreen
conditioning* Not UK Spec from the ventilators  P.7-4 and door windows (Manual air
E00731101060
• Demisting of the windscreen and door conditioning)
windows (Manual air conditioning) → E00776400021
The front cooler/Manual air conditioning can P.7-6
only be used while the engine is running. • Adjusting the blower speed  P.7-7 LHD
• To stop the fan  P.7-7
Cooler • Adjusting the temperature control 
P.7-7
• Cooling  P.7-8
7 • Heating (Manual air conditioning) →
P.7-8 RHD
• Switching the air conditioning system
ON/OFF (Manual air conditioning) →
Manual air conditioning
P.7-8
• Switching outside air and recirculated air
 P.7-9
• Driving in polluted outside air condi-
tions P.7-9
1. Push the air conditioning switch to turn it
on.
1- Mode selection dial  P.7-4 2. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
2- Rear window demister switch position.
 P.5-69 3. Set the temperature rather high by using
3- Blower speed selection dial  P.7-7 the temperature control dial.
4- Temperature control dial  P.7-7 4. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
5- Cooler switch  P.7-8 ing the blower speed selection dial clock-
6- Air selection lever  P.7-9 wise or anticlockwise.
7- Air conditioning switch*  P.7-8
5. Set “ ” Outside air by using the air
selection lever.

CAUTION Adjusting the temperature con-

 For safety, make sure you have a clear view trol
through all the windows. E00771600031
 Do not set the temperature to the max. cool
position. Cool air will blow against the win- The temperature control dial is used to select
dow glasses and prevent demisting. the desired air temperature.
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
to make the air cooler. When the temperature
NOTE control dial is turned clockwise from “”
 When demisting quick, set the blower to the position, the air conditioner switch automati-
maximum speed and the temperature to the cally turns “ON”. (On vehicles with the
highest position. cooler) 7
 To demist the door windows effectively, Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
direct the air flowing of the side ventilators
To stop the fan to make the air warmer. Turn it anticlockwise
E00772100033
towards the door windows. to make the air cooler. (On vehicles with the
manual air conditioning)
Adjusting the blower speed Cooler

E00771500030
Select the blower speed by turning the blower

speed selection dial clockwise or anticlock-
wise.
The blower speed will gradually increase as
the dial is turned clockwise.
Manual air conditioning
Turn the blower speed selection dial to the

“OFF” position.

Cooling Manual air conditioning Heating (Manual air condition-

E00771800033
ing)
Select dials and levers as shown in the illus- LHD E00775700027
tration according to your purpose. Select dials and levers as shown in the illus-
tration according to your purpose.
Cooler
LHD
LHD
RHD
RHD
RHD
CAUTION
 If high cooling performance is desired, set
air selection lever to the “ ” (recircula-
tion) position and the temperature control
dial all the way to the right (on vehicles with
the cooler) or to the left (on vehicles with the
manual air conditioning). Switching the air conditioning
Switch to the “ ” (outside) position peri- system ON/OFF (Manual air
odically to increase ventilation so that the conditioning)
windows do not become fogged up. E00775900029
Push the switch to turn the air conditioner on,

the indicator lamp (A) will come on.

LHD Driving in polluted outside air

conditions
E00775200035
If the outside air is dusty or otherwise con-

taminated when driving through a tunnel or in
a traffic jam, set the air selection lever to the
RHD “ ” (recirculation) position.
Refer to “Switching outside air and recircu-
lated air” on page 7-9.
Push the switch again to switch it off. 7
Switching outside air and recir-

culated air “ ” Outside air
E00771900034 Outside air is introduced into the passen-
To change the air selection, use the air selec- ger compartment.
tion lever.  “ ” Recirculated air
Air is recirculated inside the passenger
compartment.
CAUTION
 Normally, use the “ ” (outside) position
to prevent the windows from fogging up.
Use of the “ ” (recirculation) position for
extended time may cause the windows to fog
up. Switch to the “ ” (outside) position
periodically to increase ventilation.

Automatic climate control air conditioner*
Automatic climate control air conditioner* Not UK Spec

E00702401508
The air conditioner can only be used while the engine is running.
1- Temperature control switch  P.7-12 11- Air conditioning indicator  P.7-13 • Operating the system in manual mode 
2- Air conditioning switch  P.7-13 12- Mode selection display  P.7-4 P.7-12
3- MODE switch  P.7-4 13- Blower speed display  P.7-12 • Adjusting the blower speed  P.7-12
4- Blower speed selection switch  • Adjusting the temperature control 
 Usage P.7-12
P.7-12
• Changing the position of air flowing • Switching the air conditioning system
5- Air selection switch  P.7-13
from the ventilators  P.7-4 ON/OFF  P.7-13
6- Demister switch  P.7-11
• Demisting of the windscreen and door • Switching outside air and recirculated air
7- AUTO switch  P.7-11
windows  P.7-11  P.7-13
8- Rear window demister switch
• Operating the system in automatic mode • Driving in polluted outside air condi-
 P.5-69
 P.7-11 tions  P.7-14
9- OFF switch  P.7-11
10- Temperature display  P.7-12

Press the demister switch or AUTO switch or
NOTE MODE switch or OFF switch to turn off the
NOTE
 In extreme cold, the air conditioning control  When the demister switch is pressed, the air
demister mode.
panel screen may operate sluggishly. This conditioning system automatically operates
does not indicate a problem. and outside air (as opposed to recirculated
It will disappear when the vehicle interior CAUTION air) is selected. This automatic switching
temperature rises to a normal temperature.  For safety, make sure you have a clear view control is carried out to prevent misting of
through all the windows. the windows even if “Disable automatic air
conditioning control” or “Disable automatic
 When setting the MODE switch to the “ ”
air control” is set. (Refer to “Customising the
Demisting of the windscreen position, it also can prevent the windows
air conditioning switch” on page 7-21, “Cus-
and door windows from fogging up. But the air conditioning
tomising the air selection” on page 7-22.)
system does not operate automatically and
E00772200047
outside air (as opposed to recirculated air) is 7
not selected. If operating the air conditioning Operating the system in auto-
system and switching to outside air, press the
air conditioning switch and the air selection
matic mode
E00704102346
switch.
 Do not set the temperature to the max. cool
position. Cool air will blow against the win-
dow glasses and prevent demisting.
NOTE
 When demisting quick, set the blower to the
1. Press the demister switch to change to the maximum speed and the temperature to the
highest position.
“ ” position. When the demister switch
 To demist the door windows effectively,
is pressed, the indicator lamp (A) comes direct the air flowing of the side ventilators
on. towards the door windows.
2. Set the temperature rather high by using In normal conditions, use the system in the
the temperature control switch. AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
3. Select your desired blower speed by
1. Press the AUTO switch.
pressing the blower speed selection
2. Set the temperature control switch to the
switch.
desired temperature.


Press the OFF switch to turn off the air condi-
tioning system.
NOTE Adjusting the blower speed
 Never place anything on top of the interior E00772300048
The mode selection, blower speed adjust- air temperature sensor (B), which will pre-
Press of the blower speed selection
ment, recirculated/outside air selection, tem- vent it from functioning properly.
switch to increase the blower speed.
perature adjustment, and air conditioner Type 1 Press of the blower speed selection
ON/OFF status are all controlled automati- switch to decrease the blower speed.
cally. When the AUTO switch is pressed, the The selected blower speed will be shown in
indicator lamp (A) comes on. the display (A).
NOTE
7  If the blower speed selection switch, air con-
ditioning switch, MODE switch, or air selec-
tion switch is operated while the system is
operating in the AUTO mode, the activated Type 2
function overrides the corresponding func-
tion of automatic control. All other functions
remain under automatic control.
Adjusting the temperature con-

Operating the system in manual
trol
mode E00772400049
E00704201278
Blower speed and ventilator mode may be Press or of the temperature control
controlled manually by setting the blower switch to the desired temperature.
speed selection switch and the MODE switch The selected temperature will be shown in the
to the desired positions. display (A).
To return to automatic operation, press the
AUTO switch.
NOTE Switching the air conditioning

 When the temperature is set to the highest or system ON/OFF
the lowest, the air selection and the air condi- E00772900057
tioner will be automatically changed as fol-
lows. Press the switch to turn the air conditioner on,
Also, if the air selection is operated manually the “ ” indicator will be shown in the dis-
after an automatic changeover, manual oper- play (A).
ation will be selected. Press the switch again to switch it off.
• When the temperature is set to the highest
setting (32.0 °C)
Outside air will be introduced and the air
conditioner will stop. 7
NOTE • When the temperature is set to the lowest
 The temperature value of air conditioner is setting (18.0 °C)
switched in conjunction with outside temper- Inside air will be recirculated and the air
ature display unit of the multi information conditioner will operate.
display.  The settings described above are the factory
On vehicles equipped with multi information settings.
display - Type 1, refer to “Changing the tem- The air selection and air conditioning
perature unit” on page 5-25. switches can be customised (function setting
On vehicles equipped with multi information changed), and the automatic switching of
display - Type 2, refer to “Changing the tem- outside air and the air conditioner according
perature unit” on page 5-25. to operating conditions can be changed as
 While the engine coolant temperature is low, desired. Switching outside air and recir-
the temperature of air flowing will not be For further information, we recommend you culated air
changed, even if you have selected warm air to consult an authorised MITSUBISHI E00772700042
with the switch. MOTORS dealer.
To prevent the windscreen and windows Refer to “Customising the air conditioning To change the air selection, simply press the
from fogging up, the mode selection will be switch” on page 7-21. air selection switch.
changed to “ ” and the blower speed will Refer to “Customising the air selection” on
page 7-22.  Outside air: Indicator lamp (A) is OFF
be reduced while the system is operating in
the AUTO mode. Outside air is introduced into the passen-
ger compartment.
 Recirculated air: Indicator lamp (A) is ON


Air is recirculated inside the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
 When the engine coolant temperature rises to
a certain level, the air selection is automati-
cally switched to the recirculation position
and the indicator lamp (A) comes on. At this
time, the system will not switch to the out-
side position even if the air selection switch
is pressed.
Driving in polluted outside air

7 conditions
E00775300036

CAUTION a traffic jam, set to the recirculation position
 Normally, use the outside position to prevent by pressing the air selection switch.
the windows from fogging up.
Use of the recirculation position for
lated air” on page 7-13.
extended time may cause the windows to fog
up.
Switch to the outside position periodically to
increase ventilation.
NOTE
 If effective cooling performance is desired,
use the recirculation position.
 When pressing the AUTO switch after man-
ual operation, the air selection switch is also
controlled automatically.

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioner*

E00773000042
The air conditioner can only be used while the engine is running.
1- Driver’s side temperature control 6- Air selection switch  P.7-20 14- Passenger’s side temperature display
switch (LHD vehicles)  P.7-19 7- Demister switch  P.7-16 (LHD vehicles)  P.7-18
Passenger’s side temperature control 8- AUTO switch  P.7-17 Driver’s side temperature display
switch (RHD vehicles)  P.7-19 9- Rear window demister switch (RHD vehicles)  P.7-18
2- Air conditioning switch  P.7-19  P.5-69 15- Air conditioning indicator  P.7-19
3- Blower speed selection switch  10- OFF switch  P.7-16 16- Blower speed display  P.7-18
P.7-16 11- Driver’s side temperature display
(LHD vehicles)  P.7-18  Usage
4- MODE switch  P.7-4
Passenger’s side temperature display • Changing the position of air flowing
5- Passenger’s side temperature control
(RHD vehicles)  P.7-18 from the ventilators  P.7-4
switch (LHD vehicles)  P.7-19
12- DUAL indicator  P.7-19 • Demisting of the windscreen and door
Driver’s side temperature control
13- Mode selection display  P.7-4 windows  P.7-16
switch (RHD vehicles)  P.7-19

• Operating the system in automatic mode 3. Select your desired blower speed by
 P.7-17
Demisting of the windscreen pressing the blower speed selection
• Operating the system in manual mode  and door windows switch.
P.7-18 E00773200044
• Adjusting the blower speed  P.7-18 Press the demister switch or AUTO switch or
LHD
• Adjusting the temperature control  MODE switch or OFF switch to turn off the
P.7-18 demister mode.
• To control the driver’s side and the pas-
senger’s side temperature independently CAUTION
 P.7-19  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
• Switching the air conditioning system through all the windows.
7 ON/OFF  P.7-19
 When setting the MODE switch to the “ ”
• Switching outside air and recirculated air position, it also can prevent the windows
 P.7-20 from fogging up. But the air conditioning
• Driving in polluted outside air condi- system does not operate automatically and
tions  P.7-20 outside air (as opposed to recirculated air) is
RHD not selected. If operating the air conditioning
system and switching to outside air, press the
NOTE air conditioning switch and the air selection
 In extreme cold, the air conditioning control switch.
panel screen may operate sluggishly. This  Do not set the temperature to the max. cool
does not indicate a problem. position. Cool air will blow against the win-
It will disappear when the vehicle interior dow glasses and prevent demisting.
temperature rises to a normal temperature.
NOTE
 When demisting quick, set the blower to the
1. Press the demister switch to change to the maximum speed and the temperature to the
“ ” position. When the demister switch highest position.
is pressed, the indicator lamp (A) comes  To demist the door windows effectively,
on. direct the air flowing of the side ventilators
2. Set the temperature rather high by using towards the door windows.
the temperature control switch.

NOTE RHD NOTE

 When the demister switch is pressed, the air  If the blower speed selection switch, air con-
conditioning system automatically operates ditioning switch, MODE switch, or air selec-
and outside air (as opposed to recirculated tion switch is operated while the system is
air) is selected. This automatic switching operating in the AUTO mode, the activated
control is carried out to prevent misting of function overrides the corresponding func-
the windows even if “Disable automatic air tion of automatic control. All other functions
conditioning control” or “Disable automatic remain under automatic control.
air control” is set. (Refer to “Customising the  Never place anything on top of the interior
air conditioning switch” on page 7-21, “Cus- air temperature sensor (B), which will pre-
tomising the air selection” on page 7-22.) vent it from functioning properly.
In normal conditions, use the system in the Type 1
7
Operating the system in auto- AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
matic mode 1. Press the AUTO switch.
E00773100043
2. Set the temperature control switch to the
LHD desired temperature.
Press the OFF switch to turn off the air condi-

tioning system.
The mode selection, blower speed adjust- Type 2

ment, recirculated/outside air selection, tem-
perature adjustment, and air conditioner
ON/OFF status are all controlled automati-
cally. When the AUTO switch is pressed, the
indicator lamp (A) comes on.

Operating the system in manual Adjusting the temperature con- NOTE

mode trol  The temperature value of air conditioner is
E00773300045 E00773500047
switched in conjunction with outside temper-
ature display unit of the multi information
Blower speed and ventilator mode may be Press or of the temperature control display.
controlled manually by setting the blower switch to the desired temperature. On vehicles equipped with multi information
speed selection switch and the MODE switch The selected temperature will be shown in the display - Type 1, refer to “Changing the tem-
to the desired positions. display (A). perature unit” on page 5-25.
To return to automatic operation, press the On vehicles equipped with multi information
AUTO switch. display - Type 2, refer to “Changing the tem-
LHD perature unit” on page 5-25.
7 Adjusting the blower speed  While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of air flowing will not be
E00773400046 changed, even if you have selected warm air
with the switch.
Press of the blower speed selection
To prevent the windscreen and windows
switch to increase the blower speed. from fogging up, the mode selection will be
Press of the blower speed selection changed to “ ” and the blower speed will
switch to decrease the blower speed. be reduced while the system is operating in
The selected blower speed will be shown in the AUTO mode.
the display (A).  When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest, the air selection and the air condi-
RHD tioner will be automatically changed as fol-
lows.
Also, if the air selection is operated manually
after an automatic changeover, manual oper-
ation will be selected.
• When the temperature is set to the highest
setting (32.0°C)
Outside air will be introduced and the air
conditioner will stop.


When the AUTO switch is pressed, the
NOTE “DUAL” indicator (B) will disappear, and the
NOTE
• When the temperature is set to the lowest  If the driver’s side temperature control
temperature setting for the passenger’s side
setting (18.0°C) switch is pressed when the “DUAL” indica-
will be the same as the driver’s side.
Inside air will be recirculated and the air tor is not displayed, the temperature setting
conditioner will operate. for the passenger’s side will be the same as
 The settings described above are the factory LHD the driver’s side.
settings.
The air selection and air conditioning
switches can be customised (function setting Switching the air conditioning
changed), and the automatic switching of
outside air and the air conditioner according system ON/OFF
to operating conditions can be changed as E00774100040
7
desired. Press the switch to turn the air conditioner on,
For further information, we recommend you
to consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
the “ ” indicator will be shown in the dis-
MOTORS dealer. play (A).
Refer to “Customising the air conditioning Press the switch again to switch it off.
switch” on page 7-21. RHD
Refer to “Customising the air selection” on
page 7-22.
To control the driver’s side and

the passenger’s side tempera-
ture independently
E00773600048
The driver’s side and the passenger’s side

temperature can be controlled independently
by using the passenger’s side temperature
control switch (A).
At this time, the “DUAL” indicator (B) will
be displayed.

Rear cooler*
Switching outside air and recir- CAUTION lated air” on page 7-20.
culated air  Normally, use the outside position to prevent
E00773900041
the windows from fogging up.
To change the air selection, simply press the

Use of the recirculation position for Rear cooler*
extended time may cause the windows to fog E00707701173
air selection switch. up.
Switch to the outside position periodically to The rear cooler can only be used while the
 Outside air: Indicator lamp (A) is OFF increase ventilation. engine is running and the front air condition-
Outside air is introduced into the passen-
ing is switched on.
ger compartment.
 Recirculated air: Indicator lamp (A) is ON NOTE
7 Air is recirculated inside the passenger  If effective cooling performance is desired,
compartment. use the recirculation position.
 When pressing the AUTO switch after man-
ual operation, the air selection switch is also
controlled automatically.
 When the engine coolant temperature rises to
a certain level, the air selection is automati-
cally switched to the recirculation position
and the indicator lamp (A) comes on. At this
time, the system will not switch to the out-
side position even if the air selection switch A- ON/OFF switch
is pressed. B- Blower speed adjustment switch
Driving in polluted outside air NOTE

conditions  When the front air conditioning is not
E00775400037 switched on, only fan operation without
cooling is possible.
a traffic jam, set to the recirculation position
by pressing the air selection switch.

Customising the air conditioning
To operate the rear cooler in the To operate the rear cooler in the Customising the air condi-
front seat rear seat tioning
E00774400030 E00774500031
E00774600061
When the switch is pressed, the fan starts and 1. Press the “ON/OFF” switch to activate the
For vehicle with the automatic climate con-
the indicator lamp (A) comes on. When the rear cooler.
trol air conditioner/dual-zone automatic cli-
switch is pressed again, the fan stops and the 2. Press the “UP” button to increase the
mate control air conditioner, the following
indicator lamp goes off. blower speed and press the “DOWN” but-
customise functions can be applied.
ton to decrease the blower speed. The
selected blower speed will be shown with
Type 1 the indicator lamp (A). Customising the air condition-
3. Press the “ON/OFF” switch again to stop ing switch 7
operation. E00774700046
Functions can be changed as desired, as

stated below.
 Enable automatic air conditioning control

When the AUTO switch is pressed, or the
temperature control switch is set to the
minimum temperature, the air condition-
ing switch is controlled automatically.
Type 2
 Disable automatic air conditioning control
The air conditioning switch is not con-
trolled automatically as long as the air
conditioning switch is not operated.
NOTE
 If the rear cooler is activated again after it is  Setting change method
stopped by pressing the “ON/OFF” switch or Hold down the air conditioning switch for
after the engine is stopped, the blower speed approximately 10 seconds or more.
will return to the previous setting. • When the setting is changed from enable
to disable

Air purifier*
3 sounds are emitted and the “ ” indi-  Setting change method
Hold down the air selection switch for
NOTE
cator flashes 3 times.
 Operation in certain conditions such as driv-
• When the setting is changed from disa- approximately 10 seconds or more.
ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the
ble to enable • When the setting is changed from enable
air conditioner can lead to reduction of ser-
2 sounds are emitted and the “ ” indi- to disable vice life of the filter. When you feel that the
cator flashes 3 times. 3 sounds are emitted and the indicator airflow is lower than normal or when the
lamp flashes 3 times. windscreen or windows start to fog up easily,
• When the setting is changed from disa- replace the air filter.
NOTE ble to enable We recommend you to have it checked.
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air 2 sounds are emitted and the indicator
conditioning control”. lamp flashes 3 times.
7  When the demister switch is pressed, in
Audio system*
order to prevent misting of the windows
from fogging up, the air conditioner operates NOTE E00708503781
automatically even if “Disable automatic air  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
The audio system can only be used when the
conditioning control” is set. control”.
ignition switch or the operation mode is in
 When the demister switch is pressed, in
order to prevent misting of the windows ON or ACC.
Customising the air selection from fogging up, the air ventilator automati-
E00774800047
cally switches to outside air even if “Disable NOTE
automatic air control” is set.  For vehicles equipped with the Keyless oper-
Functions can be changed as desired, as
ation system, if the operation mode is left in
stated below. ACC, the accessory power will automatically
 Enable automatic air control Air purifier* turn off after a certain period of time and you
will no longer be able to use the audio sys-
When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air E00708401799
tem. The accessory power comes on again if
selection switch is also controlled auto- the engine switch is operated with it in the
An air filter has been incorporated into this
matically. “ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power auto-
air conditioner so that dirt and dust are
cutout function” on page 6-20.
 Disable automatic air control cleaned from the air.
Even when the AUTO switch is pressed, Replace the air filter periodically as its ability
the air selection switch is not controlled to clean the air will be reduced as it collects
automatically. pollen and dirt. For the maintenance interval,
refer to the “SERVICE BOOKLET”.

Audio system*
 If very dirty, wring out a soft cloth dipped
NOTE in neutral detergent diluted in water, and
NOTE
 If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,  iPod and iTunes licensing allows individual
use it. Do not use benzene, thinners, or
it may create noise from the audio equip- users to privately reproduce and play back
other chemical wipes. This may harm the
ment. This does not mean that anything is non- copyrighted material as well as material
wrong with your audio equipment. In such a surface. that may be legally copied and reproduced.
case, use the cellular phone at a place as far Infringement of copyright is prohibited.
away as possible from the audio equipment. Trademarks  In some countries, for vehicles with a Blue-
 If foreign objects or water get into the audio E00735801384 tooth® 2.0 interface, the types of devices that
equipment, or if smoke or a strange odour can be connected may vary. For details,
 Product names and other proper names
comes from it, immediately turn off the access the MITSUBISHI MOTORS website.
are the trademarks or registered trade-
audio system. We recommend you to have it Please read and agree to the “Warning about
marks of their respective owners.
checked. Never try to repair it by yourself.
 Furthermore, even if there is no specific
Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”. 7
Avoid continuous usage without inspection The websites mentioned above may connect
by a qualified person. denotation of trademarks or registered you to websites other than the MITSUBISHI
trademarks, these are to be observed in MOTORS website.
their entirety. http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
Important Points on Usage ucts/index.html
E00735500023
 “PremiDIA HD” and “PremiDIA WIDE”

iPod/iPhone Playback Function*
“Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone” are trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Cor-
 This product supports audio playback mean that an electronic accessory has poration. Trademarks are pending in some
from iPod/iPhone devices, however dif- been designed to connect specifically to regions.
fering versions mean that playback cannot iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been
be guaranteed. certified by the developer to meet Apple
 Please be aware that depending on the performance standards.
iPod/iPhone model or version, operation iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and
may differ. iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Apple is not responsible for the operation
How to Clean of this device or its compliance with
E00735701077
safety and regulatory standards.
 If the product becomes dirty, wipe with a
soft cloth.

Audio system*
5th generation 5th generation 160GB (2009) 160GB (2007) 80GB

(video) (video)
60GB 80GB 30GB
7
6th generation 5th generation 4th generation (video)

8GB 16GB (video camera) 8GB 16GB
8GB 16GB
3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

(video) (aluminum) 1GB 2GB 4GB
4GB 8GB 2GB 4GB 8GB

Handling of Discs
 If discs are not going to be used for a long
Important Points on Handling
period of time, remove these from the
 Fingerprints or other marks on the read product.
surface of the disc may result in its con-
4th generation 3rd generation tent being more difficult to read. When
8GB 32GB 64GB 32GB 64GB Disc Playback Environment
holding the disc, grip both edges, or one
edge and the centre hole, in order that the In cold environments such as in mid-winter
read surface is not touched. when the interior of the vehicle is cold, turn-
2nd generation 1st generation  Do not affix paper or stickers, or other- ing the heater on and immediately trying to
8GB 16GB 32GB 64GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 64GB wise damage the disc. use the product may cause condensation
 Do not forcefully insert a disc if another is (water droplets) to form on the disc and inter-
already within the device. This can result nal optical components, and this may prevent 7
in damage to discs, or malfunction. the product from operating correctly.
16GB 32GB 64GB 16GB 32GB In these conditions, remove the disc, and wait
a short time before use.
Cleaning
 Periodically clean the read surface of the Copyright

disc. When cleaning, do not wipe in a cir-
8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB Actions such as unauthorised reproduction,
cular motion. Instead, wipe gently out-
wards from the centre of the disc to the broadcast, public performance, or rental of
outer edge. discs that comprise other than personal use
 New discs may have burring around the are prohibited by law.
Handling of Discs outer edge or in the hole in the centre.
E00735901154 Ensure you check for these. If there are Types of Disc That Can Be
burrs, these may lead to faulty operation,
This explains care that should be taken in the
therefore ensure these are removed.
Played Back
handling of discs. E00736001035
The following marks are printed on the disc

Important Points on Storage
label, package, or jacket.
 When not using discs, ensure these are
kept in cases, and stored out of direct sun-
light.

Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)

Maxi-  Discs that have not been finalized cannot • There may be noise during playback.
mum Com- be played back. • There may be jumping in the audio.
Type Size  Even if recorded using the correct format • The disc may not be recognized.
playback ments
time on a recorder or computer, application • The first track may not be played back.
software settings and environments; disc • It may take longer than usual until start
CD-DA 12 cm 74 minutes — peculiarities, damage, or marking; or dirt of playback of tracks.
or condensation on the lens inside the • Playback may start from within the
product may render the disc unplayable. track.
CD-TEXT 12 cm 74 minutes —  Depending on the disc, some functions • Some parts may not be played back.
may not be used, or the disc may not play • Tracks may freeze during playback.
back. • Tracks may be displayed erroneously.
7  Do not use discs with cracks or warps.
 If the disc has stickers affixed, remains
CD-R/RW 12 cm — •Disc
from removed stickers, or affixed adhe-
Audio Files
contain-
ing MP3 sive, then do not use the disc. (MP3/WMA/AAC)
files  Discs that have decorative labels or stick- E00736101124
ers may not be used. This product can play back MP3/WMA/AAC
format audio files recorded on CD-ROM,
Nonstandard CDs CD-R/RW, and USB devices.
This product will play back audio CDs, how- There are limitations on the files and media
Discs That May Not Be Played Back
ever please be aware of the following points that can be used, therefore read the following
 Playback of discs other than those regarding CD standards. prior to recording MP3/WMA/AAC format
described in “Types of Disc That Can Be audio files on discs or USB devices.
Played Back” is not guaranteed.  Ensure that you use discs with on the Additionally, ensure you read the user manu-
 8 cm discs may not be used. label surface. als for your CD-R/RW drive and the writing
 Do not insert irregularly-shaped discs (for  Playback of other than standard CDs is software, and ensure these are used correctly.
example, heart-shaped), as these may not guaranteed. Even if the audio can be If the MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files
result in malfunction. Additionally, discs played back, the audio quality cannot be includes title information or other data, then
that have transparent portions may not be guaranteed. this can be displayed.
played back.  When playing back other than standard
CDs, the following may occur.

CAUTION Data Formats That Can Be

ROOT
 CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only Played Back Folder
play back MP3 format audio files. E00736200030
Audio file
 Actions such as copying audio CDs or files
and either distributing these to others for free Data formats that can be played on discs
or for charge, or uploading files via the Inter- (CD-ROM, CD-R/RW) and USB devices dif-
net or other means to servers is an infringe- fer.
ment of the law.
 Do not append the file extensions “.mp3”, Data format DISC USB device
“.wma”, or “.m4a”, to other than
MP3/WMA/AAC format files. Playing back
MP3
discs with these types of files recorded upon
WMA X 2 level 3 level 4 level
7
them may cause the files to be incorrectly 1 level 5 level
identified for playback, which may lead to AAC X
loud noise, resulting in speaker damage or
accident.
Folder Structure
NOTE E00736300031
 Depending on the condition of the disc

Up to 8 folder levels can be recognized.
recorder or recording software used, correct You can create a folder structure as in Genre -
playback may not be possible. In these cases, Artist - Album - Track (MP3/WMA/AAC
refer to the user manual for your product or format audio files) for management of tracks.
software.
 Depending on your computer’s operating
system, version, software, or settings, files
may not have a file extension appended. In
these cases, append the file extensions
“.mp3”, “.wma”, or “.m4a” when copying
the files.
 Files larger than 2GB in size cannot be
played back.


Speci- Speci- “Motion Picture Experts Group”, and this is a
Name fica- Explanation Name fica- Explanation video compression standard used in video
tion tion CDs, etc.
MP3 is one of the audio compression meth-
Format ISO96 Level Maximum 8 File name Maximum 64 bytes (for Uni- ods contained in the MPEG audio standard,
specifica- 60 1 character file and folder code, 32 characters), files/ fold- and reduces the quality of sounds that are
tions name, and 3 name ers with file/ folder names beyond the auditory resolution of the human
character file restric- longer than this will not be dis- ear and that are hidden by louder sounds, thus
extension. tions played or played back. creating high-quality data with a lower data
(single-byte USB sup- The recommended file system is size.
alphanumeric ported FAT32. Because this can compress CD audio to
7 capital letters,
numerals, “_”
formats 1 partition only approximately 1/10 its original data size with-
out perceptible loss, approximately 10 CDs
may be used)
*1:Do not include other than can be written to a single CD-R/RW disc.
ISO96 Joliet Files names up MP3/WMA/AAC files. However, if stor-
60 to a maximum ing many tracks within the same folder, CAUTION
exten- 64 characters these may not be recognized even if less  MP3 files different to the standards at right
sion can be used. than the maximum number of tracks. In may not play back correctly, or file/folder
Multises- Not supported (only first ses- these cases, divide the tracks up into mul- names may not be displayed correctly.
sion sion supported) tiple folders.
Maxi- 8 levels (if the root is the 1st
mum level) Standards for MP3 Files That Can
number
NOTE Be Played Back
 The order in which folders and audio files
of levels
are displayed on this product may be differ-
Maxi- 700 folders (including root) ent to how they are displayed on a computer. Specifications for MP3 files that can be
mum played are as below.
folder
Item Details
number What Is MP3?
Maxi- 65,535 files (total number on E00736400029 Specification MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3
mum file media. Other than MP3, WMA, MP3 is an abbreviation of “MPEG-1 Audio MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3
number*1 and AAC files not included) Layer 3”. MPEG is an abbreviation of


Item Details format that has a higher compression ratio Item Details
than MP3.
Sampling MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48 Sampling 32/44.1/48
frequency MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24 frequency
[kHz] NOTE [kHz]
 Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows
Bit rate MPEG-1: 32 to 320 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor-
Bit rate 48 to 320
[kbps] MPEG-2: 8 to 160 poration (USA) and in other countries. [kbps]
VBR (varia- Support VBR Support

ble bit rate) (variable bit
CAUTION rate)
Channel Stereo/ Joint stereo/ Dual  WMA supports digital rights management
mode channel/ Monaural (DRM). This product cannot play back
Channel
mode
Stereo/Monaural
7
File exten- mp3 WMA files protected using this system.
sion  WMA files different to the standards at right File exten- wma
may not play back correctly, or file/folder sion
Supported ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, names may not be displayed correctly.
tag informa- Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3, Ver. 2.4 Supported WMA tags
 “Pro”, “Lossless”, and “Voice” are not sup- tag informa- Title name, Artist name,
tion (ISO-8859-1, UTF-16 (Uni- ported.
code)), Titles, Artist name, tion Album name
Album name Maximum 64 characters
Maximum 64 characters Standards for WMA Files That number of
characters
number of Can Be Played Back
characters that can be
that can be indicated on
Specifications for WMA files that can be the display
indicated on played are as below.
the display
Item Details What Is AAC?
What Is WMA? Specification Windows Media Audio
E00736800023
E00736600021 Version7.0/8.0/9.0 AAC is an abbreviation of Advanced Audio

WMA is an abbreviation of Windows Media Coding, and this is an audio compression
Audio, and this is an audio compression for- standard used in “MPEG-2” and “MPEG-4”.
mat from Microsoft. This is a compression
Important Points on Safety for the Customer

This features 1.4x the compression of MP3, Item Details
with comparable audio quality.
WARNING
Bit rate MPEG 8 to 320  The driver should not pay close attention
[kbps] 4 to the display while driving.
CAUTION This may prevent the driver looking
MPEG 8 to 320
 AAC supports digital rights management where they are going, and cause an acci-
(DRM). This product cannot play back AAC
2 dent.
files protected using this system. VBR (variable bit Support  The driver should not perform compli-
 AAC files different to the standards at right rate) cated operations while driving.
may not play back correctly, or file/folder Performing complicated operations while
Channel mode Stereo/Monaural driving may prevent the driver looking
names may not be displayed correctly.
File extension m4a where they are going, and cause an acci-
7 Supported tag AAC tags or ID3 tags
dent.
Standards for AAC Files That Can Therefore stop the vehicle in a safe loca-
information Title, Artist name, tion before performing such operations.
Be Played Back Album name  Do not use during malfunctions, such as
Maximum num- 64 characters when no sound is audible.
Specifications for AAC files that can be ber of characters This may lead to accident, fire, or electric
played are as below. that can be indi- shock.
cated on the dis-  Ensure water or other foreign objects do
Item Details play not enter the product.
This may lead to smoking, fire, electric
Specification Advanced Audio Cod- shock, or malfunction.
ing Important Points on Safety  Do not insert foreign objects into the disc
MPEG4/AAC-LC slot.
MPEG2/AAC-LC for the Customer This may lead to fire, electric shock, or
E00737001159 malfunction.
Sam- MPEG 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24
This product features a number of pictorial  In the event of abnormalities occurring
pling 4 /32/44.1/48
indications as well as points concerning han- when foreign objects or water enter the
fre- MPEG 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24 dling so that you can use the product cor- product, resulting in smoke or a strange
quency 2 /32/44.1/48 smell, immediately stop using the product,
[kHz] rectly and in a safe manner, as well as prevent
and consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
injury or damage to yourself, other users, or
MOTORS dealer.
property. Continuing to use the product may result
in accident, fire, or electric shock.

Operation Keys
WARNING
 Do not disassemble or modify the product.
This may lead to malfunction, fire, or elec-
tric shock.
 During thunderstorms, do not touch the
antenna or the front panel.
This may lead to electrical shock from
lightning.
CAUTION
 Do not block ventilation holes or heat sinks Turn the power on, and resume playback Turn the PWR/VOL key clockwise to 7
on the product. from the previous status. increase, and counter- clockwise to
Blocking ventilation holes or heat sinks may 2. Press the PWR/VOL key. decrease the volume.
prevent heat from escaping from within the Turn the power OFF.
product, leading to fire or malfunction.
 Do not turn the volume up to the extent that
NOTE NOTE
you cannot hear sounds from outside the  The maximum value for volume is 45, and
vehicle while driving.  Hold down the steering SOURCE button to
the minimum is 0.
Driving without being able to hear sounds also turn the audio function ON/OFF.
 The initial setting for volume is “17”.
from outside the vehicle may result in an
accident.
 Do not insert your hand or fingers into the Adjust Volume Insert/Eject Discs
disc slot. E00737300025
E00737400026
This may result in injury. 1. Turn the PWR/VOL key to adjust the vol-
1. Insert the disc into the disc slot with the
ume.
label surface up.
Operation Keys
E00737101176
Turn the Power ON/ OFF

E00737201119
1. Press the PWR/VOL key.

Operation Keys
Disc slot
Disc
*Label side
7 Push the disc in a certain amount, and the

product will pull the disc in, and playback
will start.
2. Press the key.
This will eject the disc from the product,
so remove the disc.
CAUTION
 When replacing discs, first ensure that the
vehicle is stopped in an area in which stop-
ping is permitted.
 Do not insert your hand, fingers, or foreign
objects into the disc slot. This may lead to
injury, smoking, or fire.
 8 cm CDs are not supported.

Operation Keys
Explanation of Buttons
E00737501239
This explains names and functions of each part.
Type 1 Type 2
AH1100658
1- key 5- RADIO key 9- AUTO-P key (Type 1)

Use to eject a disc. Switch the radio and the band. Auto preset the radio.
6- PWR/VOL key PTY/SCAN key (Type 2)For audio,
2- 3 key/4 key
Adjust the volume, and turn the power play scan playback; for radio, search
For audio, rewind/fast forward.
ON/OFF. PTY.
For radio, use as preset keys 3 and 4.
7- MEDIA key 10- SCAN key (Type 1)
3- 2RDM key
Switch between CD and other sources. For audio, play scan playback; for
For audio, play random playback; for
Hold down the key to switch to AUX. radio, scan for stations.
radio, use as preset key 2.
8- DISP key TP key (Type 2)
4- 1RPT key
Switch the content of the display. Receive traffic messages.
For audio, play repeat playback; for
11- Disc slot
radio, use as preset key 1.

Operation Keys
12- PAGE key
Display indicator page advance.
Steering wheel audio remote Type 1
13- 5 key
control switches
E00737601533
Play/Pause Bluetooth Audio*, and use
as preset key 5 for radio.
14- 6 key
Return during audio track search, and
stop Bluetooth Audio*.
For radio, use as preset key 6.
15- key/ key
7 For audio, select audio track/file; for
radio, perform automatic station selec- Type 2
tion or ensemble/service station selec-
tion (Type 2).
16- MENU key 1- Volume up/down switch
Switch to Menu mode. Adjust audio functions and the mobile
phone function volume.
17- /SEL key
2- button, button
Adjust audio quality and select items.
For radio, manually select stations. Select CD and other audio source
*: Requires a separately-purchased Blue- tracks and radio stations.
tooth-capable audio device in equip- 3- SOURCE button
ment by type. Hold down to turn the audio function *1: An iPod cable (available separately) is
ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this required.
is pressed, this switches the audio *2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue-
source. tooth-capable audio device (vehicles
The order of switching is as shown with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
below.
If devices are not connected, then these
are to be skipped, and the next source
selected.

Listen to Radio
Release the button to start A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is
Listen to Radio key
registered.
E00737701156
(hold down) seek station selection, and
when a station is received,
This explains how to listen to AM and FM key
radio broadcasts (Type1) or FM, MW, and (hold down)
scanning stops. NOTE
 The preset memory can register a maximum
LW radio broadcasts (Type2).
of 6 stations for each band
Scan Station Selection (Type 1) (AM,FM,FM1,FM2,FM3).
To Listen to the Radio  If a preset key that already has a station reg-
istered is selected, then this is overwritten
Collective search for stations that can be
with the new preset.
Press the RADIO key to switch the band. received.
 Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
Switch between AM and FM bands. Press the SCAN key.
ously registered frequency. 7
The selected band is indicated on the display.
When a station is received, this is played for 5
seconds, then the product searches for the Auto Preset (Type 1)
NOTE next station.
 This switches between AM and FM in the
order FM1, FM2, FM3, MW, and LW. The top 6 stations with a strong signal can be
NOTE automatically registered in order with preset
 Press this button again while receiving the keys in the AUTO-P mode.
Manual/Seek Station Selection station to return to normal reception.
Hold down the AUTO-P key.
Turn the /SEL key to the frequency to lis- Switch to the AUTO-P mode, and start auto-
Preset Memory matic station selection.
ten to.
After completion of operations, the product
Register the broadcast station in advance, and will receive the station registered in the preset
/SEL key Reduces the frequency select this at a later time. key [1].
(counter- being received.
clockwise) 1. Tune in to the frequency to register.
2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
CAUTION
/SEL key Increases the frequency  Please be aware that the formerly-registered
(clockwise) being received. key to the 6 key. frequency in the memory will be overwrit-
ten.

Listen to Traffic Messages (Type 2)
NOTE NOTE To Listen to Traffic Messages

 Separate to normal reception preset keys,  Using auto store for FM1 and FM2 switches
this registers in preset keys in the AUTO-P to FM3. 1. When not in MW or LW mode, press the
mode. TP key.
 Pressing the preset key will select the previ- If traffic messages are being broadcast,
ously registered frequency. PTY Search (Type 2) these are received.
 Each time the AUTO-P key is pressed, this
switches between normal reception and
AUTO-P mode. Select PTY (program content), and automati- CAUTION
 In the AUTO-P mode, manual/seek station cally scan for stations.  When receiving a MW or LW signal, traffic
selection, as well as scan operation is also messages cannot be received.
7 possible. 1. During FM reception, press the
PTY/SCAN key.
This switches to the PTY selection mode. NOTE
Auto Memory (Auto Store) 2. Turn the /SEL key to select PTY.  Receiving traffic messages will indicate
The PTY (program content) indicator will “TRAF INF” on the display, and if text infor-
(Type 2) flash, and station selection will automati- mation can be received, the station name is
cally start. When a station is received, the displayed.
The top 6 stations with a strong signal can be station name is displayed.  If traffic messages are received, then this
automatically registered in order with preset will switch to the volume of the previously
keys. received traffic messages or emergency
Hold down the RADIO key. NOTE broadcasts. The volume when receiving traf-
 This receives the station detected first. fic messages or emergency broadcasts is that
After completion of auto store operations, the  10 seconds after reception, PTY search mode at which subsequent broadcasts will be
received.
product will receive the station registered in will be cancelled.
the preset key [1].
Traffic Message Standby Mode
CAUTION Listen to Traffic Messages
 Please be aware that the formerly-registered (Type 2) When the broadcast of traffic messages starts,
frequency in the memory will be overwrit-
ten.
E00739201070
this automatically switches to the station that
This explains how to listen to traffic mes- is broadcasting traffic messages.
sages.

Listen to CDs
1. When not in MW or LW mode, press the
TP key.
Select the Track NOTE
 Selecting a track, ejecting, fast forwarding,
“TP” is indicated on the display, and the
or rewinding will cancel.
product switches to standby mode. Press the key or key to select the
If traffic messages are being broadcast, track.
these are received. Random Playback (RDM)
2. When not in MW or LW mode, press the This enables selection of the next or previous
TP key. track. Press the 2RDM key.
“TP” disappears from the display, and
standby mode will be cancelled. Fast Forward or Rewind Play the tracks on the disc in a random order.
CAUTION Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.

NOTE 7
 When receiving a MW or LW signal, traffic  Pressing again will cancel.
message standby mode will be cancelled. Fast forward/rewind is possible.  Ejecting will cancel this.
Switch Playback Mode Scan Playback (SCAN)

Listen to CDs
E00737801160
Repeat playback, random playback, and scan Press the SCAN key (Type 1) or PTY/SCAN
This explains how to listen to audio CDs playback are possible. key (Type 2).
(CD-DA/CD-TEXT).
Repeat Playback (RPT) Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks
Play CDs on the whole disc in order.
Press the 1RPT key.
Insert the disc. NOTE
Repeat playback of the track currently being  Press this button again during playback if
Insert a disc to automatically start playback. played. you wish to hear that track, and that track
 “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-31) will play normally.
If a disc is already within the product, press NOTE
the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the
 Pressing again will cancel.
source.

Listen to MP3s
This enables selection of the next or previous Repeat playback of the tracks within the
Listen to MP3s track. folder currently being played.
E00737901158
This explains how to listen to audio files on a NOTE

disc.
Fast Forward or Rewind
 Even if the file is selected, folder repeat
CAUTION Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key. playback will not be cancelled.
 CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only Fast forward/rewind is possible.
play back MP3 format audio files.
Random Playback (RDM)
Switch Playback Mode
7 To Listen to MP3s Press the 2RDM key.
Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
Insert the disc. playback are possible. Play the tracks in the folder in a random
order.
Insert a disc to automatically start playback. Repeat Playback (RPT)
 “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-31) NOTE
If a disc is already within the product, press  Pressing again will cancel.
Press the 1RPT key.
the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the
source. Repeat playback of the track currently being
played. Folder Random Playback
NOTE
 Depending on the file structure, it may take NOTE Hold down the 2RDM key.
some time to read the contents of the disc.
 Selecting a file, ejecting, fast forwarding, or Play all tracks in folders on the disc in a ran-
rewinding will cancel. dom order.
Select the Track (File)
NOTE
Press the key or key to select the Folder Repeat Playback  Pressing again will cancel.
track.
Hold down the 1RPT key.

Listen to an iPod
Scan Playback (SCAN) NOTE NOTE

 Select the folder, and hold down the  Depending on the generation, model, or soft-
Press the SCAN key (Type 1) or PTY/SCAN /SEL key to start playback from the first ware version of the iPod/iPhone, playback
key (Type 2). track in that folder. on this product may not be possible.
(P.7-23) Additionally, playback as
 While the file is selected, press the 6 key explained in this document may not be possi-
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks to return to the previous operation.
in the folder currently being played in order. ble.
 While the file is selected, hold down the  In some countries, for vehicles with a Blue-
6 key to cancel track search mode. tooth® 2.0 interface, the types of devices that
Search Tracks  If there is no operation for five seconds after can be connected may vary.
selecting the file, that file is played back. For details, access the MITSUBISHI
Search folders and files, and select a track.  Disc operations such as selecting a track will MOTORS website. 7
cancel track search mode. Please read and agree to the “Warning about
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder. Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”.
The websites mentioned above may connect
2. Press the /SEL key. Listen to an iPod you to websites other than the MITSUBISHI
E00738001475 MOTORS website.
Files within the selected folder are dis- http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
By connecting commercially-available
played. ucts/index.html
iPod/iPhone devices to this product, you can
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file. play back tracks on these through the product.  Usage of iPod/iPhone hardware with the lat-
4. Press the /SEL key. est software version is recommended.
 Regarding how to connect the iPod/iPhone,
This plays the selected file (track).
CAUTION refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page
 Do not leave the iPod/iPhone unattended in 7-82.
the vehicle.  When connecting the iPod/iPhone, use a
NOTE  Never hold these devices in your hand to commercially-available iPod connection
 While the folder is selected, press the 6 operate while driving, as this is dangerous. cable.
key to cancel track search mode.  No indemnification for data loss resulting  Set up the device in order that no unsafe
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds after when the iPod/iPhone is connected to the actions, such as plugging in the connection
selecting the folder, then track search mode product will be possible. cable are taken while driving.
will be cancelled.  Depending on how the devices are handled,  When inserting and removing the
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore iPod/iPhone, for safety’s sake first stop the
it is recommended that data be backed up. vehicle.

Listen to an iPod
NOTE Play iPod Repeat Playback (RPT)

 Depending on the status of the iPod/iPhone,
it may take some time until the device is rec- Press the MEDIA key to set the iPod as the Press the 1RPT key.
ognized, or playback starts.
source.
 Buttons on the product will not operate while Repeat playback of the track currently being
iPod/iPhone is connected. The selected source is indicated on the displayed.
 iPod/iPhone specifications and settings may play.
mean that connection is not possible, or
result in differences in operation or display.
NOTE
 Depending on audio data in the iPod/iPhone, Select the Track (File)  Pressing again will cancel.
track information may not be displayed cor-
7 rectly.
Press the key or key to select the
 Depending on the status of the vehicle and Shuffle Playback (RDM)
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
track.
after starting the engine. Press the 2RDM key.
This enables selection of the next or previous
 Data containing copyright information may
track.
not play back. Play tracks in the category currently being
 It is recommended that the iPod/iPhone played in a random order.
equaliser settings be set to flat. Fast Forward or Rewind
 Operate the iPod/iPhone while connected to
this product. NOTE
 If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.  Pressing again will cancel.
as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
Fast forward/rewind is possible.
cable. Connection using both methods will Album Shuffle Playback
result in erroneous operation. Switch Playback Mode
 If an iPod/iPhone does not operate correctly,
Hold down the 2RDM key.
then remove the iPod/iPhone from the prod-
uct, reset, then reconnect. Repeat playback and shuffle playback are
possible. Play back the album in a random order
(tracks in any order on the album).

Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device
NOTE NOTE CAUTION

 Pressing again will cancel.  Select the category, and hold down the  Do not use hard discs, card readers, or mem-
/SEL key to start playback from the first ory readers, as damage may occur to these or
track in that category. to the data contained therein. If these are
erroneously connected, then turn the ignition
Search Tracks  While the track is selected, press the 6 switch to the “LOCK” position or put the
key to return to the previous operation. operation mode in OFF, then remove.
Search categories or track names, and select a  While the track is selected, hold down the  Because of the risk of data loss, it is recom-
track. 6 key to cancel track search mode. mended that files be backed up.
 If there is no operation for five seconds after  No guarantee is made as regards damage to
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- selecting the track, that file is played back. the USB device, nor regarding loss or dam-
gory.  iPod operations such as selecting a track will age to data contained therein. 7
cancel track search mode.  Depending on how the devices are handled,
2. Press the /SEL key. Categories or
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
tracks within the selected category are
it is recommended that data be backed up.
displayed. Listen to Audio Files on a
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- USB Device
gory or track. E00736501476 NOTE
4. Press the /SEL key. By connecting commercially-available USB  Digital audio players that support the mass
Repeat steps 1 to 4, and search for tracks. devices such as USB memory to this product, storage class specifications can be con-
nected.
Select the track, and press the /SEL you can play back audio files on these
 For details regarding the types of USB
key to play. through the product.
devices that can be connected and the types
of files that can be played back in vehicles
NOTE CAUTION with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, refer to
 While the category (1st level) is selected,  Do not leave the USB device unattended in “Types of connectable devices and supported
press the 6 key to cancel track search the vehicle. file specifications” on page 7-83.
mode.  Never hold these devices in your hand to  Regarding how to connect USB devices,
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds after operate while driving, as this is dangerous. refer to “How to connect a USB memory
selecting the category, then track search device” on page 7-81.
mode will be cancelled.


Fast forward/rewind is possible.
NOTE NOTE
 When connecting a USB device, use a con-  Depending on the type of USB device, usage
nection cable. Failure to use a connection may not be possible, or functions that can be Switch Playback Mode
cable when connecting may place undue load used may be restricted.
on, or damage the USB connector.  The recommended file system for USB Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
 Set up the device in order that no unsafe memory is FAT32.
playback are possible.
actions, such as plugging in the connection  The maximum supported capacity for USB
cable are taken while driving. memory is 32GB.
 When inserting and removing the USB  Operate the USB device containing recorded Repeat Playback (RPT)
device, for safety’s sake first stop the vehi- audio files while connected to this product.
cle. Press the 1RPT key.
7  Do not insert other than audio devices into
Play Back of Audio Files on a
the USB port. Damage to the device or Repeat playback of the track currently being
equipment may result. USB Device played.
 Depending on the status of the USB device,
it may take some time until the device is rec-
Press the MEDIA key to set NOTE
ognized, or playback starts.
 Buttons on the product will not operate while  Pressing again will cancel.
USB as the source. The selected source is
USB device is connected.  Selecting a file will cancel this.
indicated on the display.
 USB device specifications and settings may
mean that connection is not possible, or
result in differences in operation or display. Select the Track (File) Folder Repeat Playback
 Depending on audio data in the USB device,
track information may not be displayed cor-
rectly. Press the key or key to select the Hold down the 1RPT key.
 Depending on the status of the vehicle and track.
Repeat playback of the tracks within the
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
This enables selection of the next or previous folder currently being played.
after starting the engine.
 Data containing copyright information may
track.
not play back. NOTE
 This product can play back MP3, WMA, and Fast Forward or Rewind  Pressing again will cancel.
AAC format audio files.  Even if the file is selected, folder repeat
playback will not be cancelled.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.


each of the tracks on the whole USB device 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.
Folder Random Playback (RDM)
in order.
4. Press the /SEL key.
Press the 2RDM key.
NOTE This plays the selected file (track).
Play tracks in the folder currently being  Press this button again during playback if
you wish to hear that track, and that track
played in a random order.
will play normally.
NOTE
 While the folder is selected, press the 6
NOTE key to cancel track search mode.
 Pressing again will cancel.  If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
Folder Scan Playback
 Even if the file is selected, folder random selecting the folder, then track search mode
Hold down the SCAN key (Type 1) or
will be cancelled.
7
 Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL
PTY/SCAN key (Type 2). key to start playback from the first track in
All Folder Random Playback Play the first 10 seconds of the first track in
that folder.
each folder on the USB device in order.  While the file is selected, press the 6 key
Hold down the 2RDM key. to return to the previous operation.
 While the file is selected, hold down the
Play the tracks in all folders in a random NOTE 6 key to cancel track search mode.
order.  Press this button again during playback if  If there is no operation for five seconds after
you wish to hear that track, and that track selecting the file, that file is played back.
will play normally.
NOTE  Operations such as selecting a track will can-
cel track search mode.
 Even if the file is selected, all folder random
Search Tracks
Search folders and files, and select a track.

Scan Playback (SCAN)
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder.
Press the SCAN key (Type 1) or PTY/SCAN 2. Press the /SEL key.
key (Type 2). Play the first 10 seconds of
Files within the selected folder are dis-
played.
To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
3. After the voice guide says “What Artist
To play iPod/USB memory would you like to play?,” say the artist
device tracks via voice oper- name.
ation (vehicles with Blue- 4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
ceeds to step 6.
tooth® 2.0 interface) 5. If there are two or more matches, the
E00770800108 voice guide will say “More than one
Desired tracks on the iPod/USB memory match was found, would you like to play
device which connected to the USB input ter- <artist name>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-
minal can be selected and played via voice tem proceeds to step 6.
operation. If you say “No,” the next matching artist
7 For information concerning the voice recog- is uttered by the system.
nition function or speaker registration func-
To search by artist name NOTE
tion, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on
E00771000022
page 7-58.  If you say “No” to three or all artist names
1. Say “Play” on the main menu. uttered by the system, the voice guide will
The following explains how to prepare for
voice operation and play the tracks. say “Artist not found, please try again” and
NOTE the system returns to step 2.
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-  Search time is dependant on the number of
Preparation for voice operation ing the connected device. songs on your connected device. Devices
E00770900040 If the connected device cannot be recognized containing a large number of songs may take
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® longer to return search results.
To use the voice operation, press the
SPEECH button (A) first. 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
guide. Follow the voice guide. 6. After the voice guide says “Playing <artist
name>,” the system creates a playlist
2. After the voice guide says “Would you index for the artist.
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
Genre?,” say “Artist”.
NOTE
 If you say “Artist <name>,” you can skip
step 3.

To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
3. After the voice guide says “What Album 7. The system exits the voice recognition
NOTE would you like to play?” say the album mode and starts playback.
 If the confirmation function is active, the
title.
voice guide confirms if the artist name is
4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
correct. If the artist name is correct, say
ceeds to step 6.
To search by playlist
“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide E00771200024
says “Artist not found, please try again,” the 5. If there are two or more matches, the
1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
system returns to step 2. voice guide will say “More than one
match was found, would you like to play
<album title>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-
NOTE
7. The system exits the voice recognition tem proceeds to step 6.  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
mode and starts playback. If you say “No,” the next matching album ing the connected device.
is uttered by the system.
If the connected device cannot be recognized
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
7
To search by album title 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
E00771100023 NOTE guide. Follow the voice guide.
1. Say “Play” on the main menu.  If you say “No” to three or all album titles
uttered by the system, the voice guide will
NOTE say “Album not found, please try again” and 2. After the voice guide says “Would you
® the system returns to step 2. like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
 The Bluetooth 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
ing the connected device. Genre?,” say “Playlist”.
If the connected device cannot be recognized 6. After the voice guide says “Playing
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® <album title>,” the system creates a play- NOTE
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice list index for the album title.  If you say “Playlist <playlist>,” you can skip
guide. Follow the voice guide. step 3.
If the device has no playlist, the voice guide
NOTE will say “There are no playlists stored on
2. After the voice guide says “Would you  If the confirmation function is active, the device” and the system returns to step 2.
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or voice guide confirms if the album title is cor-
rect. If the album title is correct, say “Yes”.
Genre?,” say “Album”.
If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says 3. After the voice guide says “What Playlist
“Album not found, please try again,” the sys- would you like to play?,” say the playlist
NOTE tem returns to step 2. name.
 If you say “Album <title>,” you can skip
4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
step 3.
ceeds to step 6.

Listen to Bluetooth Audio

5. If there are two or more matches, the If you say “No,” the next matching genre
voice guide will say “More than one
To search by genre is uttered by the system.
E00771300025
1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
<playlist>?” If you say “Yes,” the system NOTE
proceeds to step 6.  If you say “No” to three or all genres uttered
If you say “No,” the next matching play-
NOTE by the system, the voice guide will say
list name is uttered by the system.  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz- “Genre not found, please try again” and the
ing the connected device. system returns to step 2.
If the connected device cannot be recognized
NOTE
 If you say “No” to three or all playlist names or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® 6. After the voice guide says “Playing
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
uttered by the system, the voice guide will <genre>,” the system creates an index for
7 say “Playlist not found, please try again” and guide. Follow the voice guide.
the genre.
the system returns to step 2.
2. After the voice guide says “Would you NOTE
6. After the voice guide says “Playing like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or  If the confirmation function is active, the
<playlist>,” the system creates an index Genre?,” say “Genre”. voice guide confirms if the genre is correct.
for the playlist. If the genre is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say
NOTE “No”. After the voice guide says “Genre not
found, please try again,” the system returns
NOTE  If you say “Genre <type>,” you can skip step
to step 2. Refer to “Confirmation function
 If the confirmation function is active, the 3.
setting” on page 7-63.
voice guide confirms if the playlist name is
correct. If the playlist name is correct, say 3. After the voice guide says “What Genre
“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide 7. The system exits the voice recognition
would you like to play?,” say the music
says “Playlist not found, please try again,” mode and starts playback.
type.
the system returns to step 2. Refer to “Con-
firmation function setting” on page 7-63. 4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
ceeds to step 6. Listen to Bluetooth Audio
5. If there are two or more matches, the E00736701380
7. The system exits the voice recognition voice guide will say “More than one
mode and starts playback. This product can play back tracks on com-
mercially-available Bluetooth-capable audio
<genre>?” If you say “Yes,” the system
devices.
proceeds to step 6.

Listen to Bluetooth Audio
CAUTION NOTE 2. Press the 5 key. Bluetooth Audio play-

back starts.
 Never hold these devices in your hand to  Depending on the status of the vehicle and
operate while driving, as this is dangerous. device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
 Do not leave the Bluetooth audio device after starting the engine. NOTE
unattended in the vehicle.
 Hold down the 5 key to pause.
 Depending on how the devices are handled,
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
Connect a Bluetooth-capable  Press the 6 key to stop.
it is recommended that data be backed up. Audio Device
Regarding how to connect your Bluetooth Select the Track (File)

NOTE device, refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth®
 Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable 2.0 interface and Bluetooth device” on page
7
Press the key or key to select the
audio devices, usage may not be possible, or
7-66. track.
functions that can be used may be restricted.
Operation methods below describe situations
 Confirm together with the user manuals for
once connection has been completed. This enables selection of the next or previous
the commercially-available Bluetooth-capa-
track.
ble audio devices.
 Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable NOTE
audio devices, volume levels may differ.  If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth Fast Forward or Rewind
There is the danger of loud volumes, so prior as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
to use, it is recommended that you turn the not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
volume down. cable. Connection using both methods will Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
 “Adjust Volume” (P.7-31) result in erroneous operation.
 Depending on the status of the Bluetooth Fast forward/rewind is possible.
audio device, it may take some time until the
device is recognized, or playback starts.
Play Bluetooth Audio Switch Playback Mode
 Bluetooth audio device specifications and
settings may mean that connection is not
1. Press the MEDIA key to set Bluetooth Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
possible, or result in differences in operation
or display.
Audio as the source. playback are possible.
 Depending on audio data in the Bluetooth
The selected source is indicated on the
audio device, track information may not be
display.
displayed correctly.

To listen to a disc in the rear-seat display (vehicles with rear-seat display)
Repeat Playback (RPT) NOTE To listen to a disc in the

rear-seat display (vehicles
Press the 1RPT key.
with rear-seat display)
Repeat playback of the track currently being Scan Playback (SCAN) E00755100168
played. It is possible to listen to the audio from the

Press the SCAN key (Type 1) or PTY/SCAN rear-seat display using the vehicle’s speakers.
NOTE key (Type 2).
 Each time the 1RPT key is pressed, this
Hold down the MEDIA key.
switches in the order Repeat OFF, 1 track Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks Switch to the AUX mode, and “AUX” is dis-
played.
7 repeat, All track repeat, and Repeat OFF. on the whole Bluetooth Audio device in
order.
NOTE
Random Playback (RDM) NOTE  For more details about the rear-seat display,
 Press this button again during playback if refer to the separate owner’s manual.
Press the 2RDM key. you wish to hear that track, and that track
will play normally.
Play the tracks in the Bluetooth Audio device
in a random order.
Display Indicator
E00738101144
This explains content of the display indicator.

Display Indicator
Change the Display Mode NOTE During MP3/WMA/AAC Play-

E00738501164  Up to 11 characters may be displayed at one back
You can change the content of the display time. To display 12 or more characters, press
the PAGE key, and subsequent characters
indicator. This switches in the order “Folder title”, “File
will be displayed.
Press the DISP key to switch the display con- title”, and “Operating status”.
tent.
Each time the DISP key is pressed, the dis- During CD-DA playback NOTE
play content changes.  If there is no text information to display, then
“NO TITLE” is displayed.
This switches in the order “Disc title”, “Track
CAUTION title”, and “Operating status”.
 The operation of changing display contents Display the ID3tag
may impede safe driving, therefore check NOTE
safety before operation.  If there is no text information to display, then
Hold down the DISP key.
“NO TITLE” is displayed.
This switches the ID3tag display.

Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment

[DISP] Each time the key is pressed, this Vehicles equipped with premium audio
During Bluetooth® 2.0 Audio Play-
switches in the order “Album name”, “Track Adjust-
name”, “Artist name”, “Genre name”*, and back* Turn counter- Turn clock-
ment
“Operating status”. E00739000013 clockwise wise
items
Operating details are the same as in “During BASS -5 to 0 0 to +5
*:Displayed when playing back audio files
iPod Playback” (P.7-50). (Decrease low (Increase low
on a USB device (vehicles with a Blue-
frequency vol- frequency vol-
tooth® 2.0 interface).
Audio Quality and Volume ume) ume)
Balance Adjustment MID -5 to 0 0 to +5

NOTE (Decrease (Increase mid-
7
E00738201318
 During display of the ID3tag, hold down the middle fre- dle frequency
Change audio quality settings. quency vol- volume)
DISP key to switch to the folder title display.
 The genre name display may not be possible. ume)
Adjust Audio Quality and Vol- TREBLE -5 to 0 0 to +5
ume Balance (Decrease (Increase high
During iPod Playback high fre- frequency vol-
E00738901100 1. Press the /SEL key to select settings quency volume)
This switches in the order “Albums”, “Track items. ume)
name”, “Artist name”, “Genre name”*, and Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this MUSIC NORMAL  ROCK  POP
“Operating status”. switches in the order BASS, MID*, TRE- TYPE  HIPHOP  JAZZ
BLE, MUSIC TYPE*, FADER, BAL- FADER CENTER to FRONT 11 to
NOTE ANCE, PremiDIA WIDE*, PremiDIA REAR 11 CENTER
 If there is no text information to display, then HD*, SCV (speed compensated volume), (emphasise (emphasise
“NO TITLE” is displayed. and Cancel. REAR) FRONT)
 Displayed genre name in equipment by type 2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust.
PremiDIA OFF  ON
(vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
*:Vehicles equipped with premium audio WIDE*1
 The genre name display may not be possible.
only.
PremiDIA OFF  LOW  HIGH
HD*1, *2

System Settings
Adjust- Except for vehicles equipped with pre- 2. Press the /SEL key to select settings
Turn counter- Turn clock- mium audio
ment items.
clockwise wise
items Adjust-
Turn counter- Type 1
BAL- LEFT 11 to CENTER to ment Turn clockwise
clockwise
ANCE CENTER RIGHT 11 items
Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
(emphasise (emphasise BASS -6 to 0 0 to +6
switches in the order Gracenote DB*,
LEFT) RIGHT) (Decrease low (Increase low
PHONE settings, Adjust time, and Can-
SCV OFF, LOW MID, HIGH frequency vol- frequency vol-
cel.
(SCV effect is (SCV effect is ume) ume)
OFF/low) middle/high) TRE- -6 to 0 0 to +6 Type 2
BLE (Decrease high (Increase high 7
frequency vol- frequency vol- Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
*1: This is disabled when the audio source is
analogue radio. ume) ume) switches in the order Gracenote DB*, AF,
REG, TP-S, PI-S, PTY language settings,
* : This is also effective for non-compressed
2
FADER CENTER to FRONT 11 to
sound sources. PHONE settings, CT, Adjust time, and
REAR 11 CENTER
Cancel.
(emphasise (emphasise
REAR) FRONT) 3. Turn the /SEL key to set.
PremiDIA WIDE 4. Press the /SEL key to determine.
BAL- LEFT 11 to CENTER to
Allows you to enjoy wide audio image that ANCE CENTER RIGHT 11 This completes settings, and displays the
goes beyond the range of the stereo speaker. (emphasise (emphasise next settings item.
LEFT) RIGHT)
PremiDIA HD SCV OFF, LOW MID, HIGH *: Displayed when playing back audio files
(SCV effect is (SCV effect is (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
Allows you to adjust the amount of compen-
OFF/low) middle/high)
sation for reproducing the feeling of solidity
and depth of the original sound by forecasting
and supplementing for the highpass audio System Settings
information lost during audio data compres- E00738301380
sion.
Change system settings such as product time.
1. Press the MENU key.

System Settings
RDS Setting (Type 2) Settings Settings Settings Settings

Settings content Settings content
name value name value
TP-S* TP-S ON Automatically PTY ENGLISH Set the display lan-
Change RDS settings.
search for traffic guage for the pro-
(“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory messages (TP sta- gram content
default settings.) tions). search (PTY
TP-S OFF Do not automati- search) to English.
Settings Settings cally search for FRAN- Set the display lan-
Settings content
name value traffic messages CAIS guage for the pro-
AF AF ON Automatically (TP stations). gram content
7 track the same sta- PI-S PI-S ON Search for the search (PTY
tion as the program same station or search) to French.
being received. local station for DEUTSCH Set the display lan-
AF OFF Do not automati- that registered in guage for the pro-
cally track the the preset channel. gram content
same station as the PI-S OFF Do not search for search (PTY
program being the same station or search) to German.
received. local station for SVENSK Set the display lan-
REG REG ON Do not automati- that registered in guage for the pro-
cally track the local the preset channel. gram content
station for the pro- search (PTY
gram being search) to Swedish.
received. ESPANOL Set the display lan-
REG OFF Automatically guage for the pro-
track the local sta- gram content
tion for the pro- search (PTY
gram being search) to Spanish.
received.

System Settings
Settings Settings 3. Press the /SEL key. NOTE
Settings content
name value  Cancel functions such as the mobile phone
This completes the adjustment.
PTY ITALIANO Set the display lan- “dial lock”, and connect while on the
guage for the pro- standby screen.
gram content NOTE  While connected, mobile phone (receiving
search (PTY  In order to finish adjusting the time, hold calls, etc.) operations may not function cor-
search) to Italian. rectly.
down the /SEL key until the seconds are
reset to “00”.  Depending on the distance between the prod-
CT CT ON Update the time if uct and the mobile phone, the conditions
time data is within the vehicle, and types of screening,
received. connection may not be possible. In these
CT OFF Do not update the
Gracenote DB* cases, situate the mobile phone as close as 7
possible to the product.
time even if time
 Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile
data is received. The version number can be confirmed.
phone, characteristics and specifications may
1. Select “Gracenote DB” and press the mean that correct operation may not be pos-
*:It is necessary to press the [TP] key and sible.
turn traffic message standby mode “ON”. /SEL key.  For safety’s sake, do not operate the mobile
2. Turn the /SEL key and select “DB Ver- phone while driving. When operating the
sion”. mobile phone, first stop the vehicle in a safe
location.
Time Setting 3. Press the /SEL key.
 Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile
The DB Version is displayed.
phone, phone specifications and settings may
Set the time manually (Type 1) or turning the result in differences in display, or prevent
RDS setting CT setting “CT OFF” enables PHONE Settings correct operation.
manual setting of the time (Type 2).  Some models may not be confirmed as con-
nected, or may not connect.
Change the mobile phone voice cut- in set-
1. Select “YES” at the “Adjust time” screen,
tings and the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface lan-
and press the /SEL key. Supported profiles
guage.
The hour can be adjusted. Press the Depending on the vehicle, PHONE settings
may not be possible. Hands-free HFP(v1.5)
/SEL key again to adjust the minutes. Phonebook
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust the time. OPP(v1.1), PBAP(v1.0)
transfer

System Settings
Vehicles without a Bluetooth® 2.0 Inter- Vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 Interface NOTE
face  Depending on the vehicle model, this may
(“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory not display.
A hands-free kit (available separately) is default settings.)
required.
(“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory Settings Settings
Settings content
default settings.) name value
PHONE PHONE During mobile
Settings IN set- IN-R phone voice cut-in,
Settings content
value tings output sound from
7 PHONE Do not use mobile phone voice the right front
OFF cut-in. speaker.
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- PHONE During mobile
MUTE in, mute the audio. IN-L phone voice cut-in,
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- output sound from
ATT in, output audio from all speak- the left front
ers. speaker.
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- HFM ENG- Change the hands
IN-L in, output sound from the left voice lan- LISH free module voice
front speaker. guage set- FRENCH language.
tings
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- GER-
IN-R in, output sound from the right MAN
front speaker. SPANISH
During mobile phone voice cut- ITALIAN
PHONE
in, output sound from the left
IN-LR DUTCH
and right front speakers.
PORTU-
GUESE
RUSSIAN

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
E00738401206
Please check these items if a message appears on the display, or if you think something is not working properly.
If This Message Appears...
A message is displayed on this product according to the situation.
Mode Message Cause Response

CD CHECK DISC The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up. 7
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting again.
DISC ERROR The disc is damaged. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The disc is dirty.
INTERNAL E The drive has malfunctioned for some reason. Check that there is no problem with the disc, and
insert the disc again. If the problem persists, con-
sult an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
HEAT ERROR The temperature inside the product is high. Remove the disc, and wait for the internal tempera-
ture to return to normal.

Troubleshooting
Mode Message Cause Response
USB FILE ERROR Files that cannot be played are selected. Select files that can be played.
 “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-26)
USB BUS PWR There is high or low electrical current or voltage. Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
LSI ERROR There is an internal malfunction for some reason. problem persists, consult an authorised
UNSUPPORTED Unsupported audio files have been played. Confirm audio files that can be played.
FORMAT  “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-26)
UNSUPPORTED An unsupported USB device has been connected. Please connect a USB memory device.
7 DEVICE
iPod NO SONG An iPod/iPhone not containing any tracks has been Connect an iPod/iPhone containing tracks.
connected.
VER ERROR This iPod/iPhone software version is not supported. Please change to a supported software version.
Other ERROR DC An abnormal direct voltage has been sent to the Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
speakers. problem persists, consult an authorised
If You Think Something Is Not Working Properly...
Here is a list of symptoms, causes and responses if you think something is not working properly.
Symptoms Cause Response

There is no sound or quiet The volume is turned to its minimum. Adjust the volume.
sound.  “Adjust Volume” (P.7-31)
The balance or fader is turned to one side. Adjust the balance or fader.
 “Adjust Audio Quality and Volume Balance” (P.7-50)

Antenna
Symptoms Cause Response
The disc cannot be A disc is already in the product. Eject the disc.
inserted.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-31)
There is no disc in the product, but the prod- Press the eject button once.
uct says it is loading.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-31)
The disc cannot be played. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting.
The disc is dirty. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The sound skips in the The disc is damaged or dirty. Check the disc.
same place. 7
There is no sound, even if Damage to or dirt on the disc means that its Check the disc. Additionally, if using CD-R/RW discs, their charac-
the disc is inserted. data cannot be read. teristics may render them unable to be played.
Antenna To install
E00710500022
Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base

Roof antenna* (B) until it is securely retained.
E00710901166
When listening to the radio, raise the antenna

up until you hear it click.
To remove
Turn the pole (A) anticlockwise.

Link System*
and their end user license agreements, please
NOTE Link System* go to the following website.
 Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the E00764501745 http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldis-
following cases:
closure.pdf
• When going into an automatic car wash. The Link System takes overall control of the
• When placing a car cover over the vehicle. devices connected via the USB input terminal
• When driving into a structure that has a low or the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allowing the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface*
ceiling. connected devices to be operated by using the E00726002420
switches in the vehicle or voice commands.

The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for mak-
See the following section for details on how
ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle
Glass antenna* to operate.
using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone
7 E00711101077
Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page based on the wireless communication tech-
Antenna leads are printed on the rear window 7-58. nology commonly known as Bluetooth®. It
glass. Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 7-80. also allows the user to play music, saved in a
Refer to “Listen to an iPod” on page 7-39. Bluetooth® music player, from the vehicle’s
NOTE Refer to “Listen to Audio Files on a USB speakers.
 When the rear window glass is cleaned, wipe Device” on page 7-41. The system is equipped with a voice recogni-
the glass with a soft cloth by moving the Refer to “To play iPod/USB memory device tion function, which allows you to make
cloth along the antenna so as not to damage tracks via voice operation” on page 7-44 hands-free calls by simple switch operations
it. and voice command operations using a
 Applying a reflective film or metal object Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of defined voice tree.
(after-market antenna or the like) to the rear BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
window glass causes reduced reception sen-
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used
sitivity.
There is also a risk of the reception sensitiv- Link System End User License when the ignition switch or the operation
ity being reduced by an antenna line being mode is in ON or ACC.
Agreement
damaged with a cutter or the like when you
apply a film.
E00764601049
Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
You have acquired a device that includes soft- face, you must pair the Bluetooth® device
ware licensed by MITSUBISHI MOTORS
and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Con-
CORPORATION from Visteon Corporation,
and their subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For necting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
a complete list of these 3rd party products Bluetooth® device” on page 7-66.

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface*

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Operating a music player connected via Blue-
NOTE
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. tooth®  P.7-71
 If you place the Bluetooth® device in the
How to make or receive hands-free calls
vehicle’s third seat or luggage compartment,
WARNING  P.7-71
you may not be able to use the Bluetooth®
Phonebook function  P.7-73
 Although the Bluetooth®2.0 interface 2.0 interface.
allows you to make hands-free calls, if you  Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible For vehicles sold in Nigeria
choose to use the cellular phone while
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
driving, you must not allow yourself to be The following information is shown in Eng-
 You can confirm the Link System software
distracted from the safe operation of your lish in order to comply with the applicable
version by pressing the HANG-UP button
vehicle. Anything, including cellular regulations for vehicles sold in Nigeria.
3 times (press and hold 2 times and then
phone usage, that distracts you from the
safe operation of your vehicle increases
press briefly) within 10 seconds. 7
your risk of an accident.  In some countries, for detail of the Blue-
 Refer to and comply with all state and tooth® 2.0 interface, you can see to access
local laws in your area regarding cellular via the MITSUBISHI MOTORS website.
phone usage while driving. Please read and agree the “Warning about
Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”
because it connects other than MITSUBISHI
MOTORS website.
NOTE http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod- For vehicles sold in Mexico
 For vehicles equipped with the Keyless oper- ucts/index.html
ation system, if the operation mode is left in Model name: MMC or MDGMY10
 Software updates by cellular phone/digital
ACC, the accessory power will automatically FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10 or
audio device manufacturers may
turn off after a certain period of time and you NT8MDGMY10
change/alter device connectivity.
will no longer be able to use the audio sys-
IC: 279B-MDGMY10 or 3043A-
tem. The accessory power comes on again if Steering control switch and microphone
MDGMY10
the engine switch is operated with it in the  P.7-60
“ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power auto- Voice recognition function  P.7-61
cutout function” on page 6-20. Useful voice commands  P.7-62 Your Bluetooth® 2.0 interface operates on a
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used Speaker enrolment function  P.7-65 radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
if the Bluetooth® device has a flat battery or cations Commission (FCC) Rules and Indus-
Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
the device power is turned off. try Canada Rules. This device complies with
the Bluetooth® device  P.7-66 Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the
 Hands-free calls will not be possible if your
phone does not have service available.


Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject
Steering control switch and Volume down switch
to the following two conditions:
microphone
 This device may not cause harmful inter- E00727201565 Used to decrease the volume.
ference.
 This device must accept any interference SPEECH button
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.  Press this button to change to voice recog-
nition mode.
While the system is in voice recognition
mode, “Listening” will appear on the
7 audio display.
 If you press the button briefly while in
voice recognition mode, it will interrupt
prompting and allow voice command
input.
Pressing the button longer will deactivate
the voice recognition mode.
1- Volume up switch  Pressing this button briefly during a call
2- Volume down switch will enable voice recognition and allow
3- SPEECH button voice command input.
Dealer 4- PICK-UP button
Name: FCA Mexico, S.A. de C.V. 5- HANG-UP button
Address:
PICK-UP button
6- Microphone
 Press this button when an incoming call is
received to answer the telephone.
Volume up switch  When another call is received during a
Telephone number: +52-5081-3981 call, press this button to put the first caller
Specifications on hold and talk to the new caller.
Used to increase the volume.
Electrical specifications: (voltage) 9.0 - 16.0
VDC, (current)
1,000 mA or less


• In such circumstances, you can press the
button briefly to switch between callers.
NOTE Except for vehicles for Chile and Mexico
 Call waiting and three-way calls can be used
You will switch to the first caller and the
other caller will be put on hold. by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice rec-
• To establish a three-way call in such situ- possible to use those services with your cel- ognition is possible for English, French,
ations, press the SPEECH button to enter
lular phone. Spanish, Italian, German, Dutch, Portuguese
voice recognition mode and then say and Russian. The factory setting is “English”
“Join calls.” Microphone or “Russian.”
Your voice will be recognized by a micro- Vehicles for Chile and Mexico
HANG-UP button
phone in the overhead console, allowing you
 Press this button when an incoming call is to make hands-free calls with voice com- With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice rec- 7
received to refuse the call. mands. ognition is possible for US English, North
 Press this button during a call to end the American Spanish, Canadian French and Jap-
current call. anese. The factory setting is “English.”
NOTE
When another call is on hold, you will  If a cellular phone is brought close to the
switch to that call. microphone, it may create noise in the voice NOTE
 If this button is pressed in the voice recog- on the phone. In such a case, take the cellular  If the voice command that you say differs
nition mode, the voice recognition mode phone at a place as far as possible from the from the predefined command or cannot be
will be deactivated. microphone. recognised due to ambient noise or some
other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
will ask you for the voice command again up
NOTE to 3 times.
 When you press the SPEECH button to enter
Voice recognition function
 For best performance and further reduction
E00727301771
voice recognition mode with a cellular phone of ambient noise, the vehicle windows
paired to the system, current information on The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped should be closed, lower the blower speed and
the cellular phone, such as “remaining bat- refrain from conversation with your passen-
with a voice recognition function.
tery life,” “signal strength” or “roaming,” gers while engaging the voice recognition
Simply say voice commands and you can per-
will be displayed on the audio display.* function.
*: Some cellular phones will not send this form various operations and make or receive
hands-free calls.  Some voice commands have alternative
information to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. commands.
 Depending on the selected language, some
functions may not be available.


6. When the voice guide says “English
Selecting the language NOTE
(French, Spanish, Italian, German, Dutch,
 Changing the language deletes the mobile
Portuguese or Russian) selected,” the lan-
guage change process will be completed phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0
 Except for vehicles for Chile and interface. If you wish to use it, you will have
and the system will return to the main
Mexico menu.
to import it again.
1. Press the SPEECH button. 6. When the voice guide says “English
2. Say “Setup.”  Vehicles for Chile and Mexico (Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,”
3. Say “Language.” the language change process will be com-
4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan- 1. Press the SPEECH button.
pleted and the system will return to the
guage: English, French, Spanish, Italian, 2. Say “Setup.”
main menu.
7 German, Dutch, Portuguese or Russian” 3. Say “Language.”
Say the desired language. (Example: 4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan-
“English”) guage: English, Spanish, French or Japa- Useful voice commands
5. The voice guide will say “English nese” Say the desired language. E00760000019
(French, Spanish, Italian, German, Dutch, (Example: “English”)

Portuguese or Russian) selected. Is this 5. The voice guide will say “English (Span- Help function
correct?” Say “Yes.” ish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this E00760100010
If you say “No,” the system will return to correct?” Say “Yes.”
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped
Step 4. If you say “No,” the system will return to
with a help function.
Step 4.
If you say “Help” when the system is waiting
NOTE for a voice command input, the system will
 The voice guide will repeat the same mes-
NOTE tell you a list of the commands that can be
sage twice. The first message is in the cur-  The voice guide will repeat the same mes-
used under the circumstances.
rent language, and the second message is in sage twice. The first message is in the cur-
the selected language. rent language, and the second message is in
 If many entries are registered in the vehicle the selected language. Canceling
phonebook, changing the language will take  If many entries are registered in the vehicle E00760201050
a longer time. phonebook, changing the language will take

There are 2 cancel functions.
 Changing the language deletes the mobile a longer time.
If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to
phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0 exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
interface. If you wish to use it, you will have
to import it again.


If you are anywhere else within the system, 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
Security function (Except for vehi-
say “Cancel” to return to the main menu. guide will say “Password <4-digit pass-
cles for Chile and Mexico) word>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
E00760501457
NOTE Answer “No” to return to the password
It is possible to use a password as a security input in Step 5.
 You can return to the previous menu by say-
function by setting a password of your choice 7. When the registration of the password is
ing “Go Back.”
for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. completed, the voice guide will say “Pass-
When the security function is turned on, it is word is enabled” and the system will
Confirmation function setting necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit return to the main menu.
E00760400013
password in order to use all functions of the
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for recep- NOTE
®
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface is equipped
tion.  Password will be required to access the sys-
7
with a confirmation function.
tem after the next ignition cycle.
With the confirmation function activated, you Setting the password
 It is required for a little time after engine
are given more opportunities than normal to
stop that the entered password is actually
confirm a command when making various Use the following procedure to turn on the
recorded in the system.
settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This security function by setting a password.
If the ignition switch or the operation mode
allows you to decrease the possibility that a is made to ACC or ON or the engine is
1. Press the SPEECH button.
setting is accidentally changed. started immediately after engine stop, there
2. Say “Setup.” is a case when the entered password is not
The confirmation function can be turned on
3. Say “Password.” recorded in the system. At this time, please
or off by following the steps below.
4. The voice guide will say “Password is dis- try to enter the password again.
1. Press the SPEECH button. abled. Would you like to enable it?”
2. Say “Setup.” Answer “Yes.” Entering the password
3. Say “Confirmation prompts.” Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the
4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation password and return to the main menu. If a password has been set and the security
prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to 5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4- function is enabled, the voice guide will say
turn confirmation prompts <off/on>.” digit password. Remember this password. “Hands-free system is locked. State the pass-
Answer “Yes” to change the setting or It will be required to use this system.” word to continue” when the SPEECH button
answer “No” to keep the current setting. Say a 4-digit number which you want to is pressed to enter voice recognition mode.
5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation set as a password. Say the 4-digit password number to enter the
prompts are <off/on>” and then the sys- password.
tem will return to the main menu.

If the entered password is wrong, the voice 5. When the disabling of the password is 5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
guide will say “<4-digit password>, Incorrect completed, the voice guide will say “Pass- digit passcode. Remember this passcode.
password. Please try again.” Enter the correct word is disabled” and the system will It will be required to use this system.”
password. return to the main menu. Say a 4-digit number which you want to
set as a passcode.
NOTE Security function (Vehicles for 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
guide will say “Passcode <4-digit pass-
 You can re-enter the password as many times Chile and Mexico) code>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
as you want. E00760501460
 If you have forgotten your password, say Answer “No” to return to the passcode
It is possible to use a passcode as a security input in Step 5.
“Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and
then check with an authorised MITSUBISHI function by setting a passcode of your choice 7. When the registration of the passcode is
7 MOTORS dealer. for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. completed, the voice guide will say “Pass-
When the security function is turned on, it is code is enabled” and the system will
Disabling the password necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit return to the main menu.
passcode in order to use all functions of the
Use the following procedure to turn off the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for recep-
security function by disabling the password. NOTE
tion.  Passcode will be required to access the sys-
tem after the next ignition cycle.
NOTE Setting the passcode
 It is required for a little time after engine
 System must be unlocked to disable the pass- stop that the entered passcode is actually
Use the following procedure to turn on the
word. recorded in the system.
security function by setting a passcode.
If the ignition switch is made to “ACC” or
1. Press the SPEECH button. “ON” or the engine is started immediately
1. Press the SPEECH button. after engine stop, there is a case when the
2. Say “Setup.” 2. Say “Setup.”
entered passcode is not recorded in the sys-
3. Say “Password.” 3. Say “Passcode.” tem. At this time, please try to enter the pass-
4. The voice guide will say “Password is 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is dis- code again.
enabled. Would you like to disable it?” abled. Would you like to enable it?”
Answer “Yes.” Answer “Yes.” Entering the passcode
Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the
the password and return to the main passcode and return to the main menu. If a passcode has been set and the security
menu. function is enabled, the voice guide will say
“Hands-free system is locked. State the pass-


code to continue” when the SPEECH button 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is phone while in speaker enrolment to prevent
is pressed to enter voice recognition mode. enabled. Would you like to disable it?” interruption of the process.
Say the 4-digit passcode number to enter the Answer “Yes.” Use the following procedure for speaker
passcode. Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of enrolment.
the passcode and return to the main menu.
If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice 5. When the disabling of the passcode is 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
guide will say “<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect completed, the voice guide will say “Pass- gearshift lever (M/T) in the “N” (Neutral)
passcode. Please try again.” Enter the correct code is disabled” and the system will position, or the selector lever (A/T) in the
passcode. return to the main menu. “P” (PARK) position, and apply the park-
ing brake.
NOTE Speaker enrolment function
 You can re-enter the passcode as many times
NOTE 7
E00727401251
as you want.  Speaker enrolment is not possible unless the
 If you have forgotten your passcode, say The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use the vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the
“Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and speaker enrolment function to create a voice vehicle in a safe area before attempting
then check with an authorised MITSUBISHI model for one person per language. speaker enrolment.
MOTORS dealer. This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0
interface to recognise voice commands said 2. Press the SPEECH button.
Disabling the passcode by you. 3. Say “Voice training.”
You can turn a voice model registered with 4. The voice guide will say “This operation
Use the following procedure to turn off the
the speaker enrolment function on and off must be performed in a quiet environment
security function by disabling the passcode.
whenever you want. while the vehicle is stopped. See the
owner’s manual for the list of required
NOTE training phrases. Press and release the
Speaker enrolment
 System must be unlocked to disable the pass- SPEECH button when you are ready to
E00727501366
code. begin. Press the HANG-UP button to can-
It takes approximately 2 to 3 minutes to com- cel at any time.”
plete the speaker enrolment process. Press the SPEECH button to start the
1. Press the SPEECH button. To ensure the best results, run through the
2. Say “Setup.” speaker enrolment process.
process while in the driver’s seat, in an envi-
3. Say “Passcode.” ronment that is as quiet as possible (when
there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-
cle windows are closed). Please turn off your

Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enrol-
NOTE NOTE ment process and recreate a new voice
 If you do not start the speaker enrolment pro-  Completing the speaker enrolment process
model. (Refer to “Speaker enrolment” on
cess within 3 minutes after pressing the will turn on the voice model automatically.
page 7-65.)
SPEECH button, the speaker enrolment  The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not
function will time out. work in this mode.
The voice guide will say “Speaker enrolment Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0
interface and Bluetooth® device
has timed out.” The system will then beep
and the voice recognition mode will be deac-
tivated.
Enabling and disabling the voice E00760601650
model and retraining Before you can make or receive hands-free

E00727601136
5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1. calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0
7 Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in
You can turn a voice model registered with interface function, you must pair the Blue-
the speaker enrolment function on and off
table “Enrolment commands” on page tooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
whenever you want.
7-80.
You can also retrain the system.
The system will register your voice and NOTE
Use the following procedure to perform these
then move on to the registration of the
actions.  Pairing is required only when the device is
next command. Continue the process until used for the first time. Once the device has
all phrases have been registered. 1. Press the SPEECH button. been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
2. Say “Voice training.” face, all you need is to bring the device into
NOTE 3. If you have completed a speaker enrol- the vehicle next time and the device will
 To repeat the most recent voice training com- ment process once already, the voice connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface auto-
mand, press and release the SPEECH button. guide will say either “Enrolment is ena- matically (if supported by the device). The
 If you press the HANG-UP button anytime bled. Would you like to disable or device must have Bluetooth® turned ON to
during the process, the system will beep and retrain?” or “Enrolment is disabled. connect.
stop the speaker enrolment process.
Would you like to enable or retrain?”
4. When enrolment is “enabled,” the voice
6. When all enrolment commands have been model is on; when enrolment is “disa- Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired
read out, the voice guide will say bled,” the voice model is off. Say the with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
“Speaker enrolment is complete.” The command that fits your needs. If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are
system will then end the speaker enrol- available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or
ment process and return to the main music player most recently connected is auto-
menu.


matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 NOTE NOTE
interface.
 The following procedure ( to ) can also  The pairing code entered here is only used
be used instead of saying “Pair Device.” for the Bluetooth® connection certification.
You can also change a Bluetooth® device to
Replace this step 3 with the following proce- Depending on the connection settings of the
be connected. dure if you prefer. Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be
Say “Setup.” entered each time you connect the Blue-
To pair Say “Pairing Options.” tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
The voice guide will say “Select one of face. For the default connection settings,
refer to the instructions for the device.
To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Blue- the following: pair, edit, delete, list or set
code.”
tooth® 2.0 interface, follow the steps below. 5. Enter in the Bluetooth® device the 4-digit
Say “Pair.”
 If 7 devices have already been paired, the number that has been read out in Step 4.
7
1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
voice guide will say “Maximum devices
gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
tion (M/T), or the selector lever in the “P”
paired” and then the system will end the NOTE
pairing process. To register a new device,  According to the corresponding device to
(PARK) position (A/T), and apply the delete one device and then repeat the pairing
parking brake. Bluetooth®, it might take a few minute to
process.
(Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a pair the Bluetooth® device with the Blue-
NOTE device” on page 7-68.) tooth® 2.0 interface.
 You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi- 4. The voice guide will say “Start pairing nise the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide
cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth® procedure on the device. See the device will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair-
manual for instructions.” and then will ing process will be cancelled.
device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-
confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe say “The pairing code is <pairing code>.”
location. ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.
NOTE
2. Press the SPEECH button.  Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific
pairing code. Please refer to the device man-
3. Say “Pair Device.”
ual for pairing code requirements and read
the next section “If your device requires a
specific pairing code” on page 7-68 to set the
pairing code.


7. The voice guide will say “Pairing Com- 8. The voice guide will say “Do you want to
NOTE plete. Would you like to import the con- pair a device now?” Answer “Yes,” the
 If you enter the wrong number, the voice
tacts from your mobile device now?” system will proceed to Step 3 in the pair-
guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-
Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will ing process. Refer to the “To pair.”
ing process will be cancelled.
Confirm the number is right, and try pairing say “Please wait while the contacts are
it again. imported. This may take several minutes.” Selecting a device
If your device requires a specific pairing Answer “No” to end the pairing process. E00760700104
code, you need to set the pairing code. Refer
to the device manual for pairing code If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are
If your device requires a specific pairing
requirements and read the next section “If available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or
code
your device requires a specific pairing code” music player most recently connected is auto-
7 on page 7-68.
If your device requires a specific pairing matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0
code, you need to set the pairing code. Follow interface.
6. The voice guide will say “Please say the
the procedures below. You can connect to the other paired cellular
name of the device after the beep.” You
phone or music player by following setting
can assign a desired name for the Blue- 1. Press the SPEECH button. change procedures.
tooth® device and register it as a device 2. Say “Setup.”
tag. Say the name you want to register 3. Say “Pairing Options.” To select a cellular phone
after the beep. 4. Say “Set Code.”
5. The voice guide will say “Do you want 1. Press the SPEECH button.
NOTE the pairing code to be random or fixed?” 2. Say “Setup.”
 When the confirmation function is on, after Say “Fixed.” 3. Say “Select phone.”
repeating the device tag you have said, the 6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4- 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number. the numbers of the cellular phones and
Answer “Yes.”
7. The voice guide will say “Pairing code set device tags of corresponding cellular
To change the device tag, answer “No” and
to <pairing code>.” phones will be read out in order, starting
then say the device tag again.
When the confirmation function is on, the with the cellular phone that has been most
system will confirm whether the number recently connected.
said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.” Say the number of the cellular phone that
Answer “No,” the system will return to you want to connect to.
Step 6.


When the confirmation function is on, the 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
Deleting a device
system will ask you again whether the the numbers of the music players and
phone that you want to connect to is cor- device tags of corresponding music play- Use the following procedure to delete a
rect. Answer “Yes” to continue and con- ers will be read out in order, starting with paired Bluetooth® device from the Blue-
nect to the cellular phone. the music player that has been most
Answer “No,” and the voice guide will recently connected. tooth® 2.0 interface.
say “Please say.” Say the number of the Say the number of the music player that 1. Press the SPEECH button.
phone that you want to connect to. you want to connect to. 2. Say “Setup.”
When the confirmation function is on, the 3. Say “Pairing Options.”
NOTE system will ask you again whether the 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
 You can connect to a phone at any time by music player that you want to connect to the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
pressing the SPEECH button and saying the is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and Say “Delete.” 7
number, even before all of the paired num- connect to the music player. 5. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
bers and device tags of corresponding cellu- Answer “No,” and the voice guide will
lar phones are read out by the system. the numbers of the devices and device
say “Please say.” Say the number of the tags of corresponding devices will be read
music player that you want to connect to. out in order, starting with the device that
5. The selected phone will be connected to
has been most recently connected. After it
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice NOTE completes reading all pairs, the voice
guide will say “<device tag> selected”  You can connect to a music player at any guide will say “or all.”
and then the system will return to the time by pressing the SPEECH button and
Say the number of the device that you
main menu. saying the number, even before all of the
want to delete from the system.
paired numbers and device tags of corre-
sponding music players are read out by the If you want to delete all paired phones
To select a music player system. from the system, say “All.”
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
1. Press the SPEECH button. guide will say “Deleting <device tag>
2. Say “Setup.” 5. The selected music player will be con- <number>. Is this correct?” or “Deleting
3. Say “Select music player.” nected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. all devices. Is this correct?”
The voice guide will say “<device tag> Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s).
selected” and then the system will return Answer “No,” the system will return to
to the main menu. Step 4.


7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and To hear the list again from the beginning, 1. Press the SPEECH button.
then the system will end the device dele- answer “Yes.” 2. Say “Setup.”
tion process. When you are done, answer “No” to 3. Say “Pairing Options.”
return to the main menu. 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
NOTE the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
 If the device deletion process fails for some Say “Edit.”
reason, the voice guide will say “Delete
NOTE 5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” and
 If you press and release the SPEECH button
failed” and then the system will cancel delet- read out the numbers of the Bluetooth®
and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the
ing the device.
list is being read, the system will advance or devices and device tags of corresponding
rewind the list. devices in order, starting with the Blue-
Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with tooth® that has been most recently con-
7 To check a paired Bluetooth® the next highest number or “Previous” to nected.
device return to the phone with the previous num-
After all paired device tags have been
E00760800017 ber.
read, the voice guide will say “Which
 You can change the device tag by pressing
You can check a paired Bluetooth® device by and releasing the SPEECH button and then
device, please?” Say the number of the
following the steps below. saying “Edit” while the list is being read. device tag you want to change.
 You can change the phone to be connected
1. Press the SPEECH button. by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but- NOTE
2. Say “Setup.” ton and then saying “Select phone” while the  You can press and release the SPEECH but-
3. Say “Pairing Options.” list is being read. ton while the list is being read, and immedi-
4. The voice guide will say “Select one of  You can change the music player to be con- ately say the number of the device tag you
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” nected by pressing and releasing the want to change.
Say “List.” SPEECH button and then saying “Select
5. The voice guide will read out device tags music player” while the list is being read.
6. The voice guide will say “New name,
of corresponding devices in order, starting
please.” Say the name you want to regis-
with the Bluetooth® device that has been ter as a new device tag.
most recently connected. Changing a device tag When the confirmation function is on, the
6. After the device tags of all paired Blue- E00760900018
voice guide will say “<New device tag>.
tooth® devices have been read, the system You can change the device tag of a paired cel- Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
will say “End of list, would you like to lular phone or music player. Answer “No,” you can say the new device
start from the beginning?” Follow the steps below to change a device tag you want to register again.
tag. 7. The device tag is changed.

When the change is complete, the voice Receiving calls P.7-73 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then
guide will say “New name saved” and Mute function P.7-73 make the call.
then the system will return to the main Switching between hands-free mode and pri- When the confirmation function is on, the
menu. vate mode P.7-73 system will confirm the telephone number
again. To continue with that number,
Operating a music player con- NOTE answer “Yes.”
To change the telephone number, answer
nected via Bluetooth®  The hands-free calls might not be operated
“No.” The system will say “Number
correctly when it makes calling or receiving
E00761001475
by operating the cellular phone directly. please” then say the telephone number
For the operation of a music player connected again.
via Bluetooth®, refer to “Listen to Bluetooth
Audio” on page 7-46. On vehicles equipped To make a call NOTE
7
with the Mitsubishi Multi Communication E00761200148
 In the case of English, the system will recog-
System (MMCS), Mitsubishi Multi-Enter- You can make a call in the following 3 ways nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the
tainment System (MMES), Smartphone Link
using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface: number “0.”
Display Audio, DVD AUDIO or DISPLAY
Making a call by saying a telephone number,  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports num-
AUDIO, refer to the separate owner’s man-
making a call using the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).
ual.
face’s phonebook, and making a call by redi-  The maximum supported telephone number
aling. length is as follows:
How to make or receive hands- • International telephone number: + and tele-
Making a call by using the telephone phone numbers (to 18 digits).
free calls
number • Except for international telephone number:
E00761100059
telephone numbers (to 19 digits).
You can make or receive hands-free calls You can make a call by saying the telephone
using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone number. Making a call using a phonebook
connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
1. Press the SPEECH button. You can make calls using the vehicle phone-
You can also use the phonebooks in the Blue-
2. Say “Dial.” book or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth®
tooth® 2.0 interface to make calls without 3. After the voice guide says “Number 2.0 interface.
dialling telephone numbers. please,” say the telephone number. For details on the phonebooks, refer to
4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <num- “Phonebook function” on page 7-73.
To make a call P.7-71
ber recognized>.”
Send function P.7-73


2. Say “Call.”
NOTE NOTE
 If you say “No” to all names read by the sys-  If the name you selected has matching data
tem, the voice guide will say “Name not in the mobile phonebook but no telephone
NOTE found, returning to main menu” and the sys- number is registered under the selected loca-
 If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone- tem will return to the main menu. tion, the voice guide will say
book and the mobile phonebook are empty, “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for
the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone- <name>. Would you like to try again?”
book is empty. Would you like to add a new 5. If only 1 telephone number is registered
Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to
entry now?” under the name you just said, the voice Step 3.
Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say guide will proceed to Step 6. Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled.
“Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.” If 2 or more telephone numbers are regis- Start over again from Step 1.
You can now create data in the vehicle
7 phonebook.
tered that match the name you just said,
the voice guide will say “Would you like 6. The voice guide will say “Calling <name>
Answer “No,” the system will return to the to call <name> at [home], [work], <location>” and then the system will dial
main menu. the telephone number.
[mobile], or [other]?” Select the location
to call.
3. After the voice guide says “Name please,” NOTE
say the name you want to call, from those NOTE  When the confirmation function is on, the
registered in the phonebook.  If the name you selected has matching data system will check if the name and location of
4. If there is only 1 match, the system will in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone the receiver are correct. If the name is cor-
proceed to Step 5. rect, answer “Yes.”
number is registered under the selected loca-
To change the name or location to call,
If there are 2 or more matches, the voice tion, the voice guide will say
“{home/work/mobile/other} not found for answer “No.” The system will return to Step
guide will say “More than one match was
3.
found, would you like to call <returned <name>. Would you like to add location or
name>.” If that person is the one you want try again?”
Say “Try again,” and the system will return
to call, answer “Yes.” Redialing
to Step 3.
Answer “No,” the name of the next
Say “Add location” and you can register an
matching person will be uttered by the You can redial the last number called, based
additional telephone number under the
voice guide. selected location.
on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel-
lular phone.
Use the following procedure to redial.


2. Say “Redial.” To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button
on the steering wheel control switch.
Phonebook function
E00763700017
Send function When the call is over, the audio system will
E00761300035
return to its previous state. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface has 2 types of
unique phonebooks that are different from the
During a call, press the SPEECH button to
Mute function phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They
enter voice recognition mode, then say
are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile
“<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF E00760300041
phonebook.
tones. At any time during a call, you can mute the
These phonebooks are used to register tele-
For example, if during a call you need to sim- vehicle microphone.
phone numbers and make calls to desired
ulate the pressing of a phone button as a Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying
numbers via voice recognition function.
response to an automated system, press the
SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound
“Mute” during a call will turn ON the mute
function and mute the microphone.
7
send” and the 1234# will be sent via your cel- Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn NOTE
lular phone. off the mute function and cancel the mute on  Disconnecting the battery cable will not
the microphone. delete information registered in the phone-
book.
Receiving calls
E00761600054 Switching between hands-free
If an incoming phone call is received while mode and private mode Vehicle phonebook
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in E00761400036 E00763801334
ON or ACC, the audio system will be auto- The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switch This phonebook is used when making calls
matically turned on and switched to the between hands-free mode (hands-free calls) with the voice recognition function.
incoming call, even when the audio system and private mode (calls using cellular phone). Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi-
was originally off. If you press the SPEECH button and say cle phonebook per language.
The voice guide announcement for the “Transfer call” during a hands-free call, you Also, each entry has 4 locations associated
incoming call will be output from the front can stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri- with: home, work, mobile and other. You can
passenger’s seat speaker. vate mode. register one telephone number for each loca-
If the CD player or radio was playing when To return to hands-free mode, press the tion.
the incoming call was received, the audio sys- SPEECH button again and say “Transfer
tem will mute the sound from the CD player call.” You can register a desired name as a name for
or radio and output only the incoming call. any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle
phonebook.


Names and telephone numbers can be
changed later on.
NOTE NOTE
 If the maximum number of entries are  In the case of English, the system will recog-
The vehicle phonebook can be used with all already registered, the voice guide will say nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the
paired cellular phones. “The phonebook is full. Would you like to number “0.”
delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
delete a registered name.
 To register a telephone number in If you say “No,” the system will return to the 7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone
the vehicle phonebook main menu. number you have just read, and then reg-
ister the number.
You can register a telephone number in the When the telephone number has been reg-
5. When the name has been registered, the istered, the voice guide will say “Number
vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways: voice guide will say “home, work,
7 Reading out a telephone number, and select- mobile, or other?” Say the location for
saved. Would you like to add another
ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry from number for this entry?”
which you want to register a telephone To add another telephone number for a
the phonebook of the cellular phone. number. new location for the current entry, answer
“Yes.” The system will return to location
 To register by reading out a tele- NOTE selection in Step 5.
phone number  When the confirmation function is on, the Answer “No” to end the registration pro-
voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this cor-
1. Press the SPEECH button. cess and return to the main menu.
rect?” Answer “Yes.”
2. Say “Phonebook.” If a telephone number has been registered for
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the selected location, the voice guide will say NOTE
the following: new entry, edit number, “The current number is <telephone number>,  When the confirmation function is on, after
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or number please.” repeating the telephone number you have
import contact.” Say “New entry.” If you do not want to change the telephone read, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor-
number, say “cancel” or the original number rect?” Answer “Yes.”
4. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
to keep it registered. Answer “No” to return to telephone number
Say your preferred name to register it.
registration in step 6.
6. The voice guide will say “Number

please.” Say the telephone number to reg-
ister it.

 To select and transfer one phone- 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number,
NOTE
book entry from the phonebook of  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
the cellular phone nise the Bluetooth® compatible cellular
import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
4. The voice guide will say “Would you like phone or the connection takes too much
You can select 1 phonebook entry from the time, the voice guide will say “Import con-
to import a single entry or all contacts?”
phonebook of the cellular phone and register tact has timed out” and then the system will
Say “Single entry.”
it in the vehicle phonebook. cancel the registration. In such case, start
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will become over again from Step 1.
ready to receive transferred phonebook  Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing
NOTE data. and holding the SPEECH button will cancel
 Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is the registration.
parked. Before transferring, make sure that NOTE 7
the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
 If the maximum number of entries are 7. When the reception is complete, the voice
 All or part of data may not be transferred,
already registered, the voice guide will say guide will say “<Number of telephone
even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
“The phonebook is full. Would you like to
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of numbers that had been registered in the
delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
the device. delete a registered name.
import source> numbers have been
 The maximum supported telephone number If you say “No,” the system will return to the imported. What name would you like to
length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of main menu. use for these numbers?”
20 digits or more will be truncated to the first Say the name you want to register for this
19 digits. phonebook entry.
 If telephone numbers contain characters 5. After the voice guide says “Ready to
other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters receive a contact from the phone. Only a NOTE
are deleted before the transfer. home, a work, and a mobile number can  If the entered name is already used for other
 For the connection settings on the cellular be imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- phonebook entry or similar to a name used
phone side, refer to the instructions for the face will receive the phonebook data from for other phonebook entry, that name cannot
cellular phone. be registered.
the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone.
1. Press the SPEECH button. 6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellu- 8. The voice guide will say “Adding
2. Say “Phonebook.” lar phone to set it up so that the phone- <name>.”
book entry you want to register in the When the confirmation function is on, the
vehicle phonebook can be transferred to system will ask if the name is correct.
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Answer “Yes.”

Answer “No,” the voice guide will say 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
“Name please.” Register a different name. the following: new entry, edit number,
NOTE
 If the telephone number is already registered
9. The voice guide will say “Numbers edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
in the selected location, the voice guide will
saved.” import contact”. Say “Edit number.”
say “The current number is <current num-
10. The voice guide will say “Would you like 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele-
to import another contact?” name of the entry you would like to edit, phone number to change the current number.
Answer “Yes” if you want to continue or say list names.” Say the name of the
with the registration. You can continue to phonebook entry you want to edit.
register a new phonebook entry from Step 7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone
5. NOTE number.
Answer “No,” the system will return to  Say “List names,” and the names registered When the confirmation function is on, the
7 the main menu. in the phonebook will be read out in order. system will ask if the number is correct.
Refer to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to Answer “Yes.”
the list of registered names” on page 7-77. Answer “No,” the system will return to
 To change the content registered in
the Step 3.
the vehicle phonebook 8. Once the telephone number is registered,
E00739800024 5. The voice guide will say “Home, work,
the voice guide will say “Number saved”
You can change or delete a name or telephone mobile or other?” Select and say the loca-
and then the system will return to the
number registered in the vehicle phonebook. tion where the telephone number you
main menu.
You can also listen to the list of names regis- want to change or add is registered.
tered in the vehicle phonebook. When the confirmation function is on, the
system will check the target name and
NOTE
 If the location where a telephone number
location again. Answer “Yes” if you want
NOTE was already registered has been overwritten
to continue with the editing. with a new number, the voice guide will say
 The system must have at least one entry.
Answer “No,” the system will return to “Number changed” and then the system will
Step 3. return to the main menu.
 Editing a telephone number 6. The voice guide will say “Number,
please.” Say the telephone number you
1. Press the SPEECH button. want to register.  Editing a name
2. Say “Phonebook.”
2. Say “Phonebook.”


3. The voice guide will say “Select one of 2. Say “Phonebook.” 2. Say “Phonebook.”
the following: new entry, edit number, 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or the following: new entry, edit number, the following: new entry, edit number,
import contact.” Say “Edit name.” edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
4. The voice guide will say “Please say the import contact.” Say “List names.” import contact.” Say “Delete.”
name of the entry you would like to edit, 4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out the 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
or say list names.” Say the name you want entries in the phonebook in order. name of the entry you would like to
to edit. 5. When the voice guide is done reading the delete, or say list names.” Say the name of
list, it will say “End of list, would you like the phonebook entry in which the tele-
NOTE to start from the beginning?” When you phone number you want to delete is regis-
 Say “List names,” and the names registered want to check the list again from the tered.
in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer beginning, answer “Yes.” 7
to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list When you are done, answer “No” to NOTE
of registered names” on page 7-77.  Say “List names,” and the names registered
return to the previous or main menu.
in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer
5. The voice guide will say “Changing NOTE to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list
of registered names” on page 7-77.
<name>.”  You can call, edit or delete a name that is
When the confirmation function is on, the being read out.
system will check if the name is correct. Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to 5. If only one telephone number is registered
Answer “Yes” if you want to continue call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or in the selected phonebook entry, the voice
with the editing based on this information. “Delete” to delete it. guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca-
The system will beep and then execute your
Answer “No,” the system will return to tion>.”
command.
Step 4. If multiple telephone numbers are regis-
 If you press the SPEECH button and say
6. The voice guide will say “Name please.” “Continue” or “Previous” while the list is
tered in the selected phonebook entry, the
Say the new name you want to register. being read, the system will advance or voice guide will say “Would you like to
7. The registered name will be changed. rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other],
When the change is complete, the system the next entry or “Previous” to return to the or all?”
will return to the main menu. previous entry. Select the location to delete, and the voice
guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca-
 Listening to the list of registered names tion>.”
E00739900025  Deleting a telephone number
1. Press the SPEECH button. E00740000026


4. For confirmation purposes, the voice The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically
NOTE guide will ask “Are you sure you want to converts from text to voice the names regis-
 To delete the telephone numbers from all
erase everything from your hands-free tered in the transferred phonebook entries,
locations, say “All.”
system phonebook?” Answer “Yes.” and creates names.
Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all
6. The system will ask if you really want to registered information in the phonebook
delete the selected telephone number(s) to and return to the main menu.
NOTE
go ahead with the deletion, answer “Yes.”  Only the mobile phonebook transferred from
5. The voice guide will say “You are about
Answer “No,” the system will cancel the connected cellular phone can be used
to delete everything from your hands-free
deleting the telephone number(s) and then with that cellular phone.
system phonebook. Do you want to con-
return to Step 4.  You cannot change the names and telephone
tinue?” Answer “Yes” to continue. numbers in the phonebook entries registered
7 7. When the telephone number deletion is Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select
complete, the voice guide will say registered information in the phonebook and delete specific phonebook entries, either.
“<name> <location> deleted” and then and return to the main menu. To change or delete any of the above, change
the system will return to the main menu. 6. The voice guide will say “Please wait, the applicable information in the source
If all locations are deleted, the system will erasing the hands-free system phone- phonebook of the cellular phone and then
say “<name> and all locations deleted” book” and then the system will delete all transfer the phonebook again.
and the name will be removed from the data in the phonebook.
phonebook. If numbers still remain under When the deletion is complete, the voice To import a devices phonebook
the entry, the name will retain the other guide will say “Hands-free system phone-
associated numbers. book erased” and then the system will Follow the steps below to transfer to the
return to the main menu. mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in
the cellular phone.
 Erasing the phonebook
E00740100027
Mobile phonebook
You can delete all registered information E00763900080
NOTE
from the vehicle phonebook.  Transfer should be completed while the vehi-
All entries in the phonebook stored in the cel- cle is parked. Before transferring, make sure
1. Press the SPEECH button. lular phone can be transferred in a batch and that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
2. Say “Phonebook.” registered in the mobile phonebook.  The already stored phonebook in the mobile
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing phonebook is overwritten by the stored
the following: new entry, edit number, up to 1,000 names, can be registered. phonebook in the cellular phone.
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
import contact.” Say “Erase all.”

5. The voice guide will say “Importing the 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice
NOTE contact list from the mobile phonebook. guide will say “Import complete” and
 All or part of data may not be transferred,
This may take several minutes to com- then the system will return to the main
even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
plete. Would you like to continue?” menu.
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of Answer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile
the device.
phonebook the phonebook stored in the
 Only a home, a work, and a mobile number
cellular phone will start.
can be imported.
Answer “No,” the system will return to
 The maximum supported telephone number
length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
the main menu.
20 digits or more will be truncated to the first
19 digits. NOTE
 If telephone numbers contain characters  The transfer may take some time to complete 7
other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters depending on the number of contacts.
are deleted before the transfer.  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be
 For the connection settings on the cellular connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel-
phone side, refer to the instructions for the lular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable
cellular phone. to transfer contact list from phone” and then
the system will return to the main menu.
 If you press the HANG-UP button or press
2. Say “Phonebook.” and hold the SPEECH button during the data
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and
the following: new entry, edit number, the system will return to the main menu.
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or  If an error occurs during the data transfer, all
import contact.” Say “Import contact.” transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide
4. The voice guide will say “Would you like will say “Unable to complete the phonebook
to import a single entry or all contacts?” import” and then the system will return to
Say “All contacts.” the main menu.
 If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the
voice guide will say “There are no contacts
on the connected phone.”

USB input terminal*
Enrolment commands
E00732401493
Except for vehicles for Chile and Mexico
Vehicles for Chile and Mexico USB input terminal*

E00761901634
You can connect your USB memory device or

iPod* to play music files stored in the USB
memory device or iPod.
*: “iPod” is a registered trademark of

Apple Inc. in the United States and other
countries.
The USB input terminal (A) is located in the

indicated position.

USB input terminal*

This section explains how to connect and
Type 1 Type 1
remove a USB memory device or iPod.
Vehicles without See the following sections for details on how Vehicles without
DVD AUDIO to play music files. DVD AUDIO
Refer to “Listen to an iPod” on page 7-39.
Refer to “Listen to Audio Files on a USB
Device” on page 7-41.
Vehicles with Refer to “To play iPod/USB memory device Vehicles with DVD
DVD AUDIO tracks via voice operation” on page 7-44 AUDIO
How to connect a USB memory

7
device
E00762001485
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn

Type 2 the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- Type 2
tion or put the operation mode in OFF.
Vehicles without Smart-
2. Open the cover (A) on the centre console
phone Link Display Audio
or DVD AUDIO (Type 1) or open the floor console box
(Type 2).
Vehicles with Smartphone

Link Display Audio or
DVD AUDIO *
3. Connect a commercially available USB

connector cable (C) to the USB memory
device (B).
*: If so equipped

USB input terminal*

5. To remove the USB connector cable, turn
Type 1
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in OFF Vehicles without
first and perform the installation steps in DVD AUDIO
reverse.
CAUTION Vehicles with DVD

 After removing the USB connector cable, be AUDIO
sure to close the terminal cover (Type 1) or
the floor console box (Type 2). Entry of for-
eign matter into the terminal may cause a
7 4. Connect the USB connector cable to the malfunction.
USB input terminal.
CAUTION How to connect an iPod

 On vehicles with Type 2, keep the lid of the E00762101558 Type 2
floor console box closed while driving the
vehicle. A lid or the contents of the floor 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn
console box could otherwise cause injuries. the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A)
NOTE on the centre console (Type 1) or open the
 Do not connect the USB memory device to floor console box (Type 2).
the USB input terminal directly.
The USB memory device may be damaged.
 On vehicles with Type 2, when closing the
floor console box, be careful not to trap the 3. Connect the connector cable to the iPod.
USB connector cable.
NOTE
 Use a genuine connector cable from Apple
Inc.

USB input terminal*

4. Connect the connector cable to the USB
input terminal.
Types of connectable devices For vehicles equipped with the DISPLAY
and supported file specifica- AUDIO
CAUTION tions Refer to the separate owner’s manual.
 On vehicles with Type 2, keep the lid of the E00762201357
vehicle. A lid or the contents of the floor
For vehicles equipped with the
Except for vehicles equipped with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
console box could otherwise cause injuries.
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
For details about the types of connectable
NOTE For details about the types of connectable devices and supported file specifications,
 On vehicles with Type 2, when closing the devices and supported file specifications,
refer to the following pages and manuals.
refer to the following sections. 7
floor console box, be careful not to trap the
connector cable.
For vehicles equipped with the AM/FM  Device types
radio/CD player
5. To remove the connector cable, turn the Devices of the following types can be con-
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or Refer to “Listen to an iPod” on page 7-39, nected.
put the operation mode in OFF first and “Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device” on
perform the installation steps in reverse. page 7-41 and “Audio Files Model name Condition
(MP3/WMA/AAC)” on page 7-26.
Storage capacity
CAUTION USB memory device of 256 Mbytes or
 After removing the connector cable, be sure For vehicles equipped with the more
to close the terminal cover (Type 1) or the LW/MW/FM radio/CD player
floor console box (Type 2). Entry of foreign Models other than USB Digital audio
matter into the terminal may cause a mal- Refer to “Listen to an iPod” on page 7-39, memory devices and player supporting
function. “Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device” on iPods mass storage class
page 7-41 and “Audio Files
(MP3/WMA/AAC)” on page 7-26. In some countries, for connectable device
types for “iPod*,” “iPod classic*,” “iPod
nano*,” “iPod touch*” and “iPhone*,” access
the MITSUBISHI MOTORS website.

HDMI terminal*
Please read and agree to the “Warning about
Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”.
NOTE HDMI terminal*
 Do not connect to the USB input terminal
The websites mentioned above may connect E00771400084
any device (hard disk, card reader, memory
you to websites other than the MITSUBISHI
reader, etc.) other than the connectable You can connect a commercially available
MOTORS website. devices specified in the previous section. HDMI device such as a video camera and a
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod- The device and/or data may be damaged. If smart phone to the HDMI terminal (A).
ucts/index.html any of these devices was connected by mis-
take, remove it after turning the ignition
*: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,” “iPod switch to the “LOCK” position or putting the Type 1
touch” and “iPhone” are registered trade- operation mode in OFF.
marks of Apple Inc. in the United States and
7 other countries.  File specifications
NOTE You can play music files of the following

 Depending on the type of the USB memory specifications that are saved in a USB mem-
device or other device connected, the con- ory device or other device supporting mass
nected device may not function properly or storage class. When you connect your iPod,
the available functions may be limited. playable file specifications depend on the
 It is recommended to use an iPod with firm- connected iPod.
ware updated to the latest version. Type 2
 You can charge your iPod by connecting it to
Item Condition
the USB input terminal when the ignition
switch or the operation mode is in ON or MP3, WMA, AAC,
File format
ACC. WAV
 Do not keep your USB memory device or Maximum number of
iPod in your vehicle.
levels Level 8
 It is recommended that you back up the files
(including the root)
in case of data damage.
Number of folders 700
Number of files 65,535

Sun visors
NOTE Type 2 CAUTION

 For details, refer to the separate owner’s  After removing the HDMI cable, be sure to
manual for a DVD AUDIO and Smartphone close the terminal cover (Type 1) or the floor
Link Display Audio. console box (Type 2). Entry of foreign mat-
ter into the terminal may cause a malfunc-
tion.
To connect
Sun visors
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn E00711202495
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in OFF. 3. Connect a commercially available HDMI 7
2. Open the terminal cover (A) on the centre cable to the HDMI device.
console (Type 1) or open the floor console 4. Connect a HDMI cable to the HDMI ter-
box (Type 2). minal.
Type 1
CAUTION
 On vehicles with Type 2, keep the lid of the
vehicle. A lid or the contents of the floor
console box could otherwise cause injuries.
1- To eliminate front glare
2- To eliminate side glare
NOTE
 On vehicles with Type 2, when closing the
floor console box, be careful not to trap a Card holder
HDMI cable.
Cards can be slipped into the holder (A) on

5. To remove the HDMI cable, perform the the back of the sun visor.
installation steps in reverse.

Vanity mirror
Ashtray Mounting position for movable

E00711402312 ashtray
CAUTION
The movable ashtray can be fitted in the cup
 Put out matches and cigarettes completely
before they are placed in the ashtray.
holder of the front seat and second seat.
 Don’t put papers and other things that burn
Refer to “Cup holder” on page 7-94.
into your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or
other smoking materials could set them on
fire, causing damage.
 Always close the ashtray. If left open, other
7 cigarette butts in the ashtray may be rekin-
dled.
Vanity mirror
E00711301806
To use the movable ashtray, open the lid.
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun
visor.

Cigarette lighter*
To use a plug-in type accessory, remove the
Cigarette lighter* CAUTION cap or open the lid, and insert the plug in the
 Do not touch the heating element or the ciga-
E00711502746 accessory socket.
rette lighter housing, hold the knob only to
The cigarette lighter can be used while the prevent burns.
ignition switch or the operation mode is in  Do not allow children to operate or play with Centre console*
ON or ACC. the cigarette lighter as burns may occur.
 Something is wrong with the cigarette lighter
if it does not pop back out within approxi-
mately 30 seconds of being pushed in.
Pull it out and have the problem corrected at
dealer. 7
 Do not use any electric appliance that is not
approved by MITSUBISHI MOTORS.
Doing so could damage the socket. If you
used the cigarette lighter after damaging the
socket, the cigarette lighter might pop out or Console box*
fail to come out after being pushed in.
1- Push all the way in.  When the cigarette lighter socket is used as a
power source for an electric appliance, be
sure that the electric appliance operates at
The cigarette lighter will automatically return 12 V and has an electric capacity of 120 W
to its original position with a “click” when or less. In addition, long use of the electric
ready. Pull it out for use. appliance without running the engine may
After use, insert the cigarette lighter to its run down the battery.
original position in the socket.
NOTE Accessory socket

E00711602806
 Do not leave the cigarette lighter removed
from its socket, because the socket might The accessory socket can be used while the
become clogged by foreign material and be ignition switch or the operation mode is in
short-circuited. ON or ACC.

Interior lamps
For the third seat Interior lamps Front room & map lamps/Rear
E00712002445 personal lamps
E00717301781
Front room & map lamps
Except for vehicles with sunroof
7
CAUTION
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory
1- Front room & map lamps
operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
When using more than one socket at the
2- Rear personal lamps (Vehicles with
same time, make sure that the electrical rear cooler)
accessories are 12 V accessories and that the 3- Rear personal lamps (Except for vehi-
total power consumption does not exceed cles with rear cooler)
120 W. 4- Luggage compartment lamp Vehicles with sunroof
 Long use of the electric appliance without 5- Door courtesy lamps
running the engine may run down the bat-
tery.
 When the accessory socket is not in use, be NOTE
sure to close the lid, because the socket  If you leave the lamps on without running
might become clogged by foreign material the engine, you will run down the battery.
and be short-circuited. Before you leave the vehicle, make sure that
all the lamps are off.
NOTE
 Accessory sockets in 2 or 3 locations can be
used at the same time.

Interior lamps
Rear personal lamps Position Position

of lamp On/off control of lamp On/off control
switch switch
Except for vehicles with rear cooler
2- Door Delayed off function Auto cut-out function
() The lamps illuminates when a If the lamps is left switched on
door or the tailgate is opened. It with the ignition switch is in the
goes off approximately 15 sec- “LOCK” or “ACC” position or
onds after the all doors and the the operation mode is in OFF or
tailgate are closed. ACC, and a door or the tailgate
However, the lamp goes off is opened, it goes off automati-
immediately with all doors and
the tailgate closed in the follow-
cally after approximately 30
minutes.
7
ing cases: The lamp will illuminate again
 When the ignition switch is after it automatically goes off in
Vehicles with rear cooler
turned to the “ON” position the following cases:
or the operation mode is put  When the ignition switch is
in ON. turned to the “ON” position
 When the central door lock or the operation mode is put
function is used to lock the in ON.
vehicle.  When the keyless entry sys-
 When the keyless entry key tem or the keyless operation
or the keyless operation key system is operated.
is used to lock the vehicle.  When all doors and the tail-
 If the vehicle is equipped gate are closed.
Position with the keyless operation 3- OFF The lamps goes off regardless
of lamp On/off control system, when the keyless ( ) of whether a door or the tailgate
switch operation function is used to is open or closed.
lock the vehicle.
1- The lamps illuminates regard-
( ) less of whether a door or the
tailgate is open or closed.

Interior lamps
NOTE Type 1
 When the key was used to start the engine, if
the key is removed while the doors and the
tailgate are closed, the lamps is illuminated
and after a few seconds it goes off.
 When the keyless operation function was
used to start the engine, if the operation
mode is put in OFF while the doors and the
tailgate are closed, the lamp illuminates and
after approximately 15 seconds it goes off.
(if so equipped)
7  The time until the lamp goes off (delayed
off) can be adjusted. For details, please con- Type 2
sult an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS Luggage compartment lamp
dealer. E00712701836
 The auto cut-out function cannot be operated

when the front room lamp switch is in the
“ ” position.
Also, this function can be deactivated. For
details, please consult an authorised
Map lamps
E00712401208
Rear personal lamps (for vehi-
Push the lens (A) to turn on the lamp. Push it cles with rear cooler)
again to turn it off. 1- ( )
E00712601486
The lamp illuminates regardless of whether
Push the lens (A) to turn on the lamp. Push it the tailgate is open or closed.
again to turn it off. 2- (•)
The lamp illuminates when the tailgate is
opened, and goes off when the tailgate is
closed.

Storage spaces
3- ( ) Storage spaces Glove box

The lamp goes off regardless of whether the E00713103352 E00717602853
tailgate is open or closed. The glove box can be locked and unlocked
CAUTION using the key.
Door courtesy lamps  Never leave lighters, canned carbonated bev-
E00717501220
erage, and spectacles in the cabin when park-
ing the vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin
Each door courtesy lamp comes on when the will become extremely hot, so lighters and
relevant door is opened and goes off when the other flammable items may catch fire and
door is closed. unopened drink cans may rupture. Also,
spectacles with plastic lenses or materials
could deform or crack. 7
 Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while
driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a
storage space could otherwise cause injuries.
1- To lock
2- To unlock
3- To open, press the button
NOTE
 When the lamps are illuminated with the
lamp switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or
“AUTO” position (vehicles with automatic
lamp control), the glove box lamp illumi-
nates.
1- Glove box Refer to “Combination headlamps and dip-
2- Centre console under tray* per switch” on page 5-57.
3- Sunglasses holder*
4- Floor console box
5- Luggage floor boxes*

Storage spaces
Centre console under tray* NOTE

E00748600086  When using a commercially available USB
connector cable connected to the USB input
The centre console under tray is on the floor terminal or commercially available HDMI
console part. connector cable connected to the HDMI
input terminal, if you hold up extra length of
the cable in the storage space and install the
tray, you can use only the necessary length
cable pulled out from the storage space.
 Do not use the centre console under tray as
an ashtray.
1- Upper box
7 This could cause a fire or the tray will be
2- Lower box
damaged.
Floor console box Upper box

E00723302305
To open the upper box, raise the lid.
NOTE Type 1
 The centre console under tray is removable,
so it is also possible to use as storage space. Upper and lower boxes are located inside the
floor console box.
The floor console box can also be used as an
armrest.
Lower box
To open the lower box, raise the upper box.

Storage spaces
Luggage floor boxes*

E00718701883
To use the box, raise the luggage floor board.
A- Tray
7
NOTE
 When opening or closing the lid, be careful
not to trap hands. NOTE
 The upper box can be removed and use as a  The tray can be stored in the floor console
box. box lid by turning it over and installing it.
When storing the tray, hook the tray’s hooks
(B) to the holes (C) of lid side.
Sunglasses holder*
Type 2 E00718601459
To open, press the lid.

To open the console box, raise the lid.
The floor console box can also be used as an
armrest.
 The USB input terminal and HDMI terminal

are located in the floor console box (if so
equipped). For details, refer to “USB input
terminal” on page 7-80, “HDMI terminal” on
page 7-84.

Cup holder
CAUTION NOTE Type 2

 The holder should not be used to store any-  Some bottles may not be fastened tightly
thing heavier than sunglasses. These objects depending on the shape.
could drop out. Before using the cup holder, make sure the
some bottles are tightly fastened to the cup
holder.
NOTE If the some bottles are unstable while driv-
ing, it could fall from the cup holder.
 The holder may not be able to accommodate
every possible size and shape of sunglasses;
it is advisable to check compatibility before
use. For the front seat
7
The cup holder is located between the front For the second seat
Cup holder seats. E00718901247
E00714502301
In order to use the cup holder, allow the arm-
Type 1 rest to drop down.
WARNING
 Do not spray water or spill beverages
inside the vehicle. If the switches, wires, or
electrical components become wet, they
could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe
up as much liquid as possible and immedi-
ately consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
CAUTION
 Do not drink beverages while driving. This is
distracting and could cause an accident.
 Drinks could be spilled by the vibration and
jolts while driving. If the spilt drink is very
hot, you could be burnt.

Bottle holder
The bottle holders are provided at both sides
For the third seat Bottle holder of front and rear doors.
E00719001157 E00718201497
The cup holder is located at the right side of

the third seat. WARNING
The cup holder is designed for holding cups  Do not spray water or spill beverages
or drink-cans securely in its holes. inside the vehicle. If the switches, wires, or
electrical components become wet, they
could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe
up as much liquid as possible and immedi-
ately consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer. 7
CAUTION NOTE
 Do not drink beverages while driving. This is
 Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle
distracting and could cause an accident.
holder.
 Drinks could be spilled by the vibration and
 Tightly close the cap on drink bottles before
jolts while driving. If the spilt drink is very
storing them.
hot, you could be burnt.
 Some bottles may be too big or the wrong
shape to fit in the holder.
Cargo area cover (5 per-

sons)*
E00733601157
To use
1. Draw out the cover retracted by spring
and insert it in the mounting grooves (A).

Cargo area cover (5 persons)*
CAUTION
 If the second seatback or seatback lock lever
strongly touches the cover, move the cover
rearward or adjust the seatback forward.
The cover could break if it supports the seat-
back of the second seat.
To remove
1. Roll the cover into the retracted position.
7 1. Move one of the sliders (C) toward the 2. Move one of the sliders (C) toward the
inside of the vehicle, and fit the tab (D) inside of the vehicle and lift it to remove
into the installation hole that is to be used. the cover.
Move the opposite slider in the same fash-
2. Remove the cover from the mounting ion.
grooves, and the cover will be rolled back
into the retracted position.
NOTE
 Do not put luggage on the cover.
To change position
There are two installation holes (B) for the
cover.
2. After changing the position, gently shake
To refit
the entire cover to make sure it is securely Refit the cover by performing the removal
retained. steps in reverse.
Gently shake the entire cover after fitting it to
make sure it is securely retained.
Convenient hook
Convenient hook
E00732901270
Light items of luggage can be hung from the

hook.
7
CAUTION WARNING
 Do not use the assist grips when getting into  Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
detach causing you to fall. tain airbag was activated, any such item
could be propelled away with great force
and could prevent the curtain airbag from
NOTE Coat hook inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
 Do not hang heavy luggage (more than on the coat hook (without using a hanger).
approximately 4 kg) on the hook.
E00725601738
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
Doing so could cause damage to the hook. There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist objects in the pockets of clothes that you
grip. hang on the coat hook.
Assist grip
E00732801426
The assist grips (located above the doors on Luggage hooks

the headliner) are not designed to support E00715701635
body weight. They are intended for use only There are hooks on the floor, the third seat-
while seated in the vehicle. back and the side of the luggage compart-
ment.

Luggage net (5 persons)*

Use the hooks on the floor for securing the
luggage.
Third seatback (7 persons) NOTE
 Do not hang heavy luggage (more than
Fold the third seatback, pull up the cover (A). approximately 4 kg) on the hook (Side).
CAUTION Doing so could cause damage to the hook.
 Do not pile up the luggage beyond the seat-
back height.
Secure the luggage firmly.
Otherwise, serious accidents could result due
Luggage net (5 persons)*
to hindered rearward view or flying objects E00733701044
during sudden braking.

It is possible to attach the luggage net to the
four floor hooks.
7
Floor
5 persons
Side
7 persons

For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

Emergency starting ..........................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel-powered vehicles) .......................8-5
Removal of water from the fuel filter
(diesel-powered vehicles) ............................................................8-5
Tools, jack and jack handle ..............................................................8-6
How to change a tyre .......................................................................8-8 8
Towing ...........................................................................................8-15
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-19
If the vehicle breaks down

3. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
If the vehicle breaks down WARNING cle. Put an A/T in “P” (PARK) or a M/T in
 To start the engine using jumper cables
E00800102411
“N” (Neutral). Stop the engine.
from another vehicle, perform the correct
If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move
procedures according to the instruction
it to the shoulder and use the hazard warning below. Incorrect procedures could result WARNING
flashers and/or the warning triangle etc. in a fire or explosion or damage to the  Turn off the ignition on both vehicles
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch” on vehicles. beforehand. Make sure that the cables or
page 5-63.  Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away your clothes cannot be caught by the fans
from the battery because the battery may or drive belt. Personal injury could result.
produce an explosion.
If the engine stops/fails
4. Make sure battery electrolyte is at the
Vehicle operation and control are affected if proper level.
CAUTION Refer to “Battery” on page 10-11.
8 the engine stops. Before moving the vehicle  Do not attempt to start the engine by pulling
to a safe area, be aware of the following: or pushing the vehicle. WARNING
It could damage your vehicle.
 The brake booster becomes inoperative  If electrolyte fluid is not visible, or
 Check the other vehicle. It must have a
and the pedal effort will increase. Press appears to be frozen, Do Not Attempt
12-volt battery.
down the brake pedal harder than usual. Jump Starting!
If the other system isn’t 12-volt, shorting can
 Since the power steering system is no A battery might rupture or explode if the
damage both vehicles.
temperature is below the freezing point or
longer operative, the steering wheel feels  Use the proper cables suitable for the battery if it is not filled to the proper level.
heavy when turning it. size to prevent overheating of the cables.
 Electrolyte is corrosive diluted sulphuric
 Check the jumper cables for damage and cor- acid.
rosion before use.
Emergency starting  Always wear protective eye goggles when
If electrolyte (battery acid) comes into
contact with your hands, eyes, clothes or
E00800504174
working near the battery. the painted surface of your vehicle, it
If the engine cannot be started because the  Keep the battery out of the reach of children. should be thoroughly flushed with water.
battery is weak or dead, the battery from If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
another vehicle can be used with jumper 1. Get the vehicles close enough so the with water immediately and thoroughly,
cables to start the engine. and get prompt medical attention.
jumper cables can reach, but be sure the
vehicles aren’t touching each other.
2. Turn off all lamps, heater and other elec-
trical loads.
8-2 For emergencies

Emergency starting
5. Connect one end of one jumper cable Diesel-powered vehicles (4D56)
WARNING
to the positive (+) terminal of the dis-
charged battery (A or B), and the other  Make sure that the connection is made
to the appointed position (shown in the
end to the positive (+) terminal of the illustration). If the connection is made
booster battery (C). directly to the negative (−) side of the bat-
Connect one end of the other jumper cable tery, the inflammable gases generated
to the negative (−) terminal of the from the battery might catch fire and
explode.
booster battery (C), and the other end
 When connecting the jumper cables, do
to the appointed position (shown in the
not connect the positive (+) cable to the
illustration) of the vehicle with the dis- negative (−) terminal. Otherwise sparks
charged battery at the point farthest from might cause explosion of the battery.
the battery.
Petrol-powered vehicles
Diesel-powered vehicles (4N15) 8
CAUTION
 Use care not to get the jumper cable caught
in the cooling fans or other rotating part in
the engine compartment.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has

the booster battery, let the engine idle a
few minutes, then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
CAUTION
 Keep the engine of the vehicle giving assis-
tance running.
*: if so equipped
7. After the engine is started, disconnect the
cables in the reverse order and keep the
engine running for several minutes.
For emergencies 8-3

Engine overheating
With the engine still running, raise the
NOTE bonnet to ventilate the engine compart-
 If the vehicle is put in motion without fully
ment.
charging the battery, it might cause the loss
of the smooth engine operation and the anti- [If steam is coming from the engine com-
lock brake warning lamp to illuminate.
partment]
Refer to “Anti-lock brake system (ABS)” on
page 6-80.
Stop the engine, and when the steam
stops, raise the bonnet to ventilate the
engine compartment. Restart the engine.
Engine overheating WARNING

E00800604133
 Do not open the bonnet while steam is A- Cooling fans
When the engine is overheating, the warning coming from the engine compartment. It B- Reserve tank
8 will be displayed in the instrument cluster as could cause steam or hot water to spurt C- Radiator cap
follows. out, causing burns. Hot water could spurt *: If so equipped
out even when there is no steam coming
 The information screen in the multi infor- out, and some parts will be very hot. Be
mation display will be interrupted and the very careful when opening the bonnet. WARNING
engine coolant temperature warning dis-  Be careful of hot steam, which could be  Be careful not to get your hands or clothes
blowing off the reserve tank cap. caught in the cooling fans.
play will appear. Also “ ” will blink.  Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap
(Color liquid crystal display type) while the engine is hot.
4. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank
 “ ” will blink. (Mono-color liquid crys-
(B).
tal display type) 3. Confirm that the cooling fans (A) are
turning.
If this occurs, take the following corrective [If the cooling fans are turning]
measures: After the high coolant temperature warn-
ing has gone off, stop the engine.
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
[If the cooling fans are not turning]
2. Check whether steam is coming from the
Stop the engine immediately and contact
engine compartment.
[If steam does not come from the engine dealer for assistance.
compartment]
8-4 For emergencies

Bleeding the fuel system (diesel-powered vehicles)

If there is anything wrong with the cool-
ing system or drive belt, have the problem
CAUTION
 Do not smoke or have any other open flame
corrected at an authorised MITSUBISHI
near the vehicle while bleeding the fuel sys-
MOTORS dealer.
tem.
FULL  Be sure to carefully clean away any spilt fuel
Bleeding the fuel system which could ignite and cause a fire.
(diesel-powered vehicles)
LOW
Removal of water from the
E00800701449
The fuel system should be bled to remove air

as described below if the fuel supply is fuel filter (diesel-powered
5. Add coolant to the radiator and/or reserve exhausted during travel. vehicles)
tank if necessary (refer to the “Mainte- Pump the hand pump (A) at the top of the fuel
nance” section). filter until the hand pump becomes stiff.
E00800801538
8
If the fuel filter indicator lamp in the instru-
Then try again to start the engine.
ment panel illuminates or the fuel filter indi-
WARNING If the engine does not start, repeat the process
cator display on the information screen in the
 Make sure that the engine has cooled above.
multi information display appears during
down before removing the radiator cap
driving, it indicates that water has accumu-
(C), because hot steam or boiling water
otherwise will gush from the filler port
lated in the fuel filter. If this occurs, remove
and may scald you. the water as described below.
Indicator lamp (mono-color liquid crystal dis-

play)
CAUTION
 Do not add coolant while the engine is hot.
Suddenly adding cold coolant could damage
the engine. Wait for the engine to cool down,
then add coolant a little at a time.
Indicator display (color liquid crystal display)
6. Examine the radiator hoses for coolant

leakage and the drive belt for looseness or
damage.
For emergencies 8-5

Tools, jack and jack handle

3. Tighten the drain plug (A) when water no
longer comes out. Tools, jack and jack handle
4. Bleed the air in the fuel system. E00800902709
(Refer to “Bleeding the fuel system” on

page 8-5.) Storage
5. [Vehicles equipped with the mono-color
1. Loosen the drain plug (A) of the fuel fil- liquid crystal display]
ter. The tools, jack and jack handle are stowed in
Check to be sure that the fuel filter indica- the luggage compartment.
tor lamp illuminates when the ignition The storage location of the tools, jack and
switch is turned to “ON” or the operation jack handle should be remembered in case of
mode is put in ON, and that it goes off an emergency.
when the engine is started.
[Vehicles equipped with the color liquid
8 crystal display]
Check to be sure that the fuel filter indica-
tor display does not appear when the igni-
tion switch is turned to “ON” or the
operation mode is put in ON.
If in doubt, consult your nearest author-
2. Operate the hand pump (B) slowly 6 or ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
7 times in order to force the water out
through the drain plug (A).
CAUTION
 Do not smoke or have any other open flame A- Tools and jack handle
near the vehicle while bleeding the fuel sys- B- Jack
tem.
 Be sure to carefully clean away any water
drained out because any fuel mixed with the
water could ignite and cause a fire.
8-6 For emergencies

Tools, jack and jack handle
Tools and jack handle

E00801902113
2. Remove the securing band (C), and then 4. Reverse the removing procedure when
take out the tools and jack handle (D). storing the tools, jack and jack handle.
1- Tool bag 8
2- Wheel nut wrench
3- Tyre inflation pressure gauge*
NOTE
 After using the jack, pump up the jack
(Refer to “Tyre inflation pressure
secured by the band (E) 2 times.
gauge” on page 10-16.)
4- Spanner*
5- Jack handle
6- Hexagon wrench* To use the jack handle
(Refer to “When the Electric parking E00802401222
brake cannot be released” on page 1. Check that you have all sections of the
6-10.) handle.
3. Remove the securing band (E) and the
securing nut (F), and then take out the
Removing and storing the tools, jack (G).
jack and jack handle
E00802301452
1. While pressing the knob (A), remove the

lid (B).
For emergencies 8-7

How to change a tyre

E00801204107
Before changing a tyre, first stop your vehicle

in a safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable

ground, free of loose pebbles, etc.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. On vehicles with M/T, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position or put the
A- Thin handle section (with notch) operation mode in OFF, and move the
B- Thick handle section gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse) posi- WARNING
8 C- Thin handle section tion.  Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the
On vehicles with A/T, move the selector correct tyre when jacking up the vehicle.
2. With the snap pin (D) pressed, insert han- lever to the “P” (PARK) position and turn If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- jack could slip out of position, leading to
dle section (A) into handle section (B)
tion or put the operation mode in OFF. an accident.
until it is locked. Insert handle section (C)
into handle section (B) in the same way. 4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a
warning triangle, flashing signal lamp,
etc., at an adequate distance from the NOTE
vehicle, and have all your passengers  The chocks shown in the illustration do not
leave the vehicle. come with your vehicle. It is recommended
that you keep ones in the vehicle for use if
5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
needed.
jacking up the vehicle, place chocks or
 If chocks are not available, use stones or any
blocks (A) at the tyre that is diagonally
other objects that are large enough to hold
opposite from the tyre (B) you are chang- the wheel in position.
ing.
6. Get the jack, jack handle and wheel nut
wrench ready.
Refer to “Tools, jack and jack handle” on
page 8-6.
8-8 For emergencies

Spare wheel information To remove the spare wheel Except for vehicles with luggage floor box
E00803601885 E00803501666
The spare wheel is stored under the rear of UN-

the body.
CAUTION LOCK
 When removing the spare wheel, put on
Check the air pressure of the spare tyre fre-
gloves. Removing the spare wheel with your
quently and make sure it is ready for emer-
bare hands may cause injury to the fingers.
gency use at any time.
LOCK
Maintaining the spare wheel at the highest 1. On vehicles with luggage floor box,
specified air pressure will ensure that it can remove the luggage floor board (A).
always be used under any conditions
(city/high-speed driving, varying load weight, Vehicles with luggage floor box
etc.). 8
UN-
CAUTION LOCK
 The pressure should be periodically checked
and maintained at the specified pressure
while the tyre is stowed.
Driving with an insufficient tyre pressure can LOCK
lead to an accident. If you have no choice but
to drive with an insufficient tyre pressure,
keep your speed down and inflate the tyre to 2. Turn the spare tyre cap (B) to the
the correct pressure as soon as possible. “UNLOCK” position, and remove it. 3. Turn the lower cap (C) with the wheel nut
(Refer to “Tyre inflation pressures” on page wrench, and remove it.
10-16.)
For emergencies 8-9

CAUTION
• Do not use the power tool. Use the wheel
nut wrench stowed on the vehicle.
• Do not apply a force of 200 N or more at
the end of the wheel nut wrench.
5. Remove the hanger disc (E) from the

spare wheel.
4. Turn the securing bolt (D) anticlockwise

with the wheel nut wrench to lower the
8 spare wheel completely to the ground and
To change a tyre
E00803202468
to slack the chain. 1. Loosen the wheel nuts a quarter turn with
the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the
wheel nuts yet.
NOTE
 Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body
near the flat tyre. This makes it safer if the
jack slips out of position.
CAUTION
 When removing the spare wheel, please
observe the following points. 2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
If you do not follow them, it could result in points shown in the illustration. Use the
breakage of the spare wheel carrier. jacking point closest to the tyre you wish
to change.
8-10 For emergencies
WARNING
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face. Otherwise, the jack might slip and
cause personal injury. Always use the jack
on a flat, hard surface. Before setting the
jack, make sure there are no sand or peb-
bles under the jack base.
NOTE
 When jacking up the rear of the vehicle, turn
A- Front jacking point
the tip of the jack so that the grooved portion 4. Insert the jack handle in the bracket of the
(C) properly meets the designated point. jack and hook the notch (E) on the jack
handle end to the claw (F) of the bracket. 8
5. Move the jack handle up and down to
raise the ram until just before the jack
contacts the jacking point of the vehicle.
Ensure that the jack will properly contact
the vehicle jacking point.
Move the jack handle up and down to
raise the vehicle.
3. Using the jack handle, turn the release

B- Rear jacking point valve (D) clockwise until it stops.
WARNING
 Set the jack only at the positions shown
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,
it could dent your vehicle or the jack
might fall over and cause personal injury.
For emergencies 8-11


7. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-
NOTE face (G), hub bolts (H) or in the installa-
 This jack is a 2 stage expansion type.
tion holes (I) in the wheel, and then mount
the spare wheel.
WARNING
 Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
tyre is raised off the ground. It is danger-
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
 Do not get under your vehicle while using
the jack.
 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both 8. Turn the wheel nuts clockwise by hand to
are very dangerous. initially tighten them.
8  Do not use a jack except the one that came [Normal wheels and aluminium spare
with your vehicle. wheel]
 The jack should not be used for any pur- Tighten the wheel nuts until the flanges of
pose other than to change a tyre. WARNING the wheel nuts touch the wheel and the
 No one should be in your vehicle when  Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
wheel is not loose.
using the jack. (J) facing outboard. If you cannot see the
 Do not start or run the engine while your valve stem (J), you have installed the
vehicle is on the jack. wheel backwards.
Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel
 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tyres
installed backwards can cause vehicle
still on the ground could turn and make
damage and result in an accident.
your vehicle fall off the jack.
6. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut

wrench, then take the wheel off.
CAUTION
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing
[Steel spare wheel]
the tyre, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.


Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered Using the jack handle, turn the release
parts of the wheel nuts make light contact valve anticlockwise slowly to lower the
with the seats of the wheel holes and the vehicle until the tyre touches the ground.
wheel is not loose.
CAUTION
 Never use your foot or a pipe extension for 8
extra force in the wheel nut wrench. If you
WARNING do so, you will tighten the nut too much.
CAUTION  Be sure to open the release valve slowly. If
 Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or it is opened quickly, the vehicle will drop 11. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.
the nuts or they will tighten too much. abruptly and the jack may come out of
position, causing a serious accident. CAUTION
 If the release valve is loosened too much
NOTE 10. Tighten the nuts crisscross in 2 or 3 steps (2 or more turns) in the anticlockwise direc-
 Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the until each nut has been tightened securely. tion, the jack’s oil will leak and the jack can-
steel spare wheel, but return to the original not be used.
wheel and tyre as soon as possible. Tightening torque  Close the release valve slowly when lower-
 If all 4 aluminium wheels are changed to Steel wheel: 137 to 157 N•m ing the vehicle, or the valve may be dam-
steel wheels, e.g. when fitting winter tyres, Aluminium wheel: 118 to 137 N•m aged.
use tapered nuts. (Achieved by applying a force at the end
of the wheel nut wrench supplied with
9. Put the notch (K) provided on the jack the vehicle.
handle end on the valve (L) of the jack. Steel wheel: 510 to 580 N
Aluminium wheel: 440 to 500 N)

NOTE To store the spare wheel

 Occasionally when the vehicle is jacked up, E00803401287
the grooved portion of the designated point 1. Install the hanger disc (A) in wheel disc
will not come off. When this happens, rock hole.
the vehicle to lower the ram.
 If the jack is difficult to remove by hand,
insert the jack handle (M) into the bracket
(N). Then using the handle, remove the jack.
14. On vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring

system (TPMS), after filling your tyres to
8 the correct pressure, reset the tyre pres-
sure monitoring system (TPMS).
AHZ101131 Refer to “Tyre pressure monitoring sys-
2. Turn the securing bolt (B) clockwise with
tem (TPMS): Reset of low tyre pressure
the wheel nut wrench to wind up the
12. Push the piston down all the way, and turn warning threshold” on page 6-121.
chain.
the release valve clockwise as far as pos-
sible. CAUTION
13. Check your tyre inflation pressure. The  After changing the tyre and driving the vehi-
correct pressures are shown on the door cle approximately 600 miles, retighten the
wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
label. See the illustration.
come loose.
 If the steering wheel vibrates when driving
after changing the tyre, have the tyre
checked for balance at your nearest author-
 Do not mix one type of tyre with another or
use a different size from the one listed. This
would cause early wear and poor handling.

Towing
6. On vehicle with luggage floor box,
NOTE NOTE replace the luggage floor board.
 Confirm that the hanger disc is securely fit-  Overtightening the securing bolt can damage
ted in the wheel disc hole when the wheel is the gear, resulting in the gear not winding up
just lifted off the ground. the chain. To store the tools, jack and jack
handle
3. After winding up the spare wheel suffi- 4. Replace the lower cap (C), and turn it E00803801193
ciently, make sure it is not loose {the clockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
tightening torque should be approxi- ing the jack, jack handle and wheel nut
mately 22 N•m (achieved by applying a wrench.
force of 100 N at the end of the wheel nut Refer to “Tools, jack and jack handle” on
wrench)}. page 8-6.
CAUTION 8
 The spare wheel should always be secured in Towing
position. E00801505761
If a flat tyre is changed, put the flat tyre in

the spare wheel mounting position with the If your vehicle needs to be
wheel outer surface upward, and use the
wheel nut wrench to secure it firmly. towed
5. Replace the spare tyre cap (D), and turn it
 When installing the spare wheel, please
observe the following points. If you do not to the “LOCK” position.
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
follow them, it could result in breakage of have it done by your authorised
the spare wheel carrier. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or a com-
• Do not use the power tool. mercial tow truck service.
Use the wheel nut wrench stowed on the
In the following cases, transport the vehicle
vehicle.
using a tow truck.
• Do not apply a force of 200 N or more at
the end of the wheel nut wrench.
 The engine runs but the vehicle does not
move, or an abnormal noise is produced.
UNLOCK LOCK  Inspection of the vehicle’s underside
reveals that oil or some other fluid is leak-
ing.

Towing
If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to
tow the vehicle. Please contact your author-
CAUTION
 On 4WD vehicles, be sure to shift the trans-
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or a
fer shift lever or set the drive mode-selector
commercial tow truck service for assistance.
to “2H” position and transport the vehicle
with the driving wheels on a carriage {Type
Only when you cannot receive a towing ser-
C (vehicles with the transfer shift lever), D
vice from an authorised MITSUBISHI or E} as illustrated. Never try to tow with the
MOTORS dealer or commercial tow truck transfer shift lever or the drive mode-selector
service, tow your vehicle carefully in accord- in “4H”, “4HLc” or “4LLc” positions and
ance with the instructions given in “Emer- with the front or rear wheels on the ground
gency towing” in this part. (Type B or C) as illustrated. This could result
The regulations concerning towing may differ in the driving system damage or vehicle may
from country to country. It is recommended jump at the carriage. If you cannot shift the
8 that you obey the regulations of the area transfer shift lever or set the drive mode-
where you are driving your vehicle. selector to “2H” position or the transmission
is malfunctioning or damaged, transport the
vehicle with the all wheels on a carriage
(Type D or E) as illustrated.
 If your vehicle is equipped with the Active
Stability & Traction Control system (ASTC),
if the vehicle is towed with the ignition
mode in ON and only the front wheels or
only the rear wheels raised off the ground,
the active traction control system may oper-
Towing the vehicle by a tow ate, resulting in an accident.
truck  On 2WD vehicles, if the transmission is mal-
functioning or damaged, transport the vehi-
cle with the driving wheels on a carriage
CAUTION (Type C, D or E) as illustrated.
 This vehicle must not be towed by a tow
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-
age the bumper and front end.

Towing
CAUTION Towing with rear wheels off the

 If you tow the vehicles with A/T with the ground (Type C)
driving wheels on the ground (Type B) as
illustrated, make sure that the towing speed
Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
and distance given below are never
exceeded, causing damage to the transmis- position (M/T) or the selector lever in the “N”
sion. (NEUTRAL) position (A/T). Turn the igni-
tion switch to the “ACC” position or put the
Towing speed: 19 mph operation mode in ACC and secure the steer-
Towing distance: 50 miles ing wheel in a straight-ahead position with a
rope or tie-down strap. Never place the igni-
For the towing speed and the towing dis-
tion switch in the “LOCK” position or put the
tance, follow the local driving laws and regu-
operation mode in OFF when towing. CAUTION
lations.
 Do not use the tie-down hook (B) for towing. 8
This hook is provided only for the purpose of
Towing with front wheels off the Emergency towing transporting the vehicle itself.
ground (Type B) Using any part other than the designated
If towing service is not available in an emer- towing hook (A) could result in damage to
gency, your vehicle may be temporarily vehicle body.
Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
towed by a rope secured to the towing hook.
position (M/T) or the selector lever in the “N”
If your vehicle is to be towed by another
(NEUTRAL) position (A/T). NOTE
vehicle or if your vehicle tows another vehi-
Release the parking brake.
cle, pay careful attention to the following  Using a wire rope or metal chain can result
points. in damage to the vehicle body. It is best to
CAUTION use a non-metallic rope. If you use a wire
 Never tow an A/T vehicle with the front rope or metal chain, wrap it with cloth at any
wheels up (and the rear wheels on the
If your vehicle is to be towed by point where it touches the vehicle body.
ground) (Type B) when the A/T fluid level is another vehicle  Use care that the tow rope is kept as horizon-
low. This may cause serious and expensive tal as possible. An angled tow rope can dam-
damage to the transmission. 1. The front towing hook (A) is located as age the vehicle body.
shown in the illustration. Secure the tow  Secure the tow rope to the same side towing
rope to the front towing hook. hook, to keep the tow rope as straight as pos-
sible.

Towing
2. Keep the engine running. 5. Turn on the hazard warning lamps if
If the engine is not running, perform the required by law. (Follow the local driving
CAUTION
 When the vehicle with an A/T is to be towed
following operation to unlock the steering laws and regulations.)
by another vehicle with the all wheels on the
wheel. 6. During towing make sure that close con- ground, make sure that the towing speed and
[Except for vehicles with the keyless tact is maintained between the drivers of distance given below are never exceeded,
operation system] both vehicles, and that the vehicles travel avoiding damage to the transmission.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or at low speed.
“ON” position. Towing speed: 19 mph
[For vehicles with the keyless operation WARNING Towing distance: 50 miles
system]  Avoid sudden braking, acceleration and
For the towing speed and the towing dis-
Put the operation mode in ON. steering wheel movements; such driving
tance, follow the local driving laws and regu-
operation could cause damage to the tow-
lations.
WARNING ing hook or towing rope.
8  When the engine is not running, the brake
People in the vicinity could be injured as a
booster and power steering pump do not result. If your vehicle tows another vehi-
operate. This means higher brake depres-  When going down a long slope, the brakes cle
sion force and higher steering effort are may overheat, reducing effectiveness.
required. Therefore, vehicle operation is Have your vehicle transport by a tow
truck. Only use the rear towing hook (A) as shown
very difficult.
in the illustration. Secure the tow rope to the
rear towing hook.
CAUTION CAUTION Otherwise, the instructions are the same as
 The person in the vehicle being towed must for “When being towed by another vehicle”.
 Do not leave the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position or the operation mode in pay attention to the brake lamps of the tow-
OFF. The steering wheel will lock, causing ing vehicle and make sure the rope never
loss of control. becomes slack.
3. Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neu-

tral) position (M/T) or the selector lever in
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (A/T).
4. On 4WD vehicles, shift the transfer shift
lever or set the drive mode-selector to
“2H” position.

Operation under adverse driving conditions
NOTE On a wet road

 Do not tow a vehicle heavier than your own
vehicle.  When driving in rain or on a road with
many puddles a layer of water may form
between the tyres and the road surface.
This reduces a tyre’s frictional resistance
on the road, resulting in loss of steering
stability and braking capability.
To cope with this, observe the following

items:
CAUTION (a) Drive your vehicle at a slow speed.
 Do not use the tie-down hook (B) for towing. (b) Do not drive on worn tyres. 8
This hook is provided only for the purpose of Operation under adverse (c) Always maintain the specified tyre
transporting the vehicle itself. inflation pressures.
Using any part other than the designated driving conditions
towing hook (A) could result in damage to E00801704030
vehicle body.
 On 4WD vehicles, when you are going to On a flooded road On a snow-covered or frozen
tow another vehicle, shift the transfer shift road
lever or set the drive mode-selector to “4H”  Avoid flooded roads. In the event driving
position. flooded roads, doing so may cause the fol-  When driving on a snow-covered or fro-
Selecting “2H” drive may increase the differ- zen road, it is recommended that you use
lowing serious damage to the vehicle.
ential oil temperature, resulting in possible
• Engine stalling snow tyres or snow traction device (tyre
damage to the driving system.
• Short in electrical components chains).
Further, the drive train will be subjected to
excessive loading possibly leading to oil • Engine damage caused by water immer- Refer to the “Snow tyres” and “Snow
leakage, component seizure, or other serious sion traction device (tyre chains)” sections.
faults.  Avoid high-speed operation, sudden
After driving flooded roads, be sure to acceleration, abrupt brake application and
have an inspection at an authorised sharp cornering.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer and take
the necessary measures or repair.

Operation under adverse driving conditions

 Depressing the brake pedal during travel
on snowy or icy roads may cause tyre
CAUTION
 The impact on tyres and/or wheels when
slippage and skidding. When traction
driving on a bumpy or rutted road can dam-
between the tyres and the road is reduced
age the tyre and/or wheel.
the wheels may skid and the vehicle can-
not readily be brought to a stop by con-
ventional braking techniques. Braking
will differ, depending upon whether you
have anti-lock brake system (ABS). As
your vehicle is equipped with anti-lock
brake system (ABS), brake by pressing
the brake pedal hard, and keeping it
pressed.
8  Allow extra distance between your vehi-
cle and the vehicle in front of you, and
avoid sudden braking.
 Accumulation of ice on the braking sys-
tem can cause the wheels to lock. Pull
away from a standstill slowly after con-
firming safety around the vehicle.
CAUTION
 Do not press the accelerator pedal rapidly. If
the wheels break free of the ice, the vehicle
could suddenly start moving and possibly
cause an accident.
On a bumpy or rutted road
Drive as slow as possible when driving on

bumpy or rutted roads.

Vehicle care
Vehicle care precautions ..................................................................9-2

Cleaning the interior of your vehicle ...............................................9-2
Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle ..............................................9-3
9
Vehicle care precautions

2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out
Vehicle care precautions Cleaning the interior of your well. Using this cloth, wipe off the deter-
E00900102005
vehicle gent thoroughly.
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, E00900201735
it is necessary to perform regular mainte- After cleaning the interior of your vehicle NOTE
nance using the proper procedures. with water, cleaner or similar, wipe and dry in  Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
Always maintain your vehicle in compliance a shady, well-ventilated area. tectants containing silicones or wax.
with any environmental pollution control reg- Such products can cause discolouring and,
ulations. when applied to the instrument panels or
Carefully select the materials used for wash- NOTE other parts, may cause reflections on the
ing, etc., to be sure that they do not contain  To clean the inside of the rear window, windscreen and obscure vision.
always use a soft cloth and wipe the window Also, if such products get on the switches of
corrosives; if in doubt, we recommend you to
glass along the demister heater element and the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
consult a specialist for the selection of these ure of these accessories.
the glass antenna (if so equipped) so as not to
materials. cause damage.  Do not use synthetic fiber or dry cloth. They
9 can cause discolouring or damaging the sur-
CAUTION face.
 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Always CAUTION  Do not place a deodorizer on the instrument
follow the instructions of the cleaning prod-  Do not use organic substances (solvents, panel or near lamps and instruments. The
uct supplier. benzine, kerosene, alcohol, petrol, etc.) or ingredients for deodorizer can cause discol-
 To avoid damage, never use the following to alkaline or acidic solutions. ouring or cracking.
clean your vehicle. These chemicals can cause discolouring,
• Petrol staining or cracking of the surface.
• Paint Thinner If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make Upholstery
• Benzine sure their ingredients do not include the sub- E00900500207
• Kerosene stances mentioned above. 1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-
• Turpentine cle, handle the upholstery carefully and
• Naphtha keep the interior clean.
• Lacquer Thinner Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and
• Carbon Tetrachloride flocked parts
• Nail Polish Remover E00900301534
• Acetone 1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
soaked in a mild soap and water solution.
9-2 Vehicle care

Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle

Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the paint coat and body of your vehicle if left
the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
NOTE in prolonged contact.
 Remove dirty patches or oil substances
leather should be cleaned with an appro- Frequent washing and waxing is the best way
quickly as they can stain genuine leather.
priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be to protect your vehicle from this damage.
 The genuine leather surface may harden and
cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a This will also be effective in protecting it
shrink if it is exposed to direct rays of the
mild soap and water solution. sun for long hours. When your vehicle is from environmental elements such as rain,
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum parked, place it in the shade as much as pos- snow, salt air, etc.
cleaner and remove any stains with carpet sible. Using an ample amount of clean water and a
cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by  When the temperature of the vehicle interior car washing brush or sponge, wash the vehi-
lightly dabbing with a clean colourfast rises in summer, vinyl products left on the cle from top to bottom.
cloth and stain remover. genuine leather seat may deteriorate and Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.
stick to the seat. Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a soft
cloth. After washing the vehicle, carefully
Genuine leather* clean the joints and flanges of the doors, bon-
E00900601960 Cleaning the exterior of net and other sections where dirt is likely to
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a your vehicle remain.
9
soft cloth soaked in a mild soap and water E00900700108
solution.
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out
If the following is left on your vehicle, it may CAUTION
cause corrosion, discolouration and stains,  When washing the under side of your vehicle
well. Using this cloth, wipe off the deter- wash the vehicle as soon as possible. or wheel, be careful not to injure your hands.
gent thoroughly.
 If your vehicle has rain sensor, place the
3. Apply leather protecting agent to the gen-  Seawater, road deicing products. wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position to
uine leather surface.  Soot and dust, iron powder from factories, deactivate the rain sensor before washing the
chemical substance (acids, alkalis, coal- vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will operate
NOTE tar, etc.). in the presence of water spray on the wind-
 If genuine leather is wet with water or is
 Droppings from birds, carcasses of screen and may get damaged as a result.
washed in water, wipe off water as quickly as insects, tree sap, etc.  Refrain from excessively using a car wash as
possible with a dry, soft cloth. its brushes may scratch the paint surface,
If left damp, mildew may grow. causing it to lose its gloss.
Washing Scratches will be especially visible on darker
 Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,
E00900903866 coloured vehicles.
alcohol and petrol, acid or alkaline solvents
may discolour the genuine leather surface. Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust
Be sure to use neutral detergents. picked up from the road surface can damage
Vehicle care 9-3

CAUTION CAUTION Waxing

 Never spray or splash water on the electrical • The outside rear-view mirrors are retracted. E00901001987
components in the engine compartment. • The roof antenna is removed. Waxing the vehicle will help prevent the
Doing so could have an adverse effect on the • If your vehicle is equipped with a roof adherence of dust and road chemicals to the
engine startability. spoiler, consult a car wash operator before paintwork. Apply a wax solution after wash-
Exercise caution also when washing the using the car wash.
underbody; be careful not to spray water into ing the vehicle, or at least once every three
• If your vehicle has rain sensor, place the
the engine compartment. months to assist displacing of water.
wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position to
 Some types of hot water washing equipment Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.
deactivate the rain sensor.
apply high pressure and heat to the vehicle. You should wax after the surfaces have
• If your vehicle is equipped with a roof rails,
They may cause heat distortion and damage consult a car wash operator before using the cooled.
to the vehicle resin parts and may result in car wash. For information on how to use wax refer to
flooding of the vehicle interior. Therefore; the instruction manual of the wax.
• The wiper arms are secured in place with
• Maintain a distance of approx. 70 cm or tape.
more between the vehicle body and the
9 washing nozzle.
CAUTION
• When washing around the door glass, hold During cold weather  Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
the nozzle at a distance of more than 70 cm should not be used.
and at right angles to the glass surface.  On vehicles with the sunroof, be careful
The salt and other chemicals spread on the
 After washing the vehicle, drive the vehicle when waxing the area around the sunroof
roads in some areas in winter can have a opening, not to put any wax on the weather-
slowly while lightly depressing the brake harmful effect on the vehicle body. You
pedal several times in order to dry out the strip (black rubber). If stained with wax, the
should therefore wash the vehicle as often as weatherstrip cannot maintain a weatherproof
brakes.
possible in accordance with our care-instruc- seal with the sunroof.
Leaving the brakes wet could result in
reduced braking performance. Also, there is tions. It is recommended to have a preserva-
a possibility that they could freeze up or tive applied and the underfloor protection
become inoperative due to rust, rendering the checked before and after the cold weather Polishing
vehicle unable to move. season. E00901101164
 Using an automatic car wash, pay attention After washing your vehicle, wipe off all
The vehicle should only be polished if the
to the following items, referring to the opera- waterdrops from the rubber parts around the
tion manual or consulting a car wash opera- paintwork has become stained or lost its lus-
doors to prevent the doors from freezing.
tor. If the following procedure is not tre. Do not polish parts with a mat coating
followed, it could result in damage to your and the plastic bumpers. Doing so could
vehicle. cause stains or damage the finish.
9-4 Vehicle care


the glass, wipe it dry with a clean, dry, soft
Cleaning plastic parts Aluminium wheels cloth. Never use a cloth that is used for clean-
E00901301906 E00901501621
ing a painted surface to clean a window. Wax
Use a sponge or chamois leather. 1. Remove dirt using a sponge while sprin-
from the painted surface could get on the
If a car wax adheres on a grey or black rough kling water on the vehicle.
glass and lower glass transparency and visi-
surface of the bumper, moulding or lamps, 2. Use neutral detergent on any dirt that can-
bility.
the surface becomes white. In such a case, not be removed easily with water.
wipe it off using lukewarm water and soft Rinse off the neutral detergent after wash-
cloth or chamois leather. ing the vehicle. NOTE
3. Dry the vehicle thoroughly using a cham-  To clean the inside of the rear window,
ois leather or a soft cloth. always use a soft cloth and wipe the window
CAUTION glass along the demister heater element and
 Do not use a scrubbing brush or other hard the glass antenna (if so equipped) so as not to
tools as they may damage the plastic part CAUTION cause damage.
surface.  Do not use a brush or other hard implement
 Do not bring the plastic parts into contact on the wheels.
9
with petrol, light oil, brake fluids, engine Doing so could scratch the wheels. Wiper blades
oils, greases, paint thinners and sulphuric  Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra- E00901701173
acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing
stain or discolour the plastic parts. so could cause the coating on the wheels to Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove
If they touch the plastic parts, wipe them off peel or become discoloured or stained. grease, insect carcasses, etc., from the wiper
with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an  Do not directly apply hot water using a steam blades. Replace the wiper blades when they
aqueous solution of neutral detergent then cleaner or by any other means. no longer wipe properly. (Refer to page
immediately rinse the affected parts with  Contact with seawater and road deicer can 10-20.)
water. cause corrosion. Rinse off such substances as
soon as possible.
Cleaning the sunroof*
Chrome parts E00901800180
E00901401196 Window glass Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft
cloth. Hard deposits should be wiped away
In order to prevent spots and corrosion of E00901601303
with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral deter-
chrome parts, wash with water, dry thor- The window glass can normally be cleaned gent solution. Wipe away the solution with a
oughly, and apply a special protective coat- using only a sponge and water. sponge dipped in fresh water.
ing. This should be done more frequently in Glass cleaner can be used to remove oil,
winter. grease, insect carcasses, etc. After washing
Vehicle care 9-5
NOTE
 The surface treatment on the inside of the
glass may be removed if hard cloth or
organic solvent (benzine, kerosene, thinner,
etc.) is used.
Engine compartment
E00902100324
Clean the engine compartment at the begin-

ning and end of winter. Pay particular atten-
tion to flanges, crevices and peripheral parts
where dust containing road chemicals and
other corrosive materials might collect.
9 If salt and other chemicals are used on the
roads in your area, clean the engine compart-
ment at least every three months.
Never spray or splash water on the electrical
components in the engine compartment, as
this may cause damage.
Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic
parts and so on into contact with sulphuric
acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack,
stain or discolour them.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,
chamois or the like and an aqueous solution
of neutral detergent then immediately rinse
the affected parts with plenty of water.
9-6 Vehicle care

Maintenance
Service precautions ........................................................................10-2

Catalytic converter .........................................................................10-4
Bonnet ............................................................................................10-4
Engine oil .......................................................................................10-5
Engine coolant ...............................................................................10-7
Washer fluid ...................................................................................10-9
Brake fluid .....................................................................................10-9
Clutch fluid* .................................................................................10-10
Power steering fluid .....................................................................10-11
Battery ..........................................................................................10-11
Tyres ............................................................................................10-13
Wiper blade rubber replacement ..................................................10-20 10
General maintenance ...................................................................10-21
Fusible links .................................................................................10-22
Fuses ............................................................................................10-22
Replacement of lamp bulbs .........................................................10-27
Service precautions
Service precautions WARNING

E01000102654  After performing the maintenance work,
make sure that no tools or cloths are left
Adequate care of your vehicle at regular
behind in the engine compartment.
intervals serves to preserve the value and If they are left behind, a fire or damage to
appearance as long as possible. the vehicle may occur.
Some maintenance items can be carried out  The fan may turn on automatically even if
by the owner (do it yourself), while others the engine is not running. Turn the igni-
should be carried out by an authorised tion switch to “LOCK” position or put the
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer (periodic operation mode in OFF to be safe while
inspection and maintenance). In the event a you work in the engine compartment.
malfunction or a problem is discovered, have  Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open
it corrected by an authorised MITSUBISHI flames around fuel or battery. The fumes
MOTORS dealer. This section contains infor- are flammable.
mation on inspection maintenance procedures  Be extremely cautious when working
that you can do yourself. Follow the instruc- around the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulphuric acid.
10 tions and cautions for each of the various pro-
 Do not get under your vehicle with just the
cedures.
body jack supporting it. Always use auto-
motive jack stands.
WARNING  Improper handling of components and
 When checking or servicing the inside of materials used in the vehicle can endanger
the engine compartment, make sure the your personal safety. Consult an author-
engine is switched off and has had a ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer for
chance to cool down. necessary information.
 If it is necessary to do work in the engine
compartment with the engine running, be
especially careful that your clothing, hair,
etc., does not become caught by the fan,
drive belts, or other moving parts.
10-2 Maintenance
Service precautions
Check items of engine compartment are located as shown in the figure below.
Petrol-powered vehicles Diesel-powered vehicles (4D56) Diesel-powered vehicles (4N15)
LHD LHD LHD
RHD RHD RHD

10
1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Brake fluid reservoir 3. Clutch fluid reservoir*
Maintenance 10-3
Catalytic converter
4. Power steering fluid reservoir
5. Engine oil level gauge
Bonnet NOTE
E01000304373  Only open the bonnet when the wipers are in
6. Engine oil cap
the parked position. Failure to do so may
7. Washer fluid reservoir cause damage to the bonnet, wiper arms or
8. Battery To open front windscreen.
1. Pull the release lever towards you to
Catalytic converter unlock the bonnet. 3. Support the bonnet by inserting the sup-
E01000202538 port bar in its slot.
The exhaust gas scavenging devices used
with the catalytic converter are extremely
efficient for the reduction of noxious gases.
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system.
It is important to keep the engine properly
tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and
10 prevent possible catalyst damage.
WARNING
 As with any vehicle, do not park or oper- 2. Raise the bonnet while pressing the safety
ate this vehicle in areas where combustible lock. CAUTION
materials such as dry grass or leaves can  Note that the support bar may disengage the
come in contact with a hot exhaust since a bonnet if the open bonnet is lifted by a strong
fire could occur. wind.
 After inserting the support bar into the slot,
make sure the bar supports the bonnet
NOTE securely from falling down on to your head
 Use fuel of the type recommended in “Fuel or body.
selection” on page 2-2.
10-4 Maintenance
Engine oil
To close NOTE Diesel-powered vehicles (4D56)

 If this does not close the bonnet, release it
1. Unlatch the support bar and clip it in its from a slightly higher position.
holder.  Do not press down the bonnet hard with a
hand as it may damage the bonnet.
Engine oil
E01000404606
To check and refill engine oil

Diesel-powered vehicles (4N15 without DPF)
A: Minimum level
B: Maximum level
2. Slowly lower the bonnet to a position C: Oil replacement indication mark
approximately 20 cm above the closed 10
position, then let it drop.
3. Make sure the bonnet is securely locked
by softly lifting the centre of the bonnet.
CAUTION
 Be careful that hands or fingers are not
Diesel-powered vehicles (4N15 with DPF)
trapped when closing the bonnet.
 Before driving, make sure that the bonnet is
securely locked. An incompletely locked
bonnet can suddenly open while driving.
This can be extremely dangerous.
Maintenance 10-5
Engine oil
The engine oil used has a significant effect on
the engine’s performance, service life and
NOTE NOTE
 Check or refill the oil according to the fol-  For handling of used engine oils, refer to
startability. Be sure to use oil of the recom-
lowing manner. page 2-6.
mended quality and appropriate viscosity.
• When the oil level is checked in step 6
All engines consume a certain amount of oil
above, check it on a low side of the dipstick
during normal operation. Therefore, it is because it is different in appearance of oil
Selection of engine oil
important to check the oil level at regular level in the two sides of the dipstick.
intervals or before starting a long trip. • On vehicles without diesel particulate filter
(DPF), the oil level should be within the Petrol-powered vehicles
range (A) to (B) on the dipstick.
1. Park the car on a horizontal surface. • On vehicles with DPF, the oil level should
2. Switch off the engine. be within the range (A) to (C) (oil replace-
3. Wait a few minutes. ment indication mark) on the dipstick. If the
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a oil level is beyond the oil replacement indi-
clean cloth. cation mark (C), replace the oil as soon as
5. Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes. possible. Then, the oil should be refilled to
6. Remove the dipstick and read the oil the maximum level (B).
10 level, which should always be within the • On vehicle with DPF, the engine oil level
range indicated will be increased due to an amount of the
fuel being mixed in the engine oil when the
7. If the oil level is below the specified limit,
DPF regenerates to burn away the PM (par-
remove the cap located on the cylinder
ticulate matter). It does not indicate a mal-
head cover and add enough oil to raise the function.  Select engine oil of the proper SAE vis-
level to within the specified range. Do not In the following conditions, the engine oil cosity number according to the atmos-
overfill to avoid engine damage. Be sure level may increase easily. We recommend pheric temperature.
to use the specified engine oil and do not you to have it checked frequently. SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30, and 5W-40
mix various types of oil. - frequent driving at uphill and downhill
engine oils can only be used if they meet
8. After adding oil, close the cap securely. - frequent driving at high altitudes
ACEA A3/B3, A3/B4 or A5/B5 and API
9. Confirm the oil level by repeating step 4 - frequent and extended idling
- frequent driving through a traffic jam SG (or higher) specifications.
to 6.  Use engine oil conforming to the follow-
 The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
vehicle is subjected to severe conditions, ing classification:
requiring earlier oil replacement. • API classification: “For service SG” or
Please refer to the maintenance schedule. higher
10-6 Maintenance
Engine coolant
• ILSAC certificated oil  Select engine oil of the proper SAE vis-  Select engine oil of the proper SAE vis-
• ACEA classification: cosity number according to the atmos- cosity number according to the atmos-
“For service A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4 or pheric temperature. pheric temperature.
A5/B5”  Use engine oil conforming to the follow-  Use engine oil conforming to the follow-
ing classification: ing classification:
• ACEA classification: • ACEA classification:
NOTE “For service A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4 or “FOR service C1, C2, C3 or C4”
 Use of additives is not recommended since
A5/B5” • JASO classification:
they may reduce the effectiveness of addi-
tives already included in the engine oil. It • API classification: “FOR service DL-1”
may result in failure of the mechanical “For service CD” or higher
assembly. If those classifications are not available, con-
tact an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
NOTE dealer.
 Use of additives is not recommended since
Diesel-powered vehicles they may reduce the effectiveness of addi-
tives already included in the engine oil. It NOTE
may result in failure of the mechanical  Use of additives is not recommended since
 Vehicles without diesel particulate assembly. they may reduce the effectiveness of addi- 10
filter (DPF) tives already included in the engine oil. It
may result in failure of the mechanical
 Vehicles with diesel particulate fil- assembly.
ter (DPF)
Engine coolant
E01000503440
To check the coolant level
A translucent coolant reserve tank (A) is

located in the engine compartment.
The coolant level in this tank should be kept
between the “L” (LOW) and “F” (FULL)
Maintenance 10-7
Engine coolant
marks when measured while the engine is MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Coolant
cold.
WARNING has excellent protection against corrosion and
 Do not open the radiator cap (B) while the
rust formation of all metals including alumin-
engine is hot. The coolant system is under
ium and can avoid blockages in the radiator,
pressure and any hot coolant escaping
could cause severe burns. heater, cylinder head, engine block, etc.
Because of the necessity of this anti-corrosion
agent, the coolant must not be replaced with
Anti-freeze plain water even in summer. The required
concentration of anti-freeze differs depending
on the expected ambient temperature.
The engine coolant contains an ethylene gly-
col anti-corrosion agent. Some parts of the Ambient tem-
engine are cast aluminium alloy, and periodic perature
changing of the engine coolant is necessary to -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -50
(minimum)
prevent corrosion of these parts. °C
To add coolant Diesel-powered vehicles (4D56) Anti-freeze
10 concentration
Use “MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE % 30 35 40 45 50 60
The cooling system is a closed system and SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT” or equiva-
normally the loss of coolant should be very (Petrol-pow-
lent. ered vehicles)
slight. A noticeable drop in the coolant level
could indicate leakage. If this occurs, have Anti-freeze
the system checked at an authorised Petrol-powered vehicles, Diesel-powered concentration
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon as vehicles (4N15) % 50 60
possible. (Diesel-pow-
Use “MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE
If the level should drop below the “L” (LOW) ered vehicles)
SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT PRE-
level on the reserve tank, open the lid and add
MIUM” or equivalent*.
coolant.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol
Also, if the reserve tank is completely empty,
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-
remove the radiator cap (B) and add coolant
nitrate and non-borate coolant with long
until the level reaches the filler neck.
life hybrid organic acid technology
10-8 Maintenance
Washer fluid
CAUTION Washer fluid Brake fluid

 Do not use alcohol or methanol anti-freeze or E01000702243 E01000901987
any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or
Open the washer fluid reservoir cap and
methanol anti-freeze. The use of an improper
anti-freeze can cause corrosion of the alu-
check the level of washer fluid. To check the fluid level
minium components. If the level is low, replenish the container
 Do not use water to adjust the concentration with washer fluid.
of coolant.
 Concentrations exceeding 60 % will result in
a reduction of both the anti-freeze and cool-
ing performance thus adversely affecting the
engine.
 Do not top up with water only.
Water by itself reduces the rust-protective
and anti-freeze qualities of the coolant and
has a lower boiling point. It can also cause
damage to the cooling system if it should
freeze. Do not use tapwater, as it can cause EMPTY 10
corrosion and rust formation.
The brake fluid level must be between the
“MAX” and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.
The brake fluid level is monitored by a float.
NOTE When the brake fluid level falls below the
 During cold weather  The washer fluid container serves the wind-
“MIN” mark, the brake fluid warning lamp
screen, rear window and headlamps (if so
If the temperatures in your area drop below equipped).
lights up.
freezing, there is the danger that the coolant The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the
in the engine or radiator could freeze and brake pads, but this does not indicate any
abnormality.
cause severe damage to the engine and/or During cold weather If the brake fluid level falls markedly in a
radiator. Add a sufficient amount of anti-
freeze to the coolant to prevent it from freez- short length of time, it indicates leaks from
To ensure proper operation of the washers at the brake system.
ing.
low temperatures, use a fluid containing an If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an
The concentration should be checked before
anti-freezing agent. authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
the start of cold weather and anti-freeze
added to the system if necessary.
Maintenance 10-9
Clutch fluid*
Fluid type Clutch fluid* Fluid type

E01001001523
Use brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or Brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
DOT4 from a sealed container. The brake should be used.
fluid is hygroscopic. Too much moisture in To check the fluid level The reservoir cap must be fully tightened to
the brake fluid will adversely affect the brake avoid contamination from foreign matter or
system, reducing the brake performance. The clutch fluid in the master cylinder should moisture.
be checked when performing other under- DO NOT ALLOW PETROLEUM- BASED
hood service. In addition, the system should FLUID TO CONTACT, MIX WITH, OR
CAUTION be checked for leakage at the same time.
 Take care in handling brake fluid as it is
OTHERWISE CONTAMINATE THE
Check to make certain that the clutch fluid BRAKE FLUID. SEAL DAMAGE WILL
harmful to the eyes, may irritate your skin
and also damage to painted surfaces. level is always between the “MAX” and RESULT.
 Use only the specified brake fluid. “MIN” level markings on the fluid reservoir.
Do not mix or add different brand of brake WARNING
fluid to prevent chemical reaction.
 Take care in handling brake fluid as it is
10 Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,
mix with, or get into the brake fluid.
harmful to the eyes and may also cause
damage to painted surfaces. Wipe up any
This will damage the seals.
spills immediately.
 Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to prevent
the brake fluid from deteriorating except
maintenance.
 Clean the filler cap before removing and
close the cap securely after maintenance.
A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak in the

clutch system which should be inspected by
your authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer and repaired immediately.
10-10 Maintenance
Power steering fluid
Power steering fluid Battery WARNING

E01001102462 E01001203604  No smoking, no naked flames, no sparks
The condition of the battery is very important
for quick starting of the engine and proper
functioning of the vehicle’s electrical system. Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
Regular inspection and care are especially from the battery because the battery could
important in cold weather. explode. Also, do not short-circuit the bat-
tery terminals. Doing so could create
NOTE sparks.
 Shield eyes
 On vehicles equipped with the 2 batteries,
when the batteries are replaced, 2 batteries
should be replaced at the same time.
If only a battery is replaced, it will cause
Always wear protective eye goggles when
shortening the batteries life.
working near the battery. Battery electro-
To check the fluid level lyte contains sulphuric acid, so getting it
in your eyes is dangerous. 10
Check the fluid level in the reservoir while
Battery precautions  Battery acid
the engine is idling.
Check to make certain that the power steering WARNING
fluid level is always between the “MAX” and Battery electrolyte contains sulphuric
 Note operating instructions
“MIN” level markings on the fluid reservoir acid, so you must wear gloves and eye pro-
and top up the fluid, if necessary. tection when handling the battery.
If battery electrolyte gets in your eyes or
When you handle the battery, carefully on your skin, rinse it away with clean
Fluid type water and immediately see a doctor.
observe the following cautions for safety.
If you accidentally swallow battery elec-
Use “MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE trolyte, immediately see a doctor.
PSF (Power Steering Fluid)”. If battery electrolyte splashes on your
clothing or on the vehicle, rinse it off with
lots of water.
Maintenance 10-11
Battery
The inside of the battery is divided into sev-
WARNING eral compartments; remove the cap from each
Disconnection and connection
 Explosive gas
compartment and fill to the upper mark. Do
not top up beyond the upper mark because To disconnect the battery cable, stop the
spillage during driving could cause damage. engine, first disconnect the negative (−) ter-
Check the electrolyte level at least once every minal and then the positive (+) terminal.
The battery emits highly explosive hydro-
gen gas. Ventilate when charging the bat- four weeks, depending on the operating con- When connecting the battery, first connect the
tery in an enclosed space. ditions. positive (+) terminal and then the negative
 Keep away from children If the battery is not used, it will discharge by (−) terminal.
itself with time. Check it once every four
weeks and charge with low current as neces- NOTE
sary.  Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
Keep it out of reach of children. necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
nal of the battery.
During cold weather
Checking battery electrolyte  Loosen the nut (B), and then disconnect the
battery cable from the positive (+) terminal.
level The capacity of the battery is reduced at low
10 temperatures. This is an inevitable result of
its chemical and physical properties. This is
why a very cold battery, particularly one that
is not fully charged, will only deliver a frac-
tion of the starter current which is normally
available.
It is recommended that you have the battery
checked by an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer before the start of cold
weather and, if necessary, have it charged. WARNING
This does not only ensure reliable starting,
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
but a battery which is kept fully charged also from the battery because the battery could
The electrolyte level must be between the has a longer life. explode.
specified limit on the outside of the battery.
Replenish with distilled water as necessary.
10-12 Maintenance
Tyres
WARNING CAUTION Tyres

 The battery electrolyte is extremely caus-  Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic E01001301496
tic. Do not allow it to come in contact with parts and so on into contact with sulphuric
your eyes, skin, clothing, or the painted acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, WARNING
surfaces of the vehicle. Spilt electrolyte stain or discolour them.  Driving with tyres that are worn, damaged
should be flushed immediately with ample If they are in contact, wipe off with soft or improperly inflated can lead to a loss of
amounts of water. cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous control or blow out of the tyres which can
Irritation to eyes or skin from contact solution of neutral detergent then immedi- result in a collision with serious or fatal
with electrolyte requires immediate medi- ately rinse the affected parts with plenty of injury.
cal attention. water.  Tyres, including spare tyre, degrade over
 Ventilate when charging or using the bat- time with age even when they are not
tery in an enclosed space. being used.
NOTE It is recommended that tyres over 6 years
 Keep the terminals clean. After the battery is generally be replaced even if damage is
CAUTION connected, apply terminal protection grease. not obvious.
 Keep it out of reach of children. To clean the terminals, use lukewarm water.
 Check to see if the battery is securely
 Never disconnect the battery with the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode in the installed and cannot be moved during travel. Tyre Markings
10
“ON”; doing so could damage the vehicle’s Also check each terminal for tightness.
electrical components.  When the vehicle is to be left unused for a
 Never short-circuit the battery; doing so long period of time, remove the battery and
could cause it to overheat and be damaged. store it in a place where the battery fluid will
 If the battery is to be quick-charged, first dis- not freeze. The battery should be stored only
connect the battery cables. in a fully charged condition.
 In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure to
disconnect the negative (−) terminal first.
 Always wear protective eye goggles when
working near the battery.
Maintenance 10-13
Tyres
NOTE NOTE Speed symbol

 Depending on the type of tyre, the markings  Temporary spare tyres are high pressure
A symbol indicating the range of
described below may not be shown in the compact spares designed for temporary speeds at which a tyre can carry a
sidewall of the tyre. emergency use only. Tyres designed to this load corresponding to its load index
standard have the letter “T” molded into the under certain operating conditions.
sidewall preceding the size designation. The maximum speed corresponding
Size Designation Example: T145/80D18 103M. to the speed symbol should only be
achieved under specified operating
Service Description conditions. (i.e. tyre pressure, vehi-
EXAMPLE: 215/65R15
cle loading, road conditions and
215 Section width in millimeters (mm) posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE: 95H
Aspect ratio in percent (%)
65 Ratio of section height to section Load index
H A main speed symbol and speed
width of tyre. 95 A numerical code associated with
range are as follows.
the maximum load a tyre can carry.
Structure or construction code Speed symbol Speed range
 “R” means radial-ply structure.
10 R
 “D” means diagonal or bias-ply
M 81 mph
Q 99 mph
structure.
R 106 mph
15 Rim diameter in inches (in) S 112 mph
T 118 mph
H 130 mph
NOTE V 149 mph
 P (Passenger) - metric or LT (Light Truck) -
W 168 mph
metric tyre sizing is based on U.S.A. design
Y 186 mph
standards. Tyres designed to these standards
have the tyre size molded into the sidewall
beginning with the letter “P” or “LT”. Exam-
ple: P215/65R15 96H or LT235/85R16.
M+S
“M+S (Mud & Snow)” indicates that this tyre

is classified in the category of “snow tyre”.
10-14 Maintenance
Tyres
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 1515
Maximum Load Treadwear, Traction and Temper-
Department of Transportation ature Grades
This symbol certifies that the tyre
Maximum load indicates the maximum load
is in compliance with the U.S.
this tyre is designed to carry. DOT
Department of Transportation tyre Treadwear
safety standards, and is approved
WARNING for highway use. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
 Overloading of your tyre is dangerous. based on the wear rate of the tyre when tested
Overloading can cause tyre failure, affect
Code representing the tyre manu- under controlled conditions on a specified
MA
vehicle handling, and increase your stop- facturing location. (2 digits) government test course. For example, a tyre
ping distance. Use tyres of the recom- Code representing the tyre size. (2 graded 150 would wear one and one-half
mended load capacity for your vehicle. L9 digits) (11/2) times as well on the government course
Never overload them. ABCD Code used by tyre manufacturer. (1 as a tyre graded 100. The relative perfor-
to 4 digits) mance of tyres depends upon the actual con-
Number representing the week in ditions of their use, however, and may depart
Maximum Pressure
15 which the tyre was manufactured. significantly from the norm due to variations
Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum

(2 digits) in driving habits, service practices and differ- 10
Number representing the year in ences in road characteristics and climate.
permissible cold tyre inflation pressure for
this tyre. 15 which the tyre was manufactured.
(2 digits) Traction
Tyre Identification Number (TIN) The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
UNECE approval mark are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
The TIN may be found on one or both sides the tyre’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
of the tyre but the date code may only be on This mark certifies that the tyre is in compli- measured under controlled conditions on
one side. Look for the TIN on the outboard ance with the United Nations Economic specified government test surfaces of asphalt
side of tyres as mounted on the vehicle. If the Commission for Europe (UNECE) regula- and concrete. A tyre marked C may have poor
TIN is not found on the outboard side then tion. traction performance.
you will find it on the inboard side of the tyre. EXAMPLE: 022439
The above approval mark shows that this tyre
has been approved in the Netherlands (E 4)
under approval number 022439.
Maintenance 10-15
Tyres
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. passenger car tyres must meet under the Fed-
Temperature
Sustained high temperature can cause the eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B material of the tyre to degenerate and reduce Grades B and A represent higher levels of
and C, representing the tyre’s resistance to the tyre life, and excessive temperature can lead performance on the laboratory test wheel than
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate to sudden tyre failure. The grade C corre- the minimum required by law.
heat when tested under controlled conditions sponds to a level of performance which all
Tyre inflation pressures

E01001404124
Up to 5 passengers Up to max. load or trailer towing

Tyre size
Front Rear Front Rear
2.0 bar 2.2 bar 2.0 bar 2.5 bar
265/60R18 110H (200 kPa) (220 kPa) (200 kPa) (250 kPa)
{29 psi} {32 psi} {29 psi} {36 psi}
10 2.0 bar 2.2 bar 2.0 bar 2.5 bar
265/70R16 112S (200 kPa) (220 kPa) (200 kPa) (250 kPa)
{29 psi} {32 psi} {29 psi} {36 psi}
Check the tyre inflation pressure of all the tyres while they are cold; if insufficient or excessive, adjust to the specified value.
After the tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted, check the tyres for damage and air leaks. Be sure to put caps on the valves.
Tyre inflation pressures gauge* NOTE

E01001501371  Be careful not to lose the valve cap.
1. Take out the tyre inflation pressure gauge.
Refer to “Tools, jack and jack handle” on 3. Clean the area around the tyre valve (B).
page 8-6.
2. Remove the valve cap (A).
10-16 Maintenance
Tyres
NOTE NOTE
 If the tyre inflation pressure gauge is angled  One side of the scale shows the pressure in
(not straight) relative to the tyre valve, air kPa. The other side shows the pressure in
will leak and accurate measurement will not kgf/cm².
be possible.
6. Repeat the measurement a few times to

obtain an accurate pressure indication.
7. After taking the measurement, securely fit
the valve cap.
4. Press the tyre inflation pressure gauge (C) Wheel condition

straight onto the tyre valve. E01001802007
5. Read the tyre inflation pressure from the

scale on part (D) of the tyre inflation pres-
sure gauge.
10
1- Location of the tread wear indicator

2- Tread wear indicator
Check the tyres for cuts, cracks and other

damage. Replace the tyres if there are deep
Example: tyre inflation pressure of 210 cuts or cracks. Also check each tyre for
kPa pieces of metal or pebbles.
Maintenance 10-17
Tyres
The use of worn tyres can be very dangerous of abnormal wear, or whenever the wear dif-
because of the greater chance of skidding or
Replacing tyres and wheels ference between the front and rear tyres is
E01007201703
hydroplaning. The tread depth of the tyres recognizable.
must exceed 1.6 mm in order for the tyres to CAUTION When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear
meet the minimum requirement for use. and damage. Abnormal wear is usually
 Avoid using different size tyres from the one
Tread wear indicators will appear on the sur- listed and the combined use of different caused by incorrect tyre pressure, improper
face of the tyre as the tyre wears, thereby types of tyres, as this can affect driving wheel alignment, out of balance wheel, or
indicating that the tyre no longer meets the safety. severe braking. Consult your authorised
minimum requirement for use. When these Refer to “Tyres and wheels” on page 11-10. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer to determine
wear indicators appear, the tyres must be  Even if a wheel has the same rim size and the cause of irregular tread wear.
replaced with new ones. offset as the specified type of wheel, its
In the case of the 4-wheel drive vehicles, shape may prevent it from being fitted cor-
Spare tyre used
when replacement of any of the tyres is nec- rectly. Consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
essary, replace all of them. MOTORS dealer before using wheels that
you have.
 If your vehicle is equipped with a tyre pres-
CAUTION sure monitoring system, only MITSUBISHI
Front
10  Always use tyres of the same size, same MOTORS genuine wheels should be used.
type, and same brand, and which have no Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
Spare tyre not used
wear differences. Using tyres of different and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
size, type, brands or degree of wear, will to install the tyre inflation pressure sensors
increase the differential oil temperature, properly.
resulting in possible damage to the driving Refer to “Tyre pressure monitoring system Front
system. Further, the drive train will be sub- (TPMS)” on page 6-117.
jected to excessive loading, possibly leading
to oil leakage, component seizure, or other Tyres that have arrows showing rotation direc-
serious faults. tion
Tyre rotation
E01001902675
Tyre wear varies with vehicle conditions,

Front
road surface conditions and individual
driver’s driving habits. To equalize the wear
and help extend tyre life, it is recommended
to rotate the tyres immediately after discovery
10-18 Maintenance
Tyres
CAUTION Snow tyres NOTE

 If the tyres have arrows (A) indicating the E01002002279  If flange nuts are used on your vehicle,
correct direction of rotation, swap the front The use of snow tyres is recommended for change to tapered nuts when steel wheels are
and rear tyres on the left hand side of the used.
driving on snow and ice. To preserve driving
vehicle and the front and rear tyres on the
stability, mount snow tyres of the same size
right hand side of the vehicle separately.
Keep each tyre on its original side of the and tread pattern on all four wheels. Tyre chains
vehicle. When fitting the tyres, make sure Snow tyres worn more than 50 % are no E01002103147
the arrows point in the direction in which the longer suitable for use as snow tyres. It is recommended that snow chains are car-
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for- Snow tyres which do not meet specifications ried in snow regions and fitted when required
ward. Any tyre whose arrow points in the must not be used. to the rear wheels.
wrong direction will not perform to its full
On 4WD vehicles in which the driving power
potential.
CAUTION is distributed preferentially to the rear wheels,
 Observe permissible maximum speed for ensure that the tyre chains are fitted on the
your snow tyres and the legal speed limit. rear.
 If your vehicle is equipped with a tyre pres- The tyres fitted to your vehicle as original
Front
sure monitoring system, only MITSUBISHI equipment allow you to fit tyre chains if they 10
MOTORS genuine wheels should be used. are required. When replacing your tyres,
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks check with the tyre distributor or manufac-
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
turer if the fitting of tyre chains will be detri-
to install the tyre inflation pressure sensors
mental to the tyres being purchased.
properly.
Refer to “Tyre pressure monitoring system Always follow the chain manufacturer’s
(TPMS)” on page 6-117. instructions when fitting the chains.
WARNING
CAUTION NOTE  DO NOT use a jack when fitting the
 Avoid the combined use of different types of  The laws and regulations concerning snow chains, as in the conditions, the tyres may
tyres. tyres (driving speed, required use, type, etc.) slip on the icy road causing the vehicle to
Using different types of tyres can affect vehi- vary. Find out and follow the laws and regu- slip off the jack.
cle performance and safety. lations in the area you intend to drive.
Maintenance 10-19
Wiper blade rubber replacement
CAUTION Wiper blade rubber replace-

 Choose a clear straight stretch of road where
you can pull off and still be seen while you
ment
E01008201436
are fitting the chains.
 Do not fit chains before you need them. This
will wear out your tyres and the road surface. Windscreen wiper blades
 After driving around 100-300 metres, stop
and retighten the chains. 1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen.
 Care should be taken with extremes of steer- 2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A)
ing lock to prevent possible contact between disengages from the hook (B). Pull the
the chains and the vehicle body. wiper blade further to remove it.
 Drive carefully and do not exceed 19 mph.
Remember, fitting chains is not going to stop
accidents from happening.
 When tyre chains are installed, take care that
they do not damage the disc wheel or body. 4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, start-
10  An aluminium wheel can be damaged by a
tyre chain while driving. When fitting a tyre
ing with the opposite end of the blade
from the stopper. Make sure the hook (B)
chain on an aluminium wheel, take care that is fitted correctly in the grooves in the
any part of the chain and fitting cannot be blade.
brought into contact with the wheel.
 When installing or removing a tyre chain,
take care that hands and other parts of your
NOTE
 If retainers are not supplied with the new
body are not injured by the sharp edges of
the vehicle body. NOTE wiper blade, use the retainers from the old
 Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the blade.
 Install the chains only on the rear tyres and
tighten them as tightly as possible with the windscreen. This could damage the glass.
ends securely fastened. 5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B)
3. Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper engages securely with the stopper (A).
blade.
Refer to the illustration to ensure that the
retainers are correctly aligned as you
attach them.
10-20 Maintenance
General maintenance
NOTE General maintenance

 Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the E01002701602
windows glass; it could damage the glass.
Fuel, engine coolant, oil and
4. Firmly insert the retainer (C) into the
exhaust gas leakage
groove (D) in the wiper blade.
Refer to the illustration to ensure that the
retainers are correctly aligned as you Look under the body of your vehicle to check
insert them into the groove. for fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas
leaks.
WARNING
Rear window wiper blades  If you see a suspicious fuel leak or if you
smell fuel, do not operate the vehicle; call
1. Lift the wiper arm off the window glass. your authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
2. Pull the wiper blade downward to disen- dealer for assistance.
gage it from the stopper (A) at the end of 10
the wiper arm. Pull the wiper blade fur-
ther to remove it. Exterior and interior lamp
3. Slide a new wiper blade through the hook
(B) on the wiper arm.
operation
Operate the combination lamp switch to

check that all lamps are functioning properly.
If the lamps do not illuminate, the probable
NOTE cause is a blown fuse or defective lamp bulb.
 If a retainer is not supplied with the new Check the fuses first. If there is no blown
wiper blade, use the retainer from the old fuses, check the lamp bulbs.
blade. For information regarding the inspection and
replacement of the fuses and the lamp bulbs,
refer to “Fuses” on page 10-22 and “Replace-
ment of lamp bulbs” on page 10-27.
Maintenance 10-21
Fusible links
If the fuses and bulbs are all OK, take the
vehicle to an authorised MITSUBISHI
WARNING
 Fusible links must not be replaced by any
MOTORS dealer for inspection and repair.
other device. Failing to fit the correct fusi-
ble link may result in fire in the vehicle,
Meter, gauge and indica- property destruction and serious or fatal
injuries at any time.
tor/warning lamps operation
Run the engine to check the operation of all

meters, gauges, and indicator/warning lamps.
Fuses
E01003001211
If there is anything wrong, take the vehicle to
dealer for inspection. Fuse block location
E01007601592
Passenger compartment (RHD
To prevent damage to the electrical system vehicles)
Hinges and latches lubrication
due to short-circuiting or overloading, each
10 Check all latches and hinges, and, if neces-
individual circuit is provided with a fuse. The fuse block in the passenger compartment
There are fuse blocks in the passenger com- is located behind the glove box at the position
sary, have them lubricated. partment and in the engine compartment. shown in the illustration.
Fusible links Passenger compartment (LHD

E01002901675
vehicles)
The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if
a large current attempts to flow through cer- The fuse blocks in the passenger compart-
tain electrical systems. ment are located behind the fuse lid in front
In case of a melted fusible link, see your of the driver’s seat at the position shown in
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer the illustration.
for inspection and replacement. Pull the fuse lid to remove it.
For the fusible links, please refer to “Passen-
ger compartment fuse location table” on page
10-23 and “Engine compartment fuse loca- 1. Open the glove box.
tion table” on page 10-24.
10-22 Maintenance
Fuses
2. While pressing the side of the glove box,
Engine compartment NOTE
unhook the left and right hooks (A) and
 Spare fuses are provided in the fuse block of
lower the glove box.
In the engine compartment, the fuse block is the engine compartment. Always use a fuse
located as shown in the illustration. of the same capacity for replacement.
Passenger compartment fuse loca-

tion table
E01007902026
3. Remove the glove box fastener (B), and

then remove the glove box.
1- Press the tab. 10
2- Remove the cover.
Fuse load capacity

E01007701883 Sym- Capac-
No. Electrical system
The fuse capacity and the names of electrical bol ities
systems protected by the fuses are indicated 1 Tail lamp (left) 7.5 A
on the inside of the fuse lid (LHD vehicles),
the back of the glove box (RHD vehicles) and 2 Cigarette lighter 15 A
inside of the fuse block cover (inside of the 3 Ignition coil 10 A
engine compartment).
4 Starter motor 7.5 A
5 Sunroof 20A
6 Accessory socket 15 A
Maintenance 10-23
Fuses
Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac- Engine compartment fuse location
No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ities bol ities table
7 Tail lamp (right) 7.5 A Electronic con- E01008002066
26 20 A
trolled unit
Outside rear-view Engine compartment fuse location
8 7.5 A
mirrors
*: Fusible link
9 Engine control unit 7.5 A
 Some fuses may not be installed on your
10 Control unit 7.5 A vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
11 Rear fog lamp 10 A or specifications.
 The table above shows the main equip-
12 Central door lock 15 A ment corresponding to each fuse.
13 Room lamp 15 A
14 Rear window wiper 15A
15 Gauge 10 A
10
16 Relay 7.5 A
17 Heated seat 20 A
18 Option 10 A
19 Heated door mirror 7.5 A
20 Windscreen wiper 20 A
21 Reversing lamps 7.5 A
22 Demister 30 A
23 Heater 30 A
24 Power seat 40 A*
25 Radio 10 A
10-24 Maintenance
Fuses
Behind of the fuse block cover

Electrical sys- Capac- Electrical sys- Capac-
No. Symbol No. Symbol
tem ities tem ities
BF5 DC-DC(A/T) 30 A Headlamp low
F16 15 A
beam (left)
F1 — — —
Headlamp low
F2 Engine 20 A F17 15 A
beam (right)
F3 Fuel pump 15 A F18 Steering heater 15 A
F4 IBS 7.5 A Hazard warning
F19 15 A
F5 Starter 7.5 A flasher
Electrical sys- Capac- F20 — — —
No. Symbol Fuel line heater 20 A
tem ities F6 Radiator fan
ETV 15 A F21 20 A
SBF1 Ignition switch 40 A* motor
F7 Air conditioning 20 A Stop lamps
Electric win- F22 15 A
SBF2
dow control
30 A*
F8
Automatic
20 A
(Brake lamps) 10
transmission F23 T/F 20 A
SBF3 Power seat 40 A*
Daytime run-
Anti-lock brak- F9 10 A F24 Rear heated seat 20 A
SBF4 30 A* ning lamps
ing system Headlamp
F10 Alternator 7.5 A F25 20 A
Electric parking washer
SBF5 30 A* F11 Engine control 7.5 A
brake F26 Security horn 20 A
Audio system F12 Ignition coil 10 A
BF1 30 A F27 Horn 10 A
amp
F13 Front fog lamps 15 A F28 — — —
Rear air condi-
BF2 30 A Headlamp high F29 — — —
tioning F14 10 A
beam (left)
BF3 — — — #1 — Spare fuse 20 A
Headlamp high
DC- F15 10 A #2 — Spare fuse 30 A
BF4 30 A beam (right)
DC(AUDIO)
*: Fusible link
Maintenance 10-25
Fuses
 Some fuses may not be installed on your
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
Fuse replacement
E01007801969
or specifications.
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off
 The table above shows the main equip-
the electrical circuit concerned and place
ment corresponding to each fuse.
the ignition switch in the “LOCK” posi-
The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A, tion or put the operation mode in OFF.
10 A or 15 A fuses. If one of these fuses 2. Remove the fuse puller (A) from the
burns out, substitute with the following fuse. inside of the fuse block cover in the
7.5 A: Outside rear-view mirrors engine compartment.
10 A: Option
15 A: Cigarette lighter B- Fuse is OK
When using a substitute fuse, replace with a C- Blown fuse
fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-
ble.
NOTE
 If any system does not function but the fuse
10 Identification of fuse corresponding to that system is normal, there
E01008100366 may be a fault in the system elsewhere. Have
your vehicle checked by an authorised
Capacity Colour
7.5 A Brown
3. Referring to the fuse load capacity table,
10 A Red check the fuse pertaining to the problem. 4. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity by
15 A Blue using the fuse puller into the same place at
the fuse block.
20 A Yellow
Green (fuse type) / Pink (fusible
30 A
link type)
40 A Green (fusible link type)
10-26 Maintenance
Replacement of lamp bulbs
CAUTION NOTE
 Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after  If you are unsure of how to carry out the
being turned off. work as required, it is recommended that
When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool these procedures be carried out by an author-
sufficiently before touching it. You could ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
otherwise be burnt.  Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
 Handle halogen lamp bulb with care. The gas when removing a lamp or lens.
inside halogen lamp bulb is highly pressur-  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
halogen lamp bulb can cause it to shatter. becomes foggy. This is the same phenome-
 Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a non as when window glass mists up on a
bare hand, dirty glove, etc. humid day, and does not indicate a functional
CAUTION The oil from your hand could cause the bulb problem. When the lamp is switched on, the
 If the newly inserted fuse blows again after a to break the next time the headlamps are heat will remove the fog. However, if water
short time, have the electrical system operated. gathers inside the lamp, please go to an
checked by an authorised MITSUBISHI If the glass surface is dirty, it must be authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
MOTORS dealer to find the cause and rec- cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc., and for a check.
tify it. refit it after drying it thoroughly. 10
 Never use a fuse with a capacity larger than
that specified or any substitute, such as wire, Bulb location and capacity
foil, etc.; doing so will cause the circuit wir- E01003201431
ing to heat up and could cause a fire.
When replacing a bulb, use a new bulb with
the same wattage and colour.
E01003102046
Before replacing a bulb, ensure the lamp is  Do not install commercially available LED-
off. Do not touch the glass part of the new type bulbs.
Commercially available LED-type bulbs
bulb with your bare fingers; the skin oil left
could adversely affect the operation of the
on the glass will evaporate when the bulb gets vehicle, such as by preventing the lamps and
hot and the vapor will condense on the reflec- other vehicle equipment from operating
tor and dim the surface. properly.
Maintenance 10-27
Outside 6- Side turn-signal lamps (on outside rear- 2- Tail and stop lamps (bulb type): 21/5 W
E01003304925 view mirror)*1 (W21/5W)
3- Rear turn-signal lamps: 21 W
Front Vehicles with LED headlamps (WY21W)
1- Position lamps/Daytime running lamps 4- Reversing lamps: 16 W (W16W)
2- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W(PY21W) 5- Rear fog lamp (driver’s side)*
3- Headlamps, high/low beam 6- Licence plate lamps: 5 W (W5W)
4- Front fog lamps: 19 W (H16)
5- Side turn-signal lamps (on fender)*1, *2: *:If so equipped
Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.
5W
6- Side turn-signal lamps (on outside rear-
view mirror)*1
NOTE
 The following lamps uses LEDs rather than
*1:If so equipped bulbs. For repair and replacement, contact an
Except for vehicles with LED headlamps *2:Have the lamps bulbs replaced authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
1- Position lamps: 5 W (W5W) at an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS • Headlamps (Vehicles with LED headlamps)
10 2- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W dealer. • Side turn-signal lamps
(PY21W) Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types. • Position lamps (Vehicles with LED head-
lamps)
3- Headlamps, high/low beam: 55 W
Rear • Daytime running lamps (Vehicles with LED
(HIR2)
headlamps)
4- Type 1
• High-mounted stop lamp
Front fog lamps*1: 35 W (H8) • Tail and stop lamps (LED type)
Daytime running lamps*1: 13 W • Rear fog lamp*
(P13W)
Type 2
Front fog lamps*1: 19 W (H16)
Type 3
Daytime running lamps: 13W (P13W)
5- Side turn-signal lamps (on fender)*1,
*2: 5W 1- High-mounted stop lamp
10-28 Maintenance
Inside 6B31, 4D56 NOTE

E01003403411  When moving the upper cover towards the
* rear of the vehicle, remove the harness from
the air cleaner hooks (C).
6B31, 4D56
*
4N15
1- Glove box lamp: 1.4 W *
2- Front room & map lamps: 5 W 4N15
3- Rear personal lamps (Vehicles with *
rear cooler): 5 W 10
4- Rear personal lamps (Except for vehi-
cles with rear cooler): 5 W
5- Door courtesy lamps: 3.4 W
6- Luggage compartment lamp: 8 W
*: Front of the vehicle

Headlamps (halogen bulb)
E01003502561
1. When replacing the bulb on the right side

of the vehicle, remove the clamps (A) of
the air cleaner filter and move the upper
cover (B) towards the rear of the vehicle.
Maintenance 10-29
NOTE 4N15
 After replacing the bulb in case of diesel- *
powered vehicles, make sure that the hinges
at the front of the vehicle are firmly set.

4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
2. Turn the cover (D) anticlockwise to
remove it.
Position lamps (halogen bulb)
10 * E01003702446
1. When replacing the bulb on the right side

of the vehicle, remove the clamps (A) of
6B31, 4D56
3. Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise to

remove it. And remove the bulb from the
socket by pulling out.
10-30 Maintenance
NOTE NOTE Front turn-signal lamps

 When moving the upper cover towards the  After replacing the bulb in case of diesel- E01003802359
rear of the vehicle, remove the harness from powered vehicles, make sure that the hinges 1. When replacing the bulb on the right side
the air cleaner hooks (C). at the front of the vehicle are firmly set. of the vehicle, remove the clamps (A) of
6B31, 4D56
*
6B31, 4D56

4N15 remove it. And remove the bulb from the
* socket by pulling out.
10
4N15
*

steps in reverse. *: Front of the vehicle
Maintenance 10-31
NOTE NOTE Front fog lamps/Daytime run-

 When moving the upper cover towards the  After replacing the bulb in case of diesel- ning lamps*
rear of the vehicle, remove the harness from powered vehicles, make sure that the hinges
E01004003254
the air cleaner hooks (C). at the front of the vehicle are firmly set.
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-
6B31, 4D56 driver with a cloth over its tip at the edge
* of the cover (A) and pry gently to remove
the cover.

4N15 remove it. And remove the bulb from the
* socket by turning it anticlockwise while
10 pressing in.
2. Remove the 3 screws (B) and remove the

lamp unit.

steps in reverse.
10-32 Maintenance

3. Remove the screws (C), and then move
NOTE Front fog lamp Daytime running lamp
the lamp unit towards the rear of the vehi-
 When unfastening the screws of the fog
cle to unfix the notch (D) and pins (E) of
lamp, be careful not to mistakenly move the
the lamp unit.
beam position adjustment screw (C).

steps in reverse.
3. Turn the socket anticlockwise to remove
it. Rear combination lamps 4. Remove each socket and bulb assembly
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 1. Open the tail gate.
E01004202800
by turning it anticlockwise. 10
2. Remove the screw (A), and then move the
reflector or rear fog lamp towards the rear
of the vehicle to unfix the clip (B) of the
reflector or rear fog lamp.
D- Front fog lamp

E- Daytime running lamp F- Tail and stop lamp (bulb type)*
Remove the bulb from the socket by
4. While holding down the tab (F), pull out turning it anticlockwise while pressing
the bulb (G). in.
Maintenance 10-33

G- Rear turn-signal lamp
Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
H- Reversing lamp
Remove the bulb by pulling it out.

steps in reverse.
NOTE
 When installing the lamp unit, align the
notch (J) and pin (K) on the lamp unit with
the clip (L) and hole (M) in the body.
2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly 4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
together by turning it anticlockwise. steps in reverse.
Left side Right side
NOTE
 When installing the lamp, insert tab (A) first
10 then align and insert tab (B).
Left side Right side
Licence plate lamps

E01004602240
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw- 3. Remove the bulb by pulling out.
driver with a cloth over its tip into the
lamp assembly and pry gently to remove
it.
10-34 Maintenance
Specifications
Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-4
Vehicle performance ......................................................................11-5
Vehicle weight ...............................................................................11-5
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-9
Electrical system ..........................................................................11-10
Tyres and wheels ..........................................................................11-10
Refill capacities ........................................................................... 11-11
11
Vehicle labeling
Vehicle labeling Type 2

E01100104776
Vehicle Identification Number:

(VIN)
The vehicle identification number is stamped

as shown in the illustration.
The plate shows model code and engine

model, transmission model and body colour
Vehicle information code plate code, etc.
E01102200050
Please use this number when ordering
The vehicle information code plate is located replacement parts.
as shown in the illustration.
11 Type 1
Vehicles for Gulf countries or

South Africa
The vehicle identification number is stamped

on the plate riveted to the left front corner of 1- Model code
the instrument panel pad. It is visible from 2- Engine model code
outside of the vehicle through the wind- 3- Transmission model code
screen. 4- Final gear ratio
5- Body colour code
11-2 Specifications
Vehicle labeling
6- Interior code
Diesel-powered vehicles (4N15)
7- Option code
Engine model/number
E01102500095
The engine model and number are stamped

on the engine cylinder block as shown in the
illustrations.
1- Production year and month
2- Identification number
Certification plate (Vehicles for 3- Category
Gulf countries only)
E01102600041
The certification plate is riveted as illustrated.

The plate shows production year and month,
identification number and category. 11
Diesel-powered vehicles (4D56)
Specifications 11-3
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions
E01100204517
11 1 Front track 1,520 mm

2 Overall width 1,815 mm
3 Front overhang 880 mm
4 Wheel base 2,800 mm
5 Rear overhang 1,105 mm
6 Overall length 4,785 mm
7 Ground clearance (unladen) 218 mm
8 Overall height Without roof rails 1,800 mm
9 (unladen) With roof rails 1,805 mm
10 Rear track 1,515 mm
11-4 Specifications
Vehicle performance
Body 6.0 m
Minimum turning radius
Wheel 5.6 m
Vehicle performance
E01100303931
Item
Petrol-powered vehicles 4D56
4N15
M/T A/T
Maximum speed 182 km/h 168 km/h 166 km/h 180 km/h
Vehicle weight
E01100408214
11
2WD 4WD
Item
Seating capacity 5 persons 7 persons 5 persons 7 persons
Without optional 1,875 kg, 1880 kg*1, 1,975 kg, 1,980 kg*1,
parts
1,835 kg 1,935 kg, 1,940 kg*1
1,895 kg*2 1,995 kg*2
Kerb weight
With full optional
parts 1,910 kg, 1,905 kg*1 1,950 kg 2,005 kg, 2,010 kg*1 2,050 kg, 2,055 kg*2
Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,600 kg

Maximum axle Front 1,260 kg
weight Rear 1,600 kg
Maximum roof load 80 kg
Specifications 11-5
Vehicle weight
*1: Vehicles for Gulf countries
*2: Vehicles for Mexico
Diesel-powered vehicles (4D56)
2WD
Item
M/T A/T
Without optional
1,860 kg 1,900 kg 1,870 kg 1,910 kg
parts
Kerb weight
With full optional
1,930 kg, 1,925 kg* 1,970 kg 1,940 kg, 1,935 kg* 1,980 kg, 1,975 kg*
parts
11 Maximum axle Front 1,260 kg

*: RHD vehicles
11-6 Specifications
Vehicle weight
4WD
Item
M/T A/T
Without optional
1,960 kg 2,000 kg 1,970 kg 2,010 kg, 2,015 kg*
parts
Kerb weight
With full optional
2,025 kg 2,070 kg 2,035 kg 2,080 kg
parts
*:RHD vehicles
11
Diesel-powered vehicles (4N15)
2WD
Item
M/T A/T
Without optional 1,865 kg, 1,875 kg*1, 1,910 kg, 1,920 kg*1,
parts 1,890 kg, 1,900 kg*2 1,935 kg, 1,945 kg*2
1,870 kg*2 1,915 kg*2
Kerb weight
With full optional 1,940 kg, 1,935 kg*1, 1,985 kg, 1,975 kg*1, 1,965 kg, 1,955 kg*2, 2,005 kg, 2,000 kg*2,
parts 1,925 kg*2, 1,915 kg*3 1,970 kg*2, 1,960 kg*3 1,945 kg*3, 1,960 kg*4 1,985 kg*3
Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,710 kg, 2,600 kg*4
Specifications 11-7
Vehicle weight
2WD
Item
M/T A/T
*1: Vehicles with 2 Batteries

*2: Vehicles with diesel particulate filter (DPF)
*3: Vehicles for South Africa
*4: RHD vehicles
4WD
Item
M/T A/T
11 Seating capacity 5 persons 7 persons 5 persons 7 persons
2,030 kg, 2,050 kg*1,
Without optional 1,960 kg, 1,980 kg*2, 2,005 kg, 2,025 kg*2, 1,990 kg, 2,005 kg*1,
parts 2,045 kg*2,
1,965 kg*3 2,010 kg*3 2,000 kg*2, 1,990 kg*3
2,035 kg*3
Kerb weight 2,070 kg, 2,060 kg*1,
With full optional 2,065 kg*2, 2,110 kg, 2,085 kg*3,
parts 2,035 kg, 2,015 kg*3 2,080 kg, 2,060 kg*3
2,045 kg*3, 2,065 2,105 kg*4
kg*4
11-8 Specifications
Engine specifications
4WD
Item
M/T A/T
*1: Vehicles with 2 Batteries

*2: Vehicles with diesel particulate filter (DPF)
*3: Vehicles for South Africa
*4: RHD vehicles
Engine specifications
E01100604364
Item Petrol-powered vehicles
4D56 4N15 11
Engine models 6B31 4D56 4N15
No. of cylinders 6-V (60°) 4 in line 4 in line
Total displacement 2,998 cc 2,477 cc 2,442 cc
Bore 87.6 mm 91.1 mm 86.0 mm
Stroke 82.9 mm 95.0 mm 105.1 mm
Camshaft Single overhead Double overhead Double overhead
Mixture preparation Electronic injection Electronic direct injection Electronic direct injection
161 kW/6,000 r/min*1,
Maximum output (EEC net) 100 kW/4,000 r/min 133 kW/3,500 r/min
154 kW/6,000 r/min*2
285 N•m/4,000 r/min*1,
Maximum torque (EEC net) 324 N•m/2,000 r/min 430 N•m/2,500 r/min
279 N•m/4,000 r/min*2
Specifications 11-9
Electrical system
*1:Except for vehicles to comply with Euro 5 regulation
*2:Vehicles to comply with Euro 5 regulation
Electrical system
E01100804135
Item Petrol-powered vehicles
4D56 4N15
Voltage 12 V
80D26L(582CCA/133RC), 95D31L(622CCA/159RC),
Battery Type (JIS) 80D26L(582CCA/133RC)
95D31L(622CCA/159RC)* 80D26L(582CCA/133RC)*
Alternator capacity 130 A 90 A 95 A, 130 A*
Spark plug type NGK DILKR7C11 —
11 *: Optional equipment
Tyres and wheels

E01100904569
Tyre 265/70R16 112S 265/60R18 110H

Size 16x7J, 16x7JJ 18x7 1/2J
Wheel
Offset 38 mm
NOTE
 Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer for details on the combination used on your vehicle.
11-10 Specifications
Refill capacities
Refill capacities
E01101306737
LHD RHD
11
No. Item Quantity Lubricants
Engine coolant MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE SUPER LONG LIFE
1 9.0 litres
[Includes 0.65 litre in the reserve tank] COOLANT PREMIUM or equivalent*
2 Brake fluid As required Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Oil pan 4.0 litres
3 Engine oil Refer to page 10-5
Oil filter 0.3 litre
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE PSF (Power Steering
4 Power steering fluid As required
Fluid)
5 Washer fluid 3.5 litres —
6 A/T fluid 10.4 litres MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE ATF-MA1
Specifications 11-11
Refill capacities
CAUTION
 For the A/T fluid, use only the MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE ATF. Use of a different fluid could damage the transmission.

MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE NEW MULTI GEAR
7 Transfer oil 1.34 litres
OIL ECO API classification GL-4, SAE 75W-80
Without multi plate type limited slip differential:
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Super Hypoid Gear
2WD 2.1 litres Oil ECOLOGY API classification GL-5 SAE 80
With multi plate type limited slip differential:
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE LSD Gear Oil
8 Differential oil Front 1.2 litres
Oil ECOLOGY API classification GL-5 SAE 80
4WD MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Super Hypoid Gear
Rear 2.1 litres Oil ECOLOGY API classification GL-5 SAE 80
11 With multi plate type limited slip differential:
Refrigerant (Air Without rear cooler 530-570 g
9 HFC-134a
conditioning) With rear cooler 770-810 g
*:Similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid
technology
Refill capacities
4D56 4N15
LHD LHD
RHD RHD
11
Refill capacities
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE SUPER LONG LIFE
4D56 8.2 litres
Engine coolant COOLANT or equivalent
1
[Includes 0.65 litre in the reserve tank] MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE SUPER LONG LIFE
4N15 7.7 litres
COOLANT PREMIUM or equivalent*
2 Brake fluid As required Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
3 Clutch fluid As required Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE PSF (Power Steering
4 Power steering fluid As required
Fluid)
4D56 5.5 litres
Oil pan
4N15 7.0 litres
5 Engine oil 4D56 0.8 litre Refer to page 10-5
Oil filter
4N15 0.3 litre
Oil cooler 0.1 litre
11 6 Washer fluid 3.5 litres —
4D56 10.9 litres MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE ATF-PA
7 A/T fluid
4N15 12.8 litres MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE ATF-MA1
CAUTION
 For the A/T fluid, use only the MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE ATF. Use of a different fluid could damage the transmission.
Refill capacities
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE MTF API classifica-
5M/T 2.3 litres
tion GL-3 SAE 75W-85
2WD
6M/T 2.2 litres
8 M/T oil
5M/T 3.4 litres
tion GL-3 SAE 75W-85
4WD
6M/T 2.2 litres
tion GL-3 SAE 75W-85 or MITSUBISHI MOTORS GEN-
5M/T 2.5 litres
UINE Multi Gear Oil API classification GL-4 SAE 75W-
9 Transfer oil 85
6M/T, A/T 1.34 litres
11
2WD 2.1 litres Oil ECOLOGY API classification GL-5 SAE 80
Differential
10 MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Super Hypoid Gear
oil Front 1.2 litres
Oil ECOLOGY API classification GL-5 SAE 80
4WD MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Super Hypoid Gear
Rear 2.1 litres Oil ECOLOGY API classification GL-5 SAE 80
Refill capacities
Without rear cooler 530-570 g
11 Refrigerant (Air conditioning) HFC-134a
With rear cooler 770-810 g
*: Similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid
technology
11
Alphabetical index
Manual air conditioning .................... 7-6 Handling of Discs ........................... 7-25
Numerics Rear cooler .................................... 7-20 Important Points on Safety for the Custom-
4-wheel drive operation ....................... 6-66 Air purifier ........................................ 7-22 er ................................................ 7-30
Link System ................................... 7-58
Airbag ............................................... 4-30
Listen to an iPod............................. 7-39
A Curtain airbag system ..................... 4-38
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device....
Driver’s and front passenger’s airbag sys-
Accessory (Installation) ......................... 2-5 7-41
tem ............................................. 4-35
Accessory socket ................................ 7-87 Listen to Bluetooth Audio................ 7-46
Driver’s knee airbag system ............ 4-35
Listen to CDs ................................. 7-37
Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC) How the supplemental restraint system
Listen to MP3s ............................... 7-38
6-82 works .......................................... 4-31
Listen to Radio ............................... 7-35
“ASC OFF” switch ......................... 6-83 Side airbag system.......................... 4-38
Listen to Traffic Messages............... 7-36
ASTC function indicator display ...... 6-85 SRS servicing ................................ 4-42
Operation Keys............................... 7-31
ASTC indicator lamp ...................... 6-84 SRS warning display ...................... 4-41
Steering control switch and microphone...
ASTC OFF indicator lamp............... 6-84 SRS warning lamp.......................... 4-41
7-60
ASTC warning display .................... 6-85 Antenna............................................. 7-57 Steering wheel audio remote control
ASTC warning lamp ....................... 6-85 Glass antenna................................. 7-58 switches ....................................... 7-34
Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) 6-90 Roof antenna.................................. 7-57 System Settings .............................. 7-51
Cruise control switch ...................... 6-94 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ............. 6-80 Time Setting................................... 7-53
Driving aid display ......................... 6-94 Warning display ............................. 6-80 To listen to a disc in the rear-seat display .
Proximity alarm.............................. 6-92 Warning lamp ................................ 6-80 7-48 12
Air conditioner Armrest ............................................... 4-5 To play iPod/USB memory device tracks
Automatic climate control air conditioner. via voice operation........................ 7-44
Ashtray ............................................. 7-86 Troubleshooting.............................. 7-55
7-10
Dual-zone automatic climate control air Assist grip ......................................... 7-97 USB input terminal ......................... 7-80
conditioner................................... 7-15 Audio Automatic climate contorl air conditioner.....
Refrigerant (Air conditioning)........ 11-11 Audio Files .................................... 7-26 7-10
Air conditioning Audio Quality and Volume Balance Ad- Refrigerant (Air conditioning)........ 11-11
Customising the air conditioning ...... 7-21 justment ...................................... 7-50 Automatic headlamp levelling.............. 5-62
Front cooler...................................... 7-6 Audio system ................................. 7-22
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface ................. 7-58 Automatic transmission
Important operation tips for the air condi- 5-Speed automatic transmission with
tioner............................................. 7-2 Display Indicator............................ 7-48
sports mode.................................. 6-32
12-1
Alphabetical index
8-Speed automatic transmission with Brake Charge warning lamp .......................... 5-54
sports mode.................................. 6-39 ABS warning display....................... 6-80 Check engine warning lamp........ 5-53, 6-29
Fluid ........................................... 11-11 ABS warning lamp.......................... 6-80
Child restraint..................................... 4-20
Paddle shift .................................... 6-42 Anti-lock brake ............................... 6-80
Caution for installing the child restraint on
Selector lever operation.......... 6-32, 6-39 Brake assist system ......................... 6-79
vehicle with front passenger airbag 4-21,
Selector lever position............ 6-34, 6-41 Brake system .................................. 6-75
4-33
Selector lever position indicator display.... Brake warning display ..................... 5-55
Child restraint system with ISOFIX mount-
6-34, 6-41 Brake warning lamp ........................ 5-52
ings ............................................. 4-26
Sport mode ........................... 6-35, 6-42 Braking .......................................... 6-75
Lower anchorage location................ 4-26
Sports mode indicator display . 6-36, 6-43 Electric parking brake warning display.....
Suitability for various ISOFIX positions ...
Warning display .................... 6-37, 6-43 6-10
4-23
Warning lamp ................................ 6-37 Electric parking brake warning lamp 5-53,
Suitability for various seating positions.....
6-10
4-24
Fluid ................................... 10-9, 11-11
B Parking brake................................... 6-6
Tether anchorage locations .............. 4-26
Battery............................................. 10-11 Child-protection rear doors .................. 3-17
Bulb location and capacity ................. 10-27
Charge warning display................... 5-56 Cigarette lighter.................................. 7-87
Charge warning lamp ...................... 5-54
C Cleaning
Discharged battery (Emergency starting) ..
Chrome parts.................................... 9-5
8-2 Capacities......................................... 11-11
12 Specification ................................ 11-10
Card holder......................................... 7-85
Exterior of your vehicle.....................
Genuine leather ................................
9-3
9-3
Bleeding the fuel system ....................... 8-5 Interior of your vehicle...................... 9-2
Cargo area cover ................................. 7-95
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ............... 6-114 Plastic parts...................................... 9-5
Cargo loads ...................................... 6-142
Switch ......................................... 6-116 Plastic, vinyl leather, etc.................... 9-2
Warning indicator lamp................. 6-116 Catalytic converter .............................. 10-4 Polishing.......................................... 9-4
Warning lamp .............................. 6-116 Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive Sunroof............................................ 9-5
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface ..................... 7-58 vehicles............................................ 6-73 Washing .......................................... 9-3
Microphone .......................... 7-60, 7-61 Central door locks ............................... 3-16 Waxing............................................ 9-4
Steering control switch.................... 7-60 Centre console under tray..................... 7-92 Clutch
Bonnet............................................... 10-4 Fluid.................................. 10-10, 11-11
Certification plate................................ 11-3
Bottle holder ...................................... 7-95 Coat hook .......................................... 7-97
Charge warning display ....................... 5-56
12-2
Alphabetical index
Combination headlamps and dipper switch... Door ajar warning display ..................... 5-7 Engine
5-57 Door courtesy lamps ........................... 7-91 Check engine warning lamp.... 5-53, 6-29
Convenient hook................................. 7-97 Coolant ............................... 10-7, 11-11
Door coutesy lamps
Diesel preheat indicator lamp........... 5-51
Coolant (engine) ...................... 10-7, 11-11 Bulb capacity ................................ 10-29
Engine coolant temperature display ... 5-7,
Cooler.................................................. 7-6 Door-ajar warning lamp ...................... 5-54 5-22
Cruise control ..................................... 6-85 Doors Engine oil level warning display....... 5-57
Indicator display ............................. 6-86 Central door locks .......................... 3-16 Engine oil level warning lamp.......... 5-55
Indicator lamp ................................ 6-86 Child-protection ............................. 3-17 MIVEC.......................................... 6-24
Switch ........................................... 6-86 Lock and unlock............................. 3-15 Model ............................................ 11-3
Cup holder ......................................... 7-94 Driving, alcohol and drugs .................... 6-3 Number.......................................... 11-3
Oil...................................... 10-5, 11-11
Customising the air conditioning .......... 7-21 Dual-zone automatic climate control air Oil pressure warning display............ 5-57
conditioner ...................................... 7-15 Oil pressure warning lamp ............... 5-54
Refrigerant (Air conditioning) ........ 11-11
D Overheating...................................... 8-4
Specifications ................................. 11-9
Daytime running lamps ....................... 5-59
Bulb capacity ............................... 10-28 E Used engine oils safety instructions .... 2-6
Replacement ................................ 10-32 Economical driving .............................. 6-2 Engine specifications........................... 11-9
Demister (rear window)....................... 5-69 Electric parking brake ........................... 6-8 Engine switch ..................................... 6-18
Demisting .......................... 7-6, 7-11, 7-16 Warning display ............................. 6-10 Exterior and interior lamp operation ... 10-21 12
Warning lamp ........................ 5-53, 6-10
Diesel particulate filter (DPF) .............. 6-28
Warning display ............................. 6-28 Electric window control ...................... 3-24 F
Warning lamp................................. 6-28 Safety mechanism .......................... 3-25
Switch........................................... 3-24 Floor console box ............................... 7-92
Diesel preheat indicator lamp ............... 5-51 Fluid
Timer function ............................... 3-25
Differential oil .................................. 11-11 Automatic transmission fluid ......... 11-11
Electrical system ............................... 11-10
Digital clock Brake fluid .......................... 10-9, 11-11
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting Clutch fluid ........................ 10-10, 11-11
Time setting ................................... 7-53
system).............................................. 3-3 Engine coolant..................... 10-7, 11-11
Dimensions ........................................ 11-4
Emergency key .................................. 3-10 Power steering fluid ............ 10-11, 11-11
Dipper (High/Low beam change) ......... 5-59 Washer fluid........................ 10-9, 11-11
Emergency starting............................... 8-2
12-3
Alphabetical index
Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) Tank capacity .................................. 2-4 Dipper (High/Low beam change) ..... 5-59
6-102 Fuel remaining warning display..... 5-8, 5-22 Headlamp flasher............................ 5-60
Switch ......................................... 6-107 High-beam indicator lamp ............... 5-51
Fuses ............................................... 10-22
Front cooler ......................................... 7-6 Lamp monitor buzzer ...................... 5-59
Fusible links ..................................... 10-22 LED headlamp warning lamp .......... 5-55
Front fog lamps
Replacement ................................ 10-29
Bulb capacity ............................... 10-28
Indicator lamp ................................ 5-51 G Switch ........................................... 5-57
Welcome light................................ 5-60
Replacement ................................ 10-32 General maintenance ......................... 10-21
Switch ........................................... 5-63 High-mounted stop lamp
General vehicle data ............................ 11-4 Bulb capacity ............................... 10-28
Front room & map lamps/Rear personal lamps Genuine parts....................................... 2-6
7-88 Hill Descent Control (HDC) ................ 6-77
Glove box........................................... 7-91 Indicator lamp ................................ 6-78
Front room lamp................................. 7-88
Glove box lamp Switch ........................................... 6-78
Bulb capacity ............................... 10-29
Bulb capacity................................ 10-29 Hill start assist.................................... 6-76
Front seats ........................................... 4-4
Warning display ............................. 6-77
Front turn-signal lamps Warning lamp ................................ 6-77
Bulb capacity ............................... 10-28
H
Hinges and latches lubrication............ 10-22
Indicator lamp ................................ 5-51 Hazard warning flasher switch.............. 5-63
Replacement ................................ 10-31 Hook
Hazard warning indicator lamps ........... 5-51
12 Switch ........................................... 5-62
HDMI terminal ................................... 7-84
Luggage hooks ............................... 7-97
Frozen road warning ........................... 5-21 Hooks
Head restraints ..................................... 4-7 Coat hook ...................................... 7-97
Fuel
Headlamp levelling Convenient hook ............................ 7-97
Bleeding the fuel system ................... 8-5
Automatic headlamp levelling .......... 5-62 Horn switch........................................ 5-70
Filling the fuel tank........................... 2-3
Fuel filter indicator lamp ................. 5-52 Headlamp levelling switch ................... 5-61
Fuel remaining display ............. 5-7, 5-22 Headlamp washer switch...................... 5-69 I
Fuel remaining warning display 5-8, 5-22 Headlamps If the vehicle breaks down ..................... 8-2
Fuel selection ................................... 2-2 Auto-cutout function ....................... 5-59
Modification/alterations to the electrical or Ignition switch.................................... 6-17
Bulb capacity................................ 10-28
fuel systems ................................... 2-5 Coming home light.......................... 5-60 Important operation tips for the air conditioner
Removal of water from the fuel filter.. 8-5 Daytime running lamp ..................... 5-59 7-2
12-4
Alphabetical index
Indicator and warning lamps ....... 5-26, 5-50 Lamp monitor buzzer.......................... 5-59 Meter illumination control ............ 5-2, 5-20
Indicator lamps .................. 5-26, 5-50, 5-51 Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.) auto- Microphone............................... 7-60, 7-61
Information display ............................. 5-19 cutout function ................................. 5-59 Mirror
Information screen ................................ 5-4 Leakage (Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust Inside rear-view mirror.................... 6-13
gas)................................................ 10-21 Outside rear-view mirror ................. 6-14
Inside rear-view mirror........................ 6-13
LED headlamp warning lamp .............. 5-55 Switch ........................................... 6-15
Inspection and maintenance following rough Vanity mirror ................................. 7-86
road operation .................................. 6-73 Licence plate lamps
Bulb capacity ................................ 10-28 MIVEC engine ................................... 6-24
Installation of accessories ...................... 2-5
Replacement ................................. 10-34 Modification/alterations to the electrical or
Instruments .......................................... 5-2 fuel systems ....................................... 2-5
Limited-slip differential ...................... 6-75
Interior lamps ..................................... 7-88 Multi Around Monitor....................... 6-133
Link System....................................... 7-58
Switch ......................................... 6-136
Lock and unlock the doors................... 3-15
J Lubricants ........................................ 11-11
Multi information display ............. 5-3, 5-18
Jack Information screen display list ......... 5-28
Luggage compartment lamp ................ 7-90 Switch ............................................. 5-4
Jack handle ...................................... 8-7
Bulb capacity ................................ 10-29
Storage ............................................ 8-6
Luggage floor boxes ........................... 7-93 O
Jump starting (Emergency starting) ........ 8-2
Luggage hooks................................... 7-97
Luggage net ....................................... 7-98
Off Road mode ................................... 6-60 12
K Indicator display ............................. 6-61
Switch ........................................... 6-60
Key number tag .................................... 3-2
M Oil
Keyless entry system............................. 3-4 Differential oil.............................. 11-11
Making a flat seat ............................... 4-13
Keyless operation system....................... 3-7 Engine oil ........................... 10-5, 11-11
Emergency key............................... 3-10 Making a luggage area .......................... 4-9 Manual transmission oil................. 11-11
Warning activation.......................... 3-11 Manual air conditioning ........................ 7-6 Transfer oil .................................. 11-11
Keys .................................................... 3-2 Manual transmission........................... 6-30 Operation under adverse driving conditions..
Oil ............................................... 11-11 8-19
L Map lamps................................. 7-88, 7-90 Outside rear-view mirrors .................... 6-14
Bulb capacity ................................ 10-29 Switch ........................................... 6-15
Labeling............................................. 11-2
12-5
Alphabetical index
Overheating ......................................... 8-4 Indicator lamp................................. 5-51
Switch............................................ 5-64 S
P Rear personal lamps ................... 7-89, 7-90 Safe driving techniques ......................... 6-3
Bulb capacity................................ 10-29 Safety mechanism...................... 3-25, 3-26
Parking .............................................. 6-12
Parking brake ................................... 6-6 Rear turn-signal lamps Seat
Bulb capacity................................ 10-28 Adjustment ...................................... 4-4
Position lamps
Indicator lamp................................. 5-51 Front seats ....................................... 4-4
Bulb capacity ............................... 10-28
Replacement................................. 10-33 Head restraints ................................. 4-7
Indicator lamp ................................ 5-51
Switch............................................ 5-62 Making a flat seat ........................... 4-13
Replacement ................................ 10-30
Switch ........................................... 5-57 Rear window demister switch............... 5-69 Making a luggage area ...................... 4-9
Rear-view camera ............................. 6-129 Seat arrangement .............................. 4-2
Power steering
Second seats..................................... 4-5
Fluid ................................. 10-11, 11-11 Rear-view mirror
Third seat......................................... 4-6
System .......................................... 6-82 Inside............................................. 6-13
Outside .......................................... 6-14 Seat belt............................................. 4-14
Precautions to observe when using wipers and
Adjustable seat belt anchor .............. 4-16
washers............................................ 5-69 Refill capacities ................................ 11-11
Child restraint ................................ 4-20
Pregnant women restraint .................... 4-19 Removal of water from the fuel filter ..... 8-5 Force limiter system........................ 4-20
Puncture (Tyre changing) ...................... 8-8 Replacement of lamp bulbs ................ 10-27 Inspection ...................................... 4-30
Pregnant women restraint ................ 4-19
12 Reversing lamps
Pre-tensioner system ....................... 4-19
R Bulb capacity................................ 10-28
Warning lamp ................................ 4-16
Replacement................................. 10-33
Rear combination lamps Seat belt reminder............................... 4-16
Replacement ................................ 10-33 Reversing sensor system .................... 6-122
Sensor locations ............................ 6-122 Seats
Rear cooler ........................................ 7-20 Armrest ........................................... 4-5
Switch.......................................... 6-123
Refrigerant (Air conditioning)........ 11-11
Warning display............................ 6-125 Security alarm system ......................... 3-20
Rear differential lock .......................... 6-61
Roof carrier precaution ...................... 6-142 Sensor system................................... 6-125
Indicator display............................. 6-62
Indicator lamp ................................ 6-62 Running-in recommendations................ 6-4 Sensor locations ........................... 6-126
Switch ........................................... 6-62 Switch ......................................... 6-127
Warning display ........................... 6-129
Rear fog lamp
Bulb capacity ............................... 10-28 Service precaution .............................. 10-2
12-6
Alphabetical index
Side turn-signal lamps Card holder.................................... 7-85 Tank capacity ....................................... 2-4
Bulb capacity ............................... 10-28 Sunglasses holder ............................... 7-93 Third seat ............................................. 4-6
Indicator lamp ................................ 5-51
Sunroof ............................................. 3-26 Time Setting....................................... 7-53
Switch ........................................... 5-62
Safety mechanism .......................... 3-26 Tools ................................................... 8-7
Snow tyres ....................................... 10-19 Sunshade ....................................... 3-27 Storage ............................................ 8-6
Spare wheel.......................................... 8-9 Super select 4WD............................... 6-46 Towing .............................................. 8-15
Spark plug........................................ 11-10 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp 6-46,
Transfer oil....................................... 11-11
Specifications ..................................... 11-2 6-48
Low-range indicator lamp ............... 6-48 Transmission
Speed warning lamp............................ 5-55 5-Speed automatic transmission with
Super select 4WD II ........................... 6-50
Starting and stopping the engine........... 6-23 sports mode.................................. 6-32
2WD/4WD operation indicator display.....
Steering 8-Speed automatic transmission with
6-50, 6-56
Power steering fluid ............ 10-11, 11-11 sports mode.................................. 6-39
2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp 6-50,
Power steering system ..................... 6-82 Fluid............................................ 11-11
6-54
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment Manual transmission ....................... 6-30
Drive mode indicator display... 6-50, 6-56
6-13 Oil............................................... 11-11
Low-range indicator lamp ....... 6-50, 6-54
Steering wheel lock......................... 6-20 Turbocharger operation ....................... 6-29
Supplemental restraint system.............. 4-30
Steering control switch and microphone 7-60 How the supplemental restraint system Turn-signal indicator lamps ................. 5-51
Steering wheel audio remote control switches works .......................................... 4-31
Servicing ....................................... 4-42
Turn-signal lever................................. 5-62 12
7-34 Tyre inflation pressures gauge............ 10-16
Stop lamps SRS servicing ................................ 4-42
SRS warning display ...................... 4-41 Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ....
Bulb capacity ............................... 10-28 6-117
Replacement ................................ 10-33 SRS warning lamp.......................... 4-41
Warning display ........................... 6-118
Storage spaces .................................... 7-91 System check screen ........................... 5-10 Warning lamp............................... 6-118
Centre console under tray ................ 7-92 Tyres ............................................... 10-13
Floor console box ........................... 7-92 T How to change a tyre......................... 8-8
Glove box ...................................... 7-91 Inflation pressures......................... 10-16
Tail lamps
Luggage floor boxes ....................... 7-93 Rotation ....................................... 10-18
Bulb capacity ................................ 10-28
Sunglasses holder ........................... 7-93 Size (tyre and wheel)..................... 11-10
Replacement ................................. 10-33
Sun visors .......................................... 7-85 Snow tyres ................................... 10-19
Tailgate ............................................. 3-18
12-7
Alphabetical index
Tyre chains .................................. 10-19 Switch................................... 5-67, 5-68
Wheel condition ........................... 10-17 Washer fluid level warning lamp .......... 5-55
Washing .............................................. 9-3
U Waxing ............................................... 9-4
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System Weight ............................................... 11-5
(UMS) ........................................... 6-109
Wheel
Sensor locations ........................... 6-112
Specification................................. 11-10
Warning display ........................... 6-113
Wheel condition................................ 10-17
USB input terminal ............................. 7-80
Wiper
Used engine oils safety instructions ........ 2-6
Rain sensor..................................... 5-66
Rear window .................................. 5-68
V Windscreen .................................... 5-65
Vanity mirror ..................................... 7-86 Wiper blade rubber replacement ..... 10-20
Vehicle care precautions........................ 9-2
Vehicle dimensions............................. 11-4
Vehicle Identification Number ............. 11-2
Vehicle information code plate ............ 11-2
12
Vehicle labeling ................................. 11-2
Vehicle performance ........................... 11-5
Vehicle weight ................................... 11-5
Ventilators ........................................... 7-2
W
Warning display ........................ 5-28, 5-55
Warning lamps .................. 5-26, 5-50, 5-52
Washer
Fluid ................................... 10-9, 11-11
12-8
Certification
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
.
j
ī
g
g
-
- -
- -
- C- C- - -
- - - -
ý - -
A y - - C- -
- -
C-
.
c j j - - C- -
A ј у -
.
- - -
- -
REGISTERED No: REGISTERED No:

ER34312/14 ER43407/15
DEALER No: DEALER No:
0033578/10 DA36975/14
REGISTERED No:
ER34313/14
DEALER No:
0033578/10

18MY Shogun Sport Owners Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

18MY Shogun Sport Owners Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SHOGUN SPORT

SHOGUN SPORT - EN-UK - 17MY OKWE17E1

Foreword Throughout this owner’s manual the words WARNING and

MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORATION reserves the right to make

This manual explains operation of LHD and RHD vehicles. Illustra-

©2016 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

Foreword – Diesel Engines

Instruments and Controls (Driver’s area)

1 Instruments and Controls (Driver’s area)

Engine switch* P.6-18 Instruments P.5-2

Shift paddles* P.6-42

Wiper and washer switch P.5-64

Cruise control switch* P.6-85,

1-1 Overview/Quick guide

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 1

Air conditioner* P.7-2 Audio* P.7-22

Centre ventilators P.7-3

Overview/Quick guide 1-2

Instruments and Controls

Blind Spot Warning switch* P.6-114

1-3 Overview/Quick guide

Instruments and Controls

5M/T 6M/T, 5A/T

Overview/Quick guide 1-4

Accessory socket P.7-87

Cup holder P.7-95

Armrest P.4-5 Second seats P.4-5

1-5 Overview/Quick guide

Tether anchorage locations* P.4-26 Supplemental restraint system

Front seats P.4-4

Cargo area cover* P.7-95 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) -side

Overview/Quick guide 1-6

Tools P.8-7 Jack P.8-7

Luggage hooks P.7-97

1-7 Overview/Quick guide

Sunroof* P.3-26 Outside rear-view mirrors P.6-14

Side turn-signal lamps (on outside rear-

Front turn-signal lamps

Overview/Quick guide 1-8

Rear wiper and washer P.5-68

Rear-view camera* P.6-129, 6-133

1-9 Overview/Quick guide

Overview/Quick guide 1-10

1 Around the driver’s seat 1-Electric remote-controlled out- 2-Engine switch*

Vehicles equipped with

L- Left outside mirror adjustment

1-11 Overview/Quick guide

3-Combination headlamps Type 2 3-Turn-signal lever 1

OFF All lamps off

Overview/Quick guide 1-12

1 5-Wiper and washer switch Type 2

The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the

Refer to “Wiper and washer switch” on

1-13 Overview/Quick guide

6-Electric window control 7-Fuel tank filler door release LHD 1

1- Driver’s door window

Overview/Quick guide 1-14

1 Selector lever positions 8-Speed automatic transmission WARNING

“N” NEUTRAL “P” PARK

1-15 Overview/Quick guide

4-wheel drive operation*

Overview/Quick guide 1-16